2005 Hyundai Terracan 101241

A000A01A-GAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the
next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
DATE OF SALE:
SUBSEQUENT NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
TRANSFER DATE:
OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01HP-GAT
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
A030A01HP
All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to make
changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to current Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of
optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and
illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the
owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the
manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used
in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some
operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also
included in Section 5.
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discriminating people who drive Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction
of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is
suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to
the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed
by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service,
maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
A050A02HP-GAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this
Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
! CAUTION:
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and
lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels
and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications
section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the
prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
A070A01A-GAT
! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect
the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are
subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential
damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic compo-
nents. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular
telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend
that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one
of these devices.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY 3
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

SECTION 6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7
CONSUMER INFORMATION 8
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9
INDEX 10
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

These titles indicate the following:
! WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to
you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the warning.
! CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its
equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
caution.
NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
A100A01L-GAT facturing requirements. Using imi- The export specifications are writ-
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE tation, counterfeit or used salvage ten in English only.
PARTS parts are not covered under the
Hyundai New Vehicle Limited War- Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts? ranty or any other Hyundai war- sold through authorized Hyundai
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same ranty. In addition, any damage to or Dealership and Service Center.
parts used by Hyundai Motor Com- failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts
pany to manufacture vehicles. They caused by the installation or failure
are designed and tested for the of an imitation, counterfeit or used
optimum safety, performance, and salvage part is not covered by
reliability to our customers. Hyundai Motor Company.
3. How can you tell if you purchas-

2. Why should you use genuine ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi- Logo on the package (see below).
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
A100A03L
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
(LEFT-HAND DRIVE)
B250A03HP-GAT
B250A01HP
1. Multi-Function Light Switch/ Front Fog Light Switch 15. Multi Box
2. Instrument Cluster 16. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed)
3. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If Installed) 17. Remote Fuel-Filler Lid Release Lever
4. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed) 18. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 19. Cigarette Lighter/ Front Ashtray
6. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 20. Coin Holder
(If Installed) 21. Shift Lever
7. Hazard Warning Switch 22. Seat Warmer Switch (If Installed)
8. Cruise Control Main Switch (If Installed) 23. Front Power Outlet
9. Headlight Leveling Switch (If Installed) 24. Transfer Shift Knob
10. Audio System (If Installed) 25. Parking Brake
11. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 26. Front Drink Holder
12. Glove Box 27. Rear Power Outlet
13. Passenger's Airbag (If Installed) 28. Rear Drink Holder
14. Hood Release Lever 29. Rear Ashtray
! CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may
damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
with water immediately.
(RIGHT-HAND DRIVE)
B250B03HP-GAT
B250B01HP
1. Passenger's Airbag (If Installed) 15. Rear Drink Holder
2. Glove Box 16. Rear Power Outlet
3. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 17. Front Drink Holder
4. Audio System (If Installed) 18. Parking Brake
5. Headlight Leveling Switch (If Installed) 19. Transfer Shift Knob
6. Cruise Control Main Switch (If Installed) 20. Front Power Outlet
7. Hazard Warning Switch 21. Seat Warmer Switch (If Installed)
8. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 22. Shift Lever
(If Installed) 23. Coin Holder
9. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 24. Cigarette Lighter/ Front Ashtray
10. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed) 25. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed)
11. Horn and Driver's Airbag (If Installed) 26. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)
12. Instrument Cluster 27. Remote Fuel-Filler Lid Release Lever
13. Multi-Function Light Switch/ Front Fog Light Switch 28. Multi Box
14. Rear Ashtray 29. Hood Release Lever
! CAUTION:
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may
damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
B255A01HP-GAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Seat Belt Warning Light
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
(If Installed)
High Beam Indicator Light O/D OFF Indicator Light (If Installed)
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light A/T(Automatic Transmission)

Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed)
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level
Immobilizer Warning Indicator Light (If Installed)
Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light 4WD LOW Indicator Light
Front Fog Indicator Light 4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD only)
Door Ajar Warning Light 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD only)
Low Fuel Level Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
Tail Gate Open Warning Light Brake Vacuum Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder
Diesel Preheat Indicator Light (Diesel Engine)
Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)
Malfunction Indicator Light (If Installed)
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-58.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2

Breaking In Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3 1
Keys.............................................................................. 1-4
Immobilizer System ...................................................... 1-5
Door Locks ................................................................. 1-11
Theft-Alarm System .................................................... 1-13
Power Windows .......................................................... 1-17
Seats .......................................................................... 1-18
1
Seat Belts ................................................................... 1-31
Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-39
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System ............... 1-48
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-54
Warning and Indicator Lights ..................................... 1-58
Multimeter ................................................................... 1-69
Multi-function Light Switch ......................................... 1-73
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch .............................. 1-76
Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-84
Mirror .......................................................................... 1-88
Hood Release............................................................. 1-96
Cruise Control .......................................................... 1-100
Heating and Cooling Control .................................... 1-103
Stereo Sound System .............................................. 1-119
Audio System ........................................................... 1-121
Antenna .................................................................... 1-140
1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A01O-GAT
NOTE:
Use Unleaded Gasoline o For some countries, Hyundai
vehicles are designed to use
! CAUTION:
leaded gasoline. When you are o Do not let any gasoline or water
going to use leaded gasoline, enter the tank. This would make
ask to Hyundai dealer whether it necessary to drain it out and to
leaded gasoline in your vehicle bleed the lines to avoid jamming
is available or not. the injection pump and damag-
o Octane rating of leaded gasoline ing the engine.
is same with unleaded one. o In winter, in order to cut down
incidents due to freezing, paraf-
fin oil may be added to the fuel if
Use Diesel
the temperature drops to below
B010A02HP Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is the -10°C. Never use more than 20%
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Oc- correct rating to use in your Hyundai. If paraffin oil.
tane Rating of 87 (Research Octane two types of diesel fuel are available,
Number 91) or higher must be used in use summer or winter fuel properly
Hyundai vehicle. If leaded gasoline is according to the following temperature
used, it will cause the catalytic con- conditions. B010B01A-AAT
verter to become ineffective and the What About Gasohol?

emission control system to malfunc- o Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded
tion. diesel fuel. gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain
This can also result in increased main- o Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai.
tenance expense. To avoid accidental diesel fuel. However, if your engine develops drive
use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle ability problems, the use of 100% un-
used with leaded gasoline at service Watch the fuel level in the tank very leaded gasoline is recommended. Fu-
stations can not be inserted into fuel carefully : If the engine stops through els with unspecified quantities of alco-
tank opening of your Hyundai. fuel failure, the circuits must be com- hol, or alcohols other than ethanol,
pletely purged to permit restarting. should not be used.
1
BREAKING IN YOUR NEW 3
HYUNDAI
B010D01S-AAT B010F01A-AAT B020A01S-GAT
Do not Use Methanol Operation in Foreign Countries During the First 2,000 Km
Fuels containing methanol (wood al- If you are going to drive your Hyundai (1,200 Miles) (Gasoline Engine)
cohol) should not be used in your in another country, be sure to: No formal "break-in" procedure is re-
Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce quired with your new Hyundai. How-
vehicle performance and damage com- o Observe all regulations regarding ever, you can contribute to the eco-
ponents of the fuel system. registration and insurance. nomical operation and durability of your
o Determine that acceptable fuel is Hyundai by observing the following
available. recommendations during the first 2,000
! CAUTION: km (1,200 miles).
Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty may not cover dam- o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55
age to the fuel system and perfor- mph).
mance problems that are caused by o While driving, keep your engine
the use of methanol or fuels con- speed (rpm, or revolutions per
taining methanol. minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
start, depress the accelerator pedal
B010E01A-AAT
fully.
Gasolines for Cleaner Air o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
To help contribute to cleaner air, to avoid hard stops.
Hyundai recommends that you use o Don't lug the engine (in other words,
gasolines treated with detergent addi- don't drive so slowly in too high a
tives, which help prevent deposit for- gear that the engine "bucks":shift to
mation in the engine. These gasolines a lower gear).
will help the engine run cleaner and o Whether going fast or slow, vary
enhance performance of the Emission your speed from time to time.
Control System.
4 KEYS
o Don't let the engine idle longer than o Don't lug the engine (in other words, B030A01A-AAT
3 minutes for a catalytic converter don't drive so slowly in too high a

equipped engine. gear that the engine "bucks": shift to
o Don't tow a trailer during the first a lower gear).
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera- o Whether going fast or slow, vary
tion. your speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than
3 minutes at one time.
B020B01FC-GAT
o Don't tow a trailer during the first
During the First 1,000 Km (600 1,000 km (600 miles) of operation.
Miles) (Diesel Engine)
No formal "break-in" procedure is re- B030A01HR
quired with your new Hyundai. How-
For greater convenience, the same
ever, you can contribute to the eco-
key operates all the locks in your
nomical operation and durability of your
Hyundai. However, because the doors
Hyundai by observing the following
can be locked without a key, carrying a
recommendations during the first 1,000
spare key is recommended in case
km (600 miles).
you accidentally lock one key inside
the car.
o While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) within 3,000 rpm.
o While driving, keep under three quar-
ters of maximum speed.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't
start, depress the accelerator pedal
fully.
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try
to avoid hard stops.
1
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5
B030B01A-AAT B880A01A-GAT B880B02HP-GAT

Record Your Key Number - For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) or Keys
Gasoline Engine Type A
(If Installed)
Light
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft Purple
device, designed to deter automobile
theft. Black
ID key
Master key
B030B01HR B880B01HP
A code number is stamped on the Type B

number plate that came with the keys
to your Hyundai. This key number
plate should not be left with the keys
but kept in a safe place, not in the
vehicle. The key number should also
be recorded in a place where it can be
found in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you ID key
should lose your keys, your authorized Master key
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if
B880B02HP
you can supply the key number.
For greater convenience, your Hyundai
has two types of keys as shown in the
illustration.
6
(1) ID key (3) If you need additional keys or if you B880C01A-GAT
This key must be used first to reg- should lose your keys, your autho- Key Numbers
ister a unique ID code in the ICM. rized Hyundai dealer can make new
This ID code is then recorded onto keys if you can supply the key
the master keys. Both sides of the number and ID key.
key have a Hyundai logo.
NOTE:
(2) Master key If you make your own duplicate key,
This key is for general use. It will you will not be able to cancel the
open all locks on your vehicle. system or start the engine.
One side of the key has the Hyundai
logo and the other side has the "M"
symbol. ! CAUTION: B880C01HP
If your vehicle is equipped with When starting the engine, do not
Theft-alarm system, the master use the key with other immobilizer
keys with the function of transmit- keys around. Otherwise the engine
ter will be provided. (Type B) may not start or may stop soon
after it starts.
Keep each keys separately not to
! CAUTION:
have any malfunction after you re-
ceive your new vehicle.
Don't lose your ID key or forget the
password. Always keep your ID key
in a place where you remember and
record your password. If you don't B880C02HP
have both the password and ID key,
consult your authorized Hyundai The vehicle key number is recorded
dealer. upon a metal tag attached to the keys
when the vehicle is first delivered to
you.
1
7
The key number should be recorded B880D01HP-GAT 3. You may set the remaining number
and kept in a safe place in case the Limp Home Procedures of digits by following the same pro-
need to order further keys arises. New In case the immobilizer system is out cedures 1 and 2.
keys are available from any Hyundai of order, you cannot start the engine 4. If all of four digits have been tried
dealer by quoting the relevant key without the limp home procedures with successfully, from this time, you
number. ignition key. have to start your engine within 30
In the interest of security, the metal tag The following procedure is how to start seconds. If you start your engine
attached to the keys which bears the the engine with the function of the limp after 30 seconds, your engine will
key number should be removed from home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass- not start.
the key ring after you receive your new word).
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can- NOTE:
not be provided by Hyundai for secu- NOTE: If the engine dies while driving after
rity reasons. You can get the limp home pass- limp home procedure, you can start
If you need additional keys or if you word when the vehicle is first deliv- your engine within 8 seconds with-
should lose your keys, your authorized ered to you. If you do not have the out limp home procedure again.
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if password, consult your authorized
you can supply the key number and ID Hyundai dealer. After doing the limp home procedure,
key. you have to consult with your autho-
1. To set the password you may turn rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
the ignition key "ON" and then turn sible.
it "OFF" according to the digit num-
bers. For example, turn the ignition
key once for digit number "1", and ! CAUTION:
twice for "2", and so on. However, If you cannot start your engine in
for the digit number "0", you must spite of limp home procedure, have
turn the ignition key for 10 times. your vehicle towed by an autho-
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. rized Hyundai dealer.
8
B885A01HP-GAT
Type B
- For Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
(If Installed) ! CAUTION:
o The password should be re-
The immobilizer system is an anti-theft corded and kept in a safe place in
device, designed to deter automobile case the need to order further
theft. keys arises.
o If you forget the password, con-
sult your authorized Hyundai
B885B02HP-GAT
dealer.
Keys Master keys o When starting the engine, do not
Type A use the key with other immobi-
B885B02HP
lizer keys around. Otherwise the
All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are engine may not start or may stop
operated by the same key. However, soon after it starts.
Keep each keys separately not to
since it is possible to lock the doors have any malfunction after you
without the use of the key, care should receive your new vehicle.
be exercised to ensure that the key
does not become locked inside the
vehicle by mistake. If your vehicle is
equipped with Theft-alarm system, the
Master keys B885B01HP
master keys with the function of trans-
mitter will be provided (Type B).
NOTE:
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the
system or start the engine.
1
9
B885C01O-GAT The key number should be recorded B885D01O-GAT

Key Numbers and kept in a safe place in case the Limp Home Procedures
need to order further keys arises. New
keys are available from any Hyundai
dealer by quoting the relevant key
number.
In the interest of security, the metal tag
attached to the keys which bears the
key number should be removed from
the key ring after you receive your new
vehicle. In addition, key numbers can-
not be provided by Hyundai for secu-
rity reasons.
B885C01HP B880D01HP-1
If you need additional keys or if you
should lose your keys, your authorized In case the immobilizer warning indi-
Hyundai dealer can make new keys. cator blinks for five seconds when the
ignition key is turned to "ON" position,
this indicates that the immobilizer sys-
tem is out of order. And you cannot
start the engine without the limp home
procedures with ignition key.
The following procedure is how to start
the engine with the function of the limp
home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass-
word).
B885C02HP
The vehicle key number is recorded

upon a metal tag attached to the keys
you.
10
NOTE: NOTE: B030C01Y-AAT
You can get the limp home pass- If the engine dies while driving after ILLUMINATED IGNITION
word when the vehicle is first deliv- limp home procedure, you can start SWITCH
ered to you. If you do not have the your engine within 8 seconds with-
password, consult your authorized out limp home procedure again.
Hyundai dealer.
5. If the immobilizer indicator blinks for
1. To set the password you may turn five seconds, you have to try the
the ignition key "ON" and then turn limp home procedure again from
it "OFF" according to the digit num- the beginning.
bers, then the immobilizer indicator
will blink along with the operation of After doing the limp home procedure,
the ignition key. For example, turn you have to consult with your autho-
the ignition key once for digit num- rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos- B030C01E
ber "1", and twice for "2", and so on. sible.
However, for the digit number "0", Whenever a front door is opened, the
you must turn the ignition key for 10 ignition switch will be illuminated for
times. ! CAUTION:
your convenience, provided the igni-
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. tion switch is not in the "ON" position.
o If you fail to try the limp home The light will go off approximately 10
3. You may set the remaining number procedure with the sequence of
of digits by following the same pro- seconds after closing the door or when
three times, you have to wait for the ignition switch is turned on.
cedures 1 and 2. about one hour to do the limp
4. If all of four digits have been tried home procedure again.
successfully, turn the ignition key o If you cannot start your engine in
"ON" and check that the immobi- spite of limp home procedure,
lizer indicator illuminates. From this have your vehicle towed by an
time, you have to start your engine authorized Hyundai dealer.
within 30 seconds. If you start your
engine after 30 seconds, your en-
gine will not start.
1
DOOR LOCKS 11
B040A02Y-AAT B040B01A-AAT B040C02Y-DAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Locking from the Outside
Doors with a Key
! WARNING:
o Unlocked doors can be danger-
UNLOCK
ous. Before you drive away (es-
pecially if there are children in
the car), be sure that all the doors
are securely closed and locked LOCK
so that the doors cannot be inad-
vertently opened from the inside.
This helps ensure that the doors
will not be opened accidentally. B040C01HP
Also, when combined with the
HHP2003 The doors can be locked without a key.
proper use of seat belts, locking To lock the doors, first push the inside
the doors helps keep occupants o The door can be locked or unlocked
lock switch to the "LOCK" position so
from being ejected from the car with a key. that the red mark on the switch is not
in case of an accident. o Lock the door by turning the key visible, then close the door.
o Before opening the door, always toward the front of the vehicle and The door will not lock if the key is left in
look for and avoid oncoming traf- unlock it by turning the key toward the ignition switch when the front doors
fic. the rear. are closed. This is normal.
o In case of accident, the door is NOTE:
unlocked automatically (If In- o When locking the door this way,
stalled). be careful not to lock the door
with the ignition key left in the
vehicle.
o To reduce the chance of theft,
always remove the ignition key,
close all windows and lock all
doors when leaving your vehicle
unattended.
12
B040D01S-AAT B040E04A-AAT If you wish to be able to open the door

Locking from the Inside Child-Protector Rear Door Lock from the outside, the outside door
handle will function normally.
LOCK
UNLOCK
B040G01HP-AAT
Central Door Locks
LOCK
UNLOCK
HHP2004 HHP2008
To lock the doors from the inside, Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-
simply close the door and push the protector" rear door lock assembly.
lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When the lock mechanism is engaged,
When this is done, neither the outside the rear door cannot be opened from
nor the inside door handles can be the inside. Its use is recommended
used. whenever there are small children in B040G01HP
the rear seat. The central door locking switch is lo-

NOTE: cated on the driver's armrest. It is
When the door is locked, the red To engage the child-protector feature operated by depressing the door lock
mark on the switch is not visible. so that the door cannot be opened switch.
from the inside, move the child-protec-
tor lever to the " " position and close
the door. Move the lever to the " "
position when normal door operation is
desired.
1
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM 13
NOTE: B070A01A-AAT B070B01O-AAT
o When pushing the front portion (If Installed) Armed Stage

of the driver's door lock switch, This system is designed to provide Type A
all vehicle doors will lock. If any protection from unauthorized entry into
door is open when the switch is the car. This system is operated in
depressed, the door will remain three stages: the first is the "Armed"
locked when closed. stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,
o When pushing the rear portion of and the third is the "Disarmed" stage.
the switch, all vehicle doors will If triggered, the system provides an
unlock. audible alarm with blinking of the turn
o The central door locking is oper- signal lights.
ated by turning the key toward UNLOCK
the front or rear of the vehicle. LOCK HHP2002
Type B
LOCK
UNLOCK B070B02HP
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.
14
1) Remove the ignition key from the B070C01HP-GAT

Alarm Stage
ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine hood and
! CAUTION:
tail gate are closed and latched. Avoid trying to start the engine while
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter the system is armed.
of the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above,

B070D01HP-AAT
the turn signal lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
Disarmed Stage
Type A Type B
NOTE:
1) If any door, tail gate or engine B070C01HP
hood remains open, the system
will not be armed. The alarm will be activated if any of the
2) If this happens, rearm the system following occurs while the car is parked
as previously described. and the system is armed.
1) A front or rear door is opened with-

out using the transmitter.
! CAUTION:
2) The tail gate is opened without us-
ing the transmitter. B070D01HP
Do not arm the system until all 3) The engine hood is opened. The system will be disarmed when the
passengers have left the car. If the driver's or passenger's door is un-
system is armed while a The siren will sound and the turn signal locked by depressing the "UNLOCK"
passenger(s) remains in the car, lights will blink continuouly for 27 sec- button on the transmitter.
the alarm may be activated when onds (Type B/ Type A : This will repeat
the remaining passenger(s) leaves 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock
the car. the door or tail gate with the transmit-
ter.
1
15
After completion of the step above, the B070F01A-GAT B070E02HP-GAT
turn signal lights will blink twice to Keyless Entry System Replacing the battery
indicate that the system is disarmed. (If Installed) When the transmitter's battery begins
to get weak, it may take several pushes
Locking doors on the button to lock or unlock the
NOTE:
If any door, tail gate or engine hood 1. Close all doors. doors, and the LED will not light. Re-
is not opened within 30 seconds, 2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans- place the battery as soon as possible.
the system will be rearmed. mitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the Battery type : CR2032(Type A)
turn signal lights will blink once to or CR1616 (Type B)
indicate that the system is armed.
! CAUTION: Replacement instructions:
Only the transmitter can disarm the Unlocking doors Type A:
armed stage. If the transmitter does 1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the
not disarm the system, it is neces- transmitter.
sary to take the following steps; 2. At the same time all doors unlock,
the turn signal lights will blink twice
1. Unlock the door with the key, to indicate that the system is dis-
which will cause the alarm to be armed.
activated.
2. Insert the key in the ignition key Screwdriver
cylinder and turn the ignition key
to "ON" position.
3. Wait for 30 seconds.
MSO-0048-1
After completing the steps above, 1. Carefully separate the case with a
the system will be disarmed. blade screwdriver as shown in the
illustration.
16
Type B:
Hole
Case
Transmitter
Battery Case
Battery Battery Cover
MSO-0048-2 HMXOM033-3
2. Remove the old battery from the HMXOM033-2 2. Take off the battery cover after sepa-
case and note the polarity. Make rating the transmitter.
1. Carefully separate the case with a
sure the polarity of the new battery 3. Remove the old battery from the
is the same(+side facing down), then phillips screwdriver.
transmitter with a blade screwdriver
insert it in the transmitter. inserted in the hole and note the
3. Installation is the reverse order of polarity. Make sure the polarity of
disassembly. the new battery is the same(+side
facing up), then insert it in the trans-
mitter.
4. Installation is the reverse order of
disassembly.
1
POWER WINDOWS 17
B060A03L-AAT
NOTE:
Close The power windows can be oper-
Open ated for 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is turned to the "ACC" or
"LOCK" positions, or removed from
the ignition switch.
(1) If the front doors are opened during
this 30 second period, the power
windows can no longer be oper-
(2) ated without the ignition key turned
to the "ON" position.
B060A02HP
B060A01HP
In order to prevent operation of the
The power windows operate when the passanger front and rear windows, a
ignition key is in the "ON" position. The window lock switch(2) is provided on
main switches are located on the the armrest of the driver's door. To Close
driver's armrest and control the front disable the power windows, press the Open
and rear windows on both sides of the window lock switch. To revert to nor-
vehicle. The windows may be opened mal operation, press the window lock
by depressing the appropriate window switch a second time.
switch and closed by pulling up the
switch. To open the window on the
driver's side, press the switch(1) half- HHP2013
way down. The window moves as long
as the switch is operated. To fully open
the driver's window automatically, press
the switch fully down. In automatic
operation, the window will fully open
even if you let go of the switch. To stop
at the desired opening, pull up and
release the switch.
18 SEATS
B080A01A-AAT B080B02A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS Adjusting Seat Forward and
! WARNING: Rearward
1) Be careful that someone's head, ! WARNING:
hands and body are not trapped
by a closing window. Never attempt to adjust the seat
2) Never try to operate the main while the vehicle is moving. This
switch on the driver's door and could result in loss of control or an
the individual door window accident which may cause death,
switch in opposing directions at serious injury, or property damage.
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
3) Do not leave children alone in the
HHP2026
car. Always remove the ignition
key for their safety. To move the seat toward the front or
rear, pull the lock release lever up-
ward. This will release the seat on its
track so you can move it forward or
rearward to the desired position. When
you find the position you want, release
the lever and slide the seat forward or
rearward on its track until it locks into
the desired position and cannot be
moved further.
1
19
To recline the seatback, lean forward B080D02JM-GAT
! to take your weight off it, then pull up Adjustable Headrests

WARNING: on the recliner control lever at the
To ensure the seat is locked se- outside edge of the seat. Now lean
curely, attempt to move the seat back until the desired seatback angle
forward or rearward without using is achieved. To lock the seatback into
the lock release lever. position, release the recliner control
lever.
B080C01A-AAT
! WARNING:
Adjusting Seatback Angle To minimize risk of severe injury in Lock knob
the event of a collision or a sudden B080D01HP
stop, both the driver and passen-
ger seatbacks should always be in Headrests are designed to help re-
an upright position while the ve- duce the risk of neck injuries.
hicle is in motion. The protection To raise the headrest, pull it up. To
provided by the seat belts and lower it, push it down while pressing
airbags in a frontal collision may be the lock knob. To remove the head-
reduced significantly when the rest, raise it as far as it can go then
seatbacks are reclined. There is press the lock knob while pulling up-
greater risk that the driver and pas- ward.
senger will slide under the seat belt
HHP2027
which may result in serious injury if
a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined.
The seat belt cannot provide full
protection to an occupant if the
seat back is reclined.
20
B080E02A-AAT
o Do not adjust the headrest hejght Lumbar Support Control
! WARNING: while the vehicle is in motion. (Driver's seat only) (If Installed)
B081D01LZ-AAT
Tilting Headrest Forward and
Rearward (If Installed) 1
B080D01JM HHP2032
o For maximum effectiveness in To adjust the lumbar support, turn the

case of an accident the headrest handle on the inboard side of the seat.
should be adjusted so the middle To increase the amount of lumbar sup-
of the headrest is at the same port, pull the lever forward. To de-
height as the top of the HHP2034 crease it, push the lever toward the
occupant's eyes. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that The headrest may be tilted forward to rear.
holds the body away from the three different positions by pulling the
seatback should not be recom- headrest forward. To adjust the head- 1. Minimum support
mended. rest rearward, pull it fully forward to the 2. Maximum support
o Do not operate vehicle with the farthest position and release it. Adjust
headrests removed as injury to the headrest so that it properly sup-
the occupants may occur in the ports the head and neck.
event of an accident. Headrests
may provide protection against
neck injuries when properly ad-
justed.
1
21
B080F01S-AAT B090A02Y-AAT B090B01L-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment POWER DRIVER'S SEAT Adjusting Seat Forward and
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed) (If Installed) Rearward
The driver's seat can be adjusted ap-
propriately by using the control knob
on the left side of the seat. Before 1
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so as to easily control the 2
steering wheel, pedals and switches
on the instrument panel.
! CAUTION:
HHP2028 HHP2029
Do not operate two knobs at the
To raise or lower the front part of the same time. Pull the control knob forward or back-
seat cushion, turn the front knob forward to move the seat forward or back-
ward or rearward. To raise or lower the ward to the desired position. Release
rear part of the seat cushion, turn the the knob and the seat will lock at that
rear knob forward or rearward. ! WARNING: position.
o Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This 1. Reclining Control Knob
could result in loss of control or 2. Sliding and Height Adjusting Con-
an accident causing death, seri- trol Knob
ous injury, or property damage.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the airbag.
22
B090C01Y-AAT B090D01Y-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment Adjusting Seatback Angle
! WARNING:
To minimize the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision or
a sudden stop, both the driver's
and passenger's seatbacks should
remain in an upright position while
the car is in motion. The protection
provided by the seat belts and
airbags may be reduced signifi-
cantly when the seatbacks are re-
HHP2031
clined. There is a greater risk that
HHP2030
the seat occupants will slide under
Move the front portion of the control Rotate the upper portion of the control the belt resulting in serious injury
knob up or down to raise or lower the knob forward or backward to recline if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
front part of the seat cushion. Move the the seatback to the desired position. are reclined. The seat belt cannot
rear portion of the control knob up or Release the control knob and then the provide full protection to an occu-
down to raise or lower the rear part of seatback will lock in that position. pant if the seatback is reclined.
the seat cushion.
1
23
B080G01O-AAT B100A02HP-GAT
UNDER TRAY SEAT WARMER (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
o The seat warmer will not operate
if ambient temperature is higher
than 31.5°C (88.7°F).
o If the seat warmer doesn't work
when ambient temperature is
lower than 24.5°C (76.1°F), it must
be checked by authorized dealer.
HHP2037 B100A01HP
The tray is located under the front The seat warmer is provided to warm
passenger seat. It is opend by pulling the front seats during cold weather.
forward. With the ignition key in the "ON" posi-
tion, push either of the switches to
warm the driver's seat or the
! WARNING: passenger's seat.
To avoid the possibility of injury in During mild weather or under condi-
case of an accident or a sudden tions where the operation of the seat
stop, the tray should be kept closed warmer is not needed, keep the
when the car is in motion. switches in the "OFF" position.
24
B090A03HP-GAT B090C02HP-GAT
SECOND SEAT Adjusting Seatback Angle
Adjustable Headrests ! WARNING:
(If Installed) o For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the top of the
occupant's eyes. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback should not be recom- Seatback
mended.
o Do not operate vehicle with the folding lever
HHP2039
headrests removed as injury to
Lock Knob the occupants may occur in the To recline the seatback, push the
B090A01HP event of an accident. Headrests seatback folding lever toward the head-
Headrests are designed to help re- may provide protection against rest, and release it after the desired
duce the risk of neck injuries. neck injuries when properly ad- seatback angle is achieved.
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To justed. When you recline the seatback to de-
lower it, push it down while pressing o Do not adjust the headrest hejght sired position, always be sure it has
the lock knob. while the vehicle is in motion. locked into position.
To remove the headrest, raise it as far
as it can go then press the lock knob
while pulling upward.
1
25
B090B02HP-DAT
NOTE:
Folding Rear Seatback and Seat
! WARNING: Cushion
Before folding the seat, fit the seat
belt webbing in the clip and put the
To minimize the risk of personal For greater convenience, the entire seat belt buckle between the
injury in the event of a collision or seatback and seat cushion may be seatback and the seat cushion.
a sudden stop, both the driver's folded down and up.
and passenger's seatbacks should 1. Lower the headrest completely while
remain in an upright position while pressing the lock knob. (If Installed)
the belt resulting in serious injury
if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined. The seat belt cannot
provide full protection to an occu- HHP2057 (1)
pant if the seatback is reclined.
HHP2040
2. To fold down the seatback , first

push and hold the seatback folding
lever(1) inward, and then push down
the seatback.
HHP2041
26
! WARNING:
When folding down or returning
the seatback, always hold the
seatback. Otherwise, the seatback (3)
could move suddenly and result in
unexpected injury.
HHP2043 HHP2043-1
4. To secure the seat, hook the secur- NOTE:

ing strap(3) under the seat cushion o Before lowering the seat cush-
to the headrest stay of front driver ion when you return the seat, roll
and passenger seat. the securing strap and put it in
5. To return the seatback and seat the pocket.
cushion to its normal position, re- o When you return the seatback to
verse the above procedure. its upright position, always be
(2)
sure it is locked into position by
HHP2042 pulling and pushing on the top
of seatback.
3. Pull the seat cushion release le-
ver(2) upward, and then fold up the
seat cushion.
1
27
B095A03HP-GAT
o When you return the rear THIRD SEAT(For 7 Passengers)
! WARNING: seatback to its upright position Adjusting Seatback Angle
o The purpose of the fold-down after being folded down, be care-
rear seatback and the fold-up rear ful not to damage the seat belt
seat cushion is to allow you to webbing or buckle. In addition,
carry more objects than could be do not allow the seat belt web-
accommodated. Never allow pas- bing or buckle to get caught or
sengers to sit on the cargo area pinched in the rear seat.
while the car is moving. This is o Do not allow passengers to fold
not a proper seating position and down and up the seatback and
no seat belts are available for use seat cushion while the car is
when the seatback is folded moving.
down.
HHP2049
This could result in serious in-
jury or death in case of an acci- To recline the seatback, pull the
dent or a sudden stop. Objects seatback recliner control lever back-
should not extend higher than wards, and release it after the desired
the top of the front seatbacks. seatback angle is achieved.
This could allow cargo to slide When you recline the seatback to de-
forward and cause injury or dam- sired position, always be sure it has
age during sudden stops. locked into position.
28
B095B04HP-GAT
! WARNING: Cushion
To minimize the risk of personal 1. Lower the headrest completely while
injury in the event of a collision or pressing the lock knob (If Installed).
a sudden stop, both the driver's (2)
remain in an upright position while
provided by the seat belts and (1)
HHP2051
clined. There is a greater risk that 3. Pull the seat cushion release knob(2)
the seat occupants will slide under beside the seat cushion, and fold
the belt resulting in serious injury the seat cushion sideways.
if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
are reclined. The seat belt cannot
HHP2050
provide full protection to an occu-
pant if the seatback is reclined. 2. To fold down the seatback, pull the
seatback recliner control lever(1),
and then push down the seatback.
! WARNING:
When folding down or returning
the seatback, always hold the
seatback. Otherwise, the seatback
could move suddenly and result in
unexpected injury.
1
29
5. Fix the seat belt buckle in the groove

(3) This could result in serious in-
not to damage it.
jury or death in case of an acci-
6. To return the seatback and seat
dent or a sudden stop. Objects
cushion to its normal position, re-
should not extend higher than
verse the above procedure.
the top of the front seatbacks.
(4) This could allow cargo to slide
NOTE: forward and cause injury or dam-
When you return the seat cushion age during sudden stops.
to its normal position, always lower o When you return the rear
the leg of the third seat to lock the seatback to its upright position
HHP2053
seat into position. after being folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt
4. To secure the seat, hook the secur-
webbing or buckle. In addition,
ing strap(3) under the seat cushion
to the assist handle and fold the leg ! WARNING:
do not allow the seat belt web-
bing or buckle to get caught or
of the third seat(4). o The purpose of the fold-down pinched in the rear seat.
rear seatback and the fold-up rear o Do not allow passengers to fold
seat cushion is to allow you to down and up the seatback and
carry more objects than could be seat cushion while the car is
accommodated. Never allow pas- moving.
sengers to sit on the cargo area
while the car is moving. This is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use
when the seatback is folded
down.
HHP2054
30
B095C01HP-GAT
To get in and out of the third seat
The second seat should be folded up
to get in and out of the third seat.
(2) (4)
1. Lower the headrest completely while
pressing the lock knob.(If Installed)
(3)
B095C01HP B095C02HP
3. To get in the third seat, pull the 4. To secure the seat, hook the secur-
handle for folding the seat cushion ing strap (4) under the seat cushion
(2) beside the seat cushion, then to the headrest stay of front driver
(1) fold up the seat cushion. and passenger seat.
To get out of the third seat, pull the
seat cushion release lever (3) up- After doing above procedure, passen-
HHP2045 ward and fold up the seat cushion. gers can get in or get out of the third
seat.
lever (1) inward, and then push down
the seatback. ! WARNING:
Do not allow passengers to fold
down and up the seatback and seat
cushion while the car is moving.
1
SEAT BELTS 31
B140A01B-GAT B150A02A-GAT
NOTE:
REAR SEAT WARNING SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS Small children are best protected in
All occupants of the vehicle should an accident when properly re-
wear their seat belts at all times. In- strained by a child restraint sys-
deed, your province's laws may re- tem.
quire that some or all occupants of the
vehicle use seat belts.
B150C02A-AAT
The possibility of injury or the severity Larger Children
of injury in an accident will be de-
creased if this elementary safety pre- Children who are too large for child
caution is observed. In addition, follow restraint systems should always oc-
the other instructions provided in this cupy the rear seat and use the avail-
B140A01HP section. able lap/shoulder belts. The lap por-
tion should be fastened snug on the
For the safety of all passengers, lug- hips and as low as possible. Check
gage or other cargo should not be piled belt fit periodically. A child's squirming
higher than the top of the seatback. B150B01Y-GAT
could put the belt out of position. Chil-
Infant or Small Child dren are afforded the most safety in
Some countries require the use of the event of an accident when they are
child restraint systems for infants and restrained by a proper restraint sys-
small children. Whether this is required tem in the rear seat. If a larger child
by law or not, it is strongly recom- (over age 13) must be seated in the
mended that a child restraint seat or front seat, the child should be securely
infant restraint system be used for restrained by the available lap/shoul-
infants or small children weighing less der belt and the seat should be placed
than 18 kilograms (40 pounds). in the rearmost position. Children un-
der the age of 13 should be restrained
32
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt
a child under the age of 13 in the front
seat. NEVER place a rear facing child
! WARNING:
Two people (including children) should
seat in the front seat of a vehicle. never attempt to use a single seat belt. Sitting in a reclined position or ly-
This could increase the severity of ing down when your vehicle is in
injuries in case of an accident. motion can be dangerous. Even if
B150D01A-AAT you buckle up, your seat belts can't
Pregnant Women do their job when you're reclined.
The shoulder belt can't do its job
The use of a seat belt is recommended because it won't be against your
B150G01A-AAT
for pregnant women to lessen the body. Instead, it will be in front of
Do Not Lie Down
chance of injury in an accident. When you. In a crash you could go into it
a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion To reduce the chance of injuries in the with great force, receiving serious
should be placed as low and snugly as event of an accident and to achieve neck or other injuries.
possible on the hips, not across the maximum effectiveness of the restraint The lap belt can't do its job either. In
abdomen. For specific recommenda- system, all passengers should be sit- a crash the belt could go up over
tions, consult a physician. ting up and the front seats should be in your abdomen. The belt forces
an upright position when the car is would be applied there, not at your
moving. A seat belt cannot operate strong pelvic bones.
properly if the person is lying down in This could cause serious internal
B150E01A-AAT the rear seat or if the front seat is in a injuries.
Injured Person reclined position. For proper protection when the ve-
A seat belt should be used when an hicle is in motion, have the seatback
injured person is being transported. upright. Then sit well back in the
When this is necessary, you should seat and wear your seat belt prop-
consult a physician for recommenda- erly. See page 1-34.
tions.
1
33
B160A01A-AAT B160C01A-AAT B170A04A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS Keep Belts Clean and Dry HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT
Seat belt systems should never be Seat belts should be kept clean and SEAT SHOULDER BELT
disassembled or modified. In addition, dry. If belts become dirty, they can be (If Installed)
care should be taken to assure that cleaned by using a mild soap solution
seat belts and belt hardware are not and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
damaged by seat hinges, doors or detergents or abrasives should not be
other abuse. used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
! WARNING: B160D01A-AAT
When you return the rear seatback When to Replace Seat Belts
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care- Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
ful not to damage the seat belt web- assemblies should be replaced if the B170A01HP
bing or buckle. Be sure that the vehicle has been involved in an acci-
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
webbing or buckle does not get dent. This should be done even if no
der belt anchor to one of the 4 positions
caught or pinched in the rear seat. damage is visible. Additional ques-
for maximum comfort and safety.
tions concerning seat belt operation
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
should be directed to your Hyundai
too near your neck, you will not be
Dealer.
getting the most effective protection.
B160B01A-AAT The shoulder portion should be ad-
Periodic Inspection justed so that it lies across your chest
It is recommended that all seat belts and midway over your shoulder near-
be inspected periodically for wear or est the door and not your neck.
damage of any kind. Parts of the sys- To adjust the height of the seat belt
tem that are damaged should be re- anchor, lower or raise the height ad-
placed as soon as possible. juster into an appropriate position. To
raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To
34
lower it, push it down while pressing B180A02A-GAT will extend and let you move around. If
the height adjuster button. SEAT BELTS-Driver's and there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
Release the button to lock the anchor Passenger's 3-Point System with ever, the belt will lock into position. It
into position. Try sliding the height Webbing Clamp Locking Retrac- will also lock if you try to lean forward
adjuster to make sure that it has locked tor (If Installed) too quickly.
into the position. To Fasten Your Belt
B180A02Y-GAT
! WARNING:
SEAT BELTS-3-Point System
with Emergency Locking Retrac-
o The height adjuster must be in
the locked position when the tor (If Installed)
vehicle is moving. To Fasten Your Belt
o The misadjustment of height of
the shoulder belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt
in a crash.
B180A01L
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the retractor and insert the metal tab
into the buckle. There will be an au-
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to B180A01L
the proper length only after the lap belt

is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
1
35
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of B200A01S-GAT B210A01A-AAT
the retractor and insert the metal tab Adjusting Your Seat Belt To Release the Seat Belt
into the buckle. There will be an au-
dible "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap belt
is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around. If
there is a sudden stop or impact, how-
ever, the belt will lock into position. It
B200A01L B210A01L
will also lock if you try to lean forward
too quickly. Check to make sure that You should place the belt as low as The seat belt is released by pressing
the belt is properly locked and that the possible on your hips, not on your the release button in the locking buckle.
belt is not twisted. waist. If the belt is located too high on When it is released, the belt should
your body, you could slide under it in automatically draw back into the re-
case of accident or a sudden stop. tractor.
This could result of death, serious If this does not happen, check the belt
injury or property damage. Both arms to be sure it is not twisted, then try
should not be under or over the belt. again.
Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustra-
tion.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.
36
B220A01A-AAT B220B01A-AAT B220C01A-AAT

SEAT BELTS (2-Point Static Adjusting Your Seat Belt To Release the Seat Belt
Type) (Rear Seat Center)
(If Installed)
To Fasten Your Seat Belt
Too
high
Shorten Correct
HTB226
Center HHP2056
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the When you want to release the seat
length must be adjusted manually so it belt, press the button in the locking
HTB225
fits snugly around your body. Fasten buckle.
the belt and pull on the loose end to
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, tighten. The belt should be placed as
insert the metal tab into the locking low as possible on your hips, not on ! WARNING:
buckle. There will be an audible "click" your waist. If the belt is too high, it
when the tab locks into the buckle. The center lap belt latching mecha-
could increase the possibility of your nism is different from those for the
Check to make sure the belt is properly being injured in an accident.
locked and that the belt is not twisted. rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-
tening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
1
37
B220D02HP-GAT
SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat
3-Point System With Emergency
Locking Retractor (If Installed)
(c)
(d)
(c)
(a) B220D02HP B220A02Y-D
(d) 3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are There will be an audible "click" when
(b) latched, pull the seat belt out of the the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
retractor and insert the metal tab (c) belt automatically adjusts to the proper
B220D01HP
into the buckle (d). length only after the lap belt is adjusted
1. Pull the seat belt out of the roof manually so that it fits snugly around
panel. your hips. If you lean forward in a slow,
2. Before fastening the rear seat cen- easy motion, the belt will extend and
ter belt, confirm the metal tab (a) let you move around. If there is a
and buckle (b) are latched together. sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock
into position. It will also lock if you try to
lean forward too quickly.
38
! WARNING:
o When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all metal tabs
and buckles. If any metal tab or
buckle is not locked, it will in-
crease the chance of injury in the (a)
event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a)
and the buckle (b) with the fol- (b)
lowing exceptions. B220D03HP B220D04HP
(1) In case of folding rear
seatbacks down. o To disconnect the metal tab (a) o In case of unlocking metal tab (a)
(2) If transporting an object on from the buckle (b), insert a sharp- and the buckle (b), place metal
the rear seat may cause dam- ended tool into the groove lo- (a) in the seat belt clip not to
age to the rear seat center cated on the buckle (b). make noise while driving.
belt.
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b) immediately after fold-
ing rear seatbacks up.
1
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 39
B220C02A-GAT B230A03P-GAT
To Release the Seat Belt (If Installed)
! WARNING:
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be o A child restraint system must be
properly restrained to minimize the placed in the rear seat. Never
risk of injury in an accident, sudden install a child or infant seat on
stop or sudden maneuver. According the front passenger's seat.
to accident statistics, children are safer Should an accident occur and
when properly restrained in the rear cause the passenger's side airbag
seats than in the front seat. Larger to deploy, it could severely in-
children not in a child restraint should jure or kill an infant or child seated
use one of the seat belts provided. in an infant or child seat. Thus,
You are required by law to use safety only use a child restraint in the
B220C01HP-E
restraints for children. If small children rear seat of your vehicle.
When you want to release the seat o Since a safety belt or child re-
ride in your vehicle you must put them
belt, press the button in the locking straint system can become very
in a child restraint system (safety seat).
buckle. hot if it is left in a closed vehicle,
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly be sure to check the seat cover
! WARNING:
secured. For small children and ba- and buckles before placing a
child there.
bies, a child seat or infant seat must be
When fastening the outboard seat used. Before buying a particular child o When the child restraint system
belts or the center seat belt, make restraint system, make sure it fits your is not in use, fasten it with a
sure they are inserted into the cor- car and seat belts, and fits your child. safety belt so that it will not be
rect buckles to obtain maximum Follow all the instructions provided by thrown forward in the case of a
protection from the seat belt sys- the manufacturer when installing the sudden stop or an accident.
tem and assure proper operation. child restraint system.
40
B230F01A-GAT
o Children who are too large to be o Never use an infant carrier or Installation on Center Rear Seat
in a child restraint should sit in child safety seat that "hooks"
2-Point static type
the rear seat and be restrained over a seatback; it may not pro-
with the available lap/shoulder vide adequate security in an ac-
belts. Never allow children to ride cident.
in the front passenger seat. o Never allow a child to be held in
o Always make sure that the shoul- a person's arms while they are in
der belt portion of the outboard a moving vehicle, as this could
lap/shoulder belt is positioned result in serious injury to the
midway over the shoulder, never child in the event of an accident
across the neck or behind the or a sudden stop. Holding a child
back. Moving the child closer to in a moving vehicle does not
the center of the vehicle may help provide the child with any means B230F01HP
provide a good shoulder belt fit. of protection during an accident,
The lap belt portion of the lap/ even if the person holding the 3-Point type
shoulder belt or the center seat child is wearing a seat belt.
lap belt must always be posi- o If the child restraint seat is not
tioned as low as possible on the anchored properly, the risk of a
child's hips and as snug as pos- child being seriously injured or
sible. killed in a collision greatly in-
o If the seat belt will not properly fit creases.
the child, Hyundai recommends
the use of an approved booster
seat in the rear seat in order to
raise the child's seating height B230F02HP
so that the seat belt will properly

fit the child.
o Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the seat.
1
41
Use the center seat belt for the rear to B230G01A-GAT If you need to tighten the belt, pull
secure the child restraint system as Installation on the Outboard Rear more webbing toward the retractor.
illustrated. After installation of the child Seats When you unbuckle the seat belt and
restraint system, rock the child seat allow it to retract, the retractor will
back and forth, and side to side to automatically revert back to its normal
ensure that it is properly secured by seated passenger emergency locking
the seat belt. usage condition.
If the child seat moves, readjust the
length of the seat belt. Then, if NOTE:
equipped, insert the child restraint o Before installing the child re-
tether strap hook into the child restraint system, read the instruc-
straint hook holder and tighten to se- tions supplied by the child re-
cure the seat. Always refer to the child straint system manufacturer.
restraint system manufacturer's rec- o If the seat belt does not operate
B230G01HP
ommendation before installing the child as described, have the system
restraint system in your vehicle. To install a child restraint system on checked immediately by your
the outboard rear seats, extend the authorized Hyundai dealer.
shoulder/lap belt from its retractor.
Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. Make sure ! WARNING:
that the lap portion of the belt is tight
around the child restraint system and Do not install any child restraint
the shoulder portion of the belt is posi- system in the front passenger seat.
tioned so that it cannot interfere with Should an accident occur and cause
the child's head or neck. After installa- the passenger's side airbag to de-
tion of the child restraint system, try to ploy, it could severely injure or kill
move it in all directions to be sure the an infant or child seated in an infant
child restraint system is securely in- or child seat. Therefore, only use a
stalled. child restraint system in the rear
seat of your vehicle.
42
B230B02A-AAT B230C02HP-GAT the headrest and between the head-

Using a Child Restraint System Securing a Child Restraint Sys- rest posts, otherwise route the tether
With "Tether Anchorage" Sys- tem with "Tether Anchorage" strap over the top of the seatback.
tem System
Holder Bolt
Three child restraint hook holders are
(5/16"-30 mm) located on the floor behind the second
seat.
Install the child restraint seat accord-
Conical Spring Washer ing to the instructions provided as fol-
lowing.
Child Restraint Hook
Holder Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint
Hook Holder Child
Restraint
Retainer Washer
Hook
B230B01HP Holders
For small children and babies, the use

of a child seat or infant seat is required.
This child seat or infant seat should be
of appropriate size for the child and
should be installed in accordance with
Hole
the manufacturer's instructions. It is B230C01HP
Tether Strap
further required that the seat be placed Hook
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
in the vehicle's rear seat since this can
floor behind the second seat with
make an important contribution to
the key inserted in the hole.
safety. Your vehicle is provided with Front of Vehicle B230C02HP
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
three child restraint hook holders for
over the seatback. 3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
installing the child seat or infant seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head- child restraint hook holder and
rests, route the tether strap under tighten to secure the seat.
1
43
B230D03E-GAT An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if

Securing a Child Restraint Sys- it has vehicle-specific approval in ac-
tem with "ISOFIX" System and ISOFIX Anchor
cordance with the requirements of ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator
"Tether Anchorage" System ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the
Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo /
Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer
Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is
approved according to the requirement
ECE-R44. This seat has been tested
extensively by Hyundai and is recom-
mended for your Hyundai.
B230D02HP
NOTE: On each side of the rear seat, between

At present, this seat is the only one the cushion and backrest, are located
complying with that provision. In a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points
B230D01HP
case that other manufacturers will together with a top tether mounting on
ISOFIX is a standardized method of furnish proof of a respective certifi- the luggage compartment. During the
fitting child seats that eliminates the cation, Hyundai is going to evalu- installing, the seat has to be engaged
need to use the standard adult seat ate this seat carefully and will give at the anchorage-points in a way you
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. a recommendation provided that can hear it clicking (check by pulling!)
This enables a much more secure and seat complies to the law. Please ask and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-
positive location with the added benefit your Hyundai dealer in this respect. belt on the belonging point in the lug-
of easier and quicker installation. gage-compartment. The installing and
the use of a child-seat has to be done
according to the installing-manual,
which is added to the ISOFIX-seat.
44
NOTE: 1. To engage the child restraint seat

to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the properly in the center of the rear
An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be
child restraint seat latch into the seat and may break, causing se-
installed if the seat has a vehicle-
ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the au- rious injury or death.
specific approval according to ECE-
dible "click" sound. o Do not mount more than one
R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint to a child restraint
seat, which was bought for another
child restraint hook holder and lower anchorage point. The im-
car, ask your Hyundai-dealer
tighten to secure the seat. Refer to proper increased load may cause
whether this seat-type is approved
"Securing a Child Restraint System the anchorage points or tether
and recommended for your
with the Tether Anchorage System" anchor to break, causing serious
Hyundai.
on page 1-42. injury or death.
o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
To secure the child restraint seat patible child restraint seat only
! WARNING:
to the appropriate locations
shown in the illustration.
o Do not install a child restraint o Always follow the installation and
seat at the center of the rear seat use instructions provided by the
using the vehicle's ISOFIX an- manufacturer of the child re-
chors. The ISOFIX anchors are straint.
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach
B230D03HP a child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors. In a crash, the child
restraint seat ISOFIX attachments
may not be strong enough to
secure the child restraint seat
1
45
B230H02HP-GAT U : Suitable for "universal" category B180B03HP-AAT

Child Seat Restraint Suitability restraints approved for use in this Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
For Seat Position mass group (If Installed)
Use child safety seats that have been UF : Suitable for forward-facing "uni-
officially approved and are appropriate versal" category restraints ap-
for your children. proved for use in this mass group
When using the child safety seats, L1 : Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1"
refer to the following table. approved for use in this mass
group
Seating Position (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
Age Group Front Rear Rear
X : Seat position not suitable for chil-
Passenger Outboard Center
dren in this mass group
0 : Up to 10 kg
X U U
(0 ~ 9 months) HXG229
0+ : Up to 13 kg Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
X U U
(0 ~ 2 years) driver's and front passenger's pre-
I : 9kg to 18kg tensioner seat belts. The purpose of
(9 months ~ 4 X U, L1 U the pre-tensioner is to make sure that
years) the seat belts fit tightly against the
II & III : 15kg to occupant's body in certain frontal col-
36kg (4 ~ 12
lisions.
X UF UF
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
years)
activated alone or, where the frontal
collision is severe enough, together
with the airbags.
46
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if 1. SRS airbag warning light o When the pre-tensioner seat belts
the occupant tries to lean forward too 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly are activated, a loud noise may
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock 3. SRS control module be heard and fine dust, which
into position. In certain frontal colli- may appear to be smoke, may be
sions, the pre-tensioner will activate visible in the passenger compart-
and pull the seat belt into tighter con-
tact against the occupant's body.
! WARNING:
ment. These are normal operat-
ing conditions and are not haz-
To obtain maximum benefit from a ardous.
Driver's airbag 1 pre-tensioner seat belt: o Although it is harmless, the fine
Passenger's
airbag dust may cause skin irritation
1. The seat belt must be worn cor- and should not be breathed for
rectly. prolonged periods. Wash your
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to hands and face thoroughly after
the correct position. an accident in which the pre-
tensioner seat belts were acti-
3 vated.
NOTE:
2 o Both the driver's and front
passenger's pre-tensioner seat
B180B01HP belts will be activated in certain
The seat belt pre-tensioner system frontal collisions. The pre-
consists mainly of the following com- tensioner seat belts can be acti-
ponents. vated alone or, where the frontal
Their locations are shown in the illus- collision is severe enough, to-
tration. gether with the airbags.
1
47
o Improper handling of the pre-

! CAUTION: ! WARNING: tensioner seat belt assemblies,
o Because the sensor that activates o Pre-tensioners are designed to and failure to heed the warnings
the SRS airbag is connected with operate only one time. After acti- to not strike, modify, inspect, re-
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS vation, pre-tensioner seat belts place, service or repair the pre-
airbag warning light AIR
BAGon the must be replaced. All seat belts, tensioner seat belt assemblies
instrument panel will blink for of any type, should always be may lead to improper operation
approximately 6 seconds after replaced after they have been or inadvertent activation and se-
the ignition key has been turned rious injury.
worn during a collision.
to the "ON" position or after the o Always wear seat belts when driv-
engine is started, and then it o The pre-tensioner seat belt as-
sembly mechanisms become hot ing or riding in a motor vehicle.
should turn off.
o If pre-tensioner seat belt is not during activation. Do not touch
working properly, this warning the pre-tensioner seat belt as-
light will illuminate even if there semblies for several minutes af-
is no malfunction of the SRS ter they have been activated.
airbag. If the SRS airbag warning o Do not attempt to inspect or re-
light does not blink for about 6 place the pre-tensioner seat belts
seconds when the ignition key is yourself. This must be done by
turned to "ON" or the engine is an authorized Hyundai dealer.
started, or if it remains illumi- o Do not strike the pre-tensioner
nated after blinking for approxi- seat belt assemblies.
mately 6 seconds, or if it illumi- o Do not attempt to service or re-
nates while the vehicle is being pair the pre-tensioner seat belt
driven, please have an authorized system in any manner.
Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belts and SRS
airbag system as soon as pos-
sible.
48 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
(AIRBAG) SYSTEM
B240A01HP-AAT The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags
(If Installed)
Driver's Airbag
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
! WARNING:
passenger's side front panel above o As its name implies, the SRS is
the glove box. The purpose of the SRS designed to work with, and be
is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or supplemental to, the driver's and
the front passenger with additional pro- the passenger's three point seat
tection than that offered by the seatbelt systems and is not a substi-
belt system alone, in case of a frontal tute for them. Therefore, your seat
impact of sufficient severity. belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The airbags deploy only in cer-
Be sure to read information about tain frontal impact conditions
B240A01HP
the SRS on the labels provided on severe enough to likely cause
Your Hyundai is equipped with a the front of the sun visor and in the significant injury to the vehicle
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) Sys- glove box. occupants.
tem. The indications of the system's o The SRS is designed to deploy
presence are the letters "SRS AIR the airbags only when an impact
BAG" embossed on the airbag pad is sufficiently severe and when
cover in the steering wheel and the the impact angle is less than 30°
passenger's side front panel pad above from the forward longitudinal axis
the glove box. of the vehicle and will not deploy
in side, rear or rollover impacts.
Additionally, the airbags will only
deploy once. Thus, seat belts
must be worn at all times.
o Front airbags are not intended to
deploy in light collisions in which
protection can be provided by
the seat belt alone.
1
49
o No objects should be placed over dren to ride in the front passen-

Rear impact or near the airbag modules on ger seat. If older children (teen-
the steering wheel, instrument agers and older) must ride in the
panel, and the front passenger's front seat, make sure they are
panel above the glove box, always properly belted and that
because any such object could the seat is moved back as far as
cause harm if the vehicle is in a possible.
crash severe enough to cause o For maximum safety protection
the airbags to deploy. in all types of crashes, all occu-
o If the airbags deploy, they must pants including the driver should
Side impact
be replaced by an authorized always wear their seat belts
Rollover B240A02HP Hyundai dealer. whether or not an airbag is also
o Front airbags are not intended to o Do not tamper with or discon- provided at their seating posi-
deploy in side-impact, rear-im- nect SRS wiring, or other com- tion to minimize the risk of se-
pact or rollover crashes. In addi- ponents of the SRS system. Do- vere injury or death in the event
tion, airbags will not deploy in ing so could result in injury, due of a crash. Do not sit or lean
frontal crashes below the deploy- to accidental firing of the airbags unnecessarily close to the airbag
ment threshold speed. or by rendering the SRS inopera- while the vehicle is in motion.
o The driver should sit back as far tive.
as possible while still maintain- o Do not install a child restraint
ing control of the vehicle. If you system in the front passenger
are sitting too close to the airbag, seat position. A child restraint
it can cause death or serious system must never be placed in
injury when it inflates. the front seat. The infant or child
could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case
of an accident. Do not allow chil-
50
B240B01HP-GAT The SRS service reminder indicator

SRS Components and Functions (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink
for about 6 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started, after which
the SRI should go out.
B240B03L
B240B01L Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will sepa-
The SRS consists of the following com-
rate under pressure from the expan-
ponents:
sion of the airbags. Further opening of
the covers then allows full inflation of
- Driver's Airbag Module B240B02L
the airbags.
- Passenger's Airbag Module
- Knee Bolster The airbag modules are located both
in the center of the steering wheel and A fully inflated airbag in combination
- SRS Service Reminder Indicator
in the front passenger's panel above with a properly worn seat belt slows
(SRI)
the glove box. When the SRSCM de- the driver's or the passenger's forward
- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
tects a considerable impact to the front motion, thus reducing the risk of head
of the vehicle, it will automatically de- or chest injury.
The SRSCM continually monitors all
elements while the ignition is "ON" to ploy the airbags.
After complete inflation, the airbag
determine if a frontal or near-frontal
immediately starts deflating, enabling
impact is severe enough to require
the driver to maintain forward visibility.
airbag deployment.
1
51
Passenger's Airbag Passenger's Airbag o The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS SRI does not
flash, or continuously remains
on after flashing for about 6 sec-
onds when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started, comes
on while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this occurs,
B240B01HP
B240B05L have your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Hyundai
dealer.
! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
o Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
When installing a container of liq- o When the SRS is activated, there the ignition key to the "LOCK"
uid air freshener inside the vehicle, may be a loud noise and fine dust position or remove the ignition
do not place it near the instrument will be released through the ve- key. Never remove or replace the
cluster nor on the instrument panel hicle. These conditions are nor- air bag related fuse(s) when the
surface. If there is any leakage from mal and are not hazardous. How- ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
the air freshener onto these areas ever, the fine dust generated dur- tion. Failure to heed this warning
(Instrument cluster, instrument ing airbag deployment may cause will cause the SRS SRI to illumi-
panel or air ventilator), it may dam- skin irritation. Wash your hands nate.
age these parts. If the liquid from and face thoroughly with luke-
the air freshener does leak onto warm water and a mild soap after
these areas, wash them with water an accident in which the airbags
immediately. were deployed.
52
B240C01HP-GAT
SRS Care o For cleaning the airbag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free one which has been moistened
and so there are no parts you can with plain water. Solvents or
safely service by yourself. The entire cleaners could adversely affect
SRS system must be inspected by an the airbag covers and proper
authorized Hyundai dealer in 10 years deployment of the system.
after the date that the vehicle was o No objects should be placed over
manufactured. or near the airbag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
Any work on the SRS system, such as B240C01HP panel, and the front passenger's
removing, installing, repairing, or any panel above the glove box, be-
work on the steering wheel must be cause any such object could
performed by a qualified Hyundai tech-
nician. Improper handling of the SRS
! WARNING:
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
system may result in serious personal o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a the airbags to inflate.
injury. rearward facing child restraint o If the airbags inflate, they must
on a seat protected by an airbag be replaced by an authorized
in front of it. Hyundai dealer.
o Modification to SRS components o Do not tamper with or discon-
or wiring, including the addition nect SRS wiring, or other com-
of any kind of badges to the pad ponents of the SRS system. Do-
covers or modifications to the ing so could result in injury, due
body structure, can adversely to accidental firing of the airbags
affect SRS performance and lead or by rendering the SRS inopera-
to possible injury. tive.
1
53
o Do not install a child restraint o Do not replace the bumper or the

system in the front passenger bumper guard with the one other
seat position. than the Hyundai genuine parts.
o A child restraint system must Otherwise, it can adversely af-
never be placed in the front seat. fect SRS performance and lead
The infant or child could be se- to unexpected injury.
verely injured by an airbag de-
ployment in case of an accident.
o If components of the airbag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, cer-
tain safety precautions must be
observed. Your Hyundai dealer
knows these precautions and can
give you the necessary informa-
tion. Failure to follow these pre-
cautions and procedures could
increase the risk of personal in-
jury.
o If you sell your vehicle, make
certain that this manual is trans-
ferred to the new owner.
o If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
engine; have the car towed to
authorized Hyundai dealer.
54 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A03HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260A01HP
1
55
1. Tachometer 14.Front Fog Indicator Light

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 15.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light (If Installed)
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 16.Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
4. Fuel Gauge 17.4WD LOW Indicator Light
5. Speedometer 18.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD)
6. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) /4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
7. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System 19.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If Installed)
Service Reminder lndicator (SRI) (If Installed) 20.Trip Odometer
8. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 21.Odometer
9. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light 22.Trip Odometer Reset Knob
10.Charging System Warning Light 23.Tail Gate Open Warning Light
11.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed) 24.Door Ajar Warning Light
12.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed) 25.Seat Belt Warning Light
13.High Beam Indicator Light 26.Low Fuel Warning Light
56
B260B03HP-GAT
Diesel Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260B01HP
1
57
1. Tachometer 16.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed)

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 17.High Beam Indicator Light
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 18.Front Fog Indicator Light
4. Fuel Gauge 19.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light
5. Speedometer (If Installed)
6. Immobilizer Warning Light (2.9 CRDi only)(If Installed) 20.Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)
7. Diesel Preheat Indicator Light 21.4WD LOW Indicator Light
8. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) 22.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD) /
9. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System Service 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed) 23.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (If Installed)
10.Fuel Filter Warning Light 24.Trip Odometer
11.Brake Vacuum Warning Light 25.Odometer
12.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 26.Trip Odometer Reset Knob
13.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level 27.Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Warning Light 28.Door Ajar Warning Light
14.Charging System Warning Light 29.Seat Belt Warning Light
15.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (If Installed) 30.Low Fuel Warning Light
58 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260D01A-AAT B260P02Y-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator ABS Service Reminder
Lights Indicator (SRI) ! WARNING:
The blinking green arrows on the in- (If Installed) If the both ABS SRI and Parking
strument panel show the direction indi- Brake/ Low Brake fluid level warn-
When the key is turned to the "ON" ing lights remain "ON" or come on
cated by the turn signals. If the arrow position, the Anti-Lock Brake System
comes on but does not blink, blinks while driving, there may be a prob-
SRI will come on and then go off in a lem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake
more rapidly than normal, or does not few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains
blink at all, a malfunction in the turn Force Distribution).
on, comes on while driving, or does not If this occurs, avoid sudden stops
signal system is indicated. Your dealer come on when the key is turned to the
should be consulted for repairs. and have your vehicle checked by
"ON" position, this indicates that there your Hyundai dealer as soon as
may be a problem with the ABS. possible.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by your Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but
B260F01A-AAT
without the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system. High Beam Indicator
Light
The high beam indicator light comes
on whenever the headlights are
switched to the high beam or flash
position.
1
59
B260G01A-AAT
should be checked by an autho- Warning Light Operation
Low Oil Pressure
rized Hyundai dealer before the car The parking brake/low brake fluid level
Warning Light is driven again. warning light should come on when the
parking brake is applied and the igni-
! CAUTION: tion switch is turned to "ON" or
If the oil pressure warning light "START". After the engine is started,
stays on while the engine is run- B260H02A-GAT the light should go out when the park-
ning, serious engine damage may Parking Brake / Low ing brake is released.
result. The oil pressure warning Brake Fluid Level Warn- If the parking brake is not applied, the
light comes on whenever there is ing Light warning light should come on when the
insufficient oil pressure. In normal ignition switch is turned to "ON" or
operation, it should come on when "START", then go out when the engine
the ignition switch is turned on, ! WARNING:
starts. If the light comes on at any
then go out when the engine is other time, you should slow the vehicle
If you suspect brake trouble, have and bring it to a complete stop in a safe
started. If the oil pressure warning your brakes checked by a Hyundai
light stays on while the engine is location off the roadway.
dealer as soon as possible. Driving The brake fluid level warning light indi-
running, there may be a serious your car with a problem in either the
malfunction. cates that the brake fluid level in the
brake electrical system or brake brake master cylinder is low and hy-
If this happens, stop the car as hydraulic system is dangerous, and
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off draulic brake fluid conforming to DOT
could result in a serious injury or 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be
the engine and check the oil level. If death.
the oil level is low, fill engine oil to added. After adding fluid, if no other
the proper level and start the en- trouble is found, the car should be
gine again. If the light stays on with immediately and carefully driven to a
the engine running, turn the engine Hyundai dealer for inspection. If fur-
off immediately. In any instance ther trouble is experienced, the vehicle
where the oil light stays on when should not be driven at all but taken to
the engine is running, the engine a dealer by a professional towing ser-
vice or some other safe method.
60
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual- B260J01S-GAT B260A01B-GAT
diagonal braking systems. This means Charging System Front Fog Indicator Light
you still have braking on two wheels Warning Light
even if one of the dual systems should The charging system warning light This front fog indicator light comes on
fail. With only one of the dual systems should come on when the ignition is whenever the front fog lamp switches
working, more than normal pedal travel turned on, then go out when the engine are on.
and greater pedal pressure are re- is running. If the light stays on while the
quired to stop the car. Also, the car will engine is running, there is a malfunc-
not stop in as short a distance with only tion in the electrical charging system. If B260L01A-GAT
half of the brake system working. If the the light comes on while you are driv- Door Ajar Warning Light
brakes fail while you are driving, shift ing, stop, turn off the engine and check
to a lower gear for additional engine under the hood. First, make certain the
braking and stop the car as soon as it The door ajar warning light warns you
generator drive belt is in place. If it is, that a door is not completely closed.
is safe to do so. check the tension of the belt.
And then, have the system checked by
your Hyundai dealer. B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
! CAUTION: The low fuel level warning light comes
If the drive belt (generator belt) is on when the fuel tank is approaching
loosen, broken, or mission while empty. When it comes on, you should
the vehicle is driving, there may be add fuel as soon as possible. Driving
a serious malfunction, engine could with the fuel level warning light on or
overheat because this belt also with the fuel level below "E" can cause
drives the water pump. the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
1
61
B260B01B-GAT B260N02A-AAT B260Q01HP-DAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Malfunction Indicator Cruise Indicator Light
Light Light (If Installed) (For Gasoline Engine)
This light remains on unless the tail This light illuminates when there is a (If Installed)
gate is completely closed and latched. malfunction of an exhaust gas related The cruise indicator light in the instru-
component, and the system is not ment cluster is illuminated only when
functioning properly so that the ex- the vehicle cruising speed has been
B260B01HP-GAT
haust gas regulation values are not set using the control switch on the
SRS (Airbag) Service satisfied. This light will also illuminate steering wheel.
Reminder Indicator (SRI) when the ignition key is turned to the The indicator light does not illuminate
(If Installed) "ON" position, and then it will go out in when the main cruise control switch is
The SRS service reminder indicator a few seconds after the engine is activated. Information about the use of
(SRI) comes on and flashes for about started. If it illuminates while driving, or cruise control may be found on page 1-
6 seconds after the ignition key is does not illuminate when the ignition 100.
turned to the "ON" position or after the key is turned to the "ON" position, take
engine is started, after which it will go your car to your nearest authorized
out. Hyundai dealer and have the system B265Q01HP-GAT
checked. Cruise Indicator Light

This light also comes on when the SRS
(For Diesel Engine)
is not working properly. If the SRI does (If Installed)
B260E01HP-GAT
not flash, or continuously remains on Seat Belt Warning Light The cruise indicator light in the instru-
after flashing for about 6 seconds when ment cluster is illuminated when the
you turned the ignition key to the "ON" cruise control main switch is activated.
position or started the engine, or if it The seat belt warning light blinks for Information about the use of cruise
comes on while driving, have the SRS about 6 seconds when the ignition key control may be found on page 1-100.
inspected by an authorized Hyundai is turned from the "OFF" position to
Dealer. "ON" or "START".
62
B260C01A-AAT B260R01HP-GAT
O/D OFF Indicator 4WD LOW Indicator Light
(Automatic Transmission ! CAUTION:
only) If the warning light doesn't go off or When the key is turned to the "ON"
blinks, this indicates that there is a position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive)
When the overdrive switch is turned
malfunction in the automatic trans- LOW indicator light will come on and
on, the overdrive off indicator will go
mission or T.C.U (Transmission then go off in a few seconds.
out. This amber indicator will be illumi-
Control Unit). If this occurs, have The 4WD low indicator light comes on
nated when the overdrive switch is
your vehicle checked by an autho- when the transfer shift knob is set to
turned off.
rized Hyundai dealer. LOW position (Part-time 4WD type :
4L position, Full-time 4WD type : Low
B260U01HP-DAT B260U01TB-GAT position).
A/T(Automatic Transmis- Immobilizer Warning
sion) Oil Temperature Light (Diesel Engine (2.9
Warning Light CRDi)) (If Installed) B260T02HP-GAT
(If Installed) 4WD HIGH Indicator Light

This indicator light comes on for some (Part-time 4WD only)
The A/T oil temperature warning light seconds after the ignition key is turned
comes on when the automatic trans- to the "ON" position. At this time, you When the key is turned to the "ON"
mission oil temperature goes up to the can start the engine. The light goes out position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive)
temperature that may result in serious after the engine is running. In case this HIGH indicator light will come on and
damage of automatic transmission. light goes out before you start the then go off in a few seconds.
If the A/T oil temperature warning light engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" The 4WD HIGH indicator light will illu-
comes on while driving, park your ve- position and restart the engine. In case minate when the transfer shift knob is
hicle in at a safe place as soon as this light blinks for five seconds when set to 4H position.
possible. With the selector lever shifted the ignition key is turned to "ON" posi-
into "P" position, allow the engine to tion, this indicates that the immobilizer
idle until the warning light goes off. system is out of order. At this time,
When the warning light goes off, the refer to the explanation of the Limp
vehicle can be driven normally. home procedure(See page 1-9) or con-
sult to the Hyundai dealer.
1
63
! CAUTION: ! CAUTION: ! CAUTION(2.9 CRDi only):

If the 4WD HIGH indicator light ( ) If the 4WD system warning light When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminates with the 4WD LOW indi- ( ) blinks while driving, this illuminated, the engine power de-
cator light ( ) while driving, this indicates that there is a malfunc- creases. If the fuel filter warning
indicates that there is a malfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc- light comes on while driving, park
tion in the 4WD system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your vehicle in at a safe place and
curs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer as remove the water as soon as pos-
an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. sible. If the light remains on after
soon as possible. removing the water, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
B265A01HP-GAT
Hyundai dealer.
Fuel Filter Warning Light
B265T01HP-GAT
4WD System Warning (Diesel Engine)
Light (Full-time 4WD This light illuminates when the ignition
only) switch is set to the "ON" position and
goes off after the engine has started. If
When the key is turned to the "ON" it lights up while the engine is running,
position, the 4WD (Four wheel drive) it indicates that water has accumu-
system warning light will come on and lated inside the fuel filter. If this hap-
then go off in a few seconds. pens, remove the water from the fuel
filter.
(Refer to "Do-lt-Yourself Maintenance")
64
B265B01HP-GAT should slow the vehicle and bring it to Water temperature Illuminating time
Brake Vacuum Warning a complete stop in a safe location off (°C) (2.5 TCI) (sec)
Light (Diesel Engine) the roadway. Below -30 22.5
After starting the engine, do not drive
-20 8
the vehicle until the vacuum level is
! WARNING: above 275 mmHg below atmosphere -15 6
and warning light has turned off. If 60 0.5
If you suspect brake trouble, have 80
further trouble is experienced, the ve- 0
your brakes checked by a Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible. Driving hicle should not be driven at all but
your car with a problem in either the taken to a dealer by a professional
Water temperature Illuminating time
brake electrical system or brake towing service.
(°C) (2.9 CRDi) (sec)
hydraulic system is dangerous, and Below -30 26
could result in serious injury or -25
B265C02HP-GAT 20
death.
Diesel Preheat Indicator -20 15
Light -15 10
The brake vacuum warning light should -10 5.5
come on when the vacuum level in The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ignition switch is placed at -5 3.5
brake booster descends to about 275 0 2
mmHg or below. The brake system is the "ON" position. The engine can be
started after the preheat indicator light 20 1
designed to stop the vehicle with re-
serve assist if brake pedal is held goes off. The illuminating time varies NOTE:
down. This reserve is greatly reduced with the water temperature. If the engine were not started within
each time you release the brake. With- 2 seconds after the preheating is
out vacuum assist your vehicle can still completed, turn the ignition key
be stopped by pushing much harder once more to the "LOCK" position
on brake pedal, however the stopping during 10 seconds, and then to the
distance may be much longer. If the "ON" position, in order to preheat
light comes on at any other time, you again.
1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 65
B270A01A-GAT B280A01A-AAT B290A02A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING FUEL GAUGE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
SOUND (If Installed) TURE GAUGE
The front disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-
pitched squealing or scraping noise
when new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the
time when the vehicle is moving. It
may also be heard when the brake
pedal is pushed down firmly. Exces-
sive rotor damage will result if the worn
pads are not replaced. See your HHP2080
Hyundai dealer immediately. The needle on the gauge indicates the HHP2081
approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.

The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.
! WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The engine cool-
ant is under pressure and could
erupt and cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before re-
moving the radiator cap.
66
The needle on the engine coolant tem- B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETER
perature gauge should stay in the nor-
mal range. If it moves across the dial to Gasoline Engine
! CAUTION:
"H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon as The engine should not be raced to
possible and turn off the engine. Then such a speed that the needle enters
open the hood and, after the engine the red zone on the tachometer face.
has cooled, check the coolant level This can cause severe engine dam-
and the water pump drive belt. If you age and may void your warranty.
suspect cooling system trouble, have
your cooling system checked by
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
B330A01HP
Diesel Engine
HHP2078
The tachometer registers the speed of

your engine in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
1
67
B300A01Y-GAT B310A02HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
Gasoline Engine Odometer
Trip Odometer
B300A03HP
B300A01HP
Your Hyundai's speedometer is cali-
brated in kilometers per hour or miles Odometer
B310A01HP
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) per hour.
The digital odometer records the total
driving distance in kilometers or miles,
and is useful for keeping a record for
maintenance intervals.
It is normal for a new vehicle to have
the odometer indicating less than 50km.
NOTE:
Any alteration of the odometer may
B300A02HP
void your warranty coverage.
68
Trip Odometer
B310A03HP
Reset Knob B310A02HP

Trip odometer records the distance of
Pushing in the reset knob under the 2 trips in kilometers or miles.
right side of the speedometer for less
than 1 second when the ignition switch TRIP A: First distance you have trav-
is turned "ON" displays the following eled from your origination point to a
sequence: first destination.
TRIP B: Second distance from the first

destination to the final destination.
When the reset knob is pressed for

more than 1 second, trip odometer will
reset to 0.
1
MULTIMETER 69
B990A01HP-GAT B990B02HP-GAT
(If Installed) HOW TO ADJUST MULTIMETER
Switch function
Switch Function
Altimeter Relative Altimeter
Barometer
Mode (Press it for less than 2 sec.)
Selecting of time adjustment
mode
(Press it for more than 2 sec.)
Altimeter correction
(Up),
Setting altitude to "0"
(Down)
Time adjustment
Light Illumination on/off
Selecting correction mode
Adjust
of azimuth indicator
HHP2189
6. Down switch
1. Digital Clock 7. Road display responsive to vehicle
2. Azimuth Compass speed
3. Altimeter/Relative altimeter/Barom- 8. Mode conversion switch
eter 9. Light switch
4. Azimuth adjustment switch
5. Up switch
70
B990C01HP-GAT
How to correct azimuth indica- vicinity of a transformer station,
ELECTRICAL AZIMUTH COM- tor etc.). The azimuth is displayed nor-
PASS mally after escaping those places.
1. If you push and hold the "ADJ"
Azimuth Compass switch for less than 3 seconds, the
azimuth indicator will start to blink.
B990D01HP-GAT
ALTIMETER
HHP2190
It displays 16 azimuths according to

the vehicle driving direction and the
angle of one graduation is 22.5°. HHP2191
2. Slowly rotate the vehicle one turn HHP2194

NOTE: within 128 seconds.
If new vehicle is first driven or if the 3. After the rotation is finished, the Altimeter is operated by atmospheric
battery has been disconnected, azimuth compass indicator will stop pressure. The air pressure variation is
correct the azimuth indicator be- blinking and now correcting error is converted to the altitude on the basis
fore driving. made. of the sea level(0m, it is equal to
1013.25hpa) by the 50m.
Correcting azimuth indicator NOTE: The measurement range is 0~2,800m.
It is normal if the azimuth is dis- And when the altitude is under 50m, it
This is need to correct the error be- is displayed to 0m.
tween a current azimuth of terrestrial played abnormally in specific
magnetism sensor and the displayed places(tunnel, parking lot in build-
azimuth in the vehicle position. ing, basement garage, area in the
1
71
Altitude Correction B990E01HP-GAT When you want to know the differ-

RELATIVE ALTIMETER ence of altitude between the desti-
Displayed altitude could vary even at nation and the starting point:
same place because of air pressure
variation at sea level(0m point). So you
can correct this display error in ±300m Destination
range by pushing " (up)", " (down)"
as listed in following table.
Switch Pushing time Altitude

Less than 0.5 sec. Increasing by 50m The difference of altitude
between the destination
(Up) Increasing by 50m and the starting point : 1000 m
More than 0.5 sec.
gradually HHP2195
Less than 0.5 sec. Decreasing by 50m Starting point
Relative altimeter is used when you HHP2196
(Down) Decreasing by 50m want to know the altitude of the spe-
More than 0.5 sec.
gradually cific location. And it displays by com- 1. Press the " (Up)" and " (Down)"
paring the altitude of the specific loca- switch simultaneously for more than
tion with the current altitude which the 1 second to reset the current alti-
vehicle is located in. tude to 0m.
When the "MODE" switch is pressed 2. After arriving, the displayed altitude
for less than 2 seconds, the relative is the difference of altitude between
altimeter mode is selected. the destination and the starting point.
72
B990F01HP-GAT B990G01HP-GAT B990H01HP-GAT

BAROMETER DIGITAL CLOCK ROAD DISPLAY RESPONSIVE
TO VEHICLE SPEED
HHP2193 HHP2198
HHP2199
The current air pressure is displayed in If you press "MODE" switch for more
hpa units where the measurement than 2 seconds, the mode that you can The road display indicator blinks ac-
range is from 720hpa to 1,045hpa.(The adjust the time is displayed. cording to the vehicle speed.
minimum is 1hpa)
If the "MODE" switch is pressed for How to adjust the time
Vehicle speed Blinking cycle
less than 2 seconds. from "Relative 1. In time adjustment mode, push the Total Lightening
Below 2.8 km/h
Altimeter" mode, the atmospheric pres- "MODE" switch briefly, and you can
sure will be displayed on the display 2.8 ~ 40 km/h 1 second
adjust "minute". And if you push
window. "MODE" switch once more briefly, 41 ~ 60 km/h 0.8 second
you can adjust "hour". 61 ~ 80 km/h 0.5 second
2. Adjust the time by pushing " (UP)", 81 ~ 100 km/h 0.3 second
" (DOWN)" switch when the time Above 100 km/h 0.2 second
blinks.
3. After adjusting the time, push
"MODE" switch for more 2 seconds,
and the mode for adjusting the time
is cancelled.
1
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT 73
SWITCH
B340A01A-AAT B340B01A-AAT B340C03L-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, Lane Change Signal Headlight Switch
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the
turn signals on the left side of the car to
blink. Pushing upwards on the lever
causes the turn signals on the right
side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically
return to the center position and turn
HHP2099
off the turn signals at the same time. If HHP2094
either turn signal indicator light blinks To indicate a lane change, move the To operate the headlights, turn the
more rapidly than usual, goes on but lever up or down to a point where it barrel on the end of the multi-function
does not blink, or does not go on at all, begins flashing. switch. The first position turns on the
there is a malfunction in the system. The lever will automatically return to parking lights, side lights, tail lights and
Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or the center position when released. instrument panel lights. The second
see your Hyundai dealer. position turns on the headlights.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON"
position to turn on the headlights.
74
Parking Light Auto Cut B340F01A-GAT B340D01A-AAT

Daytime Running Lights High-beam Switch
If you do not turn the parking lights (If Installed)
"OFF" after driving, the parking lights
will automatically shut "OFF" when the Your Hyundai is equipped with day-
driver's door is opened. time running lights. The daytime run-
To turn them "ON" again, you must ning lights are used to improve visibil-
simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" ity for oncoming traffic. Your vehicle
position. daytime running lights are designed to
remain on continuously when the en-
gine is operating even though the head-
light switch is in the "OFF" position.
However, the daytime running lights
will be off while the parking brake is HHP2097
applied. To turn on the headlight high beams,
push the lever forward (away from
you). The High Beam Indicator Light
will come on at the same time. For low
beams, pull the lever back toward you.
1
FOG LIGHT SWITCH 75
B340E01A-AAT B360B01Y-AAT B360A01HP-GAT

Headlight Flasher Front Fog Light Switch Rear Fog Light Switch
(If Installed)
HHP2098 HHP2100
To flash the headlights, pull the switch To turn on the front fog lights, place the B360A01HP
lever toward you, then release it. The switch in the "ON" position. They will To turn on the rear fog lights, push the
headlights can be flashed even though light when the headlight switch is in the switch. They will light when the head-
the headlight switch is in the "OFF" first or second position. light switch is in the second position or
position. the front fog light is turned on and the
key is in the "ON" position.
76 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
B350A01A-AAT B350B01O-GAT o In areas where water freezes in
Windshield Washer Operation winter, use windshield washer
antifreeze.
1 Mist Wiper Operation
HHP2101
The windshield wiper switch has three HHP2103
positions: To use the windshield washer, pull the

wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
1. Intermittent wiper operation ing wheel. When the washer lever is HHP2104
2. Low-speed operation operated, the wipers automatically
3. High-speed operation make two passes across the wind- If a single wipe is desired in mist, push
shield. The washer continues to oper- the windshield wiper and washer con-
NOTE: ate until the lever is released. trol lever upwards.
To prevent damage to the wiper
system, do not attempt to wipe away NOTE:
heavy accumulations of snow or o Do not operate the washer more
ice. Accumulated snow and ice than 15 seconds at a time or when
should be removed manually. If the fluid reservoir is empty.
there is only a light layer of snow or o In icy or freezing weather, be
ice, operate the heater in the de- sure the wiper blades are not
frost mode to melt the snow or ice frozen to the glass prior to oper-
before using the wiper. ating the wipers.
1
77
B350C01O-AAT B390A01E-AAT
NOTE:
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Rear Window Wiper and Washer Do not operate the washer continu-
Operation Switch ously for more than 15 seconds or
when the fluid reservoir is empty;
this could damage the system. Do
not operate the wiper when the win-
dow is dry; this can result in scratch-
ing as well as premature wiper blade
wear.
For the same reason, do not oper-
ate the washer when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
HHP2102 HHP2108
To use the intermittent wiper feature, 1. : The rear window wiper starts
place the wiper switch in the "INT" to operate three times after the
position. With the switch in this posi- washer fluid sprays onto the
tion, the interval between wipes can be rear window.
varied from approximately 1 to 18 sec- 2.OFF
onds by turning the interval adjuster 3.INT: The interval between wipes op-
barrel. This is also varied automati- erates every 5 seconds inter-
cally depending on your road speed. mittently.
4.ON : The rear window wiper starts
to operate continuously.
5. :The washer fluid will be sprayed
onto the rear window and the
wiper operates while the rear
window wiper barrel is placed
in this position.
78 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM FRONT/REAR WINDOW DE-
FROSTER SWITCH
B370A01A-AAT B380A02HP-AAT
(If Installed)
Type A
! CAUTION:
Do not clean the inner side of the
front/rear window glass with an
abrasive type of glass cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits from the inner surface of
Type B the glass as this may cause dam-
age to the defroster elements.
B370A01HP
HHP2119
NOTE:
The hazard warning system should be The ignition must be in the "ON"
used whenever you find it necessary The front/rear window defroster and position for the front/rear window
to stop the car in a hazardous location. heated outside rear view mirrors are defroster to operate.
When you must make such an emer- turned on by pushing in the switch. At
gency stop, always pull off the road as the same time, the front/rear window
far as possible. defroster indicator light on the switch is
The hazard warning lights are turned turned on. To turn the defroster off,
on by pushing in the hazard switch. push the switch a second time. The
This causes all turn signal lights to front/rear window defroster automati-
blink. The hazard warning lights will cally turns itself off after about 20
operate even though the key is not in minutes. To restart the defroster cycle,
the ignition. push in the switch again after it has
To turn the hazard warning lights off, turned itself off.
push the switch a second time.
1
DIGITAL CLOCK INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT 79
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B400A01HP-GAT 4. MODE - Push "MODE" button to B410A01A-AAT
(Without Multimeter) display a 12- or 24-hour clock. (If Installed)
When the 12-hour clock is in use,
the letters AM or PM appear with the
time.
5. - The time is displayed on the
LCD by pushing in on the switch
and is turned off by pushing in on the
switch again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the

multimeter, see the page 1-72.
B400A01HP
B410A01HP
There are five control buttons for the The instrument panel lights can be
digital clock. Their functions are: made brighter or dimmer by turning the
instrument panel light control knob.
1. HOUR - Push "H" to advance the
hour indicated.
2. MIN - Push "M" to advance the
minute indicated.
3. RESET - Push "S" to reset minutes
to ":00" to facilitate resetting the
clock to the correct time. When this
is done:
Pressing "S" between 11 : 01 and 11
: 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.
80 CIGARETTE LIGHTER POWER OUTLET
B420A02A-AAT B500D08HP-AAT
(If Installed)
! CAUTION:
Do not use electric accessories or
equipment other than the Hyundai
genuine parts in the socket.
HHP2160
For the cigarette lighter to work, the HHP2161
key must be in the "ACC" position or

the "ON" position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all
the way into its socket. When the
element has heated, the lighter will
pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating ele-
ment and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the ciga-
rette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equiva- HHP2162
lent. The power outlet is located in front of

the center console and in the quarter
trim. It is also located behind the cen-
ter console.
1
ASHTRAY 81
These supply 12V electric power to B430A01HP-GAT B440A01E-AAT
operate electric accessories or equip- Front Ashtray Rear Ashtray

ment only when the key is in the "ON"
or "ACC" position.
! CAUTION:
o Use when the engine is running
and remove a plug from the power
outlet after using the electric ap-
pliance. Using when the engine
stops or remaining the electric
appliance with plugged in for HHP2167 HHP2168
many hours may cause the bat- The front ashtray may be opened by The rear ashtray may be opened by
tery to be discharged. pushing and releasing the ashtray/ciga- pulling it out by its top edge. To remove
o Do not use the power outlet to rette lighter door at its top edge. the ashtray to empty or clean it, press
connect electric accessories or To remove the ashtray in order to down on the spring-loaded tab inside
equipment other than those de- clean it, the metal ash receptacle should the ashtray and lift the ashtray upward
signed to operate on 12 volts. be removed from the ashtray door. Do and pull it all the way out.
o Some electronic devices can not attempt to remove the entire ash-
cause electronic interference tray door assembly, or damage will
when plugged into the power result. Instead, lift the metal ash re-
outlet. These devices may cause ceptacle upward and pull it out. To
excessive audio noise and mal- reinstall it, place it in the proper posi-
functions in other electronic sys- tion and press it down and forward to
tems or devices used in your reengage the ash receptacle rear lip in
vehicle. the ashtray door. The ashtray light will
only illuminate when the exterior body
lights are switched on.
82 DRINK HOLDER
B450A02O-GAT B450C01HP-GAT
Front Drink Holder Rear Drink Holder (Type A)
! WARNING:
o Use caution when using the drink
holders. A spilled beverage that
is very hot can injure you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage interior trim and electri-
cal components.
o Do not place objects other than
cups or cans in the drink holder.
Such objects can be thrown out
HHP2177 HHP2178
in the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring the
The front drink holder is located on the The rear drink holder is located behind passengers in the vehicle.
main console for holding cups or cans. the center console for holding cups or
cans. The rear drink holder can be
! WARNING:
used by pressing the locking release
button.
holders. A spilled beverage that
is very hot can injure you or your ! CAUTION:
passengers. Spilled liquids can When not in use or before folding
damage interior trim and electri- the second seat, place the rear drink
cal components. holder in closed position to pre-
o Do not place objects other than vent it from being broken.
Such objects can be thrown out
in the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
1
COIN HOLDER SUNSHADE 83
B450B01HP-GAT B505D01HR-GAT B470A01HP-AAT

Rear Drink Holder (Type B) (If Installed)
(If Installed)
HHP2173
HHP2023
The coin holder is used to store coins.
B450B01HP The sunshade can be opened and
The rear drink holder is located in the closed by sliding it forward or rearward
rear seat arm rest for holding cups or when the sunroof is closed. The sun-
cans. The rear drink holder can be shade will open automatically when
used by opening the lid of arm rest. the sunroof is opened, but it must be
closed manually.
! WARNING:
Do not place objects other than ! WARNING:
cups or cans in the drink holder. Never adjust the sunshade while
Such objects can be thrown out in driving.
the event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the pas-
sengers in the vehicle.
84 SUNROOF
B460A01S-AAT To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" B460C01S-AAT
(If Installed) button. Release the button when the Tilting the Sunroof
The sunroof can be operated with the sunroof reaches the desired position.
ignition key in the "ON" position.
! WARNING:
B460B01HP-GAT o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's
Opening or Closing the Sunroof hands, arms or body are between
the sliding glass and the sunroof
sash, as this could result in an
injury.
o Do not place your head or arms B460C01HP
out of the sunroof opening at any The sunroof can be tilted by pushing
time. the "UP" button with the sunroof closed.
Release the button when the sunroof
reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press the "DOWN" but-
! CAUTION: ton.
B460B01HP o Do not open the sunroof in se-
verely cold temperature or when NOTE:
The sunroof can be electrically opened After washing the car or after there
or closed. The sunroof is moved to its it is covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that is rain, be sure to wipe off any water
fully open position by pushing the that is on the sunroof before oper-
"Open" button, and to stop at the de- may have accumulated on the
guide rails. ating it.
sired position, push in any buttons
(OPEN, CLOSE, UP, DOWN).
1
INTERIOR LIGHT 85
B460D01HP-GAT B480B01Y-AAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof Map Light
HHP2022
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench

HHP2021 B480B01HP
provided with the vehicle into the
If the sunroof does not electrically op- socket. This wrench can be found in Push in the map light switch to turn the
erate: the glove box. light on or off. This light produces a
3. Turn the wrench clockwise to open spot beam for convenient use as a
1. Remove the round plug in the front or counterclockwise to close. map light at night or as a personal light
of the roof panel with a flat-bladed for the driver and the passenger.
screwdriver or coin.
! CAUTION:
Remove the round plug with the
groove pointing to the front and the
rear. Otherwise, the projections of
the plug may break if it is not posi-
tioned properly.
86 STORAGE BOX
B490A03Y-AAT
o ON B500A01A-AAT
Interior Light GLOVE BOX
In the "ON" position, the light stays on
at all times.
! CAUTION:
Do not leave this button pressed for
an extended period of time when
the vehicle is not running.
HHP2115
o OFF HHP2169
The interior courtesy light has three In the "OFF" position, the light stays off
buttons. The three buttons are: at all times even though a door is open. ! WARNING:
o DOOR To avoid the possibility of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
In the "DOOR" position, the interior stop, the glove box door should be
courtesy light comes on when any kept closed when the car is in mo-
door is opened regardless of the ignition.
tion key position. The light goes out
gradually 6 seconds after the door is
closed. o To open the glove box, pull on the
glove box release lever.
1
CENTER CONSOLE COM- 87
PARTMENT
B500B01HP-DAT B505A01HP-GAT
MULTI BOX Center Console Box
! WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, the center console box lid
should be kept closed when the car
is in motion.
(1)
HHP2174 HHP2170
The multi box may be opened by pull-

ing it out by its grip. It is used for storing
small articles.
(2)
HHP2171
The center console box is used for

storing cassette tape or small articles.
To use the center console box, press
the button (1) or (2) and pull up the lid.
88 OUTSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
B505B01HP-GAT B510A01A-AAT
Center Console Armrest Manual Type
! CAUTION:
If the mirror control is jammed with
ice, do not attempt to break it free
using the control handle or by ma-
nipulating the face of the mirror.
Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the ve-
hicle to a warm place and allow the
ice to melt.
HHP2172 B510A01HP
To use the center console armrest, The outside rearview mirrors are
press the locking release button. equipped with a remote control for
your convenience. It is operated by the
NOTE: control lever in the bottom front corner
When not in use, fix the console of the window.
armrest by pushing down it with Before driving away, always check
the locking release button pressed. that your mirrors are positioned so you
can see behind you, both to the left and
right sides, as well as directly behind
your vehicle. When using the mirror,
always exercise caution when attempt-
ing to judge the distance of vehicles
behind or along side of you.
1
89
B510B01Y-AAT
To adjust the position of either
Electric Type (If Installed) mirror: ! CAUTION:
o Do not operate the switch con-
1. Move the selecting switch to the
tinuously for an unnecessary
right or left to activate the adjustable
length of time.
mechanism for the corresponding
o Scraping ice from the mirror face
door mirror.
could cause permanent damage.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing
To remove any ice, use a sponge,
the appropriate perimeter switch as
soft cloth or approved de-icer.
illustrated.
B510B01HP
! WARNING:
The outside rearview mirrors can be
adjusted to your preferred rear vision, Be careful when judging the size or
both directly behind the vehicle, and to distance of any object seen in the
the rear of the left and right sides. passenger side rearview mirror. It
The remote control outside rearview is a convex mirror with a curved
mirror switch controls the adjustments surface. Any objects seen in this
for both right and left outside mirrors. mirror are closer than they appear.
B510B02HP
90 SIDE UNDER VIEW MIRROR
B510D02HP-GAT B510C01A-AAT B515A01HP-GAT
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR- (If Installed)
HEATER (If Installed) VIEW MIRRORS
Type A
Type B
HHP2076
HHP2119 HHP2074 Traffic and road conditions can be
The outside rearview mirror heater is To fold the outside rearview mirrors, viewed on the lower right-hand side of
actuated in connection with the front/ push them towards the rear. the vehicle with the side under view
rear window defroster. To heat the The outside rearview mirrors can be mirror.
outside rearview mirror glass, push in folded rearward for parking in narrow
the switch for the front/rear window areas.
defroster. The rearview mirror glass
will be heated for defrosting or defog-
ging and will give you improved rear ! WARNING:
vision in inclement weather conditions. Do not adjust or fold the outside
Push the switch again to turn the heater rearview mirrors while the vehicle
off. The outside rearview mirror heater is moving. This could result in loss
automatically turns itself off after 20 of control, and an accident causing
minutes. death, serious injury or property
damage.
1
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR- PARKING BRAKE 91
VIEW MIRROR
B520A01A-AAT B520B01O-GAT B530A01A-AAT
(Electric type) (If Installed)
HHP2071 B530A01HP
HHP2072
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/ Always engage the parking brake be-
night inside rearview mirror. The "night" The electric type day/night inside rear- fore leaving the car. This also turns on
position is selected by flipping the tab view mirror controls automatically the the parking brake indicator light when
at the bottom of the mirror toward you. glare of headlights of the car behind the key is in the "ON" or "START"
In the "night" position, the glare of you. Adjust the rearview mirror to the position. Before driving away, be sure
headlights of cars behind you is re- desired position. that the parking brake is fully released
duced. and the indicator light is off.
o To engage the parking brake, pull

the lever up as far as possible.
o To release the parking brake, pull
up the lever and press the thumb
button. Then, while holding the but-
ton in, lower the brake lever.
92 TAIL GATE CD AUTO CHANGER
B540A01FC-GAT o The tail gate can be locked or un- B800A01HP-AAT
locked with a key. (If Installed)

o The tail gate is opened by pulling the
outside handle up, raising the tail
gate manually.
o To close, lower the tail gate, then
press down on it until it is closed. To
be sure the tail gate is fully closed,
always try to pull it up again without
using the outside handle.
B540A01HP
HHP2185
The CD Auto Changer is located in the

! WARNING: right side of the luggage compartment.
The tail gate should always be kept This system can store up to 8 CDs.
completely closed while the vehicle You may select music without chang-
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, ing discs. First, open the CD Auto
poisonous exhaust gases may en- Changer door, remove the CD maga-
ter the car resulting in serious ill- zine, and insert up to 8 CDs. Then,
ness or death to the occupants. See push the magazine into the CD Auto
additional warnings concerning ex- Changer. The CD may be operated
haust gases on page 2-2. with the passenger compartment au-
dio system controls.
NOTE:
The magazine can be taken out when
the ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
tion.
1
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT 93
B540C01HP-GAT B540D02HP-DAT
Luggage Compartment Light Luggage Net
! CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky ob-
jects in the luggage compartment.
! WARNING:
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
HHP2117 HHP2180 stretch. ALWAYS keep face and
Luggage compartment light has a 3- Some objects can be kept in the net at body out of recoil path. DO NOT
position switch. The three positions the luggage compartment. use when strap has visible signs of
are: Use the luggage net on the floor or at wear or damage.
the back of the luggage compartment
o In the "MIDDLE" position, the lug- to prevent objects from sliding.
gage compartment light comes on
when the tail gate is opened, then
goes out when it is closed.
o In the "ON" position, the light stays
on at all times.
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays
off at all times.
94 CARGO SECURITY SCREEN ROOF RACK
B640A01S-AAT B650A01S-AAT B630A01HP-GAT
(If Installed) Stowage Precautions (If Installed)
1. Do not place objects on the cargo (1)
security screen. Such objects may
be thrown about inside the vehicle
and possibly injure vehicle occu-
(2)
pants during an accident or when
braking.
2. For better fuel economy, do not
carry unnecessary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is designed
B640A01HP for luggage only. HHP2181
4. Try to maintain the balance of the
To use the security screen, pull it out of If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you
vehicle and locate the weight as far
the retractor and hook it to the anchors can load things on top of your vehicle.
forward as possible.
as illustrated. The two cross bars (1) on the roof rack
can be repositioned forward and rear-
ward for conveniently loading cargo or
luggage. With an assistant on the op-
posite side of the vehicle, press and
hold the slider lock buttons (2) on each
side, then move the cross bar to the
desired position.
The cross bars automatically lock when
the slider lock buttons are released.
1
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP 95
LIGHT
B550A01A-AAT
o Always drive your vehicle at a (If Installed)
! CAUTION: moderate speed.
o The cross bars should be posi- o Loading cargo or luggage over
specification on the roof rack may
tioned before carrying a load on
the roof rack. damage stability of your vehicle.
o In case the sunroof is equipped,
do not position roof rack loads
that could interfere with opening
of the sunroof.
o The following specifications are
recommended when loading
cargo or luggage.
B550A01HP
34 kg (75 lb) In addition to the lower-mounted rear

ROOF RACK EVENLY DIS- stop lights on either side of the car, the
TRIBUTED high mounted rear stop light in the
o Loading cargo or luggage above center of the rear window also lights
34 kg (75 lb) on the roof rack may when the brakes are applied.
damage your vehicle.
When you carry large objects,
never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle.
o To prevent damage or loss of
cargo as you are driving, check
frequently to make sure the lug-
gage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
96 REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID HOOD RELEASE
RELEASE
B560A01HP-GAT B570A01HP-AAT
HHP2015-D
B560A01HP HHP2016
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from 1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the ! WARNING: hood.
fuel-filler lid release lever located be-
Fuel vapors are dangerous. Before
low the right of the driver's side crash
refueling, always stop the engine
pad.
and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler area. If you
NOTE: need to replace the filler cap, use a
If the fuel-filler lid will not open genuine Hyundai replacement part.
because ice has formed around it, If you open the fuel filler cap during
tap lightly or push on the lid to high ambient temperatures, a slight
break the ice and release the lid. Do "pressure sound" may be heard.
not pry on the lid. If necessary, This is normal and not a cause for
spray around the lid with an ap- concern. HHP2017
proved de-icer fluid (do not use Whenever you open the fuel filler
radiator anti-freeze) or move the cap, turn it slowly. 2. Push the secondary latch lever side-
vehicle to a warm place and allow ways and lift the hood.
the ice to melt. 3. Raise the hood by hand.
1
SUN VISOR 97
B580A01HP-AAT
! WARNING:
o Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an acci-
dent. Vanity mirror
HHP2017-1 o Do not move the vehicle with the
B580A01HP
When closing the hood, slowly close hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood Your Hyundai is equipped with sun
the hood and make sure it locks into
could fall or be damaged. visors to give the driver and front pas-
place.
senger either frontal or sideward shade.
To reduce glare or to shut out direct
rays of the sun, turn the sun visor
down.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back
of the sun visor for the front passen-
ger.
NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) label containing useful
information can be found on the
front of each sun visor(If Installed).
98 FRONT DOOR EDGE HORN
WARNING LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT B610A01L-GAT
(If Installed)
! WARNING:
Do not place the sun visor in such
a manner that it obscures visibility
of the roadway, traffic or other ob-
jects.
HHP2070
B620A01HP Press the pad on the steering wheel to
A red light comes on when the front sound the horn.
door is opened. The purpose of this
light is to assist when you get in or out
and also to warn passing vehicles.
1
REAR SEAT ARMREST STEERING WHEEL TILT HEADLIGHT LEVELING DE- 99
LEVER VICE SYSTEM
B611A01HP-AAT B600A01HP-GAT B340G01HP-GAT
(If Installed) (If Installed) (If Installed)
HHP2048 B600A01HP B340G01HP
The rear seat armrest is located in the To adjust the steering wheel: To adjust the headlight beam level
center of the rear seatback. A storage according to the number of the pas-
box and two drink holders are included 1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it sengers and the loading weight in the
for convenience. to unlock. luggage area, turn the beam leveling
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to switch.
the desired position. The higher the number of the switch
3. After adjustment, release the lever. position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam
at the proper leveling position, or head-
! WARNING: lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
Do not attempt to adjust the steer-
switch settings. For loading conditions
ing wheel while driving as this may
other than those listed below, adjust
result in loss of control of the ve-
the switch position so that the beam
hicle and serious injury or death.
level may be the nearest as the condi-
tion obtained according to the list.
100 CRUISE CONTROL
B660A01S-AAT B660B01HP-AAT
Switch (If Installed) To Set the Cruise Speed
LOADING CONDITION
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front Passenger 0
Full Passengers 1
Full passengers + Maximum
2
Permissible Loading
Driver + Maximum
3
Permissible Loading
B660A01HP B660B01HP
The cruise control system provides 1. Push in the cruise control main
automatic speed control for your com- switch. This turns the system on.
fort when driving on freeways, toll
roads, or other noncongested high- NOTE:
ways. This system is designed to func- The "CRUISE" indicator light in the
tion above approximately 40 km/h(25 instrument cluster will be illumi-
mph). nated when the main cruise control
switch is activated(2.9 CRDi only).
2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed

above 40 km/h(25 mph).
3. Push the control switch "SET"
(COAST) position.
1
101
NOTE: B660C02HP-AAT B660D01L-DAT
The "CRUISE" indicator light in the To Cancel the Cruise Speed To Resume the Preset Speed
instrument cluster will illuminate
after you have set the vehicle speed
at the desired speed (Gasoline En-
gine Only).
4. Remove your foot from the accel-

erator pedal and the desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the preset speed. B660C01HP B660D01HP
When you remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal, the vehicle To disengage the cruise control sys- The vehicle will automatically resume
will return to the speed you have tem, push the control switch "CAN- the speed set prior to cancellation when
set. CEL". Additionally, the following ac- you push the control switch "RESUME
tions will disengage the system: (ACCEL)" and release it to return (when
travelling above 40 km/h).
NOTE:
o Depress the brake pedal.
If the vehicle speed decreases more
o Depress clutch pedal (Manual trans-
than 15 km/h (9 mph) below the set B660E01L-AAT
mission). To Reset at a Faster Speed
speed or decreases below 40 km/h
o Shift the selector lever to "N" posi-
(25 mph), the cruise control system 1. Push the control switch "RESUME
tion (Automatic transmission).
will automatically cancel the set (ACCEL)" and hold it.
o Decrease the vehicle speed lower
speed. 2. Accelerate to desired speed and
than the memorized speed by 15
km/h(9 mph). release the control switch. While
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less the control switch is held, the ve-
than 40 km/h(25 mph). hicle will gradually gain speed.
o Release the main switch.
102
B660F02L-GAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed o During normal cruise control
! WARNING: operation, when the "SET" but-
o Keep the main switch off when ton is activated or reactivated
not using the cruise control. after applying the brakes, the
o Use the cruise control system cruise control will energize after
only when traveling on open high- approximately 3 seconds. This
ways in good weather. delay is normal.
o Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or vary-
B660B01HP
ing traffic, or on slippery (rainy,
icy or snow-covered) or winding
1. Push the control switch "SET roads or over 6% up-hill or down-
(COAST)" and hold it. While the hill roads.
control switch is pushed, the vehicle o Pay particular attention to the
speed will gradually decrease. driving conditions whenever us-
2. When the desired speed is obtained, ing the cruise control system.
release the control button. o During cruise-control driving
with a manual transmission ve-
hicle, do not shift into neutral
without depressing the clutch
pedal or the engine will be
overrevved. If this happens, de-
press the clutch pedal or release
the main switch.
1
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL 103
B710A01TB-GAT B710B01S-AAT
CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in
the middle of the dashboard. The di-
rection of air flow from the vents in the
center of the dashboard is adjustable.
To control the direction of the air flow,
move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side.
B710C02HP-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on
each side of dashboard. To change
the direction of the air flow, move the
knob in the center of the vent up-and-
down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved
to " " position. The vents are closed
when the vent knob is moved to " ".
Keep these vents clear of any obstruc-
tions.
1. Side Defroster Nozzle

B710B01HP
2. Side Ventilator
3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle
4. Center Ventilator
104 HEATING AND VENTILATION
B670A01HP-GAT 4. Air flow control. B670B01A-AAT
This is used to direct the flow of air. Fan Speed Control

Air can be directed to the floor, (Blower Control)
dashboard outlets, or windshield.
Five symbols are used to represent
Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost
and Defrost air positions.
B670A01HP
There are four controls for the heating

and cooling system. They are: HHP2123
This is used to turn the blower fan on

1. Fan speed control. and off and to select the fan speed.
This is used to turn the fan on and The blower fan speed, and therefore
select the fan speed. the volume of air delivered from the
2. Air intake control. system, may be controlled manually
This allows you to select fresh out- by setting the blower control between
side air or recirculation inside air. the "1" and "4" position.
3. Temperature control.
This is used to turn the heating
system on and off and to select the
degree of heating desired.
1
105
B670C01Y-AAT
NOTE: B670D01L-AAT
Air Intake Control o It should be noted that prolonged Air Flow Control
operation of the heating system
in " " mode will give rise to
fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within
the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition pro-
longed use of the air condition-
ing with the " " mode selected
may result in the air within the
passenger compartment becom-
HHP2125 ing excessively dry. HHP2126
This is used to select fresh outside air o When the ignition switch is
turned "ON", the air intake con- This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
or recirculating inside air. can be directed to the floor, dashboard
trol will change to " " mode
(regardless of switch position). outlets, or windshield. Five symbols
Fresh are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Recirculation This is normal operation.
Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
position.
With the " " mode selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and is heated
or cooled according to the other func-
tions selected.
With the " " mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment is
drawn through the heating system and
heated or cooled according to the other
functions selected.
106
B670D01HP B670D02HP B670D03HP
Face-Level Bi-Level Floor-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause Air is discharged through the face vents Air is discharged through the floor
air to be discharged through the face and the floor vents. This makes it vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side
level vents. possible to have cooler air from the defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
dashboard vents and warmer air from
the floor outlets at the same time.
1
107
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
B670D04HP B670D05HP
Cool Warm
Floor-Defrost Level Defrost-Level HHP2124
This control is used to adjust the de-

Air is discharged through the wind- Air is discharged through the wind- gree of heating or cooling desired.
shield defrost nozzle, the floor vents, shield defrost nozzle, side defroster
side defroster nozzle and side ventila- nozzle and side ventilator.
tor. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, A/C will turn on automatically and
the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated to im-
"Fresh" mode will be activated. prove windshield defrosting.
108 HEATING CONTROLS BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION
B690A02S-AAT B700A01A-AAT B710A01A-AAT
B690A01HP B700A01HP B710A01HP
For normal heating operation, set the Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level To operate the ventilation system:
air intake control to the fresh air ( ) heating controls. This makes it pos-
position and the air flow control to the sible to have cooler air from the dash- o Set the air intake control at the fresh
floor ( ) position. board vents and warmer air from the air ( ) position.
floor outlets at the same time. To use o To direct all intake air to the dash-
For faster heating, the air intake con- this feature: board vents, set the air flow control
trol should be set in the recirculate ( ) to the face ( ) position.
position. o Set the air intake control to the fresh o Adjust the fan speed control to the
air ( ) position. desired speed.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow o Set the air flow control at the bi-level o Set the temperature control between
control to the defrost ( ) position (The ( ) position. "Cool" and "Warm".
A/C will turn on automatically and o Set the temperature control between
"Fresh" mode will be activated). "Cool" and "Warm".
For maximum heat, move the tem-

perature control to "Warm".
1
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING 109
B720A02FC-AAT
NOTE:
When the A/C is operated continu-
ously on the floor-defrost level ( )
or defrost level ( ), it may cause
fog to form on the exterior wind-
shield. If this occurs, set the air
flow control to the face level posi-
tion ( ) and fan speed control to
the low position.
B720B01HP
B720A01HP
To remove frost or exterior fog on
Use the heating/ventilation system to
the windshield:
defrost or defog the windshield.
o Set the air flow control to the defrost
To remove interior fog on the wind- ( ) position.(The A/C will turn on
shield: automatically and "Fresh" mode will
be activated.)
o Set the air flow control to the defrost
o Set the temperature control to warm.
( ) position.(The A/C will turn on
o Set the fan speed control to position
automatically and "Fresh" mode will
"3" or "4".
be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between
"1" and "4" position.
110 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
B730A01L-AAT B740A01S-AAT B740B01HP-GAT
Operation Tips (If Installed) Air Conditioning Operation
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes Air Conditioning Switch Cooling
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the po-
sition. Be sure to return the control
to the position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care should B740A01HP B740B01HP
be taken that these are not blocked
by leaves, snow, ice or other ob- The air conditioning is turned on or off To use the air conditioning to cool the
structions. by pushing the A/C button on the heat- interior:
o To prevent interior fog on the winding/air conditioning control panel.
shield, set the air intake control to o Set the side vent control to " ", to
the fresh air ( ) position, and fan shut off the outside air entry.
speed to the desired position, turn o Turn on the fan control switch.
on the air conditioning system, and o Turn on the air conditioning switch
adjust temperature control to de- by pushing in on the switch. The air
sired temperature. conditioning indicator light should
come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the fresh
air ( ) position.
1
111
o Set the temperature control to B740C01A-AAT B740D01Y-AAT
"Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum De-Humidified Heating Operation Tips

cooling. The temperature may be o If the interior of the car is hot when
moderated by moving the control you first get in, open the windows for
toward "Warm".) a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired o When you are using the air condi-
speed. For greater cooling, turn the tioning system, keep all windows
fan control to one of the higher closed to keep hot air out.
speeds or temporarily select the o When moving slowly, as in heavy
recirculate ( ) position on the air traffic, shift to a lower gear. This
intake control. increases engine speed, which in
turn increases the speed of the air
B740C01HP conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air condi-
For dehumidified heating:
tioning off to avoid the possibility of
the engine overheating.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o During winter months or in periods
o Turn on the air conditioning switch.
when the air conditioning is not used
The air conditioning indicator light
regularly, run the air conditioning
should come on at the same time.
once every month for a few min-
utes. This will help circulate the
air ( ) position.
lubricants and keep your system in
o Set the air flow control to the face
peak operating condition.
( ) position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at
one of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to
provide the desired amount of
warmth.
112 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND
COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT B970B01HP-GAT
(If lnstalled) Heating and Cooling Controls
Your Hyundai is equipped with an au-
tomatic heating and cooling control
system controlled by simply setting
the desired temperature.
B970B01HP
1. Blower Fan Control Switch 8. Air Flow Control Switch

2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch 9. Air Conditioning Switch
3. OFF Switch 10.Ambient Temperature Switch
4. Display Window 11.Air Intake Control Switch
5. Temperature Control Button (Recirculation air)
6. Defroster Switch 12.Air Intake Control Switch
7. Rear Window Defroster Switch (Fresh air)
(If Installed)
1
113
B970C02L-AAT
NOTE:
Automatic Operation If the battery has been discharged
or disconnected, the temperature
mode will reset to Centigrade de-
grees.
This is a normal condition and you
can change the temperature mode
from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows;
Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3
seconds or more with the AMB
HHP2142
button held down.
HHP2138
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the The display shows that the unit of
desired temperature. temperature is adjusted to Centi-
The FATC (Full Automatic Tempera- The temperature will increase to the grade or Fahrenheit
ture Control) system automatically maximum 32°C(90°F) by pushing (°C → °F or °F → °C).
controls heating and cooling as fol- on the button. Each push of the
lows: button will cause the temperature to
increase by 0.5°C(1°F).
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indi- The temperature will decrease to
cator light will illuminate confirming the minimum 17°C(62°F) by push-
that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level ing on the button. Each push of
modes as well as the blower speed the button will cause the tempera-
and, air conditioner will be controlled ture to decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).
automatically.
114
B995A01Y-AAT B980A01Y-AAT
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MANUAL OPERATION
SWITCH The heating and cooling system can
Photo Sensor be controlled manually as well by push-
ing buttons other than the "AUTO"
button. In this state, the system se-
quentially works according to the order
of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are
not selected will be controlled auto-
matically.
HHP2096
Press the "AUTO" button in order to
NOTE: convert to automatic control of the
Never place anything over the sen- HHP2147 system.
sor which is located on the instru-
ment panel to ensure better control Pressing the AMB button displays the
of the heating and cooling system. ambient temperature on the display.
1
115
B980B01Y-AAT B670C02HP-GAT With the "Fresh" mode selected, air

Fan Speed Control Switch Air Intake Control Switch enters the vehicle from the outside and
is heated or cooled according to the
function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected,

air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
NOTE:
HHP2137 B980C01HP
o It should be noted that prolonged
The fan speed can be set to the de- This is used to select fresh outside air in "recirculation" mode will give
sired speed by pressing the appropri- or recirculation inside air. rise to fogging of the windshield
ate fan speed control button. The higher To change the air intake control mode, and side windows and the air
the fan speed is, the more air is deliv- push the control button. within the passenger compart-
ered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns ment will become stale. In addi-
off the fan. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator tion, prolonged use of the air
light on the button is illuminated when conditioning with the "Recircu-
the air intake control is in fresh mode. lation" mode selected may result
in the air within the passenger
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The compartment becoming exces-
indicator light on the button is illumi- sively dry.
nated when the air intake control is in
recirculation mode.
116
o When the ignition switch is B980E01L-GAT
turned "ON", the air intake con- Air Flow Control

trol will change to ( ) mode
(regardless of the switch posi-
tion). This is normal operation.
The air intake control operates
in "AUTO" mode when turning
the ignition to the "ON" position
if the "AUTO" mode was used
before shutting off the engine.
B670D01HP
B980d01Y-AAT
HHP2145 Face-Level
Heating and Cooling System Off
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
can be directed to the floor, dashboard When selecting the "Face" mode, the
outlets, or windshield. Four symbols indicator light will come on, causing air
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, to be discharged through the face level
Floor and Floor-Defrost air position. vents.
HHP2140
Press the "OFF" button to stop the

operation of the heating and cooling
system.
1
117
B670D02HP B670D03HP B670D04HP
Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode,
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost"
the indicator light will come on and the the indicator light will come on and the
mode, the indicator light will come on
air will be discharged through the face air will be discharged through the floor and the air will be discharged through
vents and the floor vents. This makes vents, windshield defrost nozzle, side
the windshield defrost nozzle, the floor
it possible to have cooler air from the defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
vents, side defroster nozzle and side
dashboard vents and warmer air from ventilator.
118 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
B980F01O-GAT B760A06A-GAT
Defrost Switch (FOR EVAPORATOR AND
BLOWER UNIT) (If Installed) ! CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 15,000
Blower km (10,000 miles) or once a year.
Outside air
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent air condi-
tioner filter inspections and
Inside of changes are required.
a vehicle o When the air flow rate is de-
creased, it must be checked at
HHP2143
Filter Inside air authorized dealer.
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, Evaporator core B760A01Y
the " " mode will be automatically The air conditioner filter is located in
selected and the air will be discharged front of the evaporator unit behind the
through the windshield defrost nozzle, glove box.
side defroster nozzle and side ventila- It operates to decrease the amount of
tor. To assist in defrosting, the air pollutants entering the car.
conditioning will operate if ambient tem- To replace the air conditioner filter,
perature is higher than 3.5°C and au- refer to the page 6-26.
tomatically turns off if the ambient tem-
perature drops below 3.5°C.
1
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM 119
B750A02A-AAT bridges or other large obstructions in FM radio station

How Car Audio Works the area.
FM reception Mountains
AM reception Unobstructed
Ionosphere
Ionosphere area
Buildings
Iron bridges
Obstructed area B750A03L
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

B750A01L
B750A02L frequencies and do not bend to follow
AM and FM radio signals are broad- the earth's surface. Because of this,
cast from transmitter towers located AM broadcasts can be received at FM broadcasts generally begin to fade
around your city. They are intercepted greater distances than FM broadcasts. at short distances from the station.
by the radio antenna on your car. This This is because AM radio waves are Also, FM signals are easily affected by
signal is then received by the radio and transmitted at low frequencies. These buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
sent to your car speakers. long, low frequency radio waves can tions. These can result in certain lis-
When a strong radio signal has reached follow the curvature of the earth rather tening conditions which might lead you
your vehicle, the precise engineering than travelling straight out into the to believe a problem exists with your
of your audio system ensures the best ionosphere. In addition, they curve radio. The following conditions are nor-
possible quality reproduction. However, around obstructions so that they can mal and do not indicate radio trouble:
in some cases the signal coming to provide better signal coverage.
your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such
as the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
120
B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far
as possible from the audio equipment.
B750A04L B750A05L
o Fading - As your car moves away

from the radio station, the signal will
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
! CAUTION:
weaken and sound will begin to fade. signal near the same frequency may When using a communication sys-
When this occurs, we suggest that begin to play. This is because your tem such as a cellular phone or a
you select another stronger station. radio is designed to lock onto the radio inside the vehicle, a separate
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or clearest signal. If this occurs, select external antenna must be fitted.
large obstructions between the another station with a stronger sig- When a cellular phone or a radio set
transmitter and your radio can dis- nal. is used by using an internal an-
turb the signal causing static or flut- o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- tenna alone, it may interfere with
tering noises to occur. Reducing the nals being received from several the vehicle's electrical system and
treble level may lessen this effect directions can cause distortion or adversely affect safe operation of
until the disturbance clears. fluttering. This can be caused by a the vehicle.
direct and a reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
! WARNING:
If this occurs, select another station Don't use a cellular phone when
until the condition has passed. you are driving. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
1
AUDIO SYSTEM 121
H240A01O-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H240) (If Installed)
5. BAND Selector 3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob

(TREB/FAD)
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

7. SCAN Button (BASS/BAL)
6. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
H240A01HP
122
H240B03O-AAT When the control knob is turned coun- SEEK Operation

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob terclockwise, left speaker sound will (Automatic Channel Selection)
The radio unit may be operated when be emphasized (right speaker sound
will be attenuated). Press the TUNE select button 0.5 sec
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"
or more. Releasing it will automatically
position. Press the knob to switch the
3. TREB (Treble) Control Knob tune to the next available station with a
power on. The LCD shows the radio
beep sound.
frequency in the radio mode or the Press to pop the knob out and turn to When the side is pressed longer than
tape direction indicator in the tape the left or right for the desired treble 0.5 second, releasing it will automati-
mode. To switch the power off, press tone. cally tune to the next higher frequency
the knob again.
and when the side is pressed longer
FAD (Fader) Control Knob than 0.5 second, releasing it will auto-
VOLUME Control matically tune to the next lower fre-
Pull the treble control knob further out.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase quency.
Turn the control knob counterclock-
the volume and turn the knob counter- wise to emphasize front speaker sound
clockwise to reduce the volume. (rear speaker sound will be attenu- 5. BAND Selector
ated). Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
2. BASS Control Knob When the control knob is turned clock- AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
Press to pop the knob out and turn to wise, rear speaker sound will be em- selected is displayed on LCD.
the left or right for the desired bass phasized (front speaker sound will be
tone. attenuated). 6. PRESET STATION SELECT
Buttons
BAL (Balance) Control Knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
Pull the bass control knob further out. Press the side or side to increase respectively can be preset in the elec-
Turn the control knob clockwise to or to decrease the frequency. Press tronic memory circuit on this unit.
emphasize right speaker sound (left either button and hold down to continu-
speaker sound will be attenuated). ously scroll. Release button once the
desired station is reached.
1
123
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta-

tion may be recalled by selecting
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button.
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
band select button and/or one of the
7. SCAN Button
six station select buttons, you may
When the scan button is pressed, the
recall any of these stations instantly.
To program the stations, follow these frequency will increase and the receiv-
able stations will be tuned in one after
steps:
another, receiving each station for 5
o Press band selector to set the band seconds. To stop scanning, press the
scan button again.
for AM, FM1, or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be
stored by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select ! CAUTION:
button you wish to use to access o Do not place beverages close to
that station. the audio system. The audio sys-
o Press the station select button for tem mechanism may be damaged
more than two seconds. A select if you spill them.
button indicator will show in the dis- o Do not impact on the audio sys-
play indicating which select button tem, or the audio system mecha-
you have depressed. The frequency nism could be damaged.
display will flash after it has been
stored into the memory with a beep
sound. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18
stations can be programmed by
selecting one AM and two FM sta-
tions per button.
124
H240C01O-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H240) (If Installed)
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

6. TAPE SLOT
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button
4. EJECT Button
1. FF/REW Button
5. DOLBY SELECT Button
H240C01HP
1
125
H240D03O-AAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse ! CAUTION:
o The FF (fast forward tape winding) side of the tape by merely pressing the o Do not insert anything like coins
starts when the button is press- program button. into the player slot as damage to
ed during PLAY or REW. An arrow will appear in the display to the unit may occur.
o PLAY starts when the button is show tape direction. o Do not place beverages close to
pressed again during the FF.
the audio system. The playback
o REW (rewinding) starts when the NOTE: mechanism may be damaged if
button is pressed during PLAY
When tape operation is abnormal you spill them.
or FF.
or ER8 fault code is displayed, Press o Do not impact on the audio sys-
o PLAY starts when the button is
eject button more than 5 seconds tem, or the playback mechanism
pressed again during REW.
to initialize the deck. could be damaged.
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button 4. EJECT Button
Press the button to find the starting
o When the EJECT button is pressed
point of each song in a prerecorded
with a cassette loaded, the cassette
music tape.
will eject.
The quiet space between songs (must
o When the EJECT button is pressed
have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be
during FF/REW, the cassette will
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SE-
eject.
LECT button.
o Pressing the button will play the 5. DOLBY SELECT Button

beginning of the next music seg- If you get background noise during
ment. PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
o Pressing the button will start ably by merely pressing DOLBY SE-
replay at the beginning of the music LECT button.
just listened to. If you want to release, press the button
again.
126
H290A01E-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
8. BEST STATION MEMORY or
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
SCAN Button (If Installed)
7. EQUALIZER Button
3. TREBLE/FAD Konb
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob

5. PRESET Buttons
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

6. BAND Select Button
H290A01HP
1
127
H290B03E-AAT
BALANCE Control knob 4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
Pull the Bass control knob out further. Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to
The radio unit may be operated when Rotate the knob clockwise to empha- increase or to decrease the frequency.
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" size right speaker sound (left speaker With the button held down for 0.5 sec.
position. Press the button to switch the sound will be attenuated). or more, the stop signal (broadcasting
power on. The display shows the radio When the control knob is turned coun- radio wave) is ignored and channel
frequency in the radio mode or the terclockwise, left speaker sound will selection continues.
tape direction indicator in the tape be emphasized (right speaker sound
mode, or CD track either the CD mode will be attenuated). SEEK Operation
or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To
switch the power off, press the button (Automatic Channel Selection)
3. TREBLE/FAD Knob
again. Press the TUNE select button for 0.5
TREBLE Control Knob sec or more. Releasing it will automati-
VOLUME Control Press to pop the knob out and turn to
cally tune to the next available station
with a beep sound.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the left or right for the desired treble
tone. When the ( ) side is pressed longer
the volume and turn the knob counter-
than 0.5 second, releasing it will auto-
clockwise to reduce the volume.
matically tune to the next higher fre-
FAD (Fader) Control Knob quency and when the ( ) side is
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Further pull the popped-up knob. Turn pressed longer than 0.5 second, re-
Knob the control knob counterclockwise to leasing it will automatically tune to the
emphasize front speaker sound (rear next lower frequency.
BASS Control Knob speaker sound will be attenuated).
Press to pop the knob out. To increase When the control knob is turned clock-
5. PRESET STATION Select
the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, wise, rear speaker sound will be em-
phasized (front speaker sound will be Buttons
while to decrease the bass, rotate the
knob counterclockwise. attenuated). Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the elec-
tronic memory circuit.
128
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS o When completed, any preset sta- 8. Best Station Memory Button
tion may be recalled by selecting (BSM) (If Installed)
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
programmed into the memory of the appropriate station button. When the BSM button is pressed for
radio. Then, by simply pressing the two seconds or longer, the six chan-
band select button and/or one of the nels from the highest field intensity are
6. BAND Selector
six station select buttons, you may selected next and stored in memory.
recall any of these stations instantly. Pressing the FM/AM button changes The stations selected are stored in the
To program the stations, follow these the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The sequence frequency from the first pre-
steps: mode selected is shown on the dis- set key.
play.
o Press band selector to set the band SCAN Button (If Installed)
for AM, FM1 and FM2. 7. EQUALIZER Button
o Select the desired station to be When the scan button is pressed, the
stored by seek or manual tuning. Press the EQ button to select the frequency will increase and the receiv-
o Determine the preset station select CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT able stations will be tuned in one after
button you wish to use to access MODE for the desired tone quality. another, receiving each station for 5
that station. Each press of the button changes the seconds. To stop scanning, press the
o Press the station select button for display as follows; scan button again.
more than two seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the dis- CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
play indicating which select button ! CAUTION:
you have depressed. The frequency
o Do not place beverages close to
display will flash after it has been
the audio system. The audio sys-
stored into the memory with a beep
tem mechanism may be damaged
sound. You should then release the
if you spill them.
button, and proceed to program the
o Do not impact on the audio sys-
next desired station. A total of 18
tem, or the audio system mecha-
stations can be programmed by
nism could be damaged.
selecting one AM and two FM sta-
tions per button.
1
129
H290C01E-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
5.EQUALIZER Button
4.TAPE EJECT Button
2.AUTO MUSIC
Select Button
1.FF/REW Button
6.DOLBY Button
3.TAPE PROGRAM Button
H290C01HP
130
H290D02O-GAT
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button 6. DOLBY Button
1. FF/REW Button
This allows you to play the reverse side If you get background noise during tape
o Fast forward tape winding starts when of the tape by merely depressing the PLAY, you can reduce this consider-
the FF ( ) button is pressed during program button. An arrow will appear in ably by merely pressing the DOLBY
the PLAY or REW mode. the display to show tape direction. button. If you want to cancel the DOLBY
o Tape play starts when the FF ( ) feature, press the button again.
button is pressed again during the 4. TAPE EJECT button
FF mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW
( ) button is pressed during the
o When the button is pressed with
the cassette loaded, the cassette is
! CAUTION:
PLAY or FF mode. ejected. o Do not insert anything like coins
o Tape play starts when the REW ( ) o When the button is pressed into the player slot as damage to
button pressed again during the REW during the FF/REW mode, the cas- the unit may occur.
mode. sette is ejected. o Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. The playback
2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button 5. EQ Button mechanism may be damaged if
you spill them.
Press the button to find the starting Press the EQ button to select the CLAS- o Do not impact on the audio sys-
point of each song in a prerecorded SIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE tem, or the playback mechanism
music tape. The quiet space between for the desired tone quality. Each press could be damaged.
songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) of the button changes the display as
can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC follows;
Select button.
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
o Pressing the button will play the
beginning of the next music seg-
ment.
o Pressing the button will start
replay at the beginning of the music
just listened to.
1
131
H290E01E-GAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H280) (If Installed)
6. CD EJECT Button
7. SCAN Button (If Installed)
5. EQUALIZER Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
2. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT
1. CD Select Button
H290E01HP
132
H290F03O-GAT
3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. CD EJECT Button
1. CD Select Button
o The desired track on the disc cur- When the button is pressed with
o Insert the CD with the label facing rently being played can be selected a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
upward. using the track number.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, o Press button once to skip for- 7. SCAN Button (If Installed)
during radio operation or cassette ward to the beginning of the next
tape playing. track. Press button once to skip o Press the SCAN button to playback
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you back to the beginning of the track. the first 10 seconds of each track.
press the CD/CDC button the CD o Press the SCAN button again within
player will begin playing even if the 10 sec. when you have reached the
4. REPEAT
radio or cassette player is being desired track.
used. o To repeat the track you are cur-
o The CD player can be used when rently listening to, press the RPT NOTE:
the ignition switch is in either the button. To cancel, press again. o To assure proper operation of
"ON" or "ACC" position. o If you do not release RPT operation the unit, keep the vehicle interior
when the track ends, it will automati- temperature within a normal
2. FF/REW ( / ) cally be replayed. range by using the vehicle's air
This process will be continued until conditioning or heating system.
If you want to fast forward or reverse you push the button again. o When replacing the fuse, replace
through the compact disc track, push
it with a fuse having the correct
and hold the FF ( ) or REW ( ) 5. EQUALIZER Button capacity.
button.
Press the EQ button to select the o The preset station frequencies
When you release the button, the com-
are all erased when the car bat-
pact disc player will resume playing. CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
tery is disconnected. Therefore,
MODE for the desired tone quality.
Each press of the button changes the all data will have to be set again
if this should occur.
display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

1
133
o Do not add any oil to the rotating o Avoid using CD-Recordable or

parts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-
ers and other metallic objects
! CAUTION:
CD-Rewritable as the player could
not be operated in recording way
away from the tape mechanism o Do not insert warped or poor of the CD maker. When using the
and head. quality discs into the CD player compact disc player, genuine
o This equipment is designed to as damage to the unit may occur. CDs are recommended.
be used only in a 12 volt DC o Do not insert anything like coins
battery system with negative into the player slot as damage to
ground. the unit may occur.
o This unit is made of precision o Do not place beverages close to
parts. Do not attempt to disas- the audio system. The playback
semble or adjust any parts. mechanism may be damaged if
o When driving your vehicle, be you spill them.
sure to keep the volume of the o Do not impact on the audio sys-
unit set low enough to allow you tem, or the playback mechanism
to hear sounds coming from the could be damaged.
outside. o Driving on the off-roads or other
o Do not expose this equipment vibrations may skip your com-
(including the speakers and tape) pact disc. Do not use the audio
to water or excessive moisture. system on off-roads as the discs
could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
134
H290G01E-GAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H280) (If Installed)
6. SCAN Button
(If Installed)
7. EQ Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
4. FF/REW Button
5. REPEAT
2. DISC Select Button
1. CD CHANGER Select Button

H290G01HP
1
135
B290H03HP-GAT
2. DISC Select Button o If you do not release RPT operation
The CD auto changer is located in the when the track ends, it will automati-
right side of the luggage compartment. To select the CD you want, push " TUNE
DISC
" cally be replayed.
to change the disc number. This process will be continued until
o To use the CD auto changer.
you push the button again.
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto
changer. 3. TRACK UP/DOWN 6. SCAN Button (If Installed)
2. To eject the compact disc maga- o The desired track on the disc cur- o Press the SCAN button to playback
zine, press the EJECT button lo- rently being played can be selected the first 10 seconds of each track.
cated inside the CD auto changer. using the track number. o Press the SCAN button again within
3. Insert the discs into the magazine. o Press once to skip forward to 10 sec. for the desired track.
4. Push the magazine into the CD auto the beginning of the next track. Press
changer and close the sliding lid. once to skip back to the begin-
ning of the track.
o The CD auto changer can be used 7. EQ Button
when the ignition switch is in either Press the EQ button to select the
4. FF/REW ( / ) CLASSIC, JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT
"ON" or "ACC" position.
If you want to fast forward or reverse MODE for the desired tone quality.
through the compact disc track, push Each press of the button changes the
1. CD CHANGER Select Button
and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( ) display as follows;
When the CD changer magazine con- button.
tains discs, press the "CD/CDC" but- When you release the button, the com-
ton and the CD changer can be used pact disc player will resume playing. CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT
even if the radio or cassette player is
being used. The Hyundai CD changer 5. REPEAT
can hold up to eight discs. The disc
number will be lit, and the track num- o To repeat the track you are listening
ber, and elapsed time will be displayed. to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press again.
136
NOTE: o Avoid using CD-Recordable or

o When replacing the fuse, replace
it with a fuse having the correct
! CAUTION: CD-Rewritable as the player could
not be operated in recording way
capacity. o Do not insert warped or poor
of the CD maker. When using the
o This equipment is designed to quality discs into the CD changer
compact disc changer, genuine
be used only in a 12 volt DC as damage to the unit may occur.
CDs are recommended.
battery system with negative o Do not insert anything like coins
ground. into the changer slot as damage
o This unit is made of precision to the unit may occur.
parts. Do not attempt to disas- o Do not place beverages close to
semble or adjust any parts. the audio system. The playback
o When driving your vehicle, be mechanism may be damaged if
sure to keep the volume of the you spill them.
unit set low enough to allow you o Do not impact on the audio sys-
to hear sounds coming from the tem, or the playback mechanism
outside. could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other
vibrations may skip your com-
pact disc. Do not use the audio
system on off-roads as the discs
could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc
with your hand while the disc is
being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism. These
can cause poor disc scratching
to occur or trouble in the com-
pact disc player.
1
137
B890A01Y-AAT
AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.
If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
INDICATION CAUSE SOLUTION

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er2
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
FOCUS ERROR
Er3 Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
DATA READ ERROR
Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Er6 DISC ERROR
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
TAPE DECK ERROR After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
Er8
TAPE EJECT ERROR If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns
HHH TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH
to normal.
NO DISC IN MAGAZINE
Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto
no CD NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO
changer.
CHANGER
138 CARE OF DISCS
B850A02F-AAT
Damaged Disc Keep Your Discs Clean
Proper Handling
Do not attempt to play damaged,
warped or cracked discs. These could
severely damage the playback mecha-
nism.
Storage
When not in use, place your discs in
their individual cases and store them in
a cool place away from the sun, heat,
and dust.
B850A01L Do not grip or pull out the disc with your B850A02L
hand while the disc is being pulled into Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the sur-
Handle your disc as shown. Do not the unit by the self loading mechanism.
drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will face of a disc could cause the pickup to
not leave fingerprints on the surface. If skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface
the surface is scratched, it may cause clean with a clean soft cloth.
the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen
affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild
the disc. Do not write on the disc. neutral detergent to wipe it clean.
1
CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES 139
B860A01A-AAT o Never leave a cassette inserted in o Be sure that the cassette label is not
the player when not being played. loose or peeling off or tape ejection
This could damage the tape player may be difficult.
unit and the cassette tape. o Never touch or soil the actual audio
o We strongly recommend against the tape surfaces.
use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 o Keep all magnetized objects, such
minutes total). Tapes such as C- as electric motors, speakers or trans-
120 or C-180 are very thin and do formers away from your cassette
not perform as well in the automo- tapes and tape player unit.
tive environment. o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place
with the open side facing down to
prevent dust from setting in the cas-
B860A01L
sette body.
Proper care of your cassette tapes will o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage
extend the tape life and increase your to replay one given tune or tape
listening enjoyment. Always protect section. This can cause poor tape
your tapes and cassette cases from winding to occur, and eventually
direct sunlight, severe cold and dusty cause excessive internal drag and
conditions. When not in use, cassettes poor audio quality in the cassette. If
should always be stored in the protec- this occurs, it can sometimes be
tive cassette case in which they were corrected by fast winding the tape
originally supplied. When the vehicle is from end to end several times. If this
B860A01HP
very hot or cold, allow the interior does not correct the problem, do not
temperature to become more comfort- continue to use the tape in your
able before listening to your cassettes. vehicle.
140 ANTENNA
B870A01A-GAT
Fixed Rod Antenna
Head
Cotton applicator
B860A02L B860A03L
o The playback head, capstan and NOTE: B870C01HP

pinch rollers will develop a coating Look at a tape before you insert it.
of tape residue that can result in Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
If the tape is loose, tighten it by receive both AM and FM broadcast
deterioration of sound quality, such turning one of the hubs with a pen-
as a wavering sound. They should signals.
cil or your finger. This antenna is a removable type. To
be cleaned monthly using a com- If the label is peeling off, do not put
mercially available head cleaning remove the antenna, turn the antenna
it in the player. It may cause the counterclockwise. To install the an-
tape or special solution available tape jam in the drive mechanism
from audio specialty shops. Follow tenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
when you try to eject it.
the supplier's directions carefully and Do not leave tape sitting where they
never oil any part of the tape player
unit.
are exposed to hot warm or, high ! CAUTION:
humidity, such as on top of the Be sure to remove the antenna be-
o Always be sure that the tape is dashboard or in the player.
tightly wound on its reel before in- fore washing the car in an auto-
If a tape is exposed to excessively matic car wash or the antenna may
serting in the player. Rotate a pencil hot or cold, let it reach a moderate
in the drive sprockets to wind up any be damaged.
temperature before putting it in the
slack. player.
1
141
B880C02B-GAT
Glass Antenna (If Installed)
! CAUTION:
o Do not clean the inner side of the
rear quarter glass with an abra-
sive type of glass cleaner or use
a scraper to remove foreign de-
posits from the inner surface of
the glass as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
o Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
HHP2184
broadcast signals.
When the radio power switch is turned
on while the ignition key is in either the
"ON" or "ACC" position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals through the antenna in the rear
quarter glass.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ........................... 2-2

Before Starting the Engine ........................................... 2-3
Key Positions................................................................ 2-4
Starting ......................................................................... 2-5 2
Operating the Manual Transmission ............................ 2-7
Automatic Transmission ............................................... 2-9
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ............................................ 2-14
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-21
2
Limited-Slip Differential (LSD) .................................... 2-22
Good Braking Practices ............................................. 2-22
Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-23
Smooth Cornering ...................................................... 2-25
Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-25
Trailer or Vehicle Towing ........................................... 2-28
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
C010A01HP-AAT
! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of
the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
2
BEFORE STARTING THE TO START THE ENGINE 3
ENGINE
C020A01A-AAT C030A01HP-GAT
Combination Ignition Switch
! WARNING:
Before you start the engine, you should
always: o If your Hyundai is equipped with a
Your vehicle is equipped with tires manual transmission, place the shift
designed to provide for safe ride 1. Look around the vehicle to be sure lever in neutral and depress the
and handling capability. there are no flat tires, puddles of clutch pedal fully.
Do not use a size and type of tire oil, water or other indications of o If your Hyundai has an automatic
and wheel that is different from the possible trouble. transmission, place the shift lever in
one that was originally installed on 2. After entering the car, check to be "P" (park).
your vehicle. It can affect the safety sure the parking brake is engaged. o To start the engine, insert the igni-
and performance of your vehicle, 3. Check that all windows, and lights tion key and turn it to the "START"
which could lead to handling fail- are clean. position. Release it as soon as the
ure or rollover and serious injury. 4. Check that the interior and exterior engine starts. Do not hold the key in
When replacing the tires, be sure to mirrors are clean and in position. the "START" position for more than
equip all four tires with the tire and 5. Check your seat, seatback and 15 seconds.
wheel of the same size, type, tread, headrest to be sure they are in their
brand and load-carrying capacity. proper positions. NOTE:
If you nevertheless decide to equip 6. Lock all the doors. For safety, the engine will not start
your vehicle with any tire/wheel 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N"
combination not recommended by that all other occupants have fas- Position (Automatic Transmission).
Hyundai for off-road driving, you tened theirs.
should not use these tires for high- 8. Turn off all lights and accessories
way driving. that are not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch
to "ON", check that all appropriate
warning lights are operating and
that you have sufficient fuel.
10. Check the operation of warning
lights and all bulbs when key is in
the "ON" position.
4 KEY POSITIONS
C040A01A-AAT
o "START"
! WARNING: (Diesel only) !
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the key.
To ensure that sufficient vacuum WARNING:
exists within the brake system dur- The engine should not be turned
off or the key removed from the
NOTE:
ing cold weather start-up condi- Do not hold the key in the "START"
tions, it is necessary to run the ignition key cylinder while the ve-
hicle is in motion. The steering position for more than 15 seconds.
engine at idle after starting accord-
ing to the following table. wheel is locked by removing the
key. o "ON"
Ambient temp. Warm up time When the key is in the "ON" position,
Above -15°C (5°F) 3 min. or longer the ignition is on and all accessories
may be turned on. If the engine is not
Below -15°C (5°F) 6 min. or longer
running, the key should not be left in
ACC
After starting the engine, do not the "ON" position. This will discharge
drive the vehicle until the brake LOCK ON the battery and may also damage the
vacuum warning light has turn- ignition system.
ed off.
Failure to carry out the above pro- o "ACC"
cedure may result in the need to With the key in the "ACC" position,
apply greater pedal pressure in or- some electrical accessories (radio, etc.)
der to effect the necessary braking START may be operated.
effort.
C040A01E o "LOCK"
The key can be removed or inserted in
this position.
To protect against theft, the steering
wheel locks by removing the key.
2
STARTING 5
NOTE: C050A01A-AAT C050B01HP-GAT
To unlock the steering wheel, in- NORMAL CONDITIONS

sert the key, and then turn the steer-
ing wheel and key simultaneously. Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key and fasten the seat belt.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. If your Hyundai is equipped with a
C070C01A-AAT
To remove the ignition key manual transmission, place the shift
lever in neutral and depress the
ACC clutch pedal fully. If your Hyundai
has an automatic transmission,
LOCK ON place the shift lever in "P" (park).
C050A01E
4. On vehicles equipped with the die-
sel preheat indication lamp, turn the
! WARNING:
ignition key to the "ON" position.
The diesel-preheat indicator lamp
START Never run the engine in a closed or will first illuminate in amber, and
poorly ventilated area any longer then after a short time, the amber
than is needed to move your car in illumination will go off, indicating
C070C01E or out of the area. The carbon mon- that preheating is completed.
oxide gas emitted is odorless and
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" can cause serious injury or death.
position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the
ignition key counterclockwise from
the "ACC" position to the "LOCK"
position.
3. The key can be removed in the
"LOCK" position.
6
(1) When the atmospheric tempera- C055B02HP-GAT
ture is moderate or the engine is STARTING AND STOPPING THE

warm: ENGINE FOR TURBO CHARGER
Start the engine without de- INTERCOOLER (Diesel Engine)
Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF pressing the accelerator pedal.
(1) Do not race or suddenly accelerate
(2) When the atmospheric tempera-
the engine immediately after start-
ture is low and the engine is
ing it. If the engine is cold, allow the
cold:
engine to idle for several seconds
Start the engine while depress-
before it is driven to ensure suffi-
ing the accelerator pedal. If the
cient lubrication of the turbo charger
atmospheric temperature is very
C050B01HP unit.
low, setting the ignition switch to
(2) After high speed driving or pro-
NOTE: "ON" for one or two seconds
longed engine loading, the engine
If the engine were not started within before attempting to start the
should be allowed to idle, as shown
2 seconds after the preheating is engine will make it easier to
in the following chart, before turn-
completed, turn the ignition key start.
ing it off.
once more to the "LOCK" position This idle time will allow the turbo
during 10 seconds, and then to the 6. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
charger to cool prior to shutting the
"ON" position, in order to preheat position and release it when the
engine off.
again. engine starts.
5. Operate the accelerator pedal as

described below in accordance with
the atmospheric temperature and/
or engine condition. (Diesel Engine
(2.5 TCI) Only)
2
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSMISSION 7
Driving Condition Required Idle Time

C070A02HP-GAT o During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transmis-
Normal driving Not necessary
sion lubricant has warmed up.
High speed Up to 80 km/h About 20 seconds This is normal and not harmful to
driving Up to 100km/h About 1 minute the transmission.
Steep mountain slopes o If you 've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st
or continued driving in About 2 minutes
or R(Reverse), put the shift lever
excess of 100km/h in N(Neutral) position and release
the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
back down, and then shift into
HHP3017
1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
o Do not use the shift lever as a
! WARNING: Your Hyundai's manual transmission handrest during driving, as this
Do not turn the engine off immedi- has a conventional shift pattern. This can result in premature wear of
ately after it has been subjected to shift pattern is imprinted on the shift the transmission shift forks.
a heavy load. Doing so may cause knob. The transmission is fully syn-
severe damage to the engine or chronized in all forward gears so shift-
turbo charger unit. ing to either a higher or a lower gear is ! CAUTION:
easily accomplished.
When downshifting from fifth gear
to fourth gear, caution should be
NOTE: taken not to inadvertently press the
o To shift into reverse, rest the le- gear shift lever sideways in such a
ver in neutral for at least 3 sec- manner that second gear is en-
onds after your car is completely gaged. Such a drastic downshift
stopped. Then move the lever may cause the engine speed to in-
into the reverse position. crease to the point that the tachom-
eter will enter the red-zone. Such
over-revving of the engine may
possibly cause engine damage.
8
C070B01A-AAT C070E03A-GAT C070D02O-AAT

Using the Clutch RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS Good Driving Practices
The clutch should be pressed all the Shift o Never take the car out of gear and
way to the floor before shifting, then Recommended coast down a hill. This is extremely
from-to
released slowly. The clutch pedal hazardous. Always leave the car in
1-2 20 km/h (15 mph)
should always be used after fully re- gear.
turning to the original position. Do not 2-3 40 km/h (25 mph) o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
rest your foot on the clutch pedal while 3-4 55 km/h (35 mph) cause them to overheat and mal-
driving. This can cause unnecessary 4-5 75 km/h (45 mph) function. Instead, when you are driv-
wear. Do not partially engage the clutch ing down a long hill, slow down and
to hold the car on an incline. This The shift points as shown above are shift to a lower gear. When you do
causes unnecessary wear. Use the recommended for optimum fuel this, engine braking will help slow
parking brake to hold the car on an economy and performance. the car.
incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal o Slow down before shifting to a lower
rapidly and repeatedly. gear. This will help avoid over-rev-
ving the engine, which can cause
damage.
o Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your car.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into re-
verse. The transmission can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into
reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three
seconds, then shift to the reverse
position.
2
AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- 9
SION
o Exercise extreme caution when driv- C090A01HP-GAT
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe- o In the event your vehicle leaves (If Installed)
cially careful when braking, acceler- the roadway, do not steer sharply.
ating or shifting gears. On a slippery Instead, slow down before pull-
surface, an abrupt change in ve- ing back into the travel lanes.
hicle speed can cause the drive o Never exceed posted speed lim-
wheels to lose traction and the ve- its.
hicle to go out of control.
! WARNING:
o Avoid high cornering speeds.
HHP3018
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
changes or fast, sharp turns. transmission has four forward speeds
o Always wear your seat belts. and one reverse speed. It has a con-
In a collision crash, an unbelted ventional shift pattern as shown in the
person is significantly more likely illustration.
to die than a person wearing a At night, with headlights switched on,
seatbelt. the appropriate symbol on the quad-
o The risk of rollover is greatly in- rant will be illuminated according to the
creased if you lose control of range selected.
your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers
to reenter the roadway.
10
C090B01HP-GAT C090D01HP-GAT
The function of each position is o N (Neutral):
! CAUTION: as follows: In the "N" position, the transmission is
Never shift into "R" or "P" position in neutral, which means that no gears
while the vehicle is moving. o P (Park): are engaged. The engine can be started
Use to hold the vehicle in place when with the shift lever in "N" position,
parked or while starting the engine. although this is not recommended ex-
NOTE: Whenever parking the car, apply the cept if the engine stalls while the car is
Depress the brake pedal and parking brake and shift the selector moving.
push the button when shifting. lever to the "P" (Park) position.
Push the button when shifting.
The selector lever can be C090E01HP-GAT
shifted freely. ! CAUTION:
o D (Drive):
For optimum fuel economy, acceler- Never place the selector lever in the Use for normal driving. The transmis-
ate gradually. The transmission will "P" (Park) position unless the ve- sion will automatically shift through a
automatically shift to the second, third hicle is fully stopped. four-gear sequence, giving best
and overdrive gears. Failure to observe this caution will economy and power. Never down-shift
cause severe damage to the trans- manually to "2" position or "L" position
mission. when vehicle speed is more than 96
km/h (60 mph).
C090C01A-AAT
o R (Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring
the car to a complete stop before
shifting the selector lever to "R" posi-
tion.
2
11
C090F01A-AAT C090G01HP-GAT C090H01HP-DAT

o 2 (Second gear): o L (Low gear):
Use for driving on slippery road hill Use for driving up a very steep grade or ! CAUTION:
climbing or engine braking downhill. for engine braking when descending
"2" automatically shifts between 1st steep hills. When downshifting to "L", o P (Park):
and 2nd gears. the transmission will temporarily re- Use this range to park the vehicle.
This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear main in second gear until the vehicle This range is also used when en-
is performed. However, the shift-up to has slowed enough for low gear to gine is started and warmed up.
3rd gear is done when the car speed engage. Do not exceed 50 km/h (30
exceeds a certain value to prevent the mph) in low gear. o N (Neutral):
engine from over-running. "L" engages 1st gear only. However, The engine can be started in this
Manually move the selector to "D" shift-up to 2nd is performed when the range, but the use of "P" range is
returning to normal driving condition. vehicle exceeds a certain speed, and recommended for safer start up.
as the speed increases, shift-up to 3rd
gear occurs to prevent over-running NOTE:
the engine. o For smooth operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting
from NEUTRAL or PARK to a for-
ward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the
"ON" position and the brake pedal
fully depressed in order to move
the shift lever from the "P" (Park)
position to any of the other posi-
tions.
o It is always possible to shift from
"R", "N", "D", "2", "L" positions
to "P" position. However, the
vehicle must be fully stopped to
avoid transmission damage.
12
C090I01HP-GAT C090J01HP-DAT If you need to accelerate rapidly, press

OVERDRIVE SWITCH the accelerator pedal all the way to the
! CAUTION:
floor. The transmission will automati-
cally shift to a lower gear, depending
o Shift into "R" and "P" position on the speed.
only when the vehicle has com-
pletely stopped. NOTE:
o Do not accelerate the engine in Turn the overdrive switch on for
the reverse or any of the forward good fuel economy and smooth
positions with the brakes applied. driving. If engine braking is needed
o Always apply the footbrake when in the "D" range or if repeated up-
shifting from "P" or "N" to "R", shifting and downshifting between
"D", "2" or "L" position. the 3rd and 4th gear is needed when
o Do not use the P(Park) position HHP3019
climbing a gentle slope, it is recom-
in place of the parking brake. When the overdrive switch is turned mended that the overdrive switch
Always set the parking brake, on, the transmission will automatically be turned off. Turn the overdrive
shift the transmission into upshift to the second, third and over- switch back on immediately after-
P(Park) and turn off the ignition drive gears. When the overdrive switch ward.
when you leave the vehicle, even is turned off, the transmission will not
momentarily. upshift to the overdrive gear at all.
Never leave the vehicle unat- For normal driving, the selector lever
tended while the engine is run- should be left in the "D" position and
ning. the overdrive switch turned on.
o Check the automatic transmis-
sion fluid level regularly, and add
fluid as necessary.
2
13
C090N03A-AAT o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

Good Driving Practices o Always wear your seat belts.
ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-
In a collision crash, an unbelted
o Never move the gear selector lever cially careful when braking, acceler-
person is significantly more likely
from "P" or "N" to any other position ating or shifting gears. On a slippery
to die than a person wearing a
with the accelerator pedal de- surface, an abrupt change in ve-
seat belt.
pressed. hicle speed can cause the drive
o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
o Never move the gear selector lever wheels to lose traction and the ve-
creased if you lose control of
into "P" when the vehicle is in mo- hicle to go out of control.
your vehicle at highway speeds.
tion. o Turn the overdrive switch on for
o Loss of control often occurs if
o Be sure the car is completely stopped good fuel economy and smooth driv-
two or more wheels drop off the
before you attempt to shift into "R". ing. If engine braking is needed in
roadway and the driver oversteers
o Never take the car out of gear and the "D" range or if repeated upshift-
to reenter the roadway.
coast down a hill. This may be ex- ing and downshifting between 3rd
o In the event your vehicle leaves
tremely hazardous. Always leave and 4th gear is needed when climb-
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
the car in gear when moving. ing a gentle slope, it is recommended
Instead, slow down before pull-
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can that the overdrive switch be turned
ing back into the travel lanes.
cause them to overheat and mal- off. Turn the overdrive switch back
o Never exceed posted speed lim-
function. Instead, when you are driv- on immediately afterward.
its.
ing down a long hill, slow down and o Excessive depressing of the
shift to a lower gear. When you do
this, engine braking will help slow ! WARNING:
accelerater pedal under the tire
slip condition such as moving
the car. o Avoid high cornering speeds. out of the mud or fresh snow etc,
o Slow down before shifting to a lower o Do not make quick steering wheel may cause severe damage to the
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may movements, such as sharp lane transmission. At this time, take
not be engaged. changes or fast, sharp turns. other way such as towing.
o Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the transmis-
sion in "P" to keep the car from
moving.
14 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
D090A01P-GAT C350A01HP-GAT
4L(Low range 4-wheel drive)
You can send your engine power to all Part-time 4WD operation
Use "4L" for climbing or descending
front and rear wheels for maximum
steep hills, off-road driving, and towing
power. 4WD is useful when you drive
the vehicle. Especially when increased
in snow, mud, ice, mountainous or
drive power is required.
sandy areas where good traction is
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) will
required, or when your wheels lose
be turned on to remind you that you are
traction using two-wheel drive.
in the 4L mode.
! CAUTION:
HHP2113
Do not select 4WD (4H or 4L) mode
on dry paved roads. Especially on
1. Knob position dry highway, never select the 4WD
This is used to set different positions. mode.
Four-wheel driving on dry paved
2H(Rear-wheel drive) roads for a long period will increase
the fuel consumption with possible
When driving on normal roads and noise generation and early tire wear.
highway. In addition, axle gear oil tempera-
ture increases with possible driv-
4H(High range 4-wheel drive) ing system part wear.
When driving off-road, wet or snow-
covered roads with normal speed.
The 4WD HIGH indicator light ( )
will be turned on to remind you that you
are in the 4H mode.
2
15
2. Transfer shift knob operation 4H → 4L

D090E02HP-GAT
Driving Four-wheel drive safely
By turning the transfer shift knob(4H,
4L), both axles of the vehicle are rigidly 1. Stop the vehicle. o The driving posture should be more
connected with each other. This im- 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual upright and closer to the wheel than
proves the traction characteristics. Transmission) or put the shift lever usual; adjust the seat to a good
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic position for easy steering and pedal
2H → 4H Transmission). operation.
3. Select the 4L mode. o Be sure to wear the seat belt.
Turn the transfer shift knob from the o Drive carefully when off the road
2H mode to the 4H mode at speed 4L → 4H and avoid dangerous areas.
below 80 km/h. It is not necessary to o 4WD has higher ground clearance
depress the clutch pedal (Manual 1. Stop the vehicle. and a narrower track to make them
Transmission) or put the shift lever into 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual capable of performing in a wide
"N(neutral)" position (Automatic Trans- Transmission) or put the shift lever variety of off road applications. Spe-
mission). Perform this operation when into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic cific design characteristics give them
driving straight. Transmission). a higher center of gravity than ordi-
3. Select the 4H mode. nary cars. An advantage of the
4H → 2H higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road allowing you to
Turn the transfer shift knob from the anticipate problems. They are not
4H mode to the 2H mode at speed designed for cornering at the same
below 80 km/h. It is not necessary to speeds as conventional 2-wheel
depress the clutch pedal (Manual drive vehicles any more than low-
Transmission) or put the shift lever into slung sports cars are designed to
"N(neutral)" position (Automatic Trans- perform satisfactorily under off-road
mission). Perform this operation when conditions. If at all possible, avoid
driving straight. sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
16
As with other vehicles of this type, Driving on dry paved road and Driving in Water
failure to operate this vehicle cor- highway
rectly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover. Select 2H(2WD) to drive on dry paved
o Do not grip the inside or spokes of roads. Especially on dry highway, never
the steering wheel when driving off- select the 4H or 4L(4WD).
road. The steering wheel could jerk
and injure your hands. Always firmly Driving on snowy or icy roads
hold the outer steering wheel when Select the 4H or 4L in accordance with
you are driving off-road. the road conditions, and then gradu-
o Drive at lower speeds in strong 40cm
ally depress the accelerator pedal for a
crosswinds. Because of your smooth start.
vehicle's high center of gravity, its
D090E01HP
stability will be affected in cross- Driving on sandy or muddy roads
winds. Slower speeds ensure better Select the 4L mode and drive through
vehicle control. Select the 4H or 4L and then gradually slowly.
o Check your brake condition once depress the accelerator pedal for a The maximum advisable wading depth
you are out of mud or water. Press smooth start. Keep the pressure on is approximately 40cm (15.7 in.).
the brake several times as you move the accelerator pedal constant as pos- Before driving through water, such as
slowly until your feel normal braking sible, and drive at low speed. when crossing shallow streams, first
forces return. check the depth of the water and the
o Four-wheel driving on flat and nor- Climbing sharp grades bottom of the river bed for firmness.
mal roads can result in a severe Drive slowly at the speed of 5 km/h
Select the 4L to maximize use the (3mph) and avoid deep water.
binding condition when turning the
engine torque. Take all necessary safety measures to
steering wheel.
ensure that water damage to the en-
Descending sharp grades gine or other vehicle parts does not
Select 4L, use the engine brake and occur.
descend slowly.
2
17
Water entering the engine air intake C355A04HP-GAT

LOW Mode
will cause severe engine damage. Full-time 4WD operation
Water can wash the grease from wheel (If Installed) Full power to both axles, including a
bearings, causing rusting and prema- lower gear ratio for low-speed applica-
ture failure, and may also enter the tions that require extra power such as
axles, transmission and transfer case, dry road surfaces, wet pavement,
reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali- snow-covered roads and/or off-road.
ties. Especially when increased drive power
is required.
"LOW" mode is not recommended on
dry pavement.
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) will
be turned on to remind you that you are
in the LOW mode.
HHP2114
1. Knob position 2. Transfer shift knob operation

This is used to set different positions. AUTO → LOW
AUTO Mode 1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
Full power delivered to front and rear
Transmission) or put the shift lever
axles for increase traction. Use this
into "N(neutral)" position (Automatic
mode for normal on-road operating
Transmission)
conditions such as dry road surfaces,
3. Turn the transfer shift knob to "LOW"
wet pavement, snow-covered roads
mode.
and/or off-road.
18
LOW → AUTO When driving on a snow-covered

road or a slippery, muddy surface, ure or rollover and serious injury.
make sure that you keep a suffi- When replacing the tires, be sure to
1. Stop the vehicle. equip all four tires with the tire and
2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual cient distance between your ve-
hicle and the one ahead of you. wheel of the same size, type, tread,
Transmission) or put the shift lever brand and load-carrying capacity.
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic (6) Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels, the perfor- If you nevertheless decide to equip
Transmission). your vehicle with any tire/wheel
3. Turn the transfer shift knob to mance of the full-time 4WD vehicle
is greatly affected by the condition combination not recommended by
"AUTO" mode. Hyundai for off-road driving, you
of the tires. Be sure to equip it with
all four tires of the same size and should not use these tires for high-
Driving 4WD Safely way driving.
type.
(1) Be sure to wear the seat belt. o When replacement of any of the
(2) Drive at lower speeds in strong tires or disc wheels is neces-
crosswinds. Because of your sary, replace all of them. (7)The full-time 4WD vehicle can-
vehicle's high center of gravity, its o Rotate the tires and check the not be towed by an ordinary tow
stability will be affected in cross- tire pressure at regular inter- truck. Make sure that the vehicle
winds. Slower speeds ensure bet- vals. is towed with its four wheels
ter vehicle control. raised off the ground.
(3) Check the brake condition after
driving in wet or muddy conditions. ! WARNING: o If the vehicle is towed with its
Press the brake several times as only two wheels raised off the
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
you move slowly until you feel nor- ground, the 4WD system could
designed to provide for safe ride
mal braking forces return. be damaged.
and handling capability.
(4) Do not drive the vehicle through o In unavoidable case, if the ve-
Do not use a size and type of tire
water. (i.e. streams, rivers, lakes, hicle is being towed with all four
and wheel that is different from the
etc.) wheels on the ground, it should
one that was originally installed on
(5) The stopping distance of the full- be towed only forward direction
your vehicle. It can affect the safety
time 4WD vehicle differs very little with rope.
and performance of your vehicle,
from that of the 2WD vehicle. which could lead to handling fail-
2
19
o While towing, check the follow-

ing items.
1. The ignition switch is in "ACC"
! WARNING:
or "ON". Keep away from the front of the
2. Place the shift lever in neutral vehicle while inspecting. This is
(For Automatic Transmission, very dangerous as the vehicle can
"N" position). jump forward and cause serious
3. Release the parking brake. injury or death.
Temporary
NOTE: free roller Roll tester (Speedometer)
(9) When using tire chains, be sure to
To avoid serious damage to your
HHP1034 install the chains on all wheels.
4WD vehicle, limit towing to 15km/
(10)If the front or rear wheels get stuck
h (10 mph) and not for more than o In rare cases when it's unavoidable
in the mud, do not spin them reck-
1.5km (1 mile) at ANY TIME. that a 4WD vehicle is to be in-
lessly. The 4WD system could be
spected for speedometer test on
damaged.
(8) For speedometer test or inspec- 2WD roll tester, strictly follow the
tion/maintenance (I/M) program of procedures next.
full-time 4WD vehicle, use a four- Driving on dry paved road and
wheel chassis dynamometer. 1. Check the tire pressures recom- highway
mended for your vehicle. Select the AUTO to drive on dry paved
2. Place the rear wheels on the roll roads. Especially on dry highway, never
! CAUTION: tester for speedometer test as select the LOW.
Never engage the parking brake shown in the illustration.
while performing these tests. 3. Release the parking brake. Driving on snowy or icy roads
4. Place the front wheels on the
temporary free roller as shown in Select the AUTO or LOW in accor-
the illustration. dance with the road conditions, and
then gradually depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
20
Driving on sandy or muddy roads Driving in Water Water can wash the grease from wheel
bearings, causing rusting and prema-
Select the LOW and then gradually ture failure, and may also enter the
depress the accelerator pedal for a axles, transmission and transfer case,
smooth start. Keep the pressure on reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali-
the accelerator pedal constant as pos- ties.
sible, and drive at low speed.
Climbing sharp grades

Select the LOW to maximize use the
! CAUTION:
engine torque. 40cm o While the full-time 4WD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the tires
Descending sharp grades D090E01HP to rotate.
Select the LOW, use the engine brake Select the LOW mode and drive There is the danger that rotating
and descend slowly. through slowly. tires touching the ground could
The maximum advisable wading depth cause the vehicle to go off the
is approximately 40cm (15.7 in.). jack and to jump forward.
Before driving through water, such as o If one of the front or rear wheels
when crossing shallow streams, first begins to spin in mud, snow,
check the depth of the water and the etc., the vehicle can sometimes
bottom of the river bed for firmness. be driven out by depressing the
Drive slowly at the speed of 5 km/h accelerator pedal further; how-
(3mph) and avoid deep water. ever, avoid running the engine
Take all necessary safety measures to continuously at high rpm be-
ensure that water damage to the en- cause doing so could damage
gine or other vehicle parts does not the 4WD system.
occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
2
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 21
(ABS)
C120A02A-AAT
(If Installed)
! WARNING:
! WARNING:
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
o Avoid high cornering speeds. designed to prevent wheel lock-up ABS will not prevent accidents due
o Do not make quick steering wheel during sudden braking or on hazard- to improper or dangerous driving
movements, such as sharp lane ous road surfaces. The ABS control maneuvers. Even though vehicle
charges or fast, sharp turns. module monitors the wheel speed and control is improved during emer-
o The risk of rollover is greatly in- controls the pressure applied to each gency braking, always maintain a
creased if you lose control of brake. Thus, in emergency situations safe distance between you and ob-
your vehicle at highway speeds. or on slick roads, ABS will increase jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should
o In a collision crash, an unbelted vehicle control during braking. always be reduced during extreme
person is significantly more likely road conditions.
to die than a person wear a NOTE: The braking distance for cars
seatbelt. equipped with an anti-lock braking
During ABS operation, a slight pul-
o Loss of control often occurs if system may be longer than for those
sation may be felt in the brake pedal
two or more wheels drop off the without it in the following road con-
when the brakes are applied. Also,
roadway and the driver oversteers ditions. During these conditions the
a noise may be heard in the engine
to reenter the roadway. vehicle should be driven at reduced
compartment while braking. These
o In the event your vehicle leaves speeds.
conditions are normal and indicate
the roadway, do not steer sharply. that the anti-lock brake system is o Rough, gravel or snow-covered
Instead, slow down before pull- functioning properly. roads.
ing back into the travel lanes. o With tire chains installed.
o Roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS
equipped vehicle should not be
tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
22 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFEREN- GOOD BRAKING PRAC-
TIAL (LSD) TICES
D190A01HP-GAT C130A01HP-GAT
(If Installed)
! CAUTION: !
A limited-slip differential, if equipped,
o Never start the engine with the WARNING:
is for the rear wheel differential only.
gearshift lever placed in the for- Nothing should be carried on top of
The features of this limited-slip differ-
ward or reverse while one of the the cargo area cover behind the
ential are described below:
rear wheels is jacked up and the rear seat. If there were an accident
Just as with a conventional differential,
other in contact with the ground; or a sudden stop, such objects
the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
doing so may cause the vehicle could move forward and cause dam-
at a different speed from the wheel on
to jump forward. age to the vehicle or injure the oc-
the other side when the vehicle is
o Use only recommended oil for cupants.
cornering. The difference between the
limited-slip differential and a conven- LSD in the rear axle.
tional differential is that if the wheel on See page 9-5 for the recom- o After being parked, check to be sure
one side of the vehicle loses traction, a mended oil descriptions. the parking brake is not engaged
greater amount of torque is applied to and that the parking brake indicator
the rear wheel on the other side to light is out before driving away.
improve traction. o Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes cause the car to pull to
one side. To dry the brakes, apply
the brakes lightly until the braking
action returns to normal, taking care
to keep the car under control at all
times. If the braking action does not
return to normal, stop as soon as it
is safe to do so and call your Hyundai
dealer for assistance.
2
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 23
o Don't coast down hills with the car the gear selector lever in "P" (auto- C140A01A-AAT
out of gear. This is extremely haz- matic transmission) or in first or You can save fuel and get more miles
ardous. Keep the car in gear at all reverse gear (manual transmission). from your car if you follow these sug-
times, use the brakes to slow down, If your car is facing downhill, turn the gestions:
then shift to a lower gear so that front wheels into the curb to help
engine braking will help you main- keep the car from rolling. If your car o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
tain a safe speed. is facing uphill, turn the front wheels moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Rest- away from the curb to help keep the rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
ing your foot on the brake pedal car from rolling. If there is no curb or and maintain a steady cruising
while driving can be dangerous be- if it is required by other conditions to speed. Don't race between stop-
cause it can result in the brakes keep the car from rolling, block the lights. Try to adjust your speed to
overheating and losing their effec- wheels. that of the other traffic so you don't
tiveness. o Under some conditions your park- have to change speeds unneces-
It also increases the wear of the ing brake can freeze in the engaged sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
brake components. position. This is most likely to hap- possible. Always maintain a safe
o If a tire goes flat while you are pen when there is an accumulation distance from other vehicles so you
driving, apply the brakes gently and of snow or ice around or near the can avoid unnecessary braking. This
keep the car pointed straight ahead rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. also reduces brake wear.
while you slow down. When you are If there is a risk that the parking o Drive at a moderate speed. The
moving slowly enough for it to be brake may freeze, apply it only tem- faster you drive, the more fuel your
safe to do so, pull off the road and porarily while you put the gear se- car uses. Driving at a moderate
stop in a safe place. lector lever in "P" (automatic) or in speed, especially on the highway, is
o If your car is equipped with an auto- first or reverse gear (manual trans- one of the most effective ways to
matic transmission, don't let your mission) and block the rear wheels reduce fuel consumption.
car creep forward. To avoid creep- so the car cannot roll. Then release
ing forward, keep your foot firmly on the parking brake.
the brake pedal when the car is o Do not hold the vehicle on the up-
stopped. grade with the accelerator pedal.
o Use caution when parking on a hill. This can cause the transmission to
Engage the parking brake and place overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
24
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. o Keep your car in good condition. For o Remember, your Hyundai does not
This can increase fuel consumption better fuel economy and reduced require extended warm-up. As soon
and also increase wear on these maintenance costs, maintain your as the engine is running smoothly,
components. In addition, driving with car in accordance with the mainte- you can drive away. In very cold
your foot resting on the brake pedal nance schedule in Section 5. If you weather, however, give your engine
may cause the brakes to overheat, drive your car in severe conditions, a slightly longer warm-up period.
which reduces their effectiveness more frequent maintenance is re- o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
and may lead to more serious con- quired (see Section 5 for details). Lugging is driving too slowly in too
sequences. o Keep your car clean. For maximum high a gear resulting in the engine
o Take care of your tires. Keep them service, your Hyundai should be bucking. If this happens, shift to a
inflated to the recommended pres- kept clean and free of corrosive lower gear. Over-revving is racing
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too materials. It is especially important the engine beyond its safe limit.
much or too little, results in unnec- that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al- This can be avoided by shifting at
essary tire wear. Check the tire pres- lowed to accumulate on the under- the recommended speeds.
sures at least once a month. side of the car. This extra weight o Use your air conditioning sparingly.
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned can result in increased fuel con- The air conditioning system is oper-
correctly. Improper alignment can sumption and also contribute to cor- ated by engine power so your fuel
result from hitting curbs or driving rosion. economy is reduced when you use
too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- it.
alignment causes faster tire wear sary weight in your car. Weight re-
and may also result in other prob- duces fuel economy.
lems as well as greater fuel con- o Don't let the engine idle longer than
sumption. necessary. If you are waiting (and
not in traffic), turn off your engine
and restart only when you're ready
to go.
2
SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER DRIVING 25
C150A01A-AAT C160A01A-AAT During deceleration, use engine brak-

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- The more severe weather conditions ing to the fullest extent. Sudden brake
ners, especially when roads are wet. of winter result in greater wear and applications on snowy or icy roads
Ideally, corners should always be taken other problems. To minimize the prob- may cause skids to occur. You need to
under gentle acceleration. If you follow lems of winter driving, you should fol- keep sufficient distance between the
these suggestions, tire wear will be low these suggestions: vehicle in operation in front and your
held to a minimum. vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It
should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tire will provide a greater
C160B01A-GAT driving force, but will not prevent side
Snowy or Icy Conditions skids.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires or NOTE:
to install tire chains on your tires. If Tire chains are not legal in all prov-
snow tires are needed, it is necessary inces. Check province laws before
to select tires equivalent in size and fitting tire chains.
type of the original equipment tires.
Failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns are potentially very haz-
ardous practices.
26
C160C01A-AAT C160D01A-AAT C160F01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Gly- Check Battery and Cables Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
col Coolant Winter puts additional burdens on the System
Your Hyundai is delivered with high battery system. Visually inspect the Inspect your spark plugs as described
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the battery and cables as described in in Section 6 and replace them if neces-
cooling system. It is the only type of Section 6. The level of charge in your sary. Also check all ignition wiring and
coolant that should be used because it battery can be checked by your Hyundai components to be sure they are not
helps prevent corrosion in the cooling dealer or a service station. cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
system, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace
C160E01A-AAT C160G02A-GAT
or replenish your coolant in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if To Keep Locks from Freezing
in Section 5. Before winter, have your Necessary To keep the locks from freezing, squirt
coolant tested to assure that its freez- In some climates it is recommended an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine
ing point is sufficient for the tempera- that a lower viscosity "winter weight" into the key opening. If a lock is cov-
tures anticipated during the winter. oil be used during cold weather. See ered with ice, squirt it with an approved
Section 9 for recommendations. If you de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the
aren't sure what weight oil you should lock is frozen internally, you may be
use, consult your Hyundai dealer. able to thaw it out by using a heated
key. Handle the heated key with care
to avoid injury.
NOTE:
The proper temperature for using
the immobilizer key is from -40°C
(-40°F) to 80°C (176°F). If you heat
the immobilizer key over 80°C
(176°F) to open the frozen lock, it
may cause damage to the transpon-
der in its head.
2
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING 27
C160H01A-AAT C160J01A-AAT C170A01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumu- Pre-Trip Inspections
Window Washer System late Underneath 1. Tires:
To keep the water in the window washer Under some conditions, snow and ice
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
system from freezing, add an approved can build up under the fenders and
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
anti-freeze solution in accordance with interfere with the steering. When driv- sures will result in overheating and
instructions on the container. Window ing in severe winter conditions where
possible failure of the tires.
washer anti-freeze is available from this may happen, you should periodi-
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
Hyundai dealers and most auto parts cally check underneath the car to be which may result in reduced traction or
outlets. Do not use engine coolant or sure the movement of the front wheels
tire failure.
other types of anti-freeze as these and the steering components is not
may damage the finish. obstructed.
NOTE:
Never exceed the maximum tire in-
C160I01HP-GAT
flation pressure shown on the tires.
C160K01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake
Carry Emergency Equipment 2. Fuel, engine coolant and
Freeze
Depending on the severity of the engine oil:
Under some conditions your parking weather where you drive your car, you
brake can freeze in the engaged posi- High speed travel consumes more fuel
should carry appropriate emergency than urban motoring. Do not forget to
tion. This is most likely to happen when equipment. Some of the items you
there is an accumulation of snow or ice check both engine coolant and engine
may want to carry include tire chains, oil.
around or near the rear brakes or if the tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-
brakes are wet. If there is a risk the gency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper
parking brake may freeze, apply it only 3. Drive belt:
cables, a window scraper, gloves,
temporarily while you put the gear selec- ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc. A loose or damaged drive belt may
tor lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or result in overheating of the engine.
reverse gear (manual transmission) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
28 USE OF LIGHTS TRAILER OR VEHICLE
TOWING
C180A01A-AAT C190A01HP-GAT C190B01S-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correct If you are considering towing with your Trailer Hitches
operation and always keep them clean. car, you should first check with your Select the proper hitch and ball combi-
When driving during the day in condi- Province Department of Motor Vehicles nation, making sure that it's location is
tions of poor visibility, it is helpful to to determine their legal requirements. compatible with that of the trailer or
drive with headlights on low beam. Since laws vary from province to prov- vehicle being towed.
This enables you to be seen as well as ince the requirements for towing trail- Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which
to see. ers, cars, or other types of vehicles or distributes the tongue load uniformly
apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai throughout the chassis.
dealer for further details before towing.
The hitch should be bolted securely to
the car and installed by a qualified
! CAUTION: technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH
DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY IN-
Do not do any towing with your car
STALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE
during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)
THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE
in order to allow the engine to prop-
BUMPER.
erly break in. Failure to heed this
caution may result in serious en-
gine or transmission damage.
2
29
C190C03S-GAT C190E03HP-GAT
Trailer Brakes and stop as soon as it is safe to Trailer Weight Limit
do so, and allow the engine to
If your trailer is equipped with a braking idle until it cools down. You may
system, make sure it conforms to fed- proceed once the engine has
eral and/or local regulations and that it cooled sufficiently.
is properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
NOTE:
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your C190D01A-GAT
car will require more frequent main- Safety Chains
tenance due to the additional load. Tongue load Total trailer weight
Should the hitch connection between
See "Maintenance Under Severe C190E01L
your car and the trailer or vehicle you
Usage Conditions" on page 5-8.
are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle Tongue loads can be increased or
could wander dangerously across other decreased by re-distributing the load
lanes of traffic and ultimately collide in the trailer.
! CAUTION: with another vehicle. To eliminate this This can be verified by checking the
potentially dangerous situation, safety total weight of the loaded trailer and
o Never connect a trailer brake sys-
chains, attached between your car and then checking the load on the tongue.
tem directly to the vehicle brake
system. the trailer or towed vehicle, are re-
o When towing a trailer on steep quired in most provinces. NOTE:
grades (in excess of 12%) pay 1. Never load the trailer with more
close attention to the engine cool- weight in the back than in the
ant temperature gauge to ensure front. About 60% of the trailer
the engine does not overheat. If load should be in the front half
the needle of the coolant tem- on the trailer and the remaining
perature gauge moves across the 40% in the rear.
dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over
30
3. The front or rear axle weight must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) shown on the
vehicle identification plate (see
page 8-2). It is possible that your
towing package does not exceed
the GVWR but exceeds the Coupling point
GAWR. Improper trailer loading
and/or too much luggage in the
Gross axle weight Gross vehicle cargo area can overload the rear
weight axle. Redistribute the load and Spare tire
C190E02L C190E01HP
check the axle weight again.
2. The total gross vehicle weight 4. The maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling de-
with trailer must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating vice is : ! CAUTION:
(GVWR) shown on the vehicle The following specifications are
identification plate (see page 8- Engine Load recommended when towing a
2). The total gross vehicle weight 2.5 75 kg trailer. The loaded trailer weight
is the combined weight of the cannot safely exceed the values in
2.9, E.C only 112 kg
vehicle, driver, all passengers the following chart.
and their luggage, cargo, hitch, 3.5 Except E.C 75 kg
trailer tongue load and other op-
tional equipment. 5. The maximum permissible over-
hang of the coupling point is
1,135 mm.
2
31
kg.(Lbs) C190F01HP-GAT 7. The vehicle/trailer combination is

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips more affected by crosswind and
Maximum Towable Weight
1. Before towing, check hitch and buffeting. When being passed by a
Engine Trailer Tongue large vehicle, keep a constant
safety chain connections as well
2.5 1800(3,968) 75 (165) as proper operation of the trailer speed and steer straight ahead. If
With there is too much wind buffeting
2.9, E.C only 2800(6,173) 112(246) running lights, brake lights, and
Brake turn signals. slow down to get out of the other
3.5 Except E.C 1800(3,968) 75(165)
vehicle's air turbulence.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
Without erate speed (Less than 100 km/h). 8. When parking your car and trailer,
2.5, 2.9, 3.5 700(1,543) 28(61.7)
Brake 3. Trailer towing requires more fuel especially on a hill, be sure to fol-
than normal conditions. low all the normal precautions. Turn
4. To maintain engine braking effi- your front wheel into the curb, set
ciency, do not tow a trailer with the the parking brake firmly, and put
! WARNING: transmission in fifth gear (manual the transmission in 1st or Reverse
transmission) or an overdrive gear (manual) or Park (automatic). In
o Improperly loading your car and
(automatic transmission). addition, place wheel chocks at
trailer can seriously affect its
5. Always secure items in the trailer each of the trailer's tires.
steering and braking perfor-
to prevent load shift while driving. 9. If the trailer has electric brakes,
mance causing a crash which
6. Check the condition and air pres- start your vehicle and trailer mov-
could cause injury or death.
sure of all tires on the trailer and ing, and then apply the trailer brake
o When a trailer is used, the opera-
your car. Low tire pressure can controller by hand to be sure the
tion speed is restricted to 100km/
seriously affect the handling. Also brakes are working. This lets you
h or less.
check the spare tire. check your electrical connection at
the same time.
10. During your trip, check occasion-
ally to be sure that the load is
secure, and that the lights and
any trailer brakes are still working.
32
11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-

eration or sudden stops.
12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
! CAUTION:
changes. If overheating should occur when
13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down towing, (temperature gauge reads
too long or too frequently. This near red zone), taking the following
could cause the brakes to over- action may reduce or eliminate the
heat, resulting in reduced braking problem.
efficiency.
14. When going down a hill, shift into a 1. Turn off the air conditioner.
lower gear and use the engine brak- 2. Reduce highway speed.
ing effect. When ascending a long 3. Select a lower gear when going
grade, downshift the transmission uphill.
to a lower gear and reduce speed 4. While in stop and go traffic, place
to reduce chances of engine over- the gear selector in park or neu-
loading and/or overheating. tral and idle the engine at a higher
15. If you have to stop while going speed.
uphill, do not hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelera-
tor. This can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat. Use the
parking brake or footbrake.
NOTE:
When towing, check transmission
fluid more frequently.
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
If the Engine Will not Start .......................................... 3-2

Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3
If the Engine Overheats .............................................. 3-4
Spare Tire .................................................................... 3-5
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-7
3
Changing A Flat Tire ................................................... 3-7
If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................. 3-14
Emergency Towing.................................................... 3-15
3
If You Lose Your Keys .............................................. 3-16
3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
D010A01A-AAT D010B01HP-GAT D010C02A-EAT

If Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or If Engine Turns Over Normally
! WARNING:
Turns Over Slowly but Does Not Start
If the engine will not start, do not 1. Check fuel level.
push or pull the car to start it. This 2. With the key in the "OFF" position,
could result in a collision or cause check all connectors at ignition coils
other damage. In addition, push or and spark plugs(For Gasoline En-
pull starting may cause the cata- gine) or check all connectors at
lytic converter to be overloaded and glow plug and glow plug relay(For
create a fire hazard. Diesel Engine). Reconnect any that
may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check fuel line in the engine room.
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a
HHP5020
Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
fied assistance.
1. If your car has an automatic trans-
mission, be sure the gear selector
lever is in "N" or "P" and the emer- D010D01A-AAT
gency brake is set. If Engine Stalls While Driving
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight. 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light ing a straight line. Move cautiously
dims or goes out when you operate off the road to a safe place.
the starter, the battery is discharged. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
4. Check the starter connections to be 3. Try to start the engine again. If your
sure they are securely tightened. vehicle will not start, contact a
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
start it. See instructions for "Jump fied assistance.
Starting".
3
JUMP STARTING 3
D020A02A-AAT o If you should accidentally get acid 2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
Discharged on your skin or in your eyes, acces-sories in both vehicles.
battery immediately remove any contami- 3. Attach the clamps of the jumper
nated clothing and flush the area cable in the exact location shown in
with clear water for at least 15 min- the illustration. First, attach one
utes. Then promptly obtain medical clamp of the jumper cable to the
attention. If you must be transported positive (+) post or cable of the
to an emergency facility, continue to discharged battery. Then attach the
apply water to the affected area other end of the same cable to the
with a sponge or cloth. positive (+) post or cable of the
o The gas produced by the battery booster battery. Next, using the
Booster battery during the jump-start operation is other cable, attach one clamp to the
HHP4001
highly explosive. Do not smoke or negative (-) post or cable of the
allow a spark or an open flame in booster battery. Then attach the
! WARNING:
the vicinity. other end of that cable to a solid
o The battery being used to provide metal part of the engine away from
The gas produced by the battery the jump start must be 12-volt. If you the battery. Do not connect the cable
during the jump-start operation is cannot determine that it is a 12-volt to any moving part.
highly explosive. If these instruc- battery, do not attempt to use it for 4. Start the engine in the car with the
tions are not followed exactly, seri- the jump start. booster battery and let it run for a
ous personal injury and damage to o To jump start a car with a discharged few minutes. This will help to as-
the vehicle may occur! If you are battery, follow this procedure ex- sure that the booster battery is fully
not sure how to follow this proce- actly: charged. During the jumping opera-
dure, seek qualified assistance. tion, run the engine in this vehicle at
Automobile batteries contain sul- 1. If the booster battery is installed in about 2000 rpm.
furic acid. This is poisonous and another vehicle, be sure the two
highly corrosive. When jump start- vehicles are not touching.
ing, wear protective glasses and be
careful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the car.
4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
5. Start the engine in the car with the D030A02HP-AAT 4. Check to see if the water pump drive
discharged battery using the nor- If your temperature gauge indicates belt is missing. If it is not missing,
mal starting procedure. After the overheating, you experience a loss of check to see that it is tight. If the
engine starts, leave the jumper power, or hear loud pinging or knock- drive belt seems to be satisfactory,
cables connected and let the engine ing, the engine is probably too hot. If check for engine coolant leaking
run at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for this happens to you, you should: from the radiator, hoses or under
several minutes. the car. (If the air conditioning had
6. carefully remove the jumper cables 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as been in use, it is normal for cold
in the reverse order of attachment. it is safe to do so. water to be draining from it when
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" you stop).
If you do not know why your battery (automatic), or neutral (manual
became discharged (because the lights transmission) and set the parking
were left on, etc.), have the charging
system checked by your Hyundai
brake. If the air conditioning is on, ! WARNING:
turn it off.
dealer. 3. If engine coolant is running out un- While the engine is running, keep
der the car or steam is coming out hands and clothing away from mov-
from under the hood, stop the en- ing parts such as the fan and drive
gine. Do not open the hood until the belts to prevent injury.
engine coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If there
is no visible loss of coolant and no
steam, leave the engine running
and check to be sure the engine
cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
not running, turn the engine off.
3
SPARE TIRE 5
D040A01HP-GAT
! WARNING (Diesel only):

! WARNING:
The following instructions for the FULL
SIZE spare tire should be observed:
Never work on injection system with Do not remove the radiator cap when Check inflation pressure as soon as
engine running or within 30 sec- the engine is hot. This can allow possible after installing the spare tire,
onds after shutting off engine. High coolant to be blown out of the open- and adjust to the specified pressure.
pressure pump, rail, injectors and ing and cause serious burns. The tire pressure should be periodi-
high pressure pipes are subject to cally checked and maintained at the
high pressure even after the engine specified pressure while the tire is
stopped. The fuel jet produced by 6. If you cannot find the cause of the stored.
fuel leaks may cause serious in- overheating, wait until the engine
jury, if it touch the body. People temperature has returned to nor- Spare Tire Pressure
using pacemakers should not move mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
than 30cm closer to the ECU or carefully add coolant to the reser- Tire Size Full Size
wiring harness within the engine voir (Page 6-12) to bring the fluid Inflation Pressure 200 kPa (29 psi)
room while engine is running, since level in the reservoir up to the half-
the high currents in the Common way mark.
Rail system produce considerable 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert
magnetic fields. for further signs of overheating. If
overheating happens again, call a
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
! CAUTION:
nearest Hyundai dealer for assis- Serious loss of coolant indicates
tance. there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by a Hyundai dealer.
6
D040B03HP-GAT 2. Insert the spare wheel rod into the Installation is the reverse order of re-
Handling the Spare Tire hole in the upper pad of the rear moval.
bumper.
3. Connect the wheel nut wrench to
the spare wheel rod. ! CAUTION:
4. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-
When installing, turn the wheel nut
clockwise and the spare tire will
wrench clockwise till you hear the
lower.
crackle once or twice(Tightening
torque : 3.87 kg.m). And make sure
the spare tire is secured in the
proper location.
HHP4015
1. Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack
handle) after folding up the seat
cushion of the second seat .
To fold up the seat cushion, refer to
the page 1-25.
HHP4026
5. Remove the lift plate from the cen-

ter of the spare tire after the spare
tire is lowered completely.
HHP4025
3
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE 7
D050A01HP-GAT D060A02HP-GAT
If a tire goes flat while you are driving: ! WARNING:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator Your vehicle is equipped with tires
pedal and let the car slow down designed to provide for safe ride
while driving straight ahead. Do not and handling capability.
apply the brakes immediately or at- Do not use a size and type of tire
tempt to pull off the road as this may and wheel that is different from the
cause a loss of control. When the one that was originally installed on
car has slowed to such a speed that your vehicle. It can affect the safety
it is safe to do so, brake carefully and performance of your vehicle,
and pull off the road. Drive off the which could lead to handling fail-
D060A01HP
road as far as possible and park on ure or rollover and serious injury.
firm, level ground. If you are on a The procedure described on the fol- When replacing the tires, be sure to
divided highway, do not park in the lowing pages can be used to rotate equip all four tires with the tire and
median area between the two traffic tires as well as to change a flat tire. wheel of the same size, type, tread,
lanes. When preparing to change a flat tire, brand and load-carrying capacity.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on check to be sure the gear selector If you nevertheless decide to equip
your emergency hazard flashers, lever is in "P" (automatic transmission) your vehicle with any tire/wheel
set the parking brake and put the or reverse gear (manual transmission) combination not recommended by
transmission in "P" (automatic trans- and that the parking brake is set, then: Hyundai for off-road driving, you
mission) or reverse (manual trans- should not use these tires for high-
mission). way driving.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4. Change the tire according to the
instructions provided as following.
8
D060B01HP-GAT D060C01A-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool 2. Block the Wheel
HHP4011
o Remove the spare tire and take out Flat tire

HHP4015 HHP4022
the jack and tool bag.
o Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack Block the wheel that is diagonally op-
handle) after folding up the seat posite from the flat tire to keep the
cushion of the second seat .
NOTE: vehicle from rolling when the car is
To fold up the seat cushion, refer to The spare tire is located underneath raised on the jack.
the page 1-25. the car.
3
9
D065C02HP-GAT D060D01A-AAT D060E01A-AAT

3. Removing the Spare Wheel 4. Loosen Wheel Nuts 5. Put the Jack in Place
Cap Front
Pry off the wheel cap, using the bar as
o Alloy Wheel Cap type
HHP4028 HHP4023
The wheel nuts should be loosened Rear

slightly before raising the car. To loosen
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure
that the socket is seated completely
HHP4027 over the nut so it cannot slip off. For
maximum leverage, position the
wrench so the handle is to the right as
shown in the illustration. Then, while
holding the wrench near the end of the
handle, pull up on it with steady pres-
HHP4024
sure. Do not remove the nuts at this
time. Just loosen them about one-half The base of the jack should be placed
turn. on firm, level ground. The jack should
be positioned as shown in the illustra-
tion.
10
D060F02HP-GAT
6. Raising the Car
HHP4016 HHP4018
D060F01HP Using the jack handle, turn the release Move the jack handle up and down to
valve clockwise until it reaches a stop. raise the ram until just before the jack
o Open the lid at the left corner of the contacts the jacking point of the car.
luggage compartment. Position the jack with the jack handle.
o Loosen the hexagonal bolt, and then Position it only at the specified points
take out the jack. indicated in the "Put the Jack in Place".
Use of the jack at other points could
damage the car.
Moving the jack handle up and down to
raise the ram.
HHP4017
Then fit the jack handle into the holder,

and align the groove of the jack handle
with the notch of the holder.
3
11
As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, 4) This jack is hydraulic, and the
double check that it is properly posi- ram is a two stage type. When
tioned and will not slip. both rams are raised and the stop
Raise the car high enough so that the mark of the upper ram becomes
Stop
fully inflated spare tire can be installed. visible, stop jacking immediately.
mark
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
! WARNING:
HHP4019
Do not get under the car when it is
supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
! CAUTION:
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the car while
1) Use only the jack included with the jack is being used.
the vehicle and use it only for
changing a wheel and for in-
stalling tire chains.
HHP4020 2) Position the jack on a hard, level
Using the jack handle, turn the release surface.
3) If the release valve is loosened
valve counterclockwise slow to lower
by turning it 2 or more times in
the ram, and then take out the jack.
When the release valve is difficult to the counterclockwise direction,
the jack's oil will leak and the
turn by jack handle, connect the wheel
jack cannot be used.
nut wrench to the jack handle.
12
D060G02Y-AAT D060H02O-AAT
7. Changing Wheels 8. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
D060G02HP
D060G01HP D060H01HP
Use the wrench to loosen the wheel ! WARNING: To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
nuts, then remove them with your fin- Wheel may have sharp edges. Handle studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs
gers. Slide the wheel off the studs and them carefully to avoid possible se- and tighten them finger tight. The nuts
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put vere injury. should be installed with their small
the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare Before putting the wheel into place, diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle
tire, line up the holes with the studs be sure that there is nothing on the the tire to be sure it is completely
and slide the wheel onto them. If this is hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, seated, then tighten the nuts as much
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get etc.) that interferes with the wheel as possible with your fingers again.
the top hole in the wheel lined up with from fitting solidly against the hub. If
the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel there is, remove it. If there is not good
back and forth until the wheel can be contact on the mounting surface be-
slid over the other studs. tween the wheel and hub, the wheel
nuts could come loose and cause the
loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the vehicle.
This may cause serious injury or death.
3
13
D060J01A-AAT
D060I02HP-GAT Go around the wheel tightening every
9. Lower Vehicle and Tighten other nut until they are all tight. Then AFTER CHANGING WHEELS
Nuts double-check each nut for tightness.
HHP5019
HHP4029
HHP4030 If you have a tire gauge, remove the
Lower the car to the ground by moving valve cap and check the air pressure.
And reinstall the wheel cap by fitting If the pressure is lower than recom-
the jack handle up and down. Then the boss of the wheel cap in the groove
position the wrench as shown in the mended, drive slowly to the nearest
of the wheel, hitting the center of the service station and inflate to the cor-
drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be wheel cap with hand.
sure the socket is seated completely rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it
After changing wheels, have a techni- until it is correct. Always reinstall the
over the nut. Do not stand on the cian tighten the wheel nuts to their
wrench handle or use an extension valve cap after checking or adjusting
proper torque as soon as possible. tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
pipe over the wrench handle.
air may leak from the tire. If you lose a
Wheel nut tightening torque: valve cap, buy another and install it as
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: soon as possible.
900-1,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft) After you have changed wheels, al-
ways secure the flat tire in its place and
return the jack, jack handle, and tools
to their proper storage locations.
14 IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE
TOWED
D080A02HR-GAT D080C02HP-GAT
If your vehicle has to be towed, it Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Ve-
should be done by your Hyundai dealer hicle ! CAUTION:
or a commercial tow truck service. o The 4WD vehicle should never
This will help assure that your vehicle be towed with the wheels on the
is not damaged in towing. Also, profes- ground. This can cause serious
sionals are generally aware of local damage to the transmission or
laws governing towing. In any case, the 4WD system.
rather than risk damage to your car, it o When towing the vehicle, take
is suggested that you show this infor- care not to cause damage to the
mation to the tow truck operator. Be bumper or underbody of the ve-
dolly
sure that a safety chain system is used hicle.
and that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels
off the ground.
dolly
! CAUTION:
o Your vehicle can be damaged if
towed incorrectly!
o Be sure the transmission is in HHP4045
HHP4044
neutral.
o When the engine will not start, be When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must o Do not tow with sling type truck
sure the steering is unlocked by be towed by lifting all 4 wheels or using as this may cause damage to the
placing the key in the "ACC" po- the towing dolly. bumper or underbody of the ve-
sition. hicle.
3
15
D080D03HP-GAT For emergency towing when no com-

Emergency Towing mercial tow vehicle is available, attach
Front a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the
towing hooks under the front/rear of
your car. Be very careful when at-
tempting this procedure when the ve-
hicle is on any unpaved surface to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
Nor should towing be attempted if the
wheels, drive train, axles, steering or
brakes are damaged. Before towing,
HHP4037
be sure the transmission is in neutral
and the key is in "ACC" (with the NOTE:
HHP4035
engine off) or in the "ON" position (with o To do the emergency towing, first
Rear the engine running). A driver must be remove the cover below the
in the towed car to steer it and operate bumper on passenger's side by
the brakes. pulling it
o To avoid serious damage to your
4WD vehicle, limit the towing to
15 km/h (10 mph) and not for
more than 1.5 km (1 mile) at ANY
TIME.
o Before towing, check the level of
the automatic transmission fluid.
HHP4036 If it is below the "HOT" range on
the dipstick, add fluid. If you can-
not add fluid, a towing dolly must
be used.
16 IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-GAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundai

dealers can make you a new key if you
have your key number. If you lock the
keys inside your car and you cannot
obtain a new key, many Hyundai deal-
ers can use special tools to open the
door for you. Information about the key
of immobilizer system (If Installed) will
be found on page 1-5.
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion Protection .................................................... 4-2

To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-3
Washing and Waxing ................................................... 4-4
Cleaning the Interior ..................................................... 4-6
4
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
E010A01A-AAT E010C01A-AAT Mud is particularly corrosive because

Protecting Your Hyundai from High-Corrosion Areas it is slow to dry and holds moisture in
Corrosion If you live in an area where your car is contact with the vehicle. Although the
By using the most advanced design regularly exposed to corrosive materi- mud appears to be dry, it can still retain
and construction practices to combat als, corrosion protection is particularly the moisture and promote corrosion.
corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of important. Some of the common High temperatures can also acceler-
the highest quality, However, this is causes of accelerated corrosion are ate corrosion of parts that are not
only part of the job. To achieve the road salts, dust control chemicals, properly ventilated so the moisture
long-term corrosion resistance your ocean air and industrial pollution. can be dispersed. For all these rea-
Hyundai can deliver, the owner's co- sons, it is particularly important to keep
operation and assistance is also re- your car clean and free of mud or
quired. accumulations of other materials. This
E010D01A-AAT applies not only to the visible surfaces
Moisture Breeds Corrosion but particularly to the underside of the
car.
E010B01A-AAT Moisture creates the conditions in
Common Causes of Corrosion which corrosion is most likely to occur.
The most common causes of corro- For example, corrosion is accelerated
sion on your car are: by high humidity, particularly when tem-
peratures are just above freezing. In
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is such conditions, the corrosive mate-
allowed to accumulate underneath rial is kept in contact with the car
the car. surfaces by moisture that is slow to
o Removal of paint or protective coat- evaporate.
ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or
minor scrapes and dents which leave
unprotected metal exposed to cor-
rosion.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION 3
E020A01A-AAT ing it away will accelerate corrosion E020D01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion from rather than prevent it. Water under Keep Paint and Trim in Good
getting started by observing the follow- high pressure and steam are par- Condition
ing: ticularly effective in removing accu- Scratches or chips in the finish should
mulated mud and corrosive materi- be covered with "touch-up" paint as
als. soon as possible to reduce the possi-
E020B01A-AAT o When cleaning lower door panels, bility of corrosion. If bare metal is show-
Keep Your Car Clean rocker panels and frame members, ing through, the attention of a qualified
be sure that drain holes are kept body and paint shop is recommended.
The best way to prevent corrosion is to open so that moisture can escape
keep your car clean and free of corro- and not be trapped inside to ac-
sive materials. Attention to the under- celerate corrosion.
side of the car is particularly important. E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
o If you live in a high-corrosion area — E020C01A-AAT
where road salts are used, near the Keep Your Garage Dry Moisture can collect under the floor
ocean, areas with industrial pollu- mats and carpeting to cause corro-
tion, acid rain, etc.—, you should Don't park your car in a damp, poorly sion. Check under the mats periodi-
take extra care to prevent corro- ventilated garage. This creates a fa- cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
sion. In winter, hose off the under- vorable environment for corrosion. This Use particular care if you carry fertiliz-
side of your car at least once a is particularly true if you wash your car ers, cleaning materials or chemicals in
month and be sure to clean the in the garage or drive it into the garage the car.
underside thoroughly when winter when it is still wet or covered with These should be carried only in proper
is over. snow, ice or mud. Even a heated ga- containers and any spills or leaks
o When cleaning underneath the car, rage can contribute to corrosion un- should be cleaned up, flushed with
give particular attention to the com- less it is well ventilated so moisture is clear water and thoroughly dried.
ponents under the fenders and other dispersed.
areas that are hidden from view. Do
a thorough job; just dampening the
accumulated mud rather than wash-
4 WASHING AND WAXING
E030A01A-AAT line, strong solvents or abrasive clean- When the weather is warm and the
Washing Your Hyundai ing powders as these may damage the humidity low, you may find it neces-
Never wash your car when the surface finish. sary to rinse each section immediately
is hot from being in the sun. Always Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it after washing to avoid streaking.
wash your car in the shade. frequently and don't damage the finish
by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, After rinsing, dry the car using a damp
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abra- dampen them frequently and remove chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The
sive and can scratch the paint if it is not them a little at a time. reason for drying the car is to remove
removed. Air pollution or acid rain may To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff water from the car so it will dry without
damage the paint and trim through brush or soapy steel-wool scouring water spots. Don't rub, this can dam-
chemical action if pollutants are al- pad. age the finish.
lowed to remain in contact with the
surface. If you live near the ocean or in To clean plastic wheel covers, use a If you find any nicks or scratches in the
an area where road salts or dust con- clean sponge or soft cloth and water. paint, use touch-up paint to cover them
trol chemicals are used, you should to prevent corrosion. To protect the
pay particular attention to the under- To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, paintwork of the car against corrosion,
side of the car. Start by rinsing the car use a mild soap or neutral detergent. you must clean your Hyundai (at least
to remove dust and loose dirt. In win- Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect once a month). Give special attention
ter, or if you have driven through mud the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, to the removal of salt, mud and other
or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly polishing and waxing. Because alumi- substances on the underside of the
clean the underside as well. Use a num is subject to corrosion, be sure to splashboards of the car. Make sure
hard direct stream of water to remove give aluminum alloy wheels special that the outlets and the underside of
accumulations of mud or corrosive attention in winter. If you drive on the doors are open. Paint damage can
materials. Use a good quality car-wash- salted roads, clean the wheels thor- be caused by small accumulation of
ing solution and follow the manufac- oughly afterwards. tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin,
turer's directions on the package. insects and bird droppings, when not
These are available at your Hyundai After washing, be sure to rinse thor- removed immediately.
dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use oughly. If soapy water dries on the
strong household detergents, gaso- finish, streaking will result.
4
5
If water alone is not strong enough to E030C01A-AAT E030E01A-AAT
remove the accumulated dirt, use a Polishing and Waxing Maintaining Bumpers
mild car washing solution. Be sure to Always wash and dry the car before Special precautions must be observed
rinse the surface after washing to re- polishing or waxing or using a combi- to preserve the appearance of the
move the solution. Never allow the nation cleaner and wax. Use a good bumpers on your Hyundai. They are:
solution to dry on the painted surfaces. quality commercial product and follow
the manufacturer's directions on the o Be careful not to spill battery elec-
container. Polish and wax the bright trolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the
E030B01A-AAT trim pieces as well as the paint. bumpers. If you do, wash it off
Spot Cleaning immediately with clean water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or E030D01A-AAT surfaces. They are made of soft
corrosive cleaning agents. These can When to Wax Again plastic and the surface can be dam-
damage the finish of the car. To re- aged if mistreated. Do not use abra-
move road tar, use turpentine on a You should polish and wax the car
again when water no longer beads on sive cleaners. Use warm water and
clean, soft cloth or commercially avail- mild soap or car-washing solution.
able bug and tar remover. Be gentle. a clean surface but spreads out over a
larger area. o Do not expose the bumpers to high
To remove dead insects or tree sap, temperatures. For example, if you
use warm water and mild soap or car- have your car repainted, do not
washing solution. Soak the spot and leave the bumpers on the car if the
rub gently. If the paint has lost its car is going to be placed in a high-
luster, use a commercial car-cleaning temperature paint booth.
polish.
6 CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E040A01A-AAT E040B01A-AAT During tanning operations, sufficient

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery To Clean the Leather Upholstery oils are incorporated through process-
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first re- (If Installed) ing that none need be applied during
move loose dirt and dust with a vacuum In the normal course of use, leather the life of the leather. Oil applied to the
cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild upholstered surfaces will, like any finished surface will in no way help the
soap or detergent and water using a material, pick-up dust and dirt. This leather and may do more harm than
clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it good. Varnishes and furniture polishes
stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, may work into the surface of the leather, should never be used under any con-
then wipe with a clean damp sponge or causing damage. ditions.
cloth. If all the dirt stains are not re-
moved, repeat this procedure until the Fine leather needs care, and should
upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso- be cleaned when necessary. Washing E040C01A-AAT
line, solvent, paint thinner or other leather thoroughly with soap and water Cleaning the Carpets
strong cleaners. will keep your leather lustrous, beauti- Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-
ful and ensure you have many years of ers of this type are available in aerosol
wear. cans in liquid form or powder. Read the
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using instructions and follow them exactly.
any mild soap and lukewarm water, Using a vacuum cleaner with the ap-
work up a good lather. Thoroughly propriate attachment, remove as much
wash the leather. Wipe clean with a dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply
slightly damp cloth and dry with soft the foam following the manufacturer's
cloth. Do this as often as the leather directions, then rub in overlapping
becomes soiled. circles. Do not add water. These clean-
ers work best when the carpet is kept
as dry as possible.
4
ANY QUESTIONS? 7
E040D01A-AAT E050A01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts If you have any questions about the
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or care of your car, consult your Hyundai
sponge with mild soap or detergent dealer.
and warm water. Do not use strong
detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive
materials on the seat belts as this may
weaken the fabric.
While cleaning the belts, inspect them
for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or
other signs of damage and replace
them if necessary.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window
cleaner on the windows. However,
when cleaning the inside of the rear
window be careful not to damage the
rear window defroster wiring.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 5-2

Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-8
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-9
5 5
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
F010A01A-GAT F010B01A-AAT It is suggested that genuine Hyundai

Service Requirements Maintenance Requirements service parts be used for any required
To assure that you receive the great- The maintenance required for your repairs or replacements. Other parts of
est number of kilometers of satisfying Hyundai can be divided into three main equivalent quality such as engine oil,
operation from your Hyundai, certain areas: engine coolant, manual or auto trans-
maintenance procedures must be permission oil, brake fluid and so on
formed. Although careful design and o Specified scheduled procedures which are not supplied by Hyundai
engineering have reduced these to a o General checks Motor Company or its distributor may
minimum, those that are required are o Do-it-yourself maintenance be used without affecting your war-
of the utmost importance. ranty coverage but you should always
It is your responsibility to have these be sure these are equivalent to the
maintenance procedures performed to quality of the original Hyundai parts.
comply with the terms of the warran- F010C01HP-GAT Your Service Passport provides fur-
ties covering your new Hyundai. The Specified Scheduled Procedures ther information about your warranty
Service Passport supplied with your coverage.
These are the procedures such as
new vehicle provides further informa- inspections, adjustments and replace-
tion about these warranties. ments that are listed in the mainte-
nance charts starting on page 5-4. F010D01A-AAT
These procedures must be performed General Checks

at the intervals shown in the mainte- These are the regular checks you
nance schedule to assure that your should perform when you drive your
warranty remains in effect. Although it Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list
is strongly recommended that they be of these items will be found on page 6-
performed by the factory-trained or 5.
distributor-trained technicians at your
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may
be performed at any qualified service
facility.
5
SCHEDULED MAINTE- 3
NANCE REQUIREMENTS
F010E01A-AAT F020A01Y-GAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance Inspection should be performed any
If you are mechanically inclined, own a time a malfunction is experienced or
few tools that are required and want to suspected. Receipts for all emission
take the time to do so, you can inspect control system services should be re-
and service a number of items. For tained to demonstrate compliance with
more information about doing it your- conditions of the emissions system
self, see Section 6. warranty.
For severe usage maintenance require-
ments, see page 5-8 of this section.
F010F01A-GAT
A Few Tips
Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-
viced, keep copies of the service
records in your glove box. This will
help ensure that you can document
that the required procedures have been
performed to keep your warranties in
effect. This is especially important
when service is not performed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
F030A01A-GAT
The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for
all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined
by whichever occurs first.
F030B03HP-GAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (GASOLINE ENGINE)
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R R R R R R R R
2 DRIVE BELT (ALT, DAMPER, TENSIONER, IDLER) I I I I I I I I
3 FUEL FILTER (MPI TYPE) R R
4 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I
5 TIMING BELT I R
6 VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP I I I I I I I I
7 CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES I I I I
8 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I R
9 SPARK PLUGS See Note (1)
SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) See Note (2)
Note: (1) Every 40,000km : "R"
(2) Every 100,000km : "R"
5
5
F030D04HP-GAT
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL ENGINE (2.5 TCI))
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER European Community Only See Note (1)
(API CF-4 OR ABOVE, ACEA B2 OR B3) Except European Community See Note (2)
3 FUEL FILTER R R R R
4 VALVE CLEARANCE I I I I I I I I
5 INJECTION TIMING I I I I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE AND VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I I
8 TIMING BELT I R I
9 DRIVE BELT (FOR WATER PUMP/ALTERNATOR) I I I R I I I R
10 ENGINE IDLE SPEED I I I I I I I I
11 FUEL SYSTEM LEAKS I I I I I I I I
12 INJECTION NOZZLE I I I I
Note: (1) For every 7,500 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
(2) For every 5,000 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
6
F030E06HP-GAT
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL ENGINE (2.9 CRDi))
1 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (API CF-4 Europe Countries Only R R R R R R R R
OR ABOVE, ACEA B4 OR ABOVE) Except Europe Countries See Note (1)
3 FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE Central and South America Only R R R R R R R R
Except Central and South America I R I R I R I R
4 TIMING BELT R
5 DRIVE BELT (FOR AIR COMPRESSOR, ALTERNATOR) I I I I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE & VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I I
8 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I I
Note: (1) For every 10,000 km or 6 months, whichever occurs first : "R"
5
7
F030C08HP-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
KILOMETERS X 1000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I I I I
2 COOLANT GASOLINE ENGINE See Note (1)
DIESEL ENGINE R R R R
3 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I I I I
4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION European Community Only I I I I I R I I
FLUID Except European Community I I I I I I I I
5 BRAKE HOSES AND LINES I I I I I I I I
6 BRAKE FLUID, CLUTCH FLUID I I I I I I I I
7 REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I I I I I I I I
8 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I I I I I I I I
9 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER I I I I I I I I
10 SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS I I I I I I I I
11 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
I I I I I I I I
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
12 POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES I I I I I I I I
13 DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I I I I
14 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT I I I I I I I I
15 TRANSFER CASE OIL I I I I I I I I
16 AXLE GEAR OIL R I I R I I R I
17 PROPELLER SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN I I I I
18 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) R R R R R R R R
Note: (1) FOR EVERY 24 MONTHS OR 45,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"
8 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A07HP-GAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the
chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (Gasoline Engine) EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER European Community Only EVERY 4,000 KM
(Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)) Except European Community R EVERY 3,000 KM
A, B, F, G, H, I, J
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Europe Countries Only EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS
(Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)) Except Europe Countries EVERY 5,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS (For Gasoline Engine) R MORE FREQUENTLY G, H, I, J
TIMING BELT R EVERY 60,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE AND BOOTS/
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 15,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS C, D, E, F
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL R EVERY 100,000 KM A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION European Community Only EVERY 45,000 KM
R A, C, E, F, G, H, I
FLUID Except European Community EVERY 40,000 KM
TRANSFER CASE OIL *1 R EVERY 100,000 KM C, E, G, H, I
AXLE GEAR OIL *1 R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E, G, H, I
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) R MORE FREQUENTLY C,E
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 8km(5miles) in E - Driving in sandy areas
normal temperature or less than 16km(10miles) in freezing F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C(90°F)
temperature G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- J - Driving over 170 Km/h(100 MPH)
spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
cold weather
*1: Transfer Case Oil and Axle Gear Oil should be checked (and replaced if necessary) anytime they have been submerged in water over 40cm (15.7 in.) deep.
5
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS 9
F060M01A-AAT F060C01A-AAT F060D01TB-GAT

o Engine Oil and Filter o Fuel filter o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at Connections
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, dam- Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
the maintenance schedule. If the car age the emission system and cause connections for leakage and damage.
is being driven in severe conditions, hard starting. If an excessive amount Have a trained technician replace any
more frequent oil and filter changes of foreign matter accumulates in the damaged or leaking parts immediately.
are required. fuel tank, the filter may require re-
placement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
F060B01A-AAT
engine for several minutes, and check ! WARNING (Diesel only):
for leaks at the connections. Fuel fil- Never work on injection system with
o Drive belts ters should be installed by trained engine running or within 30 sec-
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of technicians. onds after shutting off engine. High
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil pressure pump, rail, injectors and
saturation and replace if necessary. high pressure pipes are subjected
Drive belts should be checked periodi- to high pressure even after the en-
cally for proper tension and adjusted gine has been switched off. The fuel
as necessary. jet produced by fuel leaks may cause
serious injury, if it contacts with the
body. People using pacemakers
should not move closer than 30cm
to the ECU or wiring harness within
the engine room with the engine
running, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
10
F060E01A-AAT F060F0HP-AAT F060H01A-AAT

o Timing belt o Crankcase Ventilation Hoses o Air Cleaner Filter
Inspect all parts related to the timing Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
belt for damage and deformation. Re- dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- recommended when the filter is re-
place any damaged parts immediately. age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, placed.
tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling indicate deterioration. Particu-
lar attention should be paid to examine F060J01A-AAT
F060G01A-AAT those hose surfaces nearest to high o Spark Plugs
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap heat sources, such as the exhaust (For Gasoline Engine)
manifold.
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect the hose routing to assure that Make sure to install new spark plugs
should be inspected at those intervals the hoses do not come in contact with of the correct heat range.
specified in the maintenance sched- any heat source, sharp edges or mov-
ule. Make sure that a new vapor hose ing component which might cause heat
or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced. damage or mechanical wear. Inspect F070B01A-GAT
all hose connections, such as clamps o Cooling System

and couplings, to make sure they are Check the cooling system part, such
secure, and that no leaks are present. as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses
Hoses should be replaced immedi- and connections for leakage and dam-
ately if there is any evidence of dete- age. Replace any damaged parts.
rioration or damage.
F070C01A-AAT
o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
5
11
F070D01A-AAT F070F01A-AAT F070J01A-AAT

o Manual Transmission Oil o Brake Hoses and Lines o Brake Pads, Calipers and
Inspect the manual transmission oil Visually check for proper installation, Rotors
according to the maintenance sched- chafing, cracks, deterioration and any Check the pads for excessive wear,
ule. leakage. Replace any deteriorated or discs for run out and wear, and cali-
damaged parts immediately. pers for fluid leakage.
NOTE:
If the oil level is low, check for
possible leaks before adding oil. Do F070G02A-AAT F070K01A-AAT
not overfill. o Brake Fluid o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Check brake fluid level in the brake Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
fluid reservoir. The level should be muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
F070E03HP-GAT between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on rioration, or damage. Start the engine
o Automatic Transmission Fluid the side of the reservoir. Use only and listen carefully for any exhaust
The fluid level should be in the "HOT" hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT gas leakage. Tighten connections or
range of the dipstick, after the engine 3 or DOT 4. replace parts as necessary.
and transmission are at normal operat-
ing temperature. Check the automatic F070H01A-AAT
F070L01A-AAT
transmission fluid level with the engine o Rear Brake Drums/ Linings
running and the transmission in neu- o Suspension Mounting Bolts
Parking Brake
tral, with the parking brake properly Check the suspension connections for
applied. Use MOBIL DEXRON-II when Check the rear brake drums and lin- looseness or damage. Retighten to the
adding or changing fluid. ings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, specified torque.
broken parts, and excessive wear. In-
spect the parking brake system in-
cluding the parking brake lever and
cables. For detailed service proce-
dures, refer to the Shop Manual.
12
F070M01B-AAT F070P01A-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & o Drive Shafts and Boots
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Check the drive shafts, boots and
Upper Arm Ball Joint clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
With the vehicle stopped and engine damage. Replace any damaged parts
off, check for excessive free-play in and, if necessary, repack the grease.
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball F070Q01A-AAT
joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam- o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
age. Replace any damaged parts.
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
F070N01A-AAT
Check air conditioning performance
o Power Steering Pump, Belt according to the relevant shop manual
and Hoses if necessary.
Check the power steering pump and

hoses for leakage and damage. Re-
place any damaged or leaking parts
immediately. Inspect the power steer-
ing belt for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper
tension. Replace or adjust it if neces-
sary.
Engine Compartment ................................................... 6-2

General Checks ........................................................... 6-5
Checking the Engine Oil.............................................. 6-6
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter .......................... 6-10
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ........... 6-11
Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-14
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................ 6-15
Checking the Transmission Oil (Manual) .................. 6-18
6
Checking the Transmission Fluid (Automatic) .......... 6-20
Checking the Brakes ................................................. 6-22
Checking the Clutch Fluid ......................................... 6-24
Air Conditioning Care ................................................ 6-24 6
Changing the Air Conditioner Filter .......................... 6-26
Checking Drive Belts ................................................. 6-29
Checking and Replacing Fuses ................................ 6-30
Checking The Battery ................................................ 6-32
Checking The Eclectric Cooling Fans ....................... 6-34
Power Steering Fluid Level ....................................... 6-34
Fuel Filter ................................................................... 6-35
Replacement of Headlight Bulbs ............................... 6-39
Headlight Aiming Adjustment .................................... 6-40
Bulb Wattages ............................................................ 6-43
Fuse Panel Description ............................................. 6-44
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine (3.5 V6)
! CAUTION:
When inspecting or servic-
ing the engine, you should
handle tools and other
heavy objects carefully so
that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.
G010A01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 6. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser- 10.Automatic Transmission Fluid
2. Battery voir Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto-
3. Engine Cover 7. Air Cleaner Filter matic Transmission)
4. Brake Fluid Reservoir 8. Radiator Cap 11.Engine Oil Level Dipstick
5. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9. Engine Oil Filler Cap 12.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
6
3
G010B01HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
! CAUTION:
G010B01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 5. Engine Oil Level Dipstick 10.Windshield Washer Fluid Reser-
2. Battery 6. Engine Cover voir
3. Automatic Transmission Fluid 7. Brake Fluid Reservoir 11.Air Cleaner Filter
Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto- 8. Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Installed) 12.Radiator Cap
matic Transmission) 9. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 13.Fuel Filter
4. Engine Oil Filler Cap 14.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
4
G010C01HP-GAT
! CAUTION:
G010C01HP
1. Fuse and Relay Box 6. Brake Fluid Reservoir 10.Automatic Transmission Fluid
2. Battery 7. Windshield Washer Fluid Reser- Level Dipstick (Vehicle With Auto-
3. Engine Oil Level Dipstick voir matic Transmission)
4. Engine Cover 8. Air Cleaner Filter 11.Fuel Filter
5. Engine Oil Filler Cap 9. Radiator Cap 12.Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
13.Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
6
GENERAL CHECKS 5
G020A01HP-GAT G020B01A-AAT o Defroster, heating system opera-

Engine Compartment Vehicle Exterior tion (and air conditioning, if in-
The following should be checked regu- The following should be checked stalled)
larly: monthly: o Steering operation and condition
o Mirror condition and operation
o Engine oil level and condition o Overall appearance and condition o Turn signal operation
o Transmission fluid level and condi- o Wheel condition and wheel nut o Accelerator pedal operation
tion torque o Brake operation, including parking
o Brake fluid level o Exhaust system condition brake
o Clutch fluid level o Light condition and operation o Manual transmission operation, in-
o Engine coolant level o Windshield glass condition cluding clutch operation
o Windshield washer fluid level o Wiper blade condition o Automatic transmission operation,
o Accessory drive belt condition o Paint condition and body corrosion including "Park" mechanism opera-
o Engine coolant hose condition o Fluid leaks tion
o Fluid leaks o Door and hood lock condition o Seat control condition and opera-
(on or below components) o Tire pressure and condition tion
o Power steering fluid level (including spare tire) o Seat belt condition and operation
o Battery condition o Sun visor operation
o Air filter condition
If you notice anything that does not
G020C01HP-GAT operate correctly or appears to be
Vehicle Interior functioning incorrectly, inspect it care-
fully and seek assistance from your
The following should be checked each Hyundai dealer if service is needed.
time when the vehicle is driven:
o Lights operation
o Windshield wiper operation
o Horn operation
6 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
G030A01A-AAT G030B05HP-GAT
NOTE:
Engine oil is essential to the perfor- Recommended Oil o For good fuel economy, SAE
mance and service of the engine. It is 1. Gasoline Engine 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-
suggested that you check the oil level (1) Select engine oil of the proper gine oil is preferred regardless
at least once a week in normal use SAE viscosity number according of regional option and engine
and more often if you are on a trip or to the atmospheric temperature. variation.
driving in severe conditions. Recommended viscosity is given o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 en-
in the following illustration. gine oil is not available, second-
ary recommended engine oil for
corresponding temperature
range can be used.
2. Diesel Engine
(1) Select engine oil of the proper
SAE viscosity number according
to the atmospheric temperature.
Recommended viscosity is given
in the following illustration.
2.5 TCI
G030B01JM
(2) The engine oil quality should meet

the following classification.
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE
G030B01HR
6
7
2.9 CRDi
(2) The engine oil quality should meet G030C02HP-AAT
the following API classification: To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) : engine to the normal operating tem-
CF-4 or ABOVE perature and be sure your car is
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) : parked on level ground. Turn the en-
CF-4 or ABOVE gine off.
(3) The engine oil quality should meet Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
the following ACEA classification :
G030B03HP
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) : B2 or B3
NOTE: Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) : B4 or
For diesel-powered vehicle SAE ABOVE
0W-30 (2.5 TCI) or SAE 5W-30(2.9
CRDi) oil should be used only in
areas where extremely cold tem-
peratures of 10°C(50°F) or below
are experienced. G030C03HP
For diesel-powered vehicle, if the
NOTE:
atmospheric temperatures are 0°C
Before checking or adding the
(32°F) or below, SAE #30 oil must
engine oil, remove the cover above
not be used. This oil should be
the engine oil filler cap and the
used only in areas where the at-
engine oil level dipstick with a
mospheric temperatures are 0°C
blade screwdriver inserted in the
(32°F) or above.
notch (2.5 TCI only).
8
G030D02HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
Adding Oil
Gasoline Engine
G030C01HP HHP5002
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) Wait ten minutes, then remove the G030D01HP
dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the
dipstick and withdraw it again. Then Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
note the highest level the oil has
reached on the dipstick. It should be
between the upper ("F") and lower
("L") range.
! WARNING:
G030C02HP
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking the G030D02HP
engine oil as it may be hot enough
to burn you.
6
9
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) Engine oil consumption

! CAUTION: It is normal that an engine should
Slowly pour the recommended oil consume some engine oil while nor-
using by a funnel. Do not overfill mal driving. The cause of oil con-
not to damage engine. sumption in a normal engine are as
follows;
o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis-

! WARNING:
tons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the
HHP5003
Be very careful not to touch the cylinder wall when a piston moves
radiator hose when adding the en- downwards in the cylinder. High
If the oil level is close to or below the gine oil as it may be hot enough to negative pressure generated dur-
"L" mark, add oil until it reaches the burn you. ing engine operation sucks some
"F" mark. To add oil:
of the oil into the combustion cham-
ber.
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning
This oil with some oil of the cylin-
it counterclockwise.
der wall is burned by the high tem-
2. Add oil, then check the level again.
perature combustion gases during
Do not overfill. G350A01A-GAT the combustion process.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clock- ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION o The engine oil consumption is
wise. Function of Engine Oil strongly effected by the viscosity
Engine oil has the primary function of and quality of oil, engine rpm and
The distance between the "F" and "L"
lubricating and cooling the inside of driving condition etc. The engine
marks is equal to about 1 liter (Gaso-
the engine. oil is more consumed under severe
line Engine/Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))/
driving conditions such as high
1.4 liters (Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi))
speeds and frequent acceleration
of oil.
and deceleration than normal driv-
ing condition.
10 CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
AND FILTER
G040A03HP-GAT
Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) matic transmission) or reverse gear
Gasoline Engine Oil filler cap (manual transmission).
2. Open the hood and remove the
Oil filler engine oil filler cap.
cap 3. Slide underneath the car and loosen
the drain plug by turning it counter-
clockwise with a wrench of the
proper size. Be sure that a drain
pan is in position to catch the oil as
it drains out, then remove the drain
Oil filter Oil filter plug.
Drain plug Drain plug HHP5004
G040A01HP
The engine oil and filter should be
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) Oil filler changed at those intervals specified
cap in the maintenance schedule in Sec-
tion 5. If the car is being driven in
! WARNING:
severe conditions, more frequent oil Be very careful when draining the
and filter changes are required. engine oil as it may be hot enough
Oil filter to burn you!
The procedure for changing the oil
and filter is as follows:
4. When the oil has stopped draining,
1. Park the car on level ground and replace the drain plug using a new
set the parking brake. Start the gasket and retighten by turning it
Drain plug G040A02HP
engine and let it warm up until the clockwise.
needle on the coolant temperature
gauge moves above the lowest Oil pan drain plug tightening
mark. Turn the engine off and place torque: 3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m
the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-
6
CHECKING AND CHANGING 11
THE ENGINE COOLANT
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it 9. Start the engine and check to be G050A01A-AAT
counterclockwise with a oil filter sure no oil is leaking from the

wrench of the proper size. A cer-
tain amount of oil will come out
drain plug or oil filter.
10.Shut off the engine and recheck
! WARNING:
when you remove the filter. So be the oil level. Do not remove the radiator cap
sure to have your drain pan in when the engine is hot. When the
place underneath it. NOTE: engine is hot, the engine coolant
6. Install a new oil filter in accordance Always dispose of used engine oil is under pressure and may erupt
with the instructions on the carton in an environmentally acceptable through the opening if the cap is
or on the filter itself. Do not over- manner. It is suggested that it be removed. You could be seriously
tighten (Tightening torque: Gaso- placed in a sealed container and burned if you do not observe this
line- 1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m, Diesel - 2.3 taken to a service station for recla- precaution. Do not remove the
~ 2.5 kgf.m). Be sure that the mation. Do not pour the oil on the radiator cap until the radiator is
mounting surface on the engine is ground or put it into the house- cool to touch.
clean and that the old gasket is hold trash.
removed completely. Lubricate the
new gasket on the filter with clean
engine oil before installation.
7. Remove the engine oil level dip- ! WARNING:
stick.
Used motor oil may cause irrita-
8. Refill the crankcase with the rec-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
ommended engine oil slowly. Refer
contact with the skin for prolonged
to the specification in chapter 9 for
periods of time. Wash your hands
engine oil capacity.
thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after
! CAUTION: handling used oil.
Slowly pour the recommended oil
by using a funnel. Do not overfill
not to damage the engine.
12
G050B01A-DAT G050C01A-AAT G050D02HP-GAT

Recommended Engine Coolant To Check the Coolant Level To Change the Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol
The engine coolant should be changed
coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The
at those intervals specified in the ve-
engine coolant should be compatible
hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
with aluminum engine parts. Addi-
tion 5.
tional corrosion inhibitors or additives
should not be used. The cooling sys-
tem must be maintained with the cor-
rect concentration and type of engine
! CAUTION:
coolant to prevent freezing and corro- Engine coolant can damage the
sion. Never allow the concentration of finish of your car. If you spill en-
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or gine coolant on the car, wash it off
go below the 35% level, otherwise HHP5005 thoroughly with clean water.
damage to the cooling system may The coolant level can be seen on the
result. For proper concentration when side of the plastic coolant reservoir. 1. Park the car on level ground, set
adding or replacing the engine cool- The level of the coolant should be the parking brake and remove the
ant, refer to the following table. between the "LOW" and "FULL" lines radiator cap when cool.
on the reservoir when the engine is
Gasoline Engine only
Ambient Engine Coolant concentration cool. If the level is below the "LOW"
temperature Antifreeze mark, add engine coolant to bring it
Water up between "LOW" and "FULL". If the
°C ( °F) solution
level is low, inspect for coolant leaks
-15 (5) 35% 65% and recheck the fluid level frequently.
-25 (-13) 40% 60% If the level drops again, visit your
-35 (-31) 50% 50% Hyundai dealer for an inspection and
diagnosis of the reason.
-45 (-49) 60% 40%
G050D02HP
6
13
NOTE: Gasoline Engine Only Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi) 4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of
Before adding the coolant to the the cooling system in your car.
radiator, unscrew the bolts on the Then, following the manufacturer’s
engine cover, remove the engine directions on the engine coolant
cover and unscrew the flange bolt container, add the appropriate
for fitting water outlet to escape quantity of coolant to the radiator.
the excess pressure. And if the 5. Fill the radiator with clean deminer-
coolant overflows from the hole alized or distilled water. Continue
while adding the coolant, screw to add clean demineralized or dis-
the bolt and continue to add the tilled water in small quantities until
coolant. the fluid level stays up in the radia-
HHP5006 tor neck.
Gasoline Engine or Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclock-
wise without pressing down on it,
until it stops. This relieves any pres-
sure remaining in the cooling sys-
tem. And remove the radiator cap
by pushing down and turning coun-
terclockwise.
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in
place. Open the drain cock on the
radiator. Allow all the engine cool-
G050D01HP ant to drain from the cooling sys-
tem, then securely close the drain HHP5008
cock.
14 SPARK PLUGS
6. Start the engine, top off the radia- G060A01HP-GAT G060B01HP-AAT
tor with water and then add coolant (Gasoline Engine Only) Replacing the Spark Plugs
to the reservoir until the level is The spark plugs should be changed
between "LOW" and "FULL". at the intervals specified in the ve-
7. Replace the radiator and reservoir
Leaded : 0.7 ~ 0.8mm

Unleaded: 1.0 ~ 1.1mm
caps and check to be sure the tion 5 or whenever engine perfor-
drain cocks are fully closed and not mance indicates they should be
leaking. changed. Symptoms that suggest poor
spark plug performance include en-
gine misfiring under load, loss of fuel
! WARNING:
economy, poor acceleration, etc.
When spark plugs are replaced, al-
The cooling fan is controlled by G060A01L ways use spark plugs recommended
engine coolant temperature and by Hyundai. The use of other spark
may sometimes operate even when Your engine was originally equipped plugs can result in loss of perfor-
the engine is not running. Use with platinum-tipped spark plugs. mance, radio interference or engine
extreme caution when working near Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last damage.
the blades of the coolant fan so longer than conventional type spark
that you are not injured by a rotat- plugs and can be identified by blue
Recommended Spark Plugs:
ing fan blade. As the engine cool- lines on the ceramic shell.
ant temperature decreases, the fan Type Remark
will automatically shut off. This is NOTE: RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)
a normal condition. Do not clean or regap platinum- Unleaded*
tipped spark plugs. PFR5N-11 (NGK)
RC10YC(CHAMPION)
Leaded
BKR5ES (NGK)
*: Platinum coated
6
CHANGING THE AIR 15
CLEANER FILTER
NOTE: G070A03Y-AAT
o When replacing the spark plug,

genuine Hyundai parts are rec-
! CAUTION:
ommended. o Operating your vehicle without
o It is recommended that the spark a proper air cleaner filter in place
plugs be changed by an autho- can result in excessive engine
rized Hyundai dealer. wear.
o When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
! WARNING: does not enter the air intake.
It is recommended that the engine These may result in damage to
be cool or cold when changing the the air cleaner filter.
HHP5013
spark plugs. If the engine is hot,
The replacement of air cleaner filter is
you could burn yourself on the
performed in the following manner.
insulated connector, the spark plug
or the engine itself.
1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.
2. When this is done, the cover can
be lifted off, the old filter removed
and the new filter put in its place.
Genuine Hyundai replacement parts

are recommended.
16 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
G080A02A-AAT G080B01HR-GAT
Replacing the Wiper Blades
! CAUTION: To replace the wiper blades, raise the
o Do not operate the wipers on wiper to the vertical.
dry glass. This can result in more
rapid wear of the wiper blades
To remove the wiper blade
and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products
such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
HHP5045-D
The wiper blades should be carefully

inspected from time to time and
cleaned to remove accumulations of
road film or other debris. To clean the
(1)
wiper blades and arms, use a clean
HHR5048
sponge or cloth with a mild soap or
detergent and water. If the wipers 1. Push down the wiper blade with
continue to streak or smear the glass, the locking clip (1) pressed to de-
replace them with genuine Hyundai tach it from the wiper arm.
replacement parts or their equivalent.
6
17
To install the wiper blade
HHR5049 HHR5051
HHR5050 2. Pull up the wiper blade until you

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and hear an audible "click" to engage in
pull up it. 1. Put a new wiper blade onto the
the end of the wiper arm.
wiper arm and lower the wiper blade
at the level of the wiper arm as
shown in the drawing. NOTE:
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield.
18 FILLING THE WASHER RES- CHECKING THE TRANSMIS-
ERVOIR SION OIL (MANUAL)
G090A02HP-AAT G100A04HP-GAT
! CAUTION:
o Radiator antifreeze (engine cool-
ant) should not be used in the
washer system because it will
damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be oper-
ated if the washer reservoir is
empty. This can damage the
washer fluid pump. Drain plug
Filler plug
HHP5017 HHP5010
The washer fluid reservoir supplies

fluid to the windshield washer sys-
! WARNING:
Transmission lubricant in the manual
transmission should be checked at
tem. o Windshield washer fluid agents those intervals specified in the ve-
A good quality washer fluid should be contain some amounts of alco- hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-
used to fill the washer reservoir. The hol and can be flammable under tion 5.
fluid level should be checked more certain circumstances. Do not
frequently during inclement weather allow sparks or flame to contact Recommended Oil
or whenever the washer system is in the washer fluid or the washer
more frequent use. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE
fluid reservoir. Damage to the PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) in
The capacity of the washer reservoir vehicle or its occupants could
is 4.5 liters. the manual transmission.
occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
6
19
Manual Transmission Oil Capac- G100B01HP-GAT 2. Use your finger to feel inside the
ity To Check the Manual transmis- hole. The oil level should be at its
sion Fluid Level bottom edge. If it is not, check for
The oil capacity of the manual trans- leaks before adding oil. To refill the
mission is; transmission or bring the oil level
up,add oil slowly until it reaches
Engine Capacity
the proper level. Do not overfill.
Gasoline 3. Replace the plug and washer,
3.2 liters screw it in with your fingers and
Diesel (2.9 CRDi)
then tighten securely with the
Diesel (2.5 TCI) 2.5 liters wrench.
! WARNING:
G100B01L
It is always better to check the Park the car on level ground with the
transmission oil level when the engine off.
engine is cool or cold. If the en-
gine is hot, you should exercise 1. Using a wrench of the correct size,
great caution to avoid burning loosen the oil filler plug by turning
yourself on hot engine or exhaust it counterclockwise and remove it
parts. with your fingers.
20 CHECKING THE TRANSMIS-
SION FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
G110A02HP-AAT G110B02HP-GAT G110D02HP-GAT
Transmission fluid in the automatic Recommended Fluid To Check the Transmission Fluid
transmission should be checked at Your Hyundai automatic transmission Level
those intervals specified in the ve- is specially designed to operate with Park the car on level ground with the
hicle maintenance schedule in Sec- MOBIL DEXRON-II. Damage caused parking brake engaged. When the
tion 5. by a nonspecified fluid is not covered transmission fluid level is checked,
by your new vehicle limited warranty. the transmission fluid should be at
NOTE: normal operating temperature and the
Automatic transmission fluid is engine idling.
basically a red color. As driving G110C03HP-GAT
distance increases, the fluid color Transmission Fluid Capacity

turns darkish red gradually. It is The fluid capacity of the automatic
normal condition and you should transmission is;
not judge the need to replace based
up on the changing color. Engine Capacity
You must replace the automatic Gasoline 10.5 liters
transmission fluid in accordance
with intervals specified in the ve- Diesel (2.9 CRDi) 11.8 liters
hicle maintenance schedule in sec- Diesel (2.5 TCI) 8.2 liters
tion 5.
HHP3018
! WARNING: While the engine is idling, apply the
The transmission fluid level should brakes and move the gear selector
be checked when the engine is at lever from "P" to each of its other
normal operating temperature. This positions — "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" —
means that the engine, radiator, and then return to "N" or "P". With the
exhaust system etc., are very hot. engine still idling:
Exercise great care not to burn
yourself during this procedure.
6
21
1. Open the hood, being careful to Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)

keep hands, long hair and clothing
clear of any moving parts.
Gasoline Engine
Fluid level should be within "HOT" range
HHP5009 G110D04HP
2. Remove the transmission dipstick, 3. If the transmission fluid level is

wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick low, use a funnel to add transmis-
G110D01HP
as far as it will go, then remove it sion fluid through the dipstick tube
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) again. Now check the fluid level on until the level reaches the "HOT"
the dipstick. It should be in the range. Do not overfill.
"HOT" range on the dipstick.
G110D02HP
22 CHECKING THE BRAKES
G120A01A-AAT
! WARNING:
! WARNING (Diesel only): !
The cooling fan is controlled by Never work on injection system CAUTION:
engine coolant temperature and with engine running or within 30 Because brakes are essential to
may sometimes operate even when seconds after shutting off engine. the safe operation of the car, it is
the engine is not running. Use High pressure pump, rail, injec- suggested that they be checked
extreme caution when working near tors and high pressure pipes are and inspected by your Hyundai
the blades of the cooling fan, so subjected to high pressure even dealer. The brakes should be
that you are not injured by a rotat- after the engine has been switched checked and inspected for wear at
ing fan blade. As the engine cool- off. The fuel jet produced by fuel those intervals specified in the
ant temperature decreases, the fan leaks may cause serious injury, if vehicle maintenance schedule in
will automatically shut off. This is it contacts with the body. People Section 5.
a normal condition. using pacemakers should not
move closer than 30cm to the ECU
or wiring harness within the en-
gine room with the engine run-
ning, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
6
23
G120B02A-AAT G120D01A-AAT G120E02A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level To Check the Fluid Level Adding Brake Fluid
! WARNING: ! WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake
fluid. It can damage your vision if Handle brake fluid carefully. It can
damage your vision if it gets into
it gets into your eyes. It will also
damage your vehicle’s paint if your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT
spilled on it and not removed im- 4 specification fluid from a sealed
container. Do not allow the fluid
mediately.
can or reservoir to remain open
any longer than required. This will
G120C02A-AAT HHP5015
prevent entry of dirt and moisture
Recommended Brake Fluid which can damage the brake sys-
The fluid level in the brake fluid reser- tem and cause improper opera-
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con- voir should be checked periodically. tion.
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifica- The level should be between the "MIN"
tions in your braking system. Follow and "MAX" marks on the side of the
reservoir. If the level is at or below the To add brake fluid, first wipe away
the instructions printed on the con-
"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to any dirt then unscrew the fluid reser-
tainer.
bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill. voir cap. Slowly pour the recom-
mended fluid into the reservoir. Do
not overfill. Carefully replace the cap
on the reservoir and tighten.
24 CHECKING THE CLUTCH AIR CONDITIONING CARE
FLUID
G130A01A-AAT G130B02A-AAT G140A01A-AAT
To Check the Clutch Fluid To Replace the Fluid Keeping the Condenser Clean
Recommended brake fluid conform- The air conditioning condenser (and
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification engine radiator) should be checked
should be used. The reservoir cap periodically for accumulation of dirt,
must be fully tightened to avoid con- dead insects, leaves, etc. These can
tamination from foreign matter or interfere with maximum cooling effi-
moisture. ciency. When removing such accu-
mulations, brush or hose them away
NOTE: carefully to avoid bending the cooling
Do not allow any other liquids to fans.
contaminate the brake fluid. Seal
HHP5016 damage will result.
The clutch fluid level in the master
cylinder should be checked when
performing other under hood services. ! WARNING:
The system should be checked for Use caution when handling brake
leakage at the same time. Check to fluid. It can damage your vision if
make certain that the clutch fluid level you get it in your eyes. It will also
is always between the "MAX" and damage your vehicle’s paint if
"MIN" level markings on the fluid res- spilled on it and not removed im-
ervoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indi- mediately.
cates a leak in the clutch system
which should be inspected and re-
paired immediately. Consult your
Hyundai dealer.
6
25
G140B01A-AAT G140D01HP-GAT
Checking the Air Conditioning Checking the Compressor Drive Generator pulley Idler pulley Water pump pulley
Operation Belt
Gasoline Engine Power
1. Start the engine and let it run at steering
fast idle for several minutes with pulley
the air conditioning set at the maxi-
mum cold setting. Tension pulley
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash COMP. pulley
vents is not cold, have the air con- COMP.pulley Auto tensioner
ditioning system inspected by your Crank shaft pulley
Hyundai dealer. Tension pulley G140D03HP
When the air conditioning is being

! CAUTION: Crankshaft pulley G140D01HP
used regularly, the compressor drive
belt tension should be checked at
Running the air conditioning sys-
least once a month.
tem for extended periods of time Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
To check the drive belt tension, press
with a low refrigerant level may
down on the belt halfway between the
damage the compressor.
Tension pulley engine crankshaft and compressor
pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you
G140C01A-AAT
should not be able to deflect this belt
Lubrication anymore than 8.0 mm. If you have
the instruments to check it with a
To lubricate the compressor and the force of 98N (22 lb.), the deflection
seals in the system, the air condition- should be approx. 8.0 mm (0.315
ing should be run for at least 10 COMP.pulley inches). If the belt is too loose, have
minutes each week. This is particu- Crankshaft pulley
G140D01HR it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.
larly important during cool weather
when the air conditioning system is
not otherwise in use.
26 CHANGING THE AIR CONDI-
TIONER FILTER
NOTE: B145A03HP-GAT
The compressor drive belt tension (For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
for diesel engine (2.9 CRDi only) is (If Installed)
adjusted automatically. The air conditioner filter is located in
front of the evaporator unit behind the
glove box. It helps to decrease the
amount of pollutants entering the car.
HHP2153
2. Lower the glove box completely by

pushing the both sides of the glove
box inward.
HHP2152
1. Open the glove box and take out

the damper strap from the hole.
6
27
Groove
HHP2154 HHP2155 HHP2156
3. Pull out the pin fixing the filter 4. Remove the filter cover by pulling 5. Replace the two filters.
cover after pushing it to the left and it. 6. Installation is the reverse order of
fix the pin to the groove on the filter disassembly.
cover.
28 CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY
G150A01A-GAT G160A01A-GAT G170A01A-GAT

Steering Wheel Clutch Pedal Brake Pedal
Maximum
6 ~ 13 mm 3 ~ 8 mm
30 mm
(0.24 ~ 0.51 in.) (0.12 ~ 0.31 in.)
(1.18 in)
HHP5044 G160A01HP G160A01HP
To check the steering wheel free- With the engine off, press lightly on With the engine off, press down on
play, stop the car with the wheels the clutch pedal until you feel a change the brake pedal several times to re-
pointed straight ahead and gently in resistance. This is the clutch pedal duce the vacuum in the brake booster.
move the steering wheel back and free-play. The free-play should be Then, using your hand, press down
forth. Use very light finger pressure within the limits specified in the illus- slowly on the brake pedal until you
and be sensitive to changes in resis- tration. If it is not, have it inspected by feel a change in resistance. This is
tance that mark the limits of the free- your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or the brake pedal free-play. The free-
play. If the free-play is greater than repaired if necessary. play should be within the limits speci-
specified, have it inspected by your fied in the illustration. If it is not, have
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re- it inspected by your Hyundai dealer
paired if necessary. and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CHECKING DRIVE BELTS 29
CLEARANCE
G180A01A-GAT G190A01HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine Generator pulley Idler pulley Water pump pulley
Power steering pulley
Power
Idler pulley steering
pulley
Tension pulley
Tension
71 mm (2.80 in.) pulley
COMP. pulley
Auto tensioner
Generator Crankshaft pulley
pulley COMP. pulley Tension pulley HHP5049
G180A01L Tension pulley Crankshaft pulley G190D01HP
Drive belts should be checked peri-
You need a helper to check the brake Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) odically for proper tension and ad-
pedal clearance. With the engine run- justed if necessary. At the same time,
Water pump pulley
ning, have your helper press down on belts should be examined for cracks,
the brake pedal several times and Tension pulley wear, fraying or other evidence of
then hold it down with a force of about deterioration and replaced if neces-
490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake Power
sary.
steering
pedal clearance is the distance from pulley Belt routing should also be checked
the top surface of the brake pedal to to be sure there is no interference
the asphalt sheeting under the floor between the belts and other parts of
mat. If the brake pedal clearance is Generator the engine. After a belt is replaced,
COMP. pulley
not within the limits specified in the pulley Crankshaft pulley the new belt should be adjusted again
G190A01HR
illustration, have it inspected by your after two or three weeks to eliminate
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re- slack resulting from initial stretching
paired if necessary. after use.
30 CHECKING AND REPLACING
FUSES
G200A01A-AAT A fusible link will melt if the electrical
Replacing a Fusible Link
! WARNING: Engine Compartment
circuits from the battery are ever over-
loaded, thus preventing damage to
The drive belt should be checked Fuse and Relay Box #1 the entire wiring harness. (This could
when the engine is cool or cold to be caused by a short in the system
avoid burning yourself on hot en- drawing too much current.) If this
gine. ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer
determine the cause, repair the sys-
tem and replace the fusible link. The
fusible links are located in a relay box
for easy inspection.
Bad Good
G200A01HP
Engine Compartment
Fuse and Relay Box #2
! CAUTION:
When replacing a fusible link, never
use anything but a new fusible
link with the same or lower amper-
age rating. Never use a piece of
wire or a higher-rated fusible link.
This could result in serious dam-
age and create a fire hazard.
Bad Good
G200A02HP
6
31
G200B02HP-GAT 1. Turn off the ignition and all other

Replacing Accessory Fuses switches.
2. Open the fuse box and examine
each fuse. Remove each fuse by
pulling it toward you (a small "fuse
puller" tool is contained in the relay
and fuse box of the engine room to
simplify this operation).
Good Burned out

G200B02L
G200B01HP
4. Replace the blown fuse by press-
ing a new fuse of the same rating
The fuse box for the lights and other into place. The fuse should be a
electrical accessories will be found snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse
under the dashboard on the driver’s clip repaired or replaced by a
side. Inside the box you will find a list Hyundai dealer. If you do not have
showing the circuits protected by each a spare fuse, you may be able to
fuse. HHP4002 borrow a fuse of the same or lower
If any of your car's lights or other rating from an accessory you can
electrical accessories stop working, a 3. Be sure to check all other fuses temporarily get along without (the
blown fuse could be the reason. If the even if you find one that appears to radio or cigarette lighter, for ex-
fuse has burned out, you will see that have burned out. ample). Always remember to re-
the metal strip inside the fuse has place the borrowed fuse.
burned through. If you suspect a blown
fuse, follow this procedure:
32 CHECKING THE BATTERY
G210A01A-AAT o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush

! CAUTION:
the affected areas with water for at
least 15 minutes and then seek
A burned-out fuse indicates that medical assistance.
there is a problem in the electrical o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse
circuit. If you replace a fuse and it out your eyes with water and get
blows as soon as the accessory is medical assistance as soon as
turned on, the problem is serious possible. While you are being driven
and should be referred to a to get medical assistance, continue
Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and to rinse your eyes by using a
repair. Never replace a fuse with sponge or soft cloth saturated with
anything except a fuse with the water.
HHP5020
same or a lower amperage rating. o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a
A higher capacity fuse could cause large quantity of water or milk fol-
damage and create a fire hazard. ! WARNING:
lowed by milk of magnesia, eat a
raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get
Batteries can be dangerous! When medical assistance as soon as
NOTE: working with batteries, carefully possible.
See page 6-44 for the fuse panel observe the following precautions
descriptions. to avoid serious injuries. While batteries are being charged
(either by a battery charger or by the
The fluid in the battery contains a vehicle's alternator), they produce
strong solution of sulfuric acid, which explosive gases. Always observe
is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be these warnings to prevent injuries from
careful not to spill it on yourself or the occurring:
car. If you do spill battery fluid on
yourself, immediately do the follow- o Charge batteries only in a well ven-
ing: tilated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or
smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
6
33
G210B01Y-GET
Checking the Battery Keep batteries out of the o When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
reach of children because tery, excessive pressure on the
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence batteries contain highly case may cause battery acid to
of corrosion around the battery posts corrosive SULFURIC ACID. leak, resulting in personal in-
or terminals should be removed using Do not allow battery acid jury. Lift with a battery carrier or
a solution of household baking soda to contact your skin, eyes, with your hands on opposite
and warm water. After the battery clothing or paint finish. corners.
terminals are dry, cover them with a If any electrolyte gets into o Never attempt to charge the bat-
light coating of grease. your eyes, flush your eyes tery when the battery cables are
with clean water for at least connected.
! WARNING:
15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If
o The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Always read the following possible, continue to ap- Never touch these components
instructions carefully ply water with a sponge or with the engine running or the
when handling a battery. cloth until medical atten- ignition switched on.
Keep lighted cigarettes tion is received.
and all other flames or If electrolyte gets on your
sparks away from the bat- skin, thoroughly wash the
tery. contacted area.
Hydrogen, which is a If you feel a pain or a burn-
highly combustible gas, is ing sensation, get medi-
always present in battery cal attention immediately.
cells and may explode if Wear eye protection when
ignited. charging or working near
a battery.
Always provide ventilation
when working in an en-
closed space.
34 CHECKING ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FLUID
COOLING FANS LEVEL
G220A01A-AAT G220B01A-AAT G230A03A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan Gasoline Engine or
! WARNING:
The engine cooling fan should come
Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI)
on automatically if the engine coolant

The cooling fan is controlled by temperature is high.
engine coolant temperature and
may sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
G220C01A-AAT
near the blades of the cooling fan,
Checking Condenser Cooling
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blade. As the engine Fan
G230A01HP
coolant temperature decreases the The condenser cooling fan should
fan will automatically shut off. This come on automatically whenever the Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)
is a normal condition. air conditioning is in operation.
HHP5014
The power steering fluid level should

be checked daily.
6
FUEL FILTER 35
To check the power steering fluid G240A01A-AAT G350A02HP-GAT
level, be sure the ignition is "OFF", POWER STEERING HOSES Bleeding the Fuel System
then check to make certain that the It is suggested that you check the (For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))
power steering fluid level is between power steering hose connections for
the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings fluid leakage at regular intervals. The
on the fluid reservoir. power steering hoses should be re-
placed if there is severe surface crack-
NOTE: ing, pulling, scuffing or worn spots.
Grinding noise from the power Deterioration of the hose could cause
steering pump may be heard im- premature failure.
mediately after the engine is started
in extremely cold conditions (be-
low - 20°C). If the noise stops dur-
ing warm up, there is no abnormal
G350A01HP
function in the system. If is due to
a power steering fluid characteris- The fuel system should be bled to
tic in extremely cold conditions. remove air as described in the illus-
tration if the fuel supply is exhausted
Recommended Fluid during travel, when the fuel filter is
replaced, or if the vehicle is not used
Use PSF-3 type fluid. for a long time.
NOTE: 1. Loosen the air bleed bolt at the

Do not start the engine when the upper part of the fuel filter with a
power steering oil reservoir is flat-head screwdriver or equivalent.
empty.
36
G300A02HP-GAT
Removal of Water from the Fuel
! WARNING: Filter
o Do not smoke or have any other (For Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI))
open flame near the vehicle while
If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi-
bleeding the fuel system.
nates during driving, it indicates that
o Be sure to carefully clean away
water has accumulated in the fuel
any fuel which spilled onto
filter. If this occurs, remove the water
nearby parts coming out of the
as described below.
air bleed bolt, because such
accumulations of fuel might ig-
G350A02HP nite and cause a fire.
2. Pump the hand pump until there
are no more bubbles in the fuel
coming out of the air bleed bolt.
When doing this, place a cloth
around the air bleed bolt to prevent
the escaping fuel from spewing
about.
3. Tighten the air bleed bolt when
there are no more bubbles in the G300A01HP
fuel.
4. Continue pumping until the hand 1. Loosen the drain plug at the bot-
pump becomes stiff. tom of the fuel filter.
5. Finally, check to be sure that there
is no leakage of fuel.
If in doubt, consult your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6
37
NOTE: G350B01HP-GAT
It is recommended that water ac- Bleeding the Fuel System

cumulated in the fuel filter should (For Diesel Gngine (2.9 CRDi))
be removed by an authorized The fuel system should be bled to
Hyundai dealer. remove air as described in the illus-
tration if the fuel supply is exhausted
during travel, when the fuel filter is
! WARNING:
replaced, or if the vehicle is not used
for a long time.
o Do not smoke or have any other
G350A02HP
open flame near the vehicle while
bleeding the fuel system.
2. Operate the hand pump slowly 6 or o Be sure to carefully wipe away
7 times in order to force the water any water drained out in this
out through the drain plug. manner, because the fuel mixed
3. Tighten the drain plug when water in the water might be ignited
no longer comes out. and result in a fire.
4. Loosen the air bleed bolt and bleed
the air.
(Refer to "Bleeding the fuel sys-
tem".)
HHP5048
5. Check to be sure that the warning
lamp illuminates when the ignition 1. Pump the hand prime pump with
key is turned to "ON", and that it your hand for one minute(about
goes off when the engine is started. 20~30 times).
If in doubt, consult your nearest 2. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. position and release it 2~3 times
shortly until the engine starts.
38
G300B02HP-GAT 3. Check to be sure that the warning

Removal of Water from the Fuel
! CAUTION: Filter
lamp illuminates when the ignition
key is turned to "ON", and that it
Do not hold the ignition key in the (For Diesel Engine (2.9 CRDi)) goes off when the engine is started.
"START" position for more than If in doubt, consult your nearest
15 seconds. Doing so may cause authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
the engine and the injection pump
to damage. NOTE:
It is recommended that water ac-
cumulated in the fuel filter should
be removed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
HHP5047 ! WARNING:
If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi- Be sure to carefully wipe away any
nates during driving, it indicates that water drained out in this manner,
water has accumulated in the fuel because the fuel mixed in the wa-
filter. If this occurs, remove the water ter might be ignited and result in a
as described below. fire.
1. Loosen the drain plug at the bot-
tom of the fuel filter.
2. Tighten the drain plug when water
no longer comes out.
6
REPLACING HEADLIGHT 39
BULBS
G260A02A-GAT G270A01B-GAT 7. Disconnect the connector from the
Before attempting to replace a head- Headlight Bulb bulb base in the back of the head-
light bulb, be sure the switch is turned 1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye light.
to the "OFF" position. protection.
The next paragraph shows how to 2. Open the engine hood.
reach the headlight bulbs so they 3. Always grasp the bulb by its plas-
may be changed. Be sure to replace tic base, avoid touching the glass.
the burned-out bulb with one of the 4. Using a spanner, remove the head-
same number and wattage rating. light assembly mounting bolts.
5. Disconnect the power cord from
the bulb base in the back of the
! CAUTION:
headlight.
Keep the lamps out of contact with

petroleum product, such as oil, G270A02HP
gasoline, etc.
8. Push the bulb spring to remove
the headlight bulb.
G270A01HP
6. Turn the plastic cover counter-

clockwise and remove it.
40 HEADLIGHT AIMING AD-
JUSTMENT
G290A01HP-GAT
(Low Beam)
Vertical
aiming
Horizontal
aiming
G270A03HP G270A03O
G290A01HP
9. Remove the protective cap from
the replacement bulb and install
the new bulb by matching the plas-
! WARNING:
(High Beam)
Horizontal
tic base with the headlight hole. The halogen bulb contains gas
aiming
Reattach the bulb spring and re- under pressure and if impacted
connect the connector. could shatter, resulting in flying Vertical
10.Use the protective cap and carton fragments. Always wear eye pro- aiming
to promptly dispose of the old bulb. tection when servicing the bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids
when lighted. Turn the bulb on
only when installed in a headlight. G290A02HP
Replace the headlight if damaged
or cracked. Keep the bulb out of Before performing aiming adjustment,
the reach of children and dispose make sure of the following.
of the used bulb with care.
6
41
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct And then, draw a parallel line at 38 G290B01HP-GAT
pressure. mm (1.50 in.) under the horizontal Adjustment After Headlight As-
2. Place the vehicle on level ground line in case of adjusting the low beam sembly Replacement
and press the front bumper & rear or at 21 mm (0.83 in.) under the (Low Beam) Vertical line
bumper down several times. Place horizontal line in case of adjusting the 38 mm
vehicle at a distance of 3m (118.1 high beam. Horizontal line
W
in.) from the test wall. "P"
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded 7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
(except for full levels of coolant, beam to the parallel line with a
H
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL Cut-off line
jack, and tools). Have the driver or AIMING.
equivalent weight placed in driver's 8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
L Ground
seat. beam to the each vertical line with H line
4. Clean the headlight lens and turn a phillips screwdriver - HORIZON-
G290B01HP-1
on the headlight. TAL AIMING.
5. Open the hood. (High Beam) Vertical line
6. Draw the vertical line (through the Horizontal line W
center of each headlight) and the 39 mm "P"
horizontal line (through the center 21 mm
of each headlight) on the aiming
screen. H
Cut-off line
(1) Horizontal line dimension from
ground :
Ground
Low Beam : 894 mm (35.1 in.) L line
High Beam : 839 mm (33 in.) H
(2) Distance between each vertical G290B02HP
line :
Low Beam : 1,316 mm (51.8 in.)
High Beam : 1,076 mm (42.4 in.)
42
If the vehicle has had front body "W"

repair and the headlight assembly Distance between each headlight
has been replaced, the headlight aim- center :
ing should be checked using an aim- Low Beam : 1,316 mm (51.8 in.)
ing screen as shown in the illustra- High Beam : 1,076 mm (42.4 in.)
tion. Turn on the headlight switch.
(Low Beam or High Beam Position). "L"
Distance between the headlights
1. Adjust headlights so that main axis and the wall that the lights are
of light is parallel to center line of tested against :
the body and is aligned with point Low Beam : 3,000 mm (118.11 in.)
"P" shown in the illustration. High Beam : 3,000 mm (118.11in.)
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show
the center of headlights.
"H"
Horizontal center line of headlights
from ground :
Low Beam : 894 mm (35.1 in.)
High Beam : 839 mm (33 in.)
6
BULB WATTAGES 43
G280A03HP-GAT
G280A01HP
No. Part Name Wattage Socket Type No. Part Name Wattage Socket Type
1 Headlight (Low/High Beam) 55/55 Px26d/P14.5S 9 Luggage Compartment Light 10 S8.5/8.5
2 Front Position Light 5 W2.1x9.5D 10 High Mounted Rear Stop Light (If Installed) 16 W-2
3 Front Turn Signal Light 21 BA 15s 11 Rear Combination Light
4 Map Light 8 S8.5/8.5 Stop/Tail Light 21/5 BAY 15d
5 Interior Light 10 S8.5/8.5 Turn Signal Light 21 BA 15s
6 Front Fog Light 55 P22d Back-up Light 16 W2.1 x 9.5D
7 Side Repeater Light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D Rear Fog Light (If Installed) 21 BA 15s
8 Front Door Edge Warning Light (If Installed) 5 W2.1 x 4.6D 12 License Plate Light 5 W2.1 x 9.5D
44 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
G200C01HP-GAT
Engine Compartment (#1)
Gasoline Engine
DESCRIPTION AMPERAGES(A) CIRCUIT PROTECTED

NO.1 100A Glow Relay (COVEC-F/EGR), Air Heater Relay (2.9 CRDi)
120A (DIESEL) Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #2,
NO. 2
140A (GASOLINE) Generator
Inner Panel Fuse Box (Fuse 1,2,3,4,5),
NO. 3 50A Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #1 (Fuse 8,9),
FUSIBLE Fuel Heater Control Module (COVEC-F/EGR)
LINK NO.4 30A Generator, Ignition Switch
NO.5 - -
Diesel Engine
NO. 6 - -
Engine Control Relay (Diesel Engine), Main Control Relay
NO. 7 20A
(Gasoline Engine)
NO. 8 10A Horn Relay
NO. 9 15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
FUSE NO. 10 - -
NO. 11 10A ECM (Diesel Engine), EGR Control Module
NO. 12 10A ECM (2.9 CRDi)
G200C01HP
NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
6
45
G200D01HP-GAT
G200C02HP
NOTE:
46

NO. 10 15A Fuel Heater and Sensor(2.9 CRDi)
NO. 11 15A Headlamp(Low beam)
NO. 12 15A Headlamp(High beam)
NO. 13 - -
NO. 14 10A A/C Compressor Relay, Triple Switch
NO. 15 10A TCI Fan Relay(COVEC-F/EGR)
NO. 16 - -
NO. 17 15A -
NO. 18 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
FUSE NO. 19 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
NO. 20 15A ECM(2.9 CRDi), Air Heater Relay(2.9 CRDi), EGR Solenoid(2.9 CRDi)
NO. 21 10A Illuminations, Combination Lamp
NO. 22 10A License Lamp, Combination Lamp
NO. 23 10A ABS Control Module, ABS Relay, EBD Relay
ECM(Diesel Engine), Headlamp Relay, Condenser Fan Relay
NO. 24 10A
(Gasoline/COVEC-F), EGR Solenoid(COVEC-F)
NO. 25 10A ABS Control Module
NO. 26 10A Cruise Control Module
NO. 27 15A Front Wiper and Washer
NO. 28 25A Power Seat Switch
NO. 29 20A Power Outlet Relay
6
47

Power Connector(A,B), Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2
NO. 1 50A
(Fuse 28,29), Inner Panel Fuse Box(Fuse 6,7,8, 9)
NO. 2 30A Start Relay, Ignition Switch
Condenser Fan Relay,
NO. 3 40A
FUSIBLE Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2(Fuse 14,15)
LINK NO. 4 40A ABS Control Module
NO. 5 30A Power Window Relay
Tail Lamp Relay,
NO. 6 40A
Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2(Fuse 11,12)
NO. 8 - -
NO. 9 20A Fuel Pump Relay, ECM, Ignition Failure Sensor
A/CON, TCM, ETACM, Data Link Connector, Siren,
NO. 30 10A
Immobilizer Control Module
Interior Lamp, Map Lamp, Audio, Instrument Cluster,
NO. 31 15A
Front Door Edge warning Lamp
48
G200E01HP-GAT
Inner Panel NO. AMPERAGES(A) CIRCUIT PROTECTED
1 30A Defogger Relay
2 10A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch
3 15A Stop Lamp Switch
4 20A TOD, EST Control Module
5 10A -
6 15A Sunroof Controller
7 30A Blower Relay
8 20A Power Door Locks
9 10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
10 10A Audio, Map Lamp
11 20A Cigarette Lighter, Power Outlet relay, ACC Socket
12 10A Power Outside Mirror Switch
13 - -
14 - -
15 10A A/C Switch
16 10A Left/Right Outside Mirror & Defogger
17 - -
18 10A TCM, ECM(COVEC-F), TCCS(TOD, EST), Immobilizer
19 10A Back-up Lamp Switch, Inside Rearview Mirror, Transmission Range Switch
20 10A Hazard Switch
21 10A Instrument Cluster, ETACM, Vehicle Speed Sensor, DRL Control Module
22 10A Airbag
23 10A Airbag Indicator
24 - -
25 10A Blower & A/C, ETACM, Defogger Relay
26 15A Seat Warmer
27 15A Sunroof, Rear Wiper & Washer, Cruise Switch, Rear Intermittent Wiper Relay
G200D01HP 28 10A Start Relay, Theft-Alarm Relay
NOTE:
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Emission Control Systems ........................................... 7-2

Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
EGR System ................................................................ 7-5
7 7
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
H010A01A-GAT H010B01A-AAT
Canister
(If Installed) 1. Crankcase Emission Control
System While the engine is inoperative, fuel
Your Hyundai is equipped with an vapors generated inside the fuel tank
emission control system to meet all ; For a Gasoline Engine
are absorbed and stored in the canis-
requirements of the Emission prohibi- The positive crankcase ventilation ter. When the engine is running, the
tion rules of your province. system is employed to prevent air fuel vapors absorbed in the canister
There are three emission control sys- pollution caused by blow-by gases are drawn into the induction system
tems which are as follows. being emitted from the crankcase. through the purge control solenoid
This system supplies fresh filtered air valve.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- to the crankcase through the air in-
tem (For a Gasoline Engine) take hose. Inside the crankcase, which Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
tem (For a Gasoline Engine) which then pass through the PCV The purge control solenoid valve is
(3) Exhaust emission control system valve into the induction system. controlled by the ECM; when the en-
gine coolant temperature is low, and
In order to assure the proper function during idling, it closes, so that evapo-
H010C02Y-GAT
of the emission control systems, it is rated fuel is not taken into the surge
2. Evaporative Emission tank. After engine warm-up, during
recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an au- Control System ordinary driving, it opens so as to
thorized Hyundai dealer in accordance ; For a Gasoline Engine introduce evaporated fuel to the surge
with the maintenance schedule in this The Evaporative Emission Control tank.
manual. System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmo- H010D01A-AAT
sphere. 3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-
tem is a highly effective system which
controls exhaust emissions while
maintaining good vehicle performance.
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER 3
H020A01A-AAT
; For a Gasoline Engine o Do not touch the catalytic con-
! WARNING: verter or any other part of the
o Use unleaded fuel only. exhaust system while the cata-
lytic converter is hot. Shut off
o Maintain the engine in good
operating condition. Extremely the engine, wait for at least one
high catalytic converter tempera- hour before touching the cata-
lytic converter or any other part
tures can result from improper
operation of the electrical, igni- of the exhaust system.
tion or multiport electronic fuel o Remember that your Hyundai
injection. dealer is your best source of
o If your engine stalls, pings, assistance.
knocks, or is hard to start, have o Do not stop your Hyundai over
Catalytic Converter H020A01HP-D any combustible material such
your Hyundai dealer inspect and
repair the problem as soon as as grass, paper, leaves or rags.
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped
possible. These materials might contact
with a monolith type three-way cata-
o Avoid driving with a very low the hot catalytic converter and a
lytic converter to reduce the carbon
fuel level. Running out of gaso- fire might result.
monoxide, hydrocarbons and nitro-
gen oxides contained in the exhaust line may cause the engine to
gas. Exhaust gases passing through misfire and result in damage to
the catalytic converter may cause it the catalytic converter.
to operate at a very high temperature. o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
The introduction of large amounts of ods longer than 10 minutes.
unburned gasoline into the exhaust o The vehicle should not be
may cause the catalytic converter to pushed or pulled to get started.
overheat and create a fire hazard. This may cause the catalytic
This risk may be reduced by observ- converter to overheat and cre-
ing the following: ate a fire hazard.
4
H020D01HP-GAT
; For a Diesel Engine (If Installed) o Do not touch the catalytic con-
! WARNING: verter or any other part of the
exhaust system while the cata-
o Use diesel only.
lytic converter is hot. Shut off
o Maintain the engine in good
the engine, wait for at least one
operating condition. Extremely
hour before touching the cata-
high catalytic converter tempera-
lytic converter or any other part
tures can result from improper
of the exhaust system.
operation of the electrical, igni-
o Remember that your Hyundai
tion or electronic fuel injection.
dealer is your best source of
o If your engine stalls, pings, or is
assistance.
hard to start, have your Hyundai
o Do not stop your Hyundai over
Catalytic Converter dealer inspect and repair the
H020A01HP any combustible material such
problem as soon as possible.
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped as grass, paper, leaves or rags.
o Avoid driving with a very low
with oxidation type catalytic converter These materials might contact
fuel level. Running out of diesel
to reduce the carbon monoxide, hy- the hot catalytic converter and a
may cause the engine to stop
drocarbons and particulates contained fire might result.
and result in damage to the cata-
in the exhaust gas. lytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
ods longer than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be
pushed or pulled to get started.
This may cause the catalytic
converter to overheat and cre-
ate a fire hazard.
7
EGR SYSTEM 5
H020C01HP-GAT
; For a Diesel Engine
(If Installed)
This system helps control oxides of
nitrogen by recirculating a part of the
exhaust gas into the engine, there by
reducing cylinder combustion tem-
perature.
The EGR system helps reduce Nox
(Oxides of Nitrogen) emission gas-
ses.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................ 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................ 8-2
Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................. 8-3
Snow Tires ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Chains ................................................................... 8-4
Tire Rotation ................................................................ 8-5
Tire Balancing .............................................................. 8-5
8
Tire Traction ................................................................. 8-5
When to Replace Tires ................................................ 8-6
Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-7
8
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION
2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ENGINE NUMBER
NUMBER (VIN)
I010A01A-GAT I010B01S-GAT
Gasoline engine
I010B03HP
I010A01HP I010B01HP
The engine number is stamped on
The vehicle identification number Diesel Engine (2.5 TCI) the engine block as shown in the
(VIN) is the number used in register- drawing.
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
It can be found on the identification
plate attached to the engine side of
the firewall between the engine and
passenger compartment.
I010B02HP
8
TIRE 3
I020A01A-AAT I030A02HP-GAT
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
TIRE INFORMATION RECOMMENDED INFLATION RIM
TIRE SIZE NORMAL LOAD MAXIMUM LOAD
The tires supplied on your new PRESSURES SIZE
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR
Hyundai are chosen to provide the
7.0Jx16 P255/65R16 200(29) 200(29) 200(29) 220(32)
best performance for normal driving.
These pressures were chosen to pro-
vide the most satisfactory combina-
tion of ride comfort, tire wear and
stability under normal conditions. Tire
pressures should be checked monthly
at least. Proper tire inflation pres-
sures should be maintained for these
reasons:
I030A01HP
The tire label located on the driver's o Lower-than-recommended tire

side of the center pillar outer panel pressures cause uneven tread wear
gives the tire pressures recommended and poor handling.
for your vehicle. o Higher-than-recommended tire
pressures increase the chance of
damage from impacts and cause
uneven tread wear.
4
I040A02S-GAT I050A03HP-AAT
SNOW TIRES TIRE CHAINS
! CAUTION: If you equip your car with snow tires, Tire chains should be installed on all
Always observe the following: they should be the same size and wheels. Be sure that the chains are
o Check pressures when the tires have the same load capacity as the installed in accordance with the
are cold. That is, after the car original tires. Snow tires should be manufacturer's instructions.
has been parked for at least three installed on all four wheels; other- To minimize tire and chain wear, do
hours and hasn't been driven wise, poor handling may result. not continue to use tire chains when
more than 1.6 km or one mile Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 they are no longer needed.
since starting up. psi) more air pressure than the pres-
o Check the pressure of your spare sure recommended for the standard
tire each time you check the
pressure of other tires.
tires on the tire label on the driver's
door edge, or up to the maximum
! WARNING:
o Never overload your car. Be es- pressure shown on the tire sidewall o When driving on roads covered
pecially careful about overload- whichever is less. with snow or ice, drive at less
ing if you equip your car with a Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 than 30 km/h (20 mph).
luggage rack or car top carrier. mph) when your car is equipped with o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
snow tires. plastic chains.
o If you have noise caused by
chains contacting the body, re-
tighten the chain to avoid con-
tact with the vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, re-
tighten the chains after driving
0.5 ~ 1 km.
8
5
I060A01HP-GAT I080A01A-AAT
TIRE ROTATION TIRE TRACTION
! WARNING: Tire traction can be reduced if you
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply drive on worn tires, tires that are
tires under any circumstances. This improperly inflated or on slippery road
may cause dangerous handling surfaces. Tires should be replaced
characteristics that may cause when tread wear indicators appear.
death, serious injury, or property To reduce the possibility of losing
damage. control, slow down whenever there is
rain, snow or ice on the road.
I070A01A-AAT
Spare tire I060A01HP TIRE BALANCING
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 A tire that is out of balance may affect
km (3,000 miles). If you notice that handling and tire wear. The tires on
tires are wearing unevenly between your Hyundai were balanced before
rotations, have the car checked by a the car was delivered but may need
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be balancing again during the years you
corrected. own the car.
After rotating, adjust the tire pres- Whenever a tire is dismounted for
sures and be sure to check wheel nut repair, it should be rebalanced before
torque. being reinstalled on the car.
6
I090A01HP-GAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES hicle with any tire/wheel combi-
! WARNING: nation not recommended by
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) Hyundai for off-road driving, you
o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-
gerous! Worn-out tires can should not use these tires for
cause loss of braking effective- highway driving.
ness, steering control and trac-
tion. When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires on
the same car. If you replace ra-
Wear indicator dial tires with bias-ply tires, they
must be installed in sets of four.
o Your vehicle is equipped with
HHP5018
tires designed to provide for safe
The original tires on your car have ride and handling capability.
tread wear indicators. The tread wear Do not use a size and type of
indicators appear when the tread tire and wheel that is different
depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tire from the one that was originally
should be replaced when these ap- installed on your vehicle. It can
pear as a solid bar across two or affect the safety and perfor-
more grooves of the tread. Always mance of your vehicle, which
replace your tires with those of the could lead to handling failure or
recommended size. If you change rollover and serious injury.
wheels, the new wheel's rim width When replacing the tires, be sure
and offset must meet Hyundai speci- to equip all four tires with the
fications. tire and wheel of the same size,
type, tread, brand and load-car-
rying capacity. If you neverthe-
less decide to equip your ve-
8
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS 7
I100A01HP-AAT
HHP4011
Your Hyundai is delivered with the

following:
Spare tire and wheel

Wrench
Jack
Jack handle (Spare Wheel Rod)
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2

Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart .......................................................... 9-4
9 9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J010A02HP-GAT J030A02HP-GAT
MEASUREMENT mm TIRE Kpa(psi)
Overall length 1
4700 (4765* ) Tire Size Inflation Pressure
Overall width 1860 Standard 255/65 R16
200kPa (29 psi)
Overall height 2
1795 (1840* ) Spare Full Size
Wheel base 2750
J040A02HP-GAT
Wheel tread Front 1530 ELECTRICAL
Rear 1530
DIESEL
*1: With Bumper Guard ITEM GASOLINE
*2: With Roof Rack 2.5 TCI 2.9 CRDi
Battery MF 68AH MF 90AH MF 100AH
J020A01HP-GAT
Alternator 120A (13.5V) 90A (12 V) 110A (12V)
POWER STEERING
Ball and nut, torsion bar type J050A02HP-GAT
Type BRAKE
(Integral type)
Wheel free play 0 ~ 30 mm (0 ~ 1.18 in.) Type Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Oil pump type Vane type Front brake type Ventilated disc
Rear E.C only Disc type
J060A01Y-GAT brake Disc type (with ABS)
Except E.C
FUEL SYSTEM type Drum type (without ABS)
Fuel tank capacity 75 liter Parking brake Cable operated on rear wheel
9
ENGINE 3
J070A03HP-GAT
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine

ITEMS
3.5 V6 2.5 TCI 2.9 CRDi
Engine Type 6-Cyl., V-type DOHC 4-Cyl., In-line SOHC 4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
Bore x Stroke 93.0 x 85.8 mm (3.67 x 3.38 in.) 91.1 x 95 mm (3.59 x 3.74 in.) 97.1 x 98 mm (3.82 x 3.86 in.)
Displacement 3497cc 2476cc 2902cc
Compression Ratio 10 22 16.5
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-3-4-2 ←
Valve clearance Cold Auto lash 0.15 mm Auto lash
(Intake/Exhaust) Hot Auto lash 0.25 mm Auto lash
Spark Plug NGK: PFR5N-11
Unleaded* - -
CHAMPION: RC10PYPB4
NGK: BKR5ES
Leaded - -
CHAMPION: RC10YC
Spark Plug Gap Unleaded* 1.0 ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.) - -
Leaded 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.) - -
Idle Speed (rpm) 800 750 ± 100 800 ± 100
Injection (or lgnition) Timing BTDC 5° ± 2° ATDC 7° ± 1° Automatically Adjusted
*: Platinum coated
4 LUBRICATION CHART
J080A09HP-GAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (liter)

Engine Oil (Gasoline) API SJ, SL or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 Drain and refill (With oil filter) : 4.3
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE -18°C(-0.4°F)]
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -13°C(8.6°F)]
SAE 20W-50 [ABOVE -7°C(19.4°F)]
Engine Oil API CF-4 or ABOVE, SAE #30 [ABOVE 0°C(32°F)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) : 5.1
(Diesel (2.5 TCI)) ACEA B2 or B3 SAE 20W-40 [ABOVE -10°C(14°F)]
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -15°C(5°F)]
SAE 10W-30 [-20°C ~ 40°C (-4°F ~ 104°F)]
SAE 5W-30 [-25°C ~10°C (-13°F ~ 50°F)]
SAE 0W-30 [BELOW 10°C(50°F)] *1, *2
Engine Oil API CF-4 or ABOVE, SAE #30 [0°C ~ 40°C(32°F ~ 104°F)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) : 6.0
(Diesel (2.9 CRDi)) ACEA B4 or ABOVE SAE 20W-40 [ABOVE -10°C (14°F)]
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE -15°C (5°F)]
SAE 10W-30 [-20°C ~ 40°C(-4°F ~ 104°F)]
SAE 5W-30 [BELOW 10°C (50°F)] *1, *2
*1. Restricted by driving condition and dealing area
*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Engine Oil Consumption Normal driving condition MAX. 1L /1500 Km
Severe driving condition MAX. 1L /1000 Km
9
5
J080A09HP-GAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (liter)

Transmission Manual HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) 2.5 (2.5 TCI), 3.2 (2.9 CRDi or 3.5 V6)
Fluid Automatic MOBIL DEXRON-II 8.2 (2.5 TCI), 11.8 (2.9 CRDi ), 10.5 (3.5 V6)
Transfer Case Oil ATF DEXRON-III 1.42
Front Axle Gear Oil HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER, Part-time 4WD : 1.8
SAE 80W[BELOW -30°C(-22°F)]/90W[ABOVE -30°C(-22°F)] Full-time 4WD : 1.3
Rear Axle MITSUBISHI GENUINE GEAR OIL PART NO. 8149630EX or
Gear Oil With LSD CASTROL HYPOY LS(2.5 TCI)
MOBIL INFILREX 33 (2.9 CRDi or 3.5 V6) NO.7 : 2.6, NO.7.5 : 2.8
Without HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER,
LSD SAE 80W[BELOW -30°C(-22°F)]/90W[ABOVE -30°C(-22°F)]
Coolant Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator 8(2.5 TCI), 9(2.9 CRDi), 11(3.5 V6)
Power Steering Oil PSF-3 TYPE FLUID 1.3
Brakes and Clutch Fluid DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent As required
INDEX
10
10
10 INDEX
2
A C
Air bag ....................................................................... 1-47 Care of Cassette Tapes ......................................... 1-139
Air Cleaner Filter ....................................................... 6-15 Care of Discs .......................................................... 1-138
Air Conditioning Cargo Security Screen .............................................. 1-94
Care ....................................................................... 6-24 Cassette Tape Player Operation (H240) ................ 1-124
Filter ........................................................... 1-118, 6-26 Cassette Tape Player Operation (H280) ................ 1-129
Operation ................................................... 1-110, 6-25 Catalytic Converter ..................................................... 7-3
Switch ................................................................... 1-110 CD Auto changer (H280) .............................. 1-92, 1-134
Antenna ................................................................... 1-140 Center Console Compartment .................................. 1-87
Ashtray ...................................................................... 1-81 Center console armrest ......................................... 1-88
Audio Fault Code .................................................... 1-137 Center console box ................................................ 1-87
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System .... 1-112 Child Restraint System ............................................. 1-39
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ............................... 1-12
B Cigarette Lighter ....................................................... 1-80
Battery ............................................................. 2-26, 6-32 Clock ......................................................................... 1-79
Bi-Level Heating ...................................................... 1-108 Clutch
Brake Checking fluid ........................................................ 6-24
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ................................ 2-21 Pedal free-play ....................................................... 6-28
Checking the brakes .............................................. 6-22 Combination Light
Fluid ....................................................................... 6-23 Daytime running lights ........................................... 1-74
Pedal clearance ..................................................... 6-29 Headlight flasher .................................................... 1-75
Pedal free-play ....................................................... 6-28 Headlight switch ..................................................... 1-73
Practices ................................................................ 2-22 High-beam switch .................................................. 1-74
Breaking-In your New Hyundai ................................... 1-3 Lane change signal ................................................ 1-73
Parking light auto cut ............................................. 1-74
Turn signal operation ............................................. 1-73
Compact Disc Player Operation (H280) ................. 1-131
Cooling Fans ............................................................. 6-34
INDEX
10
3
Corrosion protection If the engine overheats ............................................ 3-4

Cleaning the interior ................................................. 4-6 Number .................................................................... 8-2
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .................. 4-2 Oil ............................................................................. 6-6
Washing and waxing ................................................ 4-4 Starting ..................................................................... 2-5
Cruise Control ......................................................... 1-100 Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ........................... 2-2
D F
Defrosting/Defogging ............................................... 1-109 Fan Speed Control ...................................... 1-104, 1-115
Door Fog Light Switch
Locking and unlocking front door with a key ........ 1-11 Front ....................................................................... 1-75
Drink Holder .............................................................. 1-82 Rear ....................................................................... 1-75
Drive Belts ...................................................... 6-25, 6-29 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) .......................................... 2-14
Driving Front Seats
Driving for economy ............................................... 2-23 Adjustable front seats ............................................ 1-18
Smooth cornering ................................................... 2-25 Adjustable headrests.............................................. 1-19
Winter driving ......................................................... 2-25 Adjusting seat forward and rearward ..................... 1-18
Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-19
E Front/Rear Window Defroster Switch ....................... 1-78
Emission Control System ........................................... 7-1 Fuel
Catalytic converter ................................................... 7-3 Capacity ................................................................... 9-2
EGR System ............................................................ 7-5 Diesel ....................................................................... 1-2
Engine Gauge .................................................................... 1-65
Before starting the engine ....................................... 2-3 Unleaded gasoline ................................................... 1-2
Compartment (3.5 V6) ............................................. 6-2 Fuel Filler Lid
Compartment (2.5 TCI) ............................................ 6-3 Remote release ...................................................... 1-96
Compartment (2.9 CRDi) ......................................... 6-4 Full-time 4WD Operation .......................................... 2-17
Coolant ................................................................... 6-11 Fuses ........................................................................ 6-30
Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 1-65
10 INDEX
4
G
General Checks .......................................................... 6-5 K
Glove Box ................................................................. 1-86 Key .............................................................................. 1-4
If you lose your keys ............................................. 3-17
H Positions ................................................................... 2-4
Hazard Warning System ........................................... 1-78
Headlight Aiming Adjustment .................................... 6-40 L
Headlight Leveling Device System ........................... 1-99 Limited-Slip Differential ............................................. 2-22
Heating and Ventilation ........................................... 1-104 Luggage Compartment
Air flow control ......................................... 1-105, 1-116 Cargo Security Screen ........................................... 1-94
Temperature control ............................................. 1-107 Light ....................................................................... 1-93
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ................................. 1-95 Net .......................................................................... 1-93
Hood Release ........................................................... 1-96
Horn .......................................................................... 1-98 M
Maintenance Intervals
I Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ......... 5-9
Ignition Switch ............................................................. 2-3 Maintenance under severe usage conditions .......... 5-8
Immobilizer System ..................................................... 1-5 Scheduled maintenance ........................................... 5-4
Limp Home Procedures ................................... 1-7, 1-9 Service requirements ............................................... 5-2
Key ................................................................... 1-5, 1-8 Mirrors
Indicator and Warning Lights .................................... 1-58 Day/night inside rearview ....................................... 1-91
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ................... 1-54 Outside rearview .................................................... 1-88
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ............... 1-79 Multimeter ................................................................. 1-69
Interior Light .............................................................. 1-85 Altimeter ................................................................. 1-70
Intermittent Wiper ..................................................... 1-77 Barometer .............................................................. 1-72
Digital Clock ........................................................... 1-72
J Electrical azimuth compass ................................... 1-70
Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3 Relative altimeter ................................................... 1-71
INDEX
10
5
O Side Under View Mirror ............................................ 1-90

Odometer .................................................................. 1-67 Sound
Brake Pad Wear Warning Sound .......................... 1-65
P Spark Plugs ............................................................... 6-14
Parking Brake ........................................................... 1-91 Speedometer ............................................................. 1-67
Part-time 4WD Operation ......................................... 2-14 Starting Procedure ...................................................... 2-5
Power Driver's Seat .................................................. 1-21 Steering Wheel
Power Outlet ............................................................. 1-80 Free-play ................................................................ 6-28
Power Steering Fluid Level ....................................... 6-34 Steering wheel tilt lever ......................................... 1-99
Stereo Radio Operation (H240, H280) ....... 1-121, 1-126
R Stereo Sound System ............................................. 1-119
Rear Seat Warning ................................................... 1-31 Sun roof .................................................................... 1-84
Rear Window Defroster Switch ................................ 1-78 Sun visor ................................................................... 1-97
Roof Rack ................................................................. 1-94 Sunshade .................................................................. 1-83
S T
Seat Belts Tachometer ............................................................... 1-66
3-Point system ............................................. 1-34, 1-37 Tail Gate ................................................................... 1-92
2-Point Static Type ................................................ 1-36 Theft-Alarm system ................................................... 1-13
Adjusting your seat belt ......................................... 1-35 Third Seat
Care of seat belts .................................................. 1-33 Adjusting Seatback Angle ...................................... 1-27
Precautions ............................................................ 1-31 Folding Rear Seatback and seat cushion ............. 1-28
Pretensioner Seat Belt ........................................... 1-45 To get in and out of the third seat ........................ 1-30
Seat Warmer ............................................................. 1-23 Tires
Second Seat Balancing .................................................................. 8-5
Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-24 Chains ...................................................................... 8-4
Adjustable headrests.............................................. 1-24 Changing a flat tire .................................................. 3-7
Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ............... 1-25 If you have a flat tire ............................................... 3-7
Information ............................................................... 8-3
10 INDEX
6
Pressure ................................................................... 8-3 W

Replacement ............................................................ 8-6 Warning Lights .......................................................... 1-39
Rotation .................................................................... 8-5 Windows
Snow tires ................................................................ 8-4 Power ..................................................................... 1-17
Spare tire ................................................................. 3-5 Windshield Wiper and Washer ................................. 1-76
Traction .................................................................... 8-5 Rear Wiper and Washer Switch ............................ 1-77
Towing Windshield Wiper Blades .......................................... 6-16
A trailer (or vehicle) ............................................... 2-28
Emergency ............................................................. 3-16
If your car must be towed ..................................... 3-14
Transmission
Automatic transmission ............................................ 2-9
Automatic transmission fluid checking ................... 6-20
Manual transmission ................................................ 2-7
Manual transmission oil checking .......................... 6-18
Trip Odometer ........................................................... 1-67
U
Under Tray ................................................................ 1-23
V
Vehicle Identification Number ..................................... 8-2
Vehicle Specifications ................................................. 9-1
CAUTION:
Severe engine and tranmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
A000A01A-EAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the
next owner.
OWNER I.D.
ORIGINAL NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
DATE OF SALE:
SUBSEQUENT NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
TRANSFER DATE:
SA010A1-E
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
A030A01HP-E
The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation to incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.
This manual applies to all markets and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particular vehicle with which this
manual is supplied.
Please refer to the nearest franchised Hyundai dealer for information regarding current standard and optional equipment
levels.
SA020A1-E
Responsibilty For Maintenance
It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner/driver to ensure that all routine mainte-
nance services are undertaken in line with the recommendations specified in Section
5 of this manual. In addition, in order to ensure continued validity of the new vehicle
warranty and safe operation of the vehicle, non scheduled maintenance/running
repairs should be undertaken at the earliest available opportunity.
Under severe operating conditions, more frequent maintenance is required. Details
of the maintenance schedule for such conditions are also given in section 5.
It is recommended that all maintenance operations and repairs are entrusted to a
franchised Hyundai dealer to ensure that the latest repair methods, specialized
tooling and genuine Hyundai parts are used to ensure the continued reliability and
safety of the vehicle.
SA030A1-E
FOREWORD
Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to
welcome you to the ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The
advanced engineering and construction methods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai
marque are something of which we are proud, and this commitment to providing a high quality product is
supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equally proud.
This owners manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is
recommended that it is carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe
and satisfactory operation are obtained. The recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any
running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a franchised Hyundai dealer to ensure that only
the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the continued reliability, safety and
performance of the vehicle.
Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai
dealer who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.
Note: This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at
all times for ease of reference.
In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of
the new owner.
Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission
of Hyundai Motor Company.
SA040A1-E
! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE
SPECIFICATION
Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers

warranty and may adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.
Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle
specification without the express approval of the manufacturer and result in conse-
quential loss or damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
SA050A1-E
TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION
This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro
processor controlled equipment.
It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile
telephones to adversely affect these systems.
Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai dealer
for recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment
concerned and the recommended method of installation and equipment location.
Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment which gives rise to incorrect functioning
of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall within the scope of the
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 1
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3
APPEARANCE CARE 4
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

SECTION 6
OWNER MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7
CONSUMER INFORMATION 8
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS 9
INDEX 10
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

These titles indicate the following:
! WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to
you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided
with the warning.
! CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its
equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
caution.
NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
A100A01L-EAT requirements. Using imitation, coun- The export specifications are written in
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE terfeit or used salvage parts is not English only.
PARTS covered under the Hyundai New Ve- Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
hicle Limited Warranty or any other through authorized Hyundai
1. What are Hyundai Genuine
Hyundai warranty. In addition, any Dealerships.
Parts? damage to or failure of Genuine
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same Hyundai Parts caused by the installa-
parts used by Hyundai Motor Com- tion or failure of an imitation, counter-
pany to manufacture vehicles. They feit or used salvage part is not covered
are designed and tested for the opti- by Hyundai Motor Company.
mum safety, performance, and reli-
ability to our customers. 3. How can you tell if you are
purchasing Hyundai Genuine
2. Why should you use genuine Parts?
parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered Logo on the package (see below).
and built to meet rigid manufacturing A100A03L
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

B250B03HP-EAT
B250B01HP-E
1. Passenger's Airbag 15. Rear Power Outlet
2. Glove Box 16. Front Drink Holder
3. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel 17. Parking Brake
4. Headlight Leveling Switch 18. Transfer Shift Knob
5. Cruise Control Main Switch(Not all models) 19. Front Power Outlet
6. Hazard Warning Switch 20. Seat Warmer Switch (Not all models)
7. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) 21. Shift Lever
8. Windscreen Wiper/Washer Switch 22. Coin Holder
9. Rear Fog Light Switch 23. Front Ashtray/Cigar Lighter
10. Horn and Driver's Airbag 24. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever
11. Instrument Cluster 25. Cruise Control Switch (Not all models)
12. Multi-Function Light Switch/Front Fog Light Switch 26. Remote Fuel-Filler Lid Release Lever
13. Rear Ashtray 27. Multi Box
14. Rear Drink Holder 28. Bonnet Release Lever
! CAUTION:
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the
air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it
may damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
B255A01HP-EAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Seat Belt Warning Light
ABS Service Reminder Indicator(SRI)
Cruise Indicator Light (Not all models)
Light
High Beam Indicator Light Overdrive OFF Indicator Light (Not all models)
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light A/T(Automatic Transmission)

Oil Temperature Warning Light (Not all models)
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Immobiliser Warning Indicator Light
Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
Charging System Warning Light 4WD LOW Indicator Light
Front Fog Indicator Light 4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD only)
Door Ajar Warning Light 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD only)
Low Fuel Level Warning Light Fuel Filter Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
Hatchback Door Open Warning Light Brake Vacuum Warning Light (Diesel Engine)
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder
Diesel Preheat Indication Light (Diesel Engine)
Indicator (SRI) Light
Malfunction Indicator Light
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-50.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2 1

Running In Your Hyundai .............................................. 1-4
Immobiliser System ...................................................... 1-5
Door Locks ................................................................... 1-9
Theft-Alarm System .....................................................1-11
Power Windows ...........................................................1-14
Seats ........................................................................... 1-16
1
Seat Belts ....................................................................1-25
Child Restraint System ................................................1-31
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System .................1-40
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .......................1-46
Warning and Indicator Lights .......................................1-50
Multi-Function Switch ..................................................1-60
Windscreen Wiper/Washer Switch ..............................1-63
Sunroof ........................................................................1-70
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-75
Bonnet Release ...........................................................1-83
Cruise Control ..............................................................1-86
Heating and Cooling Control ........................................1-89
Stereo Sound System ...............................................1-105
Antenna .....................................................................1-107
1 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A01HP-EAT The use of leaded fuel in this vehicle will Watch the fuel level in the tank very
PETROL ENGINES result in irreversible pollution of the carefully : If the engine stops due to fuel
THIS VEHICLE MUST ONLY BE OP- catalyst element. Such pollution will failure, the circuits must be completely
ERATED WITH UNLEADED FUEL. prevent correct operation of the cata- purged to permit restarting.
SERIOUS DAMAGE WILL RESULT lyst and give rise to increased operating
FROM THE USE OF LEADED FUEL. temperatures leading to the catalyst
element melting and restricting the ex- ! CAUTION:
UNLEADED haust flow along with an increase in Do not let any petrol or water enter
FUEL ONLY exhaust emission levels. the tank. If this happens, the tank
should be completely drained and
the fuel lines should all be cleaned
! CAUTION: out. This will stop the fuel pump
The vehicle warranty will not extend from becoming contaminated.
to damage arising from the use of
incorrect fuels. ZB010C1-E
"Alternative fuels"
B010A01HP
DIESEL ENGINES
Fuels which contain methanol or etha-
Unleaded fuel with a Research Octane Diesel fuel of 52 to 54 cetane is the nol must not be used.
Number (RON) of 91 or higher must be correct rating to use in your Hyundai
used in this vehicle. Terracan. If two types of diesel fuel are
To prevent accidental filling of the fuel available, use summer or winter fuel
tank with leaded fuel, a small diameter properly according to the following tem-
filler neck along with a restrictor flap perature conditions.
are fitted to ensure that only unleaded o Above 23°F (-5°C) ... Summer type
fuel pump nozzles may enter the filler diesel fuel.
neck. However, care must be exer- o Below 23°F (-5°C) ... Winter type
cised when refuelling the vehicle tank diesel fuel.
from jerry cans or by means of a funnel
that the fuel being used is unleaded.
1
BEFORE ENTERING THE VE- AFTER ENTERING THE VE- 3
HICLE HICLE
ZB010D1-E YB020A1-E YB020B1-E
Operation in Foreign Countries o Ensure that all windows, mirrors o Ensure that all occupants fasten
Drivers of vehicles which are to be and lamps are clean. and correctly adjust seat belts.
operated in foreign countries must o Check condition of all tyres. o Ensure that seat and headrestraint
satisfy themselves that: o Ensure that no fluid leaks are evi- positions are adjusted for optimum
dent. safety, control and comfort.
o The vehicle meets all local regula- o Ensure that the area around the o Adjust interior and exterior rear view
tions with respect to insurance, speci- vehicle is clear before driving off. mirrors.
fications etc.. o Verify correct operation of lamps,
o The correct types and grades of fuel horn and other electrical equipment.
are available for satisfactory opera- o Ensure that warning lamps illumi-
tion of the vehicle. nate when ignition is turned on.
NOTE:
ZB010F2-A Fluid levels such as engine oil, en-
FUELS FOR CLEANER AIR gine coolant, brake and windscreen
washer fluid should be checked
To help contribute to cleaner air, daily or at each refuelling, whichever
Hyundai recommends that you use occurs sooner.
fuels treated with detergent additives,
which help to prevent deposit forma-
tion in the engine. These fuels will help
the engines run cleaner and the Emis-
sion Control System performance.
4 RUNNING IN YOUR NEW
HYUNDAI
B020A01FC-EAT 4) Never allow the engine to labour. Use 1) Do not race the engine without a
PETROL ENGINE the gearbox freely and avoid large load (i.e revving the engine in neu-
The longevity and performance of the throttle openings when the engine tral).
vehicle are greatly affected by the care speed is below 1500 rpm. 2) During the first 600 miles the maxi-
exercised during the first 1000 miles of 5) Avoid rapid acceleration and maximum engine speed should be re-
motoring. Because of modern manu- mum throttle openings. stricted to 3000 rpm and gradually
facturing techniques, rigid guidelines 6) Avoid harsh braking during the first increased thereafter. And while driv-
regarding maximum road speeds have 100 miles of urban motoring or 1000 ing, keep under three quarters of
become unnecessary. However, cer- miles of motorway driving to allow maximum vehicle speed.
tain precautions should be observed in the friction facings of the brake pads 3) Avoid prolonged constant speed
order to obtain the best possible per- and shoes to bed against the discs operation. The internal components
formance and useful life from the ve- and drums properly. of the engine will become more
hicle. 7) No trailer towing should be under- quickly run in if the operation speed
taken during the running-in period. is varied during the running in pe-
1) Do not race the engine without a riod.
load (i.e revving the engine in neu- 4) Never allow the engine to labour.
tral). B020B01FC-EAT Use the gearbox freely and avoid
2) During the first 500 miles the maxi- DIESEL ENGINE large throttle openings when the
mum engine speed should be re- The longevity and performance of the engine speed is below 1500 rpm.
stricted to 3000 rpm and gradually vehicle are greatly affected by the care 5) Avoid rapid acceleration and maxi-
increased thereafter. exercised during the first 1000 miles of mum throttle openings.
3) Avoid prolonged constant speed motoring. Because of modern manu- 6) Avoid harsh braking during the first
operation. The internal components facturing techniques, rigid guidelines 100 miles of urban motoring or 1000
of the engine will become more regarding maximum road speeds have miles of motorway driving to allow
quickly run in if the operation speed become unnecessary. However, cer- the friction facings of the brake pads
is varied during the running in pe- tain precautions should be observed in and shoes to bed against the discs
riod. order to obtain the best possible per- and drums properly.
formance and useful life from the ve- 7) No trailer towing should be under-
hicle. taken during the running-in period.
1
IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 5
B880A01HP-EAT B880B01HP-EAT 1) ID key

- For Petrol Engine Keys This key must be used first in order
The immobiliser system is an anti-theft Type A to register the unique code in the ICM
device, designed to deter automobile - this will have been carried out prior
theft. Light to you receiving your new vehicle.
Purple This ID code will then have been
recorded onto the master keys. Both
Black sides of the key have a Hyundai
logo.
ID key 2) Master key
This key is for general use. It will
Master key open all locks on your vehicle.
B880B01HP
One side of the key has the Hyundai
logo and the other side has the "M"
Type B symbol.
If your vehicle is equipped with Theft-
alarm system, the master keys with
the function of transmitter will be
provided. (Type B)
! CAUTION:
ID key Don't lose your ID key. Always keep
Master key your ID key in a place where you
B880B02HP
remember. If you don't have ID key,
consult your authorized Hyundai
For greater convenience, your Hyundai dealer.
has two types of keys as shown in the
illustration.
6
3) If you need additional keys or if you B885C01A-EAT The key number should be recorded
should lose your keys, your Key Numbers and kept in a safe place in case the
authorised Hyundai dealer can make need to order further keys arises. New
new keys if you can supply the key keys are available from any Hyundai
number and ID key. dealer by quoting the relevant key
number.
NOTE: In the interest of security, the metal tag
If you make your own duplicate key, attached to the keys which bears the
you will not be able to cancel the key number should be removed from
system or start the engine. the key ring after you receive your new
not be provided by Hyundai for secu-
rity reasons.
B880C01HP
should lose your keys, your authorised
Hyundai dealer can make new keys if
you can supply the key number and ID
key.
B880C02HP

you.
1
7
B885A01HP-EAT B885B01HP-EAT be exercised to ensure that the key

- For Diesel Engine Keys does not become locked inside the
The immobiliser system is an anti-theft Type A vehicle by mistake. If your vehicle is
device, designed to deter automobile equipped with Theft-alarm system, the
theft. master keys with the function of trans-
mitter will be provided (Type B).
NOTE:
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the
system or start the engine.
Master keys B885B01HP
Type B
! CAUTION:
o The password should be re-
corded and kept in a safe place in
case the need to order further
keys arises.
o If you forget the password, con-
sult your authorised Hyundai
dealer.
Master keys
B885B02HP
All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are

operated by the same key. However,
since it is possible to lock the doors
without the use of the key, care should
8
B885C01O-EAT The key number should be recorded B030C01HP-EAT

Key Numbers and kept in a safe place in case the ILLUMINATED IGNITION
need to order further keys arises. New SWITCH
keys are available from any Hyundai
dealer by quoting the relevant key num-
ber.
In the interest of security, the metal tag
attached to the keys which bears the
key number should be removed from
the key ring after you receive your new
not be provided by Hyundai for security
reasons.
B885C01HP
B030C01E
should lose your keys, your authorised
Hyundai dealer can make new keys Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for
your convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the "ON" position. The
light will go off approximately 10 sec-
onds after closing the door or when the
ignition switch is turned on.
B885C02HP

you.
1
DOOR LOCKS 9
B040A02Y-EAT B040B01A-AAT B040C02Y-EAT

Locking, Unlocking Front Doors Locking From the Outside
With a Key
!
WARNING:
o Before you drive away, be sure UNLOCK
that all the doors are securely
closed. It is also recommended
that the child-protector rear door LOCK
locks are in the 'lock' position so
that children cannot open the
rear doors from inside the ve-
hicle accidentally.
o Before opening the door, always HHP2005-E
look for and avoid oncoming traf- HHP2003-E The doors can be locked without a key.
fic. o The door can be locked or unlocked To lock the doors, first push the inside
o In case of accident, the door is with a key. lock switch to the "LOCK" position so
unlocked automatically(Not all o Lock the door by turning the key that the red mark on the switch is not
models). toward the front of the vehicle and visible, then close the door.
unlock it by turning the key toward The door will not lock if the key is left in
the rear. the ignition switch when the front doors
are closed. This is normal.
10
NOTE: B040D01S-AAT SB040F2-E
o When locking the door this way, Locking from the Inside CHILD-PROOF REAR DOOR
be careful not to lock the door with LOCK
the ignition key left in the vehicle.
o To help prevent theft, always re- LOCK
move the ignition key, close all UNLOCK
windows, and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
HHP2004-E
To lock the doors from the inside, sim- HHP2008-E
ply close the door and push the lock The rear doors are fitted with child proof
switch to the "LOCK" position. When locks to prevent accidental opening of
this is done, neither the outside nor the the doors using the inside door handle,
inside door handles can be used. whilst allowing access by means of the
outside handle (such as is required in
NOTE: the event of an acccident for example)
When the door is locked, the red provided that the door lock button is at
mark on the switch is not visible. the unlocked position. Use of the child
proof lock mechanism is recommended
when children are carried in the vehicle.
1
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM 11
The child proof lock mechanism may NOTE: B070A01A-EAT
be activated by opening the door and o When pushing the front portion (Not all models)
moving the lever located by the door of the driver's door lock switch, all This system is designed to provide
latch to the " " position. Move the vehicle doors will lock. If any door protection from unauthorised entry into
lever to the " " position when normal is open when the switch is de- the car. This system is operated in
door operation is desired. pressed, the door will remain three stages: the first is the "Armed"
locked when closed. stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,
B040G01HP-AAT
o When pushing the rear portion of and the third is the "Disarmed" stage.
Central Door Locks the switch, all vehicle doors will If triggered, the system provides an
unlock. audible alarm with blinking of turn sig-
LOCK UNLOCK o The central door locking is oper- nal lights.
ated by turning the key toward the
front or rear of the vehicle.
B040G01HP-E
The central door locking switch is lo-

cated on the driver's arm rest. It is
operated by depressing the door lock
switch.
12
B070B01O-EAT
NOTE: B070C01HP-EAT
Armed Stage 1) If any door, hatchback door or Alarm Stage
engine bonnet remains open, the
system will not be armed.
2) If this happens, rearm the system
as described above.
LOCK
! CAUTION:
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the car. If the
UNLOCK B070B02HP-E system is armed whilst a B070C01HP
passenger(s) remains in the car,
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the alarm may be activated when The alarm will be activated if any of the
the system as described below. the remaining passenger(s) leaves following occurs whilst the car is parked
the car. and the system is armed.
1) Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch. 1) A front or rear door is opened with-
2) Make sure that the bonnet and hatch- out using the transmitter.
back door are closed and latched. 2) The hatchback door is opened with-
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter out using the transmitter.
of the keyless entry system. 3) The engine bonnet is opened.
After completion of the steps above, The siren will sound and the turn signal
the turn signal lights will blink once to lights will blink continuouly for 27 sec-
indicate that the system is armed onds. To turn off the system, unlock
the door or hatchback door with the
transmitter.
1
13
NOTE: B070F01A-EAT
Keyless Entry System
! CAUTION:
If any door, hatchback door or en-
gine bonnet is not opened within 30 (Not all models)
Avoid trying to start the engine seconds, the system will be rearmed.
whilst the system is armed. Locking doors
1. Close all doors.
B070D01HP-EAT ! CAUTION:
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans-
Disarmed Stage mitter.
Only the transmitter can disarm the 3. At the same time all doors lock, the
armed stage. If the transmitter does turn signal lights will blink once to
not disarm the system, it is neces- indicate that the system is armed.
sary to take the following steps;
Unlocking doors
1. Unlock the door with the key, which
will cause, the alarm to be acti- 1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the
vated. transmitter.
2. Insert the key in the ignition key 2. At the same time all doors unlock,
cylinder and turn the ignition key the turn signal lights will blink twice
to "ON" position. to indicate that the system is dis-
3. Wait for 30 seconds. armed.
B070D01HP-1
The system will be disarmed when the After completion of the steps above,
driver's or passenger's door is unlocked the system will be disarmed.
by depressing the "UNLOCK" button on
the transmitter.
After completion of the step above, the

turn signal lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
14 POWER WINDOWS
B070E02HP-EAT B060A03L-DAT
Replacing the battery Hole
When the transmitter's battery begins Close Open
to get weak, it may take several pushes
on the button to lock or unlock the
doors, and the LED will not light. Re- (1)
place the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR1616

Battery Battery Cover
Replacement instructions: HMXOM033-3
B060A01HP-E
2. Take off the battery cover after sepa- The power windows operate when the
rating the transmitter. ignition key is in the "ON" position. The
3. Remove the old battery from the main switches are located on the
transmitter with a blade screwdriver driver's armrest and control the front
inserted in the hole and note the and rear windows on both sides of the
Transmitter polarity. Make sure the polarity of the vehicle. The windows may be opened
Case new battery is the same(+side facing by depressing the appropriate window
up), then insert it in the transmitter. switch and closed by pulling up the
switch. To open the window on the
driver's side, press the switch(1) half-
HMXOM033-2
way down. The window moves as long
1. Carefully separate the case with a as the switch is operated. To fully open
phillips screwdriver. the driver's window automatically, press
the switch fully down. In automatic
operation, the window will fully open
even if you let go of the switch. To stop
at the desired opening, pull up and
release the switch.
1
15
NOTE:
The power windows can be operated
for 30 seconds after the ignition key
! WARNING:
is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" (1)Be careful that someone's head,
(2) positions, or removed from the igni- hands and body are not trapped
tion switch. by a closing window.
If the front doors are opened during (2)Never try to operate the main
this 30 second period, the power switch on the driver's door and the
windows can no longer be operated individual door window switch in
without the ignition key turned to the opposing directions at the same
"ON" position. time. If this is done, the window
B060A02HP-E
will stop and cannot be opened or
In order to prevent operation of the closed.
passenger front and rear windows, a (3)Do not leave children alone in the
window lock switch(2) is provided on car. Always remove the ignition
the armrest of the driver's door. To key for their safety.
disable the power windows, press the
window lock switch. To revert to normal Close
Open
operation, press the window lock switch
a second time.
HHP2013-E
16 SEATS
SB070A1-E ZB060A8-E
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT Front Seat Fore/Aft Adjustment
! WARNING:
o Seat adjustment should not be
! WARNING: made whilst the vehicle is in mo-
Front seat adjustments must not be tion since loss of control of the
undertaken whilst the vehicle is in vehicle may occur.
motion. Loss of control of the ve- o To ensure the seat is locked se-
hicle may result if seat adjustments curely, attempt to move the seat
are made whilst the vehicle is in forward or rearward without using
motion. the lock release lever.
HHP2026-E
Front seat fore/aft adjustment is facili-

tated by turning the lever located on the
front centre of the seat base and sliding
the seat forwards or backwards as re-
quired.
When the seat is at the desired posi-
tion, release the lever and ensure that
the locking mechanism is engaged by
rocking the seat to and fro.
1
17
ZB060C1-E B080D02LZ-EAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle Adjustable Head Restraints
! WARNING:
To minimize risk of personal injury
in event of a collision or sudden
stop, both the driver and passen-
ger seatbacks should always be in
a nearly upright position whilst the
vehicle is in motion. The protection
cantly when the seatbacks are re- Lock knob
HHP2027-E
clined. There is greater risk that the B080D01HP
passenger will slide under the belt
To recline the seatback, lean forward to resulting in serious injury when the To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To
take your weight off it, then pull up on seatbacks are reclined. lower it, push it down whilst pressing
the recliner control lever at the outside the lock knob. For maximum effective-
edge of the seat. Now lean back until ness in the event of an accident, the
the desired seatback angle is achieved. restraint must be adjusted so that the
To lock the seatback into position, restraint is approximately at the level of
release the recliner control lever. the seat occupant's ears. The restraint
must never be so adjusted that it is
centred about the level of the seat
occupant's neck.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go then press the lock knob
whilst pulling upward.
18
B081D01LZ-EAT B080E02A-EAT
Tilting Head Restraint Forward Driver's Seat Lumbar Support
! WARNING: and Rearward Control
o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the head restraint
should be adjusted so the top of
the head restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
1
ears. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away
from the seatback is not recom- 2
mended.
o Do not operate vehicle with the
head restraints removed as injury
HHP2034 HHP2032-E
to the occupants may occur in
the event of an accident. Head The head restraint may be tilted forward To adjust the lumbar support, turn the
restraints may provide protection to three different positions by pulling handle on the inboard side of the seat.
against neck injuries when prop- the head restraint forward. To adjust the To increase the amount of lumbar sup-
erly adjusted. head restraint rearward, pull it fully for- port, pull the lever forward. To de-
ward to the farthest position and re- crease it, push the lever toward the
lease it. Adjust the head restraint so rear.
that it properly supports the head and
neck. 1. Minimum support
2. Maximum support
1
19
B080F01S-EAT B090A02Y-EAT B090B01L-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment POWER DRIVER'S SEAT Adjusting Seat Forward and
(Driver's Seat Only) (Not all models) Rearward
The driver's seat can be adjusted ap-
propriately by using the control knob
on the right side of the seat. Before 1
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so as to easily control the
2
steering wheel, pedals and switches
on the instrument panel.
! CAUTION:
HHP2028-E Do not operate two knobs at the HHP2029-E
same time.
To raise or lower the front part of the Pull the control knob forward or back-
seat cushion, turn the front knob forward to move the seat forward or back-
ward or rearward. ward to the desired position. Release
To raise or lower the rear part of the seat the knob and the seat will lock at that
cushion, turn the rear knob forward or ! WARNING: position.
rearward. o Never attempt to adjust the seat
whilst the vehicle is moving. This 1. Reclining Control Knob
could result in loss of control or 2. Sliding and Height Adjusting Con-
an accident causing death, seri- trol Knob
ous injury, or property damage.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the airbag.
20
B090C01Y-AAT B090D01Y-EAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment Adjusting Seatback Angle
! WARNING:
To minimize the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision or
a sudden stop, both the driver's
remain in an upright position whilst
HHP2031-E HHP2030-E
Move the front portion of the control Rotate the upper portion of the control the belt resulting in serious injury
knob up or down to raise or lower the knob forward or backward to recline if a crash occurs when the seatbacks
front part of the seat cushion. Move the the seatback to the desired position. are reclined. The seat belt cannot
rear portion of the control knob up or Release the control knob and then the provide full protection to an occu-
down to raise or lower the rear part of seatback will lock in that position. pant if the seatback is reclined.
the seat cushion.
1
21
B080G01O-AAT B100A02HP-EAT
UNDER TRAY SEAT WARMER (Not all models)
! CAUTION:
o The seat warmer will not operate if
ambient temperature is higher
than 88.7°F (31.5°C).
o If the seat warmer doesn't work
when ambient temperature is
lower than 76.1°F (24.5°C), it must
be checked by authorized dealer.
HHP2037-E B100A01HP-E
The tray is located under the front The seat warmer is provided to warm
passenger seat. It is opend by pulling the front seats during cold weather.
forward. With the ignition key in the "ON" posi-
tion, push either of the switches to
warm the driver's seat or the
! WARNING:
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
To avoid the possibility of injury in tions where the operation of the seat
case of an accident or a sudden warmer is not needed, keep the
stop, the tray should be kept closed switches in the "OFF" position.
when the car is in motion.
22
B080D02HP-EAT B090C02HP-GAT
REAR SEAT Adjusting Seatback Angle
Adjustable Head Restraints ! WARNING:
o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the head restraint
should be adjusted so the top of
the head restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
ears. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away
from the seatback is not recom-
mended. Seatback
o Do not operate vehicle with the folding lever
HHP2039
Lock Knob head restraints removed as injury
B090A01HP
to the occupants may occur in the To recline the seatback, push the
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To event of an accident. Head re- seatback folding lever toward the head-
lower it, push it down whilst pressing straints may provide protection rest, and release it after the desired
the lock knob. For maximum effective- against neck injuries when prop- seatback angle is achieved.
ness in the event of an accident, the erly adjusted. When you recline the seatback to de-
restraint must be adjusted so that the sired position, always be sure it has
restraint is approximately at the level of locked into position.
the seat occupant's ears. The restraint
must never be so adjusted that it is
centred about the level of the seat
occupant's neck.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go then press the lock knob
whilst pulling upward.
1
23
B090B02HP-EAT
NOTE:
! WARNING: Cushion
Before folding the seat, fit the seat
belt webbing in the clip and put the
To minimize the risk of personal For greater convenience, the entire seat belt buckle between the seatback
injury in the event of a collision or a seatback and seat cushion may be and the seat cushion.
sudden stop, the seatbacks should folded down and up.
remain in an upright position whilst 1. Lower the head restraint completely
the car is in motion. The protection whilst pressing the lock knob.
provided by the seat belts may be
reduced significantly when the
seatbacks are reclined. There is a
greater risk that the seat occupants
will slide under the belt resulting in
serious injury if a crash occurs when
the seatbacks are reclined. The seat
belt cannot provide full protection to
an occupant if the seatback is re-
clined. HHP2057 (1)
HHP2040

lever(1) inward, then push down the
seatback.
HHP2041
24
! WARNING:
When folding down or returning the
seatback, always hold the seatback.
Otherwise, the seatback could move (3)
suddenly and result in unexpected
injury.
HHP2043 HHP2043-1
4. To secure the seat, hook the secur- NOTE:

ing strap(3) under the seat cushion to o Before lowering the seat cushion
the headrest stay of front driver and when you return the seat, roll the
passenger seat. securing strap and put it in the
5. To return the seatback and seat pocket.
cushion to its normal position, re- o When you return the seatback to
(2) verse the above procedure. its upright position, always be sure
HHP2042
it is locked into position by pull-
ing and pushing on the top of
3. Pull the seat cushion release le- seatback.
ver(2) upward, and then fold up the
seat cushion.
1
SEAT BELTS 25
SB090A1-E
o Do not allow passengers to fold SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS
! WARNING: down and up the seatback and
seat cushion whilst the car is Seat belts should be worn at all times
o The purpose of the fold-down rear by all occupants front and rear. The
seat back and the fold-up rear seat moving.
possibility of injury or the severity of
cushion is to allow you to carry injuries suffered in the event of an
more objects than could be ac- accident will be greatly reduced by the
commodated. Never allow passen- wearing of seat belts.
gers to sit on the cargo area whilst B140A01B-GAT
In addition the following recommenda-
the car is moving. This is not a REAR SEAT WARNING tions should be observed.
proper seating position and no
seat belts are available for use
when the seat back is folded down.
This could result in serious injury SB090B1-E
or death in case of an accident or Babies/Small Children
a sudden stop. Objects should not
Babies and small children must be
extend higher than the top of the
restrained using a restraint system
front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide specifically designed for this purpose.
Under no circumstances should a child
forward and cause injury or dam-
be carried in the vehicle without the
age during sudden stops.
o When you return the rear seatback use of a suitable restraint which meets
B140A01HP
the regulations in force in the country
to its upright position after being
For the safety of all passengers, lug- where the vehicle is in operation.
folded down, be careful not to
damage the seatbelt webbing or gage or other cargo should not be piled
buckle. In addition, do not allow higher than the top of the seatback.
the seatbelt webbing or buckle to
get caught or pinched in the rear
seat.
26
SB090C1-E SB090E1-E SB090H1-E

Larger Children Injured Persons CARE OF SEAT BELTS
Larger children should occupy the rear A seat belt should be used when an Seat belt assemblies must never be
seat and be restrained at all times. The injured person is being transported. disassembled or modified in any way.
restraint may take the form of a special For specific recommendations, the In addition, care should be exercised
safety belt or the original factory fitted advice of a qualified Medical Practioner to ensure that the belt assemblies do
seat belt used in conjunction with an should be sought. not become damaged by being trapped
approved booster cushion depending in seat mechanisms, door shuts etc.
upon the size and weight of the child.
Under no circumstances should chil- SB090F1-E
dren be allowed to travel standing, Seat Belt Occupancy SB090I-E
kneeling or lying on the seat. Periodic Inspection
Never allow childen to ride in the front The seat belts are designed to be used
by one seat occupant only. The use of It is recommended that all seat belts
passenger seat.
a seat belt by more than one person be inspected periodically for wear or
increases the levels of injury which damage of any kind. Parts of the sys-
may be sustained in the event of an tem that are damaged should be re-
SB090O1-E accident. placed as soon as possible. Under no
Pregnant Women circumstances must any part of the
The use of a seat belt is recommended seat belt assemblies be dismantled or
for pregnant women. The seat belt SE090G1-E repaired.
should be worn as low and snugly as Do Not Lie Down
possible across the hips, not across To ensure that the maximum level of
the abdomen. A qualified Medical Prac- protection may be afforded by the seat
titioner should be consulted for further belt system, all passengers should be
information. sitting in an upright position throughout
the journey. The seat belt will be un-
able to afford maximum protection if
the front seats are at or near the fully
reclined position.
1
27
SB090J1-E B170A04A-EAT lower it, push it down whilst pressing

Keep Belts Clean and Dry HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT the height adjuster button.
Seat belts should be kept clean and SEAT SHOULDER BELT Release the button to lock the anchor
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be into position. Try sliding the release
cleaned using a mild soap solution and button to make sure that it has locked
warm water. Bleach, dye, strong de- into the position.
tergents or abrasives should not be
used since the fabric may become
damaged and weakened.
! WARNING:
o The height adjuster must be in
SB090K1-E
the locked position when the
Replacement of Seat Belts vehicle is moving.
o The misadjustment of height of
The entire seat belt assembly or as- B170A01HP-E
the shoulder belt could reduce
semblies should be replaced if the You can adjust the height of the shoul- the effectiveness of the seat belt
vehicle has been involved in an acci- der belt anchor to one of the 4 positions in a crash.
dent even if no damage is evident. for maximum comfort and safety.
Additional questions concerning seat If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
belt operation should be directed to a too near your neck, you will not be
Hyundai Dealer. getting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion should be ad-
justed so that it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height ad-
juster into an appropriate position. To
raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To
28
SB090P1-E The mechanism will also lock if the seat B200A01A-AAT

SEAT BELTS (3-Point Type) belt webbing is withdrawn too quickly Adjusting Your Seat Belt
To Fasten The Seat Belt when the belt is being fastened or if
attempts are made to withdraw the
webbing whilst the vehicle is not on
level ground. Should the seat belt lock
under these conditions, it will be pos-
sible to release the mechanism by
allowing a small amount of webbing to
be retracted and the belt withdrawn
again.
B200A01L-R
B180A01L-R
The seat belts are fastened by pulling

the belt buckle towards the seat belt
! WARNING:
stalk and inserting the metal tongue of You should place the lap belt por-
the buckle into the stalk. The buckle tion as low as possible and snugly
should be firmly pressed into the stalk across your hips, not on your waist.
until locked which will be indicated by If the lap belt is located too high on
an audible "click". your waist, it may increase the
The length of the seat belt webbing will chance of injury in the event of a
be automatically adjusted by the seat collision. Both arms should not be
belt mechanism to allow the wearer under or over the belt. Rather, one
maximum freedom of movement whilst should be over and the other under,
the belt is being worn. However, in the as shown in the illustration.
event of rapid deceleration or impact, Never wear the seat belt under the
the belt mechanism will automatically arm nearest the door.
lock.
1
29
B210A01A-AAT B220D02HP-EAT
To Release the Seat Belt SEAT BELTS - Centre Rear Seat
3-Point System With Emergency
Locking Retractor
(c)
(d)
(c)
(a) B220D02HP
(d)
B210A01L-R
(b) 3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are
The seat belt is released by pressing latched, pull the seat belt out of the
the release button in the locking buckle. B220D01HP retractor and insert the metal tab (c)
When it is released, the belt should 1. Pull the seatbelt out of the roof panel. into the buckle (d).
automatically draw back into the re- 2. Before fastening the rear seat centre
tractor. belt, confirm the metal tab (a) and
If this does not happen, check the belt buckle (b) are latched together.
to be sure it is not twisted, then try
again.
30
! WARNING:
o When using the rear seat centre
belt, you must lock all metal tabs
and buckles. If any metal tab or
buckle is not locked, it will in-
crease the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a)
and the buckle (b) with the fol-
B220A02Y-D
lowing exceptions. B220D03HP
(1) In case of folding rear
There will be an audible "click" when the seatbacks down. o To disconnect the metal tab (a)
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt (2) If transporting an object on from the buckle (b), insert a sharp-
automatically adjusts to the proper length the rear seat may cause dam ended tool into the groove lo-
only after the lap belt is adjusted manu- age to the rear seat centre cated on the buckle (b).
ally so that it fits snugly around your belt.
hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy o Lock the metal tab (a) and the
motion, the belt will extend and let you buckle (b) immediately after fold-
move around. If there is a sudden stop ing rear seatbacks up.
or impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean forward
too quickly.
1
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM 31
B220C02A-EAT B230A03P-EAT
To Release the Seat Belt Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
restrained to minimize the risk of injury
in an accident, sudden stop or sudden
manoeuvre. According to accident sta-
tistics, children are safer when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children should
use one of the seat belts provided.
You are required by law to use safety
B220D04HP restraints for children. If small children
ride in your vehicle you must put them
B220C01HP-E
o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) in a child restraint system (safety seat).
and the buckle (b), place metal (a) When you want to release the seat belt, Children could be injured or killed in a
in the seat belt clip not to make press the button in the locking buckle. crash if their restraints are not properly
noise whilst driving. secured. For small children and ba-
bies, a child seat or infant seat must be
! WARNING:
used. Before buying a particular child
restraint system, make sure it fits your
When fastening the outboard seat car seat and seat belts, and fits your
belt or the centre seat belt, make sure child. Follow all the instructions pro-
they are inserted into the correct vided by the manufacturer when in-
buckles to obtain maximum protec- stalling the child restraint system.
tion from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
32
o Children who are too large to be in o Never use an infant carrier or child
! WARNING: a child restraint should sit in the safety seat that "hooks" over a
rear seat and be restrained with seatback; it may not provide ad-
o A child restraint system must be
the available lap/shoulder belts. equate security in an accident.
placed in the rear seat. Never
Never allow children to ride in the o Never allow a child to be held in a
install a child or infant seat on
front passanger seat. person's arms whilst they are in a
the front passenger's seat.
o Always make sure that the shoul- moving vehicle, as this could re-
Should an accident occur and
der belt portion of the outboard sult in serious injury to the child
cause the passenger side airbag
lap/shoulder belt is positioned in the event of an accident or a
to deploy, it could severely in-
midway over the shoulder, never sudden stop. Holding a child in a
jure or kill an infant or child seated
across the neck. Moving the child moving vehicle does not provide
in an infant or child seat. Thus,
closer to the centre of the vehicle the child with any means of pro-
only use a child restraint in the
may help provide a good shoul- tection during an accident, even if
rear seat of your vehicle.
der belt fit. The lap belt portion of the person holding the child is
o Since a safety belt or child re-
the lap/shoulder belt or the cen- wearing a seat belt.
straint system can become very
tre seat lap belt must always be o If the child restraint seat is not
hot if it is left in a closed vehicle,
positioned as low as possible on anchored properly, the risk of a
be sure to check the seat cover
the child's hips and as snug as child being seriously injured or
and buckles before placing a
possible. killed in a collision greatly in-
child there.
o If the seat belt will not properly fit creases.
o When the child restraint system
the child, we recommend the use
is not in use, fasten it with a
of an approved booster seat in
safety belt so that it will not be
the rear seat in order to raise the
thrown forward in the case of a
child's seating height so that the
sudden stop or an accident.
seat belt will properly fit the child.
o Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the seat.
1
33
B230F01A-EAT B230G01A-EAT If you need to tighten the belt, pull more

Installation on Rear Seat Centre Installation on Outboard Rear webbing toward the retractor. When you
Position Seats unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated pas-
senger emergency locking usage con-
dition.
NOTE:
o Before installing the child re-
straint system, read the instruc-
tions supplied by the child re-
straint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate
B230F02HP B230G01L
as described, have the system
Use the centre seat belt for the rear to To install a child restraint system in the checked immediately by your
secure the child restraint system as outboard rear seats, extend the shoul- authorised Hyundai dealer.
illustrated. After installation of the child der/lap belt from its retractor. Install
restraint system, rock the child seat the child restraint system, buckle the
back and forth, and side to side to seat belt and allow the seat belt to take
ensure that it is properly secured by up any slack. Make sure that the lap
the seat belt. portion of the belt is tight around the
If the child seat moves, readjust the child restraint system and the shoulder
length of the seat belt. Then, if portion of the belt is positioned so that
equipped, insert the child restraint it cannot interfere with the child's head
tether strap hook into the child re- or neck. After installation of the child
straint hook holder and tighten to se- restraint system, try to move it in all
cure the seat. Always refer to the child directions to be sure the child restraint
restraint system manufacturer's rec- system is securely installed.
ommendation before installing the child
restraint system in your vehicle.
34
B230B02A-AAT B230C02HP-EAT
Using a Child Restraint System Securing a Child Restraint Sys-
! WARNING: with "Tether Anchorage" Sys- tem with "Tether Anchorage"
Do not install any child restraint tem System
system in the front passenger seat. Three child restraint hook holders are
Should an accident occur and cause Bolt, Holder located on the floor behind the rear
the passenger side airbag to de- (5/16" - 30 mm) seat.
ploy, it could severely injure or kill Install the child restraint seat accord-
an infant or child seated in an infant Washer, Conical ing to the instructions provided as fol-
or child seat. Therefore, only use a Spring lowing.
child restraint system in the rear
Holder, Child
seat of your vehicle. Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint
Restraint Hook
Hook Holder
Retainer Washer
B230B01HP
For small children and babies, the use

of a child seat or infant seat is required.
This child seat or infant seat should be
of appropriate size for the child and
should be installed in accordance with Hole
the manufacturer's instructions. It is B230C01HP
further required that the seat be placed
in the vehicle's rear seat since this can 1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
make an important contribution to floor behind the rear seat with the key
safety. Your vehicle is provided with inserted in the hole.
three child restraint hook holders for 2. Route the child restraint seat strap
installing the child seat or infant seat. over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap un-
1
35
der the head restraint and between B230D03E-EAT Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is
the head restraint posts, otherwise Securing a Child Restraint Sys- approved according to the requirement
route the tether strap over the top of tem with "ISOFIX" System and ECE-R44. This seat has been tested
the seatback. "Tether Anchorage" System extensively by Hyundai and is recom-
mended for your Hyundai.
NOTE:
At present, this seat is the only one
complying with that provision. In
case that other manufacturers will
furnish proof of a respective certifi-
cation, Hyundai is going to evalu-
ate this seat carefully and will give
Child a recommendation provided that
Restraint seat complies to the law. Please ask
Hook B230D01HP
Holders
your Hyundai dealer in this respect.
ISOFIX is a standardised method of
fitting child seats that eliminates the
need to use the standard adult seat ISOFIX Anchor
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator
This enables a much more secure and
positive location with the added benefit
of easier and quicker installation.
Tether Strap
Hook An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if
it has vehicle-specific approval in ac-
Front of Vehicle B230C02HP cordance with the requirements of
ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the B230D02HP
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo /
child restraint hook holder and tighten Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer
to secure the seat.
36
On each side of the rear seat, between To secure the child restraint seat
the cushion and backrest, are located
a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points
! WARNING:
together with a top tether mounting on o Do not install a child restraint
the luggage compartment. During the seat at the centre of the rear seat
installing, the seat has to be engaged using the vehicle's ISOFIX an-
at the anchorage-points in a way you chors. The ISOFIX anchors are
can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) only provided for the left and
and has to be fixed with the Top Tether- right outboard rear seating posi-
belt on the belonging point in the lug- tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
gage-compartment. The installing and anchors by attempting to attach
the use of a child-seat has to be done a child restraint seat in the middle
B230D03HP
according to the installing-manual, of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
which is added to the ISOFIX-seat. anchors. In a crash, the child
1. To engage the child restraint seat to restraint seat ISOFIX attachments
NOTE: the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child may not be strong enough to
An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX secure the child restraint seat
installed if the seat has a vehicle- anchor. Listen for the audible "click" properly in the centre of the rear
specific approval according to ECE- sound. seat and may break, causing se-
R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child- 2. Connect the tether strap hook to the rious injury or death.
seat, which was bought for another child restraint hook holder and o Do not mount more than one
car, ask your Hyundai-dealer tighten to secure the seat. Refer to child restraint to a child restraint
whether this seat-type is approved "Securing a Child Restraint System lower anchorage point. The im-
and recommended for your with the Tether Anchorage System" proper increased load may cause
Hyundai. on page 1-34. the anchorage points or tether
anchor to break, causing serious
injury or death.
1
37
B230H02HP-EAT U: Suitable for "universal" category

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com- Child Seat Restraint Suitability restraints approved for use in
patible child restraint seat only For Seat Position this mass group
to the appropriate locations UF : Suitable for forward-facing "uni-
shown in the illustration. Use child safety seats that have been
officially approved and are appropriate versal" category restraints ap-
o Always follow the installation and proved for use in this mass group
use instructions provided by the for your children.
When using the child safety seats, L1: Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX
manufacturer of the child re- GR1" approved for use in this
straint. refer to the following table .
mass group
(Approval No: E1 R44-
Seating Position
03301133)
Age Group Front Rear Rear X : Seat position not suitable for chil-
Passenger Outboard Centre dren in this mass group
0 : Up to 10 kg
X U U
(0 ~ 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
X U U
(0 ~ 2 years)
I : 9kg to 18kg
(9 months ~ 4 X U, L1 U
years)
II & III : 15kg to
36kg (4 ~ 12 X UF UF
years)
38
B180B03HP-EAT When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if 1 Driver's airbag

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt the occupant tries to lean forward too
Passenger's
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
airbag
into position. In certain frontal colli-
sions, the pre-tensioner will activate
and pull the seat belt into tighter con-
tact against the occupant's body.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system 3

consists mainly of the following com- 2
ponents.
B180B01HP-E
Their locations are shown in the illus-

HXG229-R
tration.
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
driver's and front passenger's pre- 1. SRS airbag warning light
! WARNING:
tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner is to make sure that the 3. SRS control module pre-tensioner seat belt:
seat belts fit tightly against the
occupant's body in certain frontal colli- 1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
sions. rectly.
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be 2. The seat belt must be adjusted to
activated alone or, where the frontal the correct position.
collision is severe enough, together
with the airbags.
1
39
NOTE:
o Both the driver's and front
passenger's pre-tensioner seat
! CAUTION: ! WARNING:
belts will be activated in certain o Because the sensor that activates o Pre-tensioners are designed to
frontal collisions. The pre- the SRS airbag is connected with operate only one time. After acti-
tensioner seat belts can be acti- pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
vated alone or, where the frontal airbag warning light AIR
BAG on the must be replaced. All seat belts,
collision is severe enough, to- instrument panel will blink for ap- of any type, should always be
gether with the airbags. proximately 6 seconds after the replaced after they have been
o When the pre-tensioner seat belts ignition key has been turned to the worn during a collision.
are activated, a loud noise may be "ON" position or after the engine o The pre-tensioner seat belt as-
heard and fine dust, which may is started, and then it should turn sembly mechanisms become hot
appear to be smoke, may be vis- off. during activation. Do not touch
ible in the passenger compart- o If pre-tensioner seat belt is not the pre-tensioner seat belt as-
ment. These are normal operating working properly, this warning semblies for several minutes af-
conditions and are not hazard- light will illuminate even if there is ter they have been activated.
ous. no malfunction of the SRS airbag. o Do not attempt to inspect or re-
o Although it is harmless, the fine If the SRS airbag warning light place the pre-tensioner seat belts
dust may cause skin irritation and does not blink for about 6 seconds yourself. This must be done by
should not be breathed for pro- when the ignition key is turned to an authorised Hyundai dealer.
longed periods. Wash your hands "ON" or the engine is started, or if o Do not strike the pre-tensioner
and face thoroughly after an acci- it remains illuminated after blink- seat belt assemblies.
dent in which the pre-tensioner ing for approximately 6 seconds, o Do not attempt to service or re-
seat belts were activated. or if it illuminates whilst the ve- pair the pre-tensioner seat belt
hicle is being driven, please have system in any manner.
an authorised Hyundai dealer in-
spect the pre-tensioner seat belts
and SRS airbag system as soon as
possible.
40 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
(AIRBAG) SYSTEM
B240A01HP-EAT belt system alone, in case of a frontal
o Improper handling of the pre-
impact of sufficient severity.
tensioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings to not
strike, modify, inspect, replace, NOTE:
service or repair the pretensioner Be sure to read information about
seat belt assemblies may lead to the SRS on the labels provided in the
improper operation or inadvertent front of the sun visor and in the glove
activation and serious injury. box.
o Always wear seat belts when driv-
ing or riding in a motor vehicle.
! WARNING:
B240A01HP
o As its name implies, the SRS is
Your Hyundai is equipped with a designed to work with, and be
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) Sys- supplemental to, the driver's and
tem. The indications of the system's the passenger's three point seat
presence are the letters "SRS AIR belt systems and is not a substi-
BAG" embossed on the airbag pad tute for them. Therefore your seat
cover in the steering wheel and the belts must be worn at all times
passenger's side front panel pad above whilst the vehicle is in motion.
the glove box. The airbags deploy only in certain
frontal impact conditions severe
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags enough to likely cause significant
installed under the pad covers in the injury to the vehicle occupants.
centre of the steering wheel and the o The SRS is designed to deploy the
passenger's side front panel above the airbags only when an impact is
glove box. The purpose of the SRS is sufficiently severe and when the
to provide the vehicle's driver and/or impact angle is less than 30° from
the front passenger with additional pro- the forward longitudinal axis of
tection than that offered by the seat the vehicle and will not deploy in
1
41
B240B01HP-EAT
side, rear or rollover impacts. o For maximum safety protection SRS Components and Functions
Additionally, the airbags will only in all types of crashes, all occu-
deploy once. Thus, seat belts must pants including the driver should
be worn at all times. always wear their seat belts
o Front airbags are not intended to whether or not an airbag is also
deploy in light collisions in which provided at their seating posi-
protection can be provided by tion to minimize the risk of se-
the seat belt alone. vere injury or death in the event
o Front airbags are not intended to of a crash. Do not sit or lean
deploy in side-impact, rear-im- unnecessarily close to the airbag
pact or rollover crashes. In addi- whilst the vehicle is in motion.
tion, airbags will not normally o The SRS airbag system must
deploy in frontal crashes below deploy very rapidly to provide B240B01L-R
the deployment threshold speed. protection in a crash. If an occu- The SRS consists of the following com-
pant is out of position because ponents:
Rear impact
of not wearing a seat belt, the
airbag may forcefully contact the - Driver's Airbag Module
occupant causing serious or fatal - Passenger's Airbag Module
injuries. - Knee Bolster
- SRS Service Reminder Indicator
(SRI)
- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
Side impact The SRSCM continually monitors all

elements whilst the ignition is "ON" to
Rollover B240A02HP
determine if a frontal or near-frontal
impact is severe enough to require
airbag deployment.
42
The SRS service reminder indicator Passenger's Airbag

(SRI) on the instrument panel will blink
for about 6 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the "ON" position or
after the engine is started, after which
the SRI should go out.
B240B03L-R B240B01HP-E
Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will sepa-
rate under pressure from the expansion
! CAUTION:
of the airbags. Further opening of the When installing a container of liquid
covers then allows full inflation of the air freshener inside a vehicle, do not
B240B02L-R airbags. place it near the instrument cluster
nor on the instrument panel pad
The airbag modules are located both in surface. If there is any leakage from
A fully inflated airbag in combination
the centre of the steering wheel and in the air freshener onto these areas
with a properly worn seat belt slows the
the front passenger's panel above the (instrument cluster, instrument panel
driver's or the passenger's forward mo-
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a pad or air ventilator), it may damage
tion, thus reducing the risk of head or
considerable impact to the front of the these parts. If the liquid from the air
chest injury.
vehicle, it will automatically deploy the freshener does leak onto these ar-
airbags. eas, wash them with water immedi-
After complete inflation, the airbag im-
mediately starts deflating, enabling the ately.
driver to maintain forward visibility.
1
43
B240C01HP-EAT
Passenger's Airbag o The SRS can function only when SRS Care
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS SRI does not The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
flash, or continuously remains on and so there are no parts you can
after flashing for about 6 seconds safely service by yourself. The entire
when the ignition key is turned to SRS system must be inspected by an
the "ON" position or after the en- authorized Hyundai dealer 10 years
gine is started, or comes on whilst after the date that the vehicle was
driving, the SRS is not working manufactured.
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by Any work on the SRS system, such as
B240B05L-R
your Hyundai dealer. removing, installing, repairing, or any
o Before you replace a fuse or dis- work on the steering wheel must be
! WARNING:
connect a battery terminal, turn performed by a qualified Hyundai tech-
nician. Improper handling of the SRS
the ignition key to the "LOCK"
o When the SRS is activated, there position or remove the ignition system may result in serious personal
may be a loud noise and fine dust key. Never remove or replace the injury.
will be released throughout the air bag related fuse(s) when the
vehicle. These conditions are ignition key is in the "ON" posi-
normal and are not hazardous. tion. Failure to heed this warning
However, the fine dust generated will cause the SRS SRI to illumi-
during airbag deployment may nate.
cause skin irritation. Be sure to
wash your hands and face thor-
oughly with lukewarm water and
a mild soap after an accident in
which the airbags were deployed.
44
o For cleaning the airbag pad cov- o A child restraint system must
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or never be placed in the front seat.
one which has been moistened The infant or child could be se-
with plain water. Solvents or verely injured by an airbag de-
cleaners could adversely affect ployment in case of an accident.
the airbag covers and proper de- o If components of the airbag sys-
ployment of the system. tem must be discarded, or if the
o No objects should be placed over vehicle must be scrapped, cer-
or near the airbag modules on tain safety precautions must be
the steering wheel, instrument observed. Your Hyundai dealer
B240C01HP panel, and the front passenger's knows these precautions and can
panel above the glove box, be- give you the necessary informa-
cause any such object could tion. Failure to follow these pre-
cause harm if the vehicle is in a cautions and procedures could
! WARNING: crash severe enough to cause increase the risk of personal in-
o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a the airbags to inflate. jury.
rearward facing restraint on a o If the airbags inflate, they must o If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
seat protected by an airbag in be replaced by an authorized inform the new owner of these
front of it! Hyundai dealer. important points and make cer-
o Modification to SRS components o Do not tamper with or discon- tain that this manual is trans-
or wiring, including the addition nect SRS wiring, or other com- ferred to the new owner.
of any kind of badges to the pad ponents of the SRS system. Do- o If your car was flooded and has
covers or modifications to the ing so could result in injury, due soaked carpeting or water on
body structure, can adversely to accidental firing of the airbags flooring, you shouldn't try to start
affect SRS performance and lead or by rendering the SRS inopera- engine; have the car towed to
to possible injury. tive. authorised Hyundai dealer.
1
45
o Do not replace the bumper or the

bumper guard with the one other
than the Hyundai genuine parts.
Otherwise, it can adversely af-
fect SRS performance and lead
to unexpected injury.
46 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A03HP-EAT
Petrol Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260A01HP-E
1
47
1. Tachometer 14.Front Fog Indicator Light

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 15.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge (Not all models)
4. Fuel Gauge 16.Cruise Indicator Light (Not all models)
5. Speedometer 17.4WD LOW Indicator Light
6. ABS Service Reminder Indicator(SRI) 18.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD)
(Not all models) /4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
7. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System 19.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Service Reminder lndicator (SRI) 20.Trip Odometer
8. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 21.Odometer
9. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light 22.Trip odometer Reset Knob
10.Charging System Warning Light 23.Hatchback Door Open Warning Light
11.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (Not all models) 24.Door Ajar Warning Light
12.Overdrive OFF Indicator Light (Not all models) 25.Seat Belt Warning Light
13.High Beam Indicator Light 26.Low Fuel Warning Light
48
B262A03HP-GAT
Diesel Engine
Part-time 4WD:
Full-time 4WD:
B260B01HP-E
1
49
1. Tachometer 16.Overdrive OFF Indicator Light (Not all models)

2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 17.High Beam Indicator Light
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 18.Front Fog Indicator Light
4. Fuel Gauge 19.Automatic Transmission Position Indicator Light
5. Speedometer (Not all models)
6. Immobilizer Warning Light 20.Cruise Indicator Light (Not all models)
7. Diesel Preheat Indicator Light 21.4WD LOW Indicator Light
8. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) 22.4WD HIGH Indicator Light (Part-time 4WD) /
(Not all models) 4WD System Warning Light (Full-time 4WD)
9. Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System Service 23.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Reminder Indicator (SRI) 24.Trip Odometer
10.Fuel Filter Warning Light 25.Odometer
11.Brake Vacuum Warning Light 26.Trip Odometer Reset Knob
12.Low Oil Pressure Warning Light 27.Hatchback Door Open Warning Light
13.Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level 28.Door Ajar Warning Light
Warning Light 29.Seat Belt Warning Light
14.Charging System Warning Light 30.Low Fuel Warning Light
15.A/T Oil Temperature Warning Light (Not all models)
50 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260D01A-AAT without the assistance of the anti-lock B260G01A-EAT

Turn Signal Indicator Low Oil Pressure Warn-
Lights !
brake system.
ing Light
The blinking green arrows on the in-
strument panel show the direction indi-
cated by the turn signals. If the arrow
! WARNING: ! CAUTION:
comes on but does not blink, blinks If both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/ If the oil pressure warning light stays
more rapidly than normal, or does not Low brake fluid level warning lights on whilst the engine is running, se-
illuminate at all, a malfunction in the remain "ON" or come on whilst driv- rious engine damage may result.
turn signal system is indicated. Your ing, there may be a problem with The oil pressure warning light comes
dealer should be consulted for repairs. E.B.D. (Electronic brake force dis- on whenever there is insufficient oil
tribution). If this occurs, avoid sud- pressure. In normal operation, it
den stops and have your vehicle should come on when the ignition
checked by your Hyundai dealer as switch is turned on, then go out
B260P02Y-EAT
soon as possible. when the engine is started.
ABS Service Reminder
Indicator (SRI) If the oil pressure warning light stays
on whilst the engine is running, there
(Not all models) is a serious malfunction.
B260F01A-AAT
When the key is turned to the "ON" If this happens, stop the car as soon
position, the Anti-Lock Brake System
High Beam Indicator Light as it is safe to do so, turn off the
SRI will come on and then go off in a engine and check the oil level. If the
few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains The high beam indicator light comes on oil level is low, fill engine oil to the
on, comes on whilst driving, or does not whenever the headlights are switched proper level and start the engine
come on when the key is turned to the to the high beam or flash position. again. If the light stays on with the
"ON" position, this indicates that there engine running, turn the engine off
may be a problem with the ABS. immediately. In any instance where
If this occurs, have your vehicle the oil light stays on when the engine
checked by your Hyundai dealer as is running, the engine should be
soon as possible. The normal braking checked by an authorised Hyundai
system will still be operational, but dealer before the car is driven again.
1
51
B260H02A-EAT
Warning Light Operation If failure of one of the circuits occurs,
Parking Brake/ the required amount of pedal effort,
Low Brake Fluid Level The parking brake/low brake fluid level pedal travel and stopping distance will
Warning Light warning light will be illuminated when- be increased. Use of the gearbox is
ever the ignition switch is turned to the recommended to assist in bringing the
"ON" position irrespective of whether or
! WARNING: not the parking brake is applied and
vehicle to rest. The vehicle must not be
driven once brake failure has occurred
must be extinguished when the engine until the system has been repaired and
In the event of problems being sus-
starts and the parking brake released. is functioning normally.
pected with the braking system, the
If the warning light fails to extinguish or The braking system employs a vacuum
advice of the nearest Hyundai dealer
illuminates at any other time, the ve- servo in order that the pedal efforts are
must be sought before the vehicle
hicle must be brought to rest in a safe reduced. Power for the servo is de-
is driven. Driving the vehicle with
location and the level of brake fluid in rived from the engine and therefore, in
either an electrical or hydraulic brak-
the reservoir checked. If the fluid level the event of the engine stopping or the
ing system defect may be danger-
is incorrect, fluid conforming to DOT 3 vehicle being towed, pedal efforts will
ous, resulting in accident or per-
or DOT 4 specifications should be be substantially increased.
sonal injury.
added. If, after correcting the brake
fluid level, the warning light continues
to be illuminated, the advice of the
nearest Hyundai dealer must be sought
before the vehicle is driven again.
Your Hyundai is equipped with a di-
agonally split dual braking system
which will ensure that in the event of
one of the brake circuits becoming
defective, approximately fifty per cent
of the normal braking performance will
be available.
52
B260J01S-EAT B260A01B-GAT B260K01B-EAT

Charging System Warn- Front Fog Indicator Light Hatchback Door Open
ing Light Warning Light
The charging system warning light Front fog indicator light comes on when- This light remains on unless the hatch-
should come on when the ignition is ever the fog light switch is on. back door is completely closed and
turned on, then go out when the engine latched.
is running. If the light stays on whilst the
engine is running, there is a malfunction
SB2100I-E
in the electrical charging system. If the B260B01HP-EAT
light comes on whilst you are driving, Door Ajar Warning Light
SRS (Airbag) Service
stop, turn off the engine and check Reminder Indicator (SRI)
under the bonnet. First, make certain The door ajar warning light warns you
the generator drive belt is in place. If it that a door is not completely closed. The SRS service reminder indicator
is, check the tension of the belt. Ensure that the light is extinguished (SRI) comes on and flashes for about 6
And then, have the system checked by prior to driving the vehicle. seconds after the ignition key is turned
your Hyundai dealer. to the "ON" position or after the engine
is started, after which it will go out.
B260M01A-AAT
This light also comes on when the SRS
! CAUTION:
Low Fuel Level Warning
is not working properly. If the SRI does
Light not flash, or continuously remains on
If the drive belt (generator belt) is
loose, broken, or missing whilst the The low fuel level warning light comes after flashing for about 6 seconds when
vehicle is driving, there may be a on when the fuel tank is approaching you turned the ignition key to the "ON"
serious malfunction, engine could empty. When it comes on, you should position or started the engine, or if it
overheat because this belt also drives add fuel as soon as possible. Driving comes on whilst driving, have the SRS
the water pump. with the fuel level warning light on or inspected by an authorised Hyundai
with the fuel level below "E" can cause Dealer.
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
1
53
B260N02A-EAT B260Q01HP-EAT HP210E1-E

Malfunction Indicator Cruise Indicator Light Overdrive OFF Indicator
Light (For Petrol Engine) Light (Automatic Trans-
This light illuminates when there is a (Not all models) mission only)
malfunction of an exhaust gas related The cruise indicator light in the instru-
When the overdrive (4th gear) switch
component, and the system is not ment cluster is illuminated only when is turned off and the operation of over-
functioning properly so that the ex- the vehicle cruising speed has been set
drive (4th gear) is cancelled, the over-
haust gas regulation values are not using the control switch on the steering
drive warning light (O/D OFF) will be
satisfied. This light will also illuminate wheel. illuminated. When the switch is at the
when the ignition key is turned to the The indicator light does not illuminate
on position, the gearbox will operate in
"ON" position, and will go out in a few when the main cruise control switch is
the normal fully automatic mode and
seconds after the engine is started. If it activated. the warning light will be extinguished.
illuminates whilst driving, or does not Information on the use of cruise control
illuminate when the ignition key is turned may be found on page 1-86.
to the "ON" position, take your car to
your nearest authorised Hyundai dealer
B265Q01HP-EAT
and have the system checked.
Cruise Indicator Light
(For Diesel Engine)
(Not all models)
B260E01HP-GAT
Seat Belt Warning Light The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control main switch is activated.
The seat belt warning light blinks for Information about the use of cruise
about 6 seconds when the ignition key control may be found on page 1-86.
is turned from the "OFF" position to
"ON" or "START".
54
B260U01HP-EAT B260U01TB-EAT B260R01HP-GAT
A/T(Automatic Transmis- Immobiliser Warning 4WD LOW Indicator Light
sion) Oil Temperature Light (Diesel Engine)
Warning Light (Not all When the key is turned to the "ON"
This warning light comes on for some
models) seconds after the ignition key is turned position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive)
The A/T oil temperature warning light to the "ON" position. At this time, you LOW indicator light will come on and
comes on when the automatic trans- can start the engine. The light goes out then go off in a few seconds.
mission oil temperature goes up to the after the engine is running. In case this The 4WD LOW indicator light comes on
temperature that may result in serious light goes out before you start the when the transfer shift knob is set to
damage of automatic transmission. engine, you must turn to the "LOCK" low position (Part-time 4WD type : 4L
If the A/T oil temperature warning light position and restart the engine. In case position, Full-time 4WD type : Low
comes on whilst driving, park your this light blinks for five seconds when position).
vehicle in at a safe place as soon as the ignition key is turned to "ON" posi-
possible. With the selector lever shifted tion, this indicates that the immobiliser
into "P" position, allow the engine to system is out of order. At this time,
idle until the warning light goes off. consult to the Hyundai dealer.
When the warning light goes off, the
vehicle can be driven normally.
! CAUTION:
If the warning light doesn't go off or
blinks, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the automatic trans-
mission or T.C.U (Transmission
Control Unit). If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an
authorised Hyundai dealer.
1
55
B260T02HP-EAT B265T01HP-EAT B265A01HP-EAT

4WD HIGH Indicator Light 4WD System Warning Fuel Filter Warning
(Part-time 4WD only) Light (Full-time 4WD only) Light (Diesel Engine)
When the key is turned to the "ON" When the key is turned to the "ON" This light illuminates when the ignition
position, the 4WD(Four Wheel Drive) position, the 4WD (Four wheel drive) switch is set to the "ON" position and
HIGH indicator light will come on and system warning light will come on and goes off after the engine has started. If
then go off in a few seconds. then go off in a few seconds. it lights up whilst the engine is running,
The 4WD HIGH indicator light will illu- it indicates that water has accumu-
minate when the transfer shift knob is lated inside the fuel filter. If this hap-
set to 4H position . pens, remove the water from the fuel
! CAUTION: filter. (Refer to "Owner Maintenance")
If the 4WD system warning light
( ) blinks whilst driving, this
! CAUTION: indicates that there is a malfunction
!
If the 4WD HIGH indicator light ( ) in the 4WD system. If this occurs, CAUTION
illuminates with the 4WD low indica- have your vehicle checked by an When the fuel filter warning light is
tor light ( ) whilst driving, this authorised Hyundai dealer as soon illuminated, the engine power de-
indicates that there is a malfunc- as possible. creases. If the fuel filter warning light
tion in the 4WD system. If this oc- comes on whilst driving, park your
curs, have your vehicle checked by vehicle in at a safe place and remove
an authorised Hyundai dealer as soon the water as soon as possible. If the
as possible. light remains on after removing the
water, have the system checked by
an authorised Hyundai dealer.
56
B265B01HP-GAT If the light comes on at any other time, B265C02HP-EAT

Brake Vacuum Warning you should slow the vehicle and bring it Diesel Preheat
Light (Diesel Engine) to a complete stop in a safe location off Indication Light
the roadway. The indication light illuminates amber
After starting the engine, do not drive when the ignition switch is placed at
! WARNING:
the vehicle until the vacuum level is the "ON" position. The engine can be
above 275 mmHg below atmosphere started after the preheat indication light
If you suspect brake trouble, have and warning light has turned off. If
your brakes checked by a Hyundai goes off. The illuminating time varies
further trouble is experienced, the ve- with the water temperature.
dealer as soon as possible. Driving hicle should not be driven at all but
your car with a problem in either the taken to a dealer by a professional Water temperature Illuminating time
brake electrical system or brake towing service.
hydraulic system is dangerous, and (°F)(°C) (sec.)
could result in serious injury or Below -22(-30) 26
death. -13(-25) 20
-4(-20) 15
5(-15) 10
The brake vacuum warning light should
14(-10) 5.5
come on when the vacuum level in
brake booster descends to about 275 23(-5) 3.5
mmHg or below. The brake system is 32(0) 2
designed to stop the vehicle with re- 68(20) 1
serve assist if brake pedal is held
down. This reserve is greatly reduced NOTE:
each time you release the brake. With- If the engine were not started within
out vacuum assist your vehicle can still 2 seconds after the preheating is
be stopped by pushing much harder completed, turn the ignition key once
on brake pedal, however the stopping more to the "LOCK" position during
distance may be much longer. 10 seconds, and then to the "ON"
position, in order to preheat again.
1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 57
B270A01A-GAT B280A01A-AAT B290A02A-EAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING FUEL GAUGE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SOUND GAUGE
The front disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-
pitched squealing or scraping noise
when new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the
time when the vehicle is moving. It
may also be heard when the brake
pedal is pushed down firmly. Exces-
sive rotor damage will result if the worn
pads are not replaced. See your HHP2080
Hyundai dealer immediately. HHP2081
The needle on the gauge indicates the
approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.
! WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. The coolant is
under pressure and could erupt and
cause severe burns. Wait until the
engine is cool before removing the
radiator cap.
58
The needle on the coolant temperature B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETER
gauge should stay in the normal range.
If it moves across the dial to "H" (Hot), Petrol Engine
! CAUTION:
pull over and stop as soon as possible The engine should not be raced to
and turn off the engine. Then open the such a speed that the needle enters
bonnet and check the coolant level and the red zone on the tachometer face.
the water pump drive belt. If you sus- This can cause severe engine dam-
pect cooling system trouble, have your age and may void your warranty.
cooling system checked by Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible.
B330A01HP
Diesel Engine
HHP2078
The tachometer registers the speed of

your engine in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
1
59
B300A01Y-EAT B310A02HP-EAT
Trip Odometer
SPEEDOMETER ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
Petrol Engine Odometer
Trip Odometer
Reset Knob B310A02HP-E

B300A01HP-E Odometer
B310A01HP-E
Diesel Engine Pushing in the reset knob under the
The digital odometer records the total right side of the speedometer for less
driving distance in miles, and is useful than 1 second when the ignition switch
for keeping a record for maintenance is turned "ON" displays the following
intervals. sequence:
It is normal for a new vehicle to have the
odometer indicating less than 30mile.
NOTE:
Any alteration of the odometer may
void your warranty coverage.
B300A03HP-E
Your Hyundai's speedometer is cali-

brated in miles per hour or kilometers
per hour.
60 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH
ZB120A1-E HPB220B1-E
Turn Signal Operation Lane Change Signal
To signal an intention to turn right, the
switch lever should be pressed down.
To signal an intention to turn left, the
switch lever should be pushed up-
wards. In both instances, the turn sig-
nal lamps on one side of the car will
flash and the warning lamp located in
the instrument cluster will flash in sym-
B310A03HP-E
pathy. Upon completion of the ma-
noeuvre, the lever will, under normal
circumstances, return to the "OFF"
Trip odometer records the distance of 2 position. However, if the manoeuvre
HHP2099-E
trips in miles. involved only a small movement of the To indicate an intention to change lanes,
steering wheel, the signal may need to moving the lever slightly towards the
TRIP A: First distance you have trav- be cancelled manually. If either turn direction of the relevant turn signal will
eled from your origination point to a first signal indicator flashes more rapidly cause the turn signal lights to flash. The
destination. than normal or refuses to flash at all, a lever will either return automatically or
malfunction of the turn signal system will need to be manually moved to the
TRIP B: Second distance from the first may exist. centre position when the lane change
destination to the final destination. indication has been completed.
When the reset knob is pressed for

more than 1 second, trip odometer will
reset to 0.
1
61
B340C03FC-EAT
NOTE: ZB120D1-E
LIGHTING SWITCH The ignition must be in the "ON" HIGH AND LOW BEAM
position to turn on the headlights.
Sidelight auto cut

If you do not turn the sidelight "OFF"
after driving, the sidelight will automati-
cally shut "OFF" when the driver's door
is opened.
To turn them "ON" again, you must
simply turn the ignition key to the "ON"
position.
HHP2094-E HHP2097-E
The vehicle sidelights and headlights To turn on the headlight high beams,
are operated by rotating the end of the push the lever forward (away from
turn signal switch barrel. To operate you). For low beams, pull the lever
the parking lights, rotating the switch back (toward you). The appropriate
to the first detent with ignition switch at headlight beam indicator light will come
the "OFF" position will cause the lights on at the same time.
to illuminate. To operate the head-
lights, the turn signal switch barrel
should be rotated to the second de-
tent. The headlights will only operate
when the ignition switch is at the "ON"
position. If the ignition switch is turned
to the "OFF" position, only the parking
lights will function.
62 FOG LIGHT SWITCH
SB220E1-E B360B01Y-AAT B360A01HP-GAT

HEADLIGHT FLASH Front Fog Light Switch Rear Fog Light Switch
HHP2098-E HHP2100-E B360A01HP-E
The headlights may be flashed by pull- To turn on the front fog lights, place the To turn on the rear fog lights, push the
ing the turn signal switch lever towards switch in the "ON" position. They will switch. They will light when the head-
the steering wheel. The headlights will light when the headlight switch is in the light switch is in the second position or
be extinguished when the switch is first or second position. the front fog light is turned on and the
released. key is in the "ON" position.
1
WINDSCREEN WIPER AND 63
WASHER SWITCH
ZB130A2-E OB130B1-E
NOTE:
WINDSCREEN WASHER OP- In winter conditions where screen
ERATION washer icing occurs, a winter screen
wash additive containing an anti-
freeze component may be used.
1 Only fluids specifically intended for
2 this purpose should be used. En-
sure that undiluted additive is not
3 spilt upon the vehicle paintwork
and that engine coolant anti-freeze
is not used for this purpose or dam-
HHP2101-E
age to the paintwork may occur.
The windscreen wiper switch has three HHP2103-E

positions.
To use the windscreen washer, pull the
wiper/washer lever toward the steering
1. Intermittent operation
2. Low speed operation wheel. When the washer lever is oper-
ated, the wipers automatically make
3. High speed operation
two passes across the windshield. The
washer continues to operate until the
NOTE: lever is released.
To prevent damage to the wiper
system, do not attempt to wipe away
heavy accumulations of snow or
ice. Accumulated snow and ice
should be removed manually. If there
is only a light layer of snow or ice,
operate the heater in the defrost mode
to melt the snow or ice before using
the wiper.
64
Mist Wiper Operation OB140A1-E B390A01E-EAT

VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPE Rear Window Wiper and Washer
FACILITY
HHP2104-E HHP2108-E
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push HHP2102-E 1. : The rear window wiper starts to
the windscreen wiper and washer con- The variable intermittent wipe facility is operate three times after the
trol lever upwards. operated by moving the windscreen washer fluid sprays onto the
wiper switch to the first position. The rear window.
time period between wipes is adjusted 2.OFF
by moving the rotary control on the 3.INT: The interval between wipes op-
windscreen wiper switch barrel. This is erates every 5 seconds inter-
also varied automatically depending mittently.
on your road speed. 4.ON : The rear window wiper starts
to operate continuously.
5. :The washer fluid will be sprayed
onto the rear window and the
wiper operates whilst the rear
window wiper barrel is placed
in this position.
1
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM HEATED FRONT/REAR WIN- 65
DOW
NOTE: SB240A1-E SB250A2-E
Do not operate the washer continu- (Not all models)

ously for more than 15 seconds or Type A
when the fluid reservoir is empty;
this could damage the system. Do
not operate the wiper when the win-
dow is dry; this can result in scratch-
ing as well as premature wiper blade
wear. Type B
For the reason stated above,do not
operate the washer when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty. B370A01HP-E
HHP2119
The hazard warning system should be
used whenever it becomes necessary To operate the heated front/rear window
to stop the car in a hazardous location. depress the switch shown. The heated
The hazard warning system is oper- front/rear window will automatically turn
ated by depressing the switch at which off after 20 minutes or when the ignition
time all turn signal lights will flash is turned off.
simultaneously and the turn signal The system may be turned off manu-
warning lights located within the instru- ally by depressing the switch again.
ment cluster will flash simultaneously.
The hazard warning system may be
turned off by depressing the switch
again.
66
B400A01HP-EAT 4. MODE - Push "MODE" button to

DIGITAL CLOCK
! CAUTION:
display a 12- or 24-hour clock.
When the 12-hour clock is in use,
The inside of the front/rear the letters AM or PM appear with the
windscreen should never be cleaned time.
with a hard or sharp implement since 5. - The time is displayed on the
damage to the heating element may LCD by pushing in on the switch
occur. The glass should only be and is turned off by pushing in on the
cleaned with a soft cloth or chamois switch again.
leather with the use only of a mild
detergent or proprietary glass cleaner
where necessary.
Only horizontal movement of the B400A01HP
cloth should be made when clean-
ing the glass and care should be There are five control buttons for the
exercised to ensure that the heat- digital clock. Their functions are:
ing elements are not damaged by
rings or jewellery whilst the glass is 1. HOUR - Push "H" to advance the
being cleaned. hour indicated.
2. MIN - Push "M" to advance the
NOTE: minute indicated.
3. RESET - Push "S" to reset minutes
The ignition must be in the "ON"
to ":00" to facilitate resetting the
position for the heated front/rear win-
clock to the correct time. When this
dow to operate.
is done:
1
RHEOSTAT SWITCH CIGAR LIGHTER
67
ZB200A1-E B420A02A-EAT
! CAUTION:
Do not use electric accessories or
equipment other than the Hyundai
genuine parts in the socket.
B410A01HP-E HHP2160-E
The panel lamps may be dimmed by For the cigar lighter to work, the key
use of the rheostat, turning the knob to must be in the "ACC" position or the
decrease or increase the illumination "ON" position.
intensity as required. To use the cigar lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to
the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigar lighter pressed in.
This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigar
lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equiva-
lent.
68 POWER OUTLET ASHTRAY
B500D07HP-EAT The power outlet is located in front of B430A01HP-EAT
the centre console and in the quarter Front Ashtray

trim. It is also located behind the centre
console.
These supply 12V electric power to
operate electric accessories or equip-
ment only when the key is in the "ON"
or "ACC" position.
! CAUTION:
HHP2161-E
o Do not use the power outlet to
HHP2167-E
connect electric accessories or
equipment other than those de- The front ashtray may be opened by
signed to operate on 12 volts. pushing and releasing the ashtray/cigar
o Some electronic devices can cause lighter door at its top edge.
electronic interference when To remove the ashtray in order to clean
plugged into the power outlet. it, the metal ash receptacle should be
These devices may cause exces- removed from the ashtray door. Do not
sive audio noise and malfunctions attempt to remove the entire ashtray
in other electronic systems or de- door assembly, or damage will result.
vices used in your vehicle. Instead, lift the metal ash receptacle
upward and pull it out. To reinstall it,
HHP2162-E
place it in the proper position and press
it down and forward to reengage the ash
receptacle rear lip in the ashtray door.
The ashtray light will only illuminate
when the exterior body lights are
switched on.
1
DRINK HOLDER 69
B440A01E-AAT B450A02O-GAT B450C01HP-EAT

Rear Ashtray Front Drink Holder Rear Drink Holder (Type A)
HHP2168-E HHP2177-E HHP2178
The rear ashtray may be opened by The drink holder is located on the main The rear drink holder is located behind
pulling it out by its top edge. To remove console for holding cups or cans. the centre console for holding cups or
the ashtray to empty or clean it, press cans. The rear drink holder can be used
down on the spring-loaded tab inside
the ashtray and lift the ashtray upward
! WARNING:
by pressing the locking release button.
and pull it all the way out. o Use caution when using the drink
holders. A spilled beverage that is
very hot can injure you or your
! CAUTION:
damage interior trim and electri- When not in use or before folding the
cal components. rear seat, place the rear drink holder
o Do not place objects other than in closed position to prevent it from
cups or cans in the drink holder. being broken.
Such objects can be thrown out in
the event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the pas-
sengers in the vehicle.
70 SUNROOF
HPB330A1-E
B450B01HP-GAT
(Not all models)
! WARNING:
Rear Drink Holder (Type B)
holders. A spilled beverage that is
very hot can injure you or your
damage interior trim and electri-
cal components.
o Do not place objects other than
Such objects can be thrown out in
the event of a sudden stop or an HHP2023
accident, possibly injuring the B450B01HP
passengers in the vehicle. The rear drink holder is located in the The electrically operated sunroof may
rear seat armrest for holding cups or be used only whilst the ignition switch
cans. The rear drink holder can be is at the "ON" position. The sunroof is
used by opening the lid of armrest. equipped with a sunshade which may
be used whilst the sunroof is at the
closed position to obscure incoming
! WARNING:
light.
The sunshade is automatically opened
Do not place objects other than whenever the sunroof is opened but
cups or cans in the drink holder. must be manually closed by sliding
Such objects can be thrown out in forward after the sunroof is closed.
the event of a sudden stop or an When the sunroof is opened, the wind
accident, possibly injuring the pas- deflector will automatically rise to the
sengers in the vehicle. upper position and will automatically
retract when the sunroof is closed.
1
71
SB330C2-E
Tilting the Sunroof System
! WARNING:
o Ensure that the sunroof and guide
rails are clear of obstructions
before closing the sunroof and
ensure that nothing may become
entrapped between the sunroof
panel and the vehicle body whilst
the sunroof is being closed.
o Do not stand up or extend any
B460B01HP
portion of your body out of the
The sunroof can be electrically opened opening whilst the vehicle is
B460C01HP
or closed. The sunroof is moved to its moving.
The sunroof can be tilted and closed by
fully open position by pushing the
depressing the button indicated. Re-
"OPEN" switch, and to stop at the
lease the button when the sunroof
desired position, push in any switches
reaches the up position.
(OPEN, CLOSE, UP, DOWN).
To close the sunroof, press the
To close, press and hold the "CLOSE"
"DOWN" button.
button. Release the button when the
sunroof reaches the desired position.
NOTE:
The sunroof should not be opened
! CAUTION: when water or standing rain is on
o Do not open the sunroof in se- the roof panel. Driving the vehicle
vere cold temperature or when it for a short distance will allow the
is covered with ice or snow. water to disperse naturally at which
o Periodically remove any dirt that point the sunroof may be opened.
may have accumulated on the
guide rails.
72 INTERIOR LIGHT
B460D01HP-EAT B480B01Y-AAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof Map Light
HHP2022
HHP2021
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench B480B01HP
provided with the vehicle into the
If the sunroof fails to operate: socket. This wrench can be found in Push in the map light switch to turn the
the glove box or the tool bag. light on or off. This light produces a
1. Remove the round plug in the front 3. Turn the wrench clockwise to open spot beam for convenient use as a
of the roof panel with a flat-bladed or counterclockwise to close. map light at night or as a personal light
screwdriver or coin. for the driver and the passenger.
! CAUTION:
Remove the round plug with the
groove pointing to the front and the
rear. Otherwise, the projections of
the plug may break if it is not posi-
tioned properly.
1
STORAGE BOX 73
B490A03Y-AAT
o ON B500A01A-EAT
Interior Light In the "ON" position, the light stays on GLOVE BOX
at all times.
! CAUTION:
Do not leave this button pressed for
an extended period of time when the
vehicle is not running.
o OFF
In the "OFF" position, the light stays off
HHP2115 HHP2169-E
at all times even though a door is open.
The interior courtesy light has three
buttons. The three buttons are: ! WARNING:
o DOOR To avoid the possibility of injury in
In the "DOOR" position, the interior case of an accident or a sudden
courtesy light comes on when any stop, the glove box lid should be
door is opened regardless of the igni- kept closed whilst the car is in mo-
tion key position. The light goes out tion.
gradually 6 seconds after the door is
closed.
o To open the glove box, pull on the
glove box release lever.
74 CENTRE CONSOLE COM-
PARTMENT
B500B01HP-DAT B505A01HP-EAT
MULTI BOX Centre Console Box
! WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
the centre console box lid should be
kept closed when the car is in mo-
tion.
(1)
HHP2174-E HHP2170-E
The multi box may be opened by pulling

it out by its grip. It is used for storing
small articles.
(2)
HHP2171-E
The centre console box is used for

storing cassette tape or small articles.
To use the centre console box, press
the button (1) or (2) and pull up the lid.
1
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR- 75
ROR
B505B01HP-EAT B510A01A-AAT
Centre Console Armrest
! CAUTION:
If the mirror control is jammed with
ice, do not attempt to break it free
using the control handle or by ma-
nipulating the face of the mirror.
Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the ve-
hicle to a warm place and allow the
ice to melt.
B510A01HP-E
HHP2172-E
The outside rearview mirrors are
To use the centre console armrest, equipped with a remote control for your
press the locking release button. convenience. It is operated by the con-
trol lever in the bottom front corner of
NOTE: the window.
When not in use, fix the console Before driving away, always check
armrest by pushing down it with the that your mirrors are positioned so you
locking release button pressed. can see directly behind you. When
using the mirror, always exercise cau-
tion when attempting to judge the dis-
tance of vehicles behind or along side
of you.
76
B510B01Y-EAT HPB270C2-E
Electric Type (Not all models) OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
! CAUTION: HEATER (Not all models)
o Do not operate the switch continu-
ously for an unnecessary length Type A
of time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face
could cause permanent damage.
To remove any ice, use a sponge,
soft cloth or approved de-icer. Type B
B510B01HP-E
The outside rearview mirrors can be ! WARNING:

HHP2119
adjusted to your preferred rear vision, Be careful when judging the size or The outside rearview mirror heater is
both directly behind the vehicle, and to distance of any object seen in the actuated in connection with heated
the rear of the left and right sides. passenger side rearview mirror. It is front/rear window.
The remote control outside rearview a convex mirror with a curved sur- So, to heat the outside rearview mirror
mirror switch controls the adjustments face. Any objects seen in this mirror glass, push in the switch for heated
for both right and left outside mirrors. are closer than they appear. front/rear window.
The rearview mirror glass will be heated
To adjust the position of either mir- for defrosting or defogging and will
ror: give you improved rear vision in all
1. Move the selecting switch to the weather conditions. Push the switch
right or left to activate the adjustable again to turn the heater off.
mechanism for the corresponding The outside rearview mirror heater au-
door mirror. tomatically turns itself off after 20 min-
2. Now, adjust mirror angle by de- utes.
pressing the appropriate perimeter
switch as illustrated.
1
INTERIOR REARVIEW MIR- 77
ROR
YB270D2-E SB370A1-E
NOTE:
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR- The mirror should always be ad-
VIEW MIRRORS justed prior to setting the vehicle in
motion.
B520B01O-EAT
(Electric type) (Not all models)
HHP2071
The interior mirror is of the day/night

HHP2074-E type to enable the glare of headlights
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, from following vehicles to be eliminated
push them towards the rear. during night time driving.
The outside rearview mirrors can be The tab located at the bottom of the
folded rearward for parking in restricted mirror should be set to the position
areas. nearest the windscreen for normal day HHP2072
time driving, and flipped towards the The electric type day/night inside rear-
rear of the vehicle to eliminate glare view mirror controls automatically the
! WARNING:
during night time driving. To adjust the
field of vision, the mirror may be moved
glare of headlights of the car behind
you. Adjust the rearview mirror to the
Do not adjust or fold the outside by hand upon the mounting. desired position.
rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle is
moving. This could result in loss of
control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury or property
damage.
78 PARKING BRAKE HATCHBACK DOOR
SB380A1-E o To release the parking brake, apply B540A01FC-EAT
the foot brake and pull up the parking

brake lever slightly. Depress the
button and lower the lever.
B530A01HP-E B540A01HP
The parking brake must always be set

when the vehicle is to be left unat-
tended. When the parking brake is ap-
! WARNING:
plied, and the ignition key is at the "ON" The hatchback door should always
position, the parking brake warning light be kept completely closed whilst
will be illuminated. Before driving the the vehicle is in motion. If it is left
vehicle, the parking brake must be fully open or ajar, poisonous exhaust
released and the warning light extin- gases may enter the car resulting in
guished. serious illness or death to the occu-
pants. See additional warnings con-
o To set the parking brake, apply the cerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.
foot brake and pull the parking brake
lever up. Release the button when
the brake is fully applied.
1
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT 79
o The hatchback door can be locked or B540C01HP-EAT B540D02HP-DAT
unlocked with a key. Luggage compartment light Luggage Net

o The hatchback door is opened by
pulling the outside handle up, rais-
ing the hatchback door manually.
o To close, lower the hatchback door,
then press down on it until it is
closed. To be sure the hatchback
door is fully closed, always try to pull
it up again without using the outside
handle.
HHP2117 HHP2180
Luggage compartment light has a 3- Some objects can be kept in the net at
position switch. The three positions the luggage compartment.
are: Use the luggage net on the floor or at
the back of the luggage compartment
o In the "MIDDLE" position, the lug- to prevent objects from sliding.
gage compartment light comes on
when the hatchback door is opened,
then goes out when it is closed.
o In the "ON" position, the light stays ! CAUTION:
on at all times. To prevent damage to the goods or
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays the vehicle, care should be taken
off at all times. when carrying fragile or bulky ob-
jects in the luggage compartment.
80 CARGO SECURITY SCREEN
B640A01S-EAT B650A01S-AAT
(Not all models) Stowage Precautions
! WARNING: 1. Do not place objects on the cargo
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over- security screen. Such objects may
stretch. ALWAYS keep face and be thrown about inside the vehicle
body out of recoil path. DO NOT and possibly injure vehicle occu-
use when strap has visible signs of pants during an accident or when
wear or damage. braking.
2. For better fuel economy, do not
carry unnecessary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is designed
B640A01HP for luggage only.
To use the security screen, pull it out of 4. Try to maintain the balance of the
the retractor and hook it to the anchors vehicle and locate the weight as far
as illustrated. forward as possible.
1
ROOF BARS 81
B630A01HP-EAT
(Not all models) o Always drive your vehicle at a
1
! CAUTION: moderate speed.
o The roof bars should be posi- o Loading cargo or luggage over
tioned before securing a load to specification on the roof bars
them. may damage stability of your ve-
2 o If a sunroof is fitted, do not posi- hicle.
tion the roof bar loads which
could interfere with the opening
of the sunroof.
o The following specifications are
recommended when loading
cargo or luggage.
HHP2181
If your Hyundai has roof bars fitted, you 75 lb (34 kg)

ROOF BARS
can load cargo / luggage on top of EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
these. The two roof bars (1) can be
repositioned forward and rearward for o Loading cargo or luggage above
conveniently loading cargo / luggage 75 lb (34 kg) on the roof bars may
on to them. With an assistant on the damage your vehicle.
opposite side of the vehicle, press and When you carry large objects,
hold the slider lock buttons (2) on each never let them hang over the rear
side, then move the roof bar to the or the sides of your vehicle.
correct location. o To prevent damage or loss of
The roof bars automatically lock in the cargo as you are driving, check
locating hole when the slider lock but- frequently to make sure the lug-
tons are released. gage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
82 HIGH-MOUNTED REAR REMOTE FUEL-FILLER FLAP
STOP LIGHT RELEASE
B550A01A-EAT
HPB360A1-E
HHP2015
B550A01HP
B560A01HP-E
In addition to the lower-mounted rear The fuel-filler flap may be opened from
stop lights on either side of the car, the
high mounted rear stop light in the
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the ! WARNING:
fuel-filler flap opener located below the
centre of the rear window also lights Fuel vapors are dangerous. Before
left of the driver's side crash pad.
when the brakes are applied. refueling, always stop the engine
and never allow sparks or open
NOTE: flames near the filler area. If you
If the fuel-filler flap will not open need to replace the filler cap, use a
because ice has formed around it, genuine Hyundai replacement part.
tap lightly or push on it to break the If you open the fuel filler cap during
ice and release it. Do not lever the high ambient temperatures, a slight
flap. If necessary, spray around the "pressure sound" may be heard.
flap with an approved de-icer fluid This is normal and not a cause for
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or concern.
move the vehicle to a warm place Whenever you open the fuel filler
and allow the ice to melt. cap, turn it slowly.
1
BONNET RELEASE 83
B570A01HP-EAT B580A01HP-EAT
SUN VISOR
HHP2017-1
HHP2016-E Vanity mirror
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the When closing the bonnet, slowly close B580A01HP
bonnet. the bonnet and make sure it locks into

place. Sun visors are fitted to both the driver
and passenger side of the vehicle.
Certain derivatives are equipped with
! WARNING:
a vanity mirror which is located on the
back of the passenger visor. The visor
o Always double check to be sure may be lowered to reduce the amount of
that the bonnet is firmly latched glare from directly ahead, or may be
before driving away. If it is not moved towards the side window to re-
latched, the bonnet could open duce glare from the side of the vehicle,
whilst the vehicle is being driven, once the inner pivot has been unclipped
causing a total loss of visibility, from the bracket.
which might result in an accident.
HHP2017 o Do not move the vehicle with the
bonnet in the raised position, as
2. Push the secondary latch lever side-
vision is obstructed and the bon-
ways and lift the bonnet.
net could fall or be damaged.
3. Raise the bonnet by hand.
84 FRONT DOOR EDGE HORN
WARNING LIGHT
NOTE: B620A01S-EAT B610A01L-GAT
The Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem (SRS) label containing useful
information can be found in the front
of each sun visor.
! WARNING:
Do not place the sun visor in such a
manner that it obscures visibility of
the roadway, traffic or other objects. B620A01HP-E HHP2070
A red light comes on when the front door Press the pad on the steering wheel to
is opened. The purpose of this light is to sound the horn.
assist when you get in or out and also
to warn passing vehicles.
1
PACKAGE ARMREST STEERING WHEEL TILT HEADLIGHT LEVELING DE- 85
LEVER VICE SYSTEM
HPB830A1-E B600A01HP-EAT B340G01HP-EAT
HHP2048 B600A01HP-E B340G01HP-E
This armrest is located in the centre of To adjust the steering wheel: To adjust the headlight beam level ac-
rear seat back. A storage box and two cording to the number of the passen-
drink holders are included for your con- 1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it gers and the loading weight in the lug-
venience. to unlock. gage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to The higher the number of the switch
the desired position. position, the lower the headlight beam
3. After adjustment, release the lever. level. Always keep the headlight beam
at the proper leveling position, or head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of
! WARNING: recommeneded switch settings. For
Do not attempt to adjust the steering loading conditions other than those
wheel whilst driving as this may listed below, adjust the switch position
result in loss of control of the ve- so that the beam level may be the
hicle and serious injury or death. nearest as the condition obtained ac-
cording to the list.
86 CRUISE CONTROL
B660A01S-EAT B660B001HP-EAT
Switch (Not all models) To Set the Cruise Speed
LOADING CONDITION
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front Passenger 0
Full Passengers 1
Full Passengers + Maximum
2
Permissible Loading
Driver +
3
Maximum Permissible Loading
B660A01HP-E B660B01HP
The cruise control system provides a 1. Push in the cruise control main
constant speed hold function which switch. This turns the system on.
may be determined at will. The system
is most suited to use during freeway/ NOTE:
motorway driving where constant The "CRUISE" indicator light in the
speed motoring at speeds in excess of instrument cluster will be illuminated
25 m.p.h. may be undertaken. when the main cruise control switch
is activated(Diesel Engine only).
2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed

above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Push the control switch "SET"
(COAST) position.
1
87
NOTE: B660C02L-AAT B660D01L-AAT
The "CRUISE" indicator light in the To Cancel the Cruise Speed To Resume the Preset Speed
instrument cluster will illuminate af-
ter you have set the vehicle speed at
the desired speed (Petrol Engine
only).
4. Remove your foot from the accelera-

tor pedal and the desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, depress the ac-
celerator pedal enough for the ve-
hicle to exceed the preset speed. B660C01HP B660D01HP
When you remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal, the vehicle To disengage the cruise control The vehicle will automatically resume
will return to the speed you have system,push the control switch "CAN- the speed set prior to cancellation when
set. CEL". Additionally, the following ac- you push the control switch "RESUME
tions will disengage the system: (ACCEL)" (when travelling above 25
NOTE: mph).
If the vehicle speed decreases more o Push the control switch "CANCEL".
than 9 mph (15 km/h) below the set o Depress the brake pedal.
speed or decreases below 25 mph o Depress the clutch pedal
(40 km/h), the cruise control sys- (Manual transmission). B660E01L-EAT
o Shift the selector lever in "P" or "N" To Reset at a Faster Speed

tem will automatically cancel the
set speed. position (Automatic transmission). 1. Push the control switch "RESUME
o Decrease the vehicle speed lower (ACCEL)"
than memory speed by 9 mph(15 2. Accelerate to desired speed. Whilst
km/h). the control switch is held, the ve-
o Decrease the vehicle speed approxi- hicle will gradually gain speed.
mately to less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
o Release the main switch.
88
B660F02L-EAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed o Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep the
car at a constant speed, for in-
stance, driving in heavy or vary-
ing traffic, or on slippery (rainy,
icy or snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or down-
hill roads.
o Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever us-
ing the cruise control system.
o During cruise-speed driving with
B660B01HP manual transmission vehicle, do
1. Push the control switch "SET not shift into neutral without de-
(COAST)". The vehicle will deceler- pressing the clutch pedal, since
ate. Whilst the control switch is the engine will be overrevved. If
pushed, the vehicle speed will gradu- this happens, depress the clutch
ally decrease. pedal or release the main switch.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, o During normal cruise control
release the control button. operation, when the set button is
activated or reactivated after ap-
plying the brakes, the cruise con-
! WARNING:
trol will energize after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. This delay is
o Keep the main switch off when not normal.
using the cruise control.
o Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways
in good weather.
1
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL 89
B710A01HP-EAT B710B01S-DAT
CENTRE VENTILATOR
The centre ventilators are located in the
middle of the dashboard. The direction
of air flow from the vents in the centre
of the dashboard is adjustable.
To control the direction of the air flow,
move the knob in the centre of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side.
B710C02HP-DAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on
each side of dashboard. To change the
direction of the air flow, move the knob
in the centre of the vent up-and-down
and side-to-side. The vents are opened
when the vent knob is moved to " "
position. The vents are closed when the
vent knob is moved to " ". Keep
these vents clear of any obstructions.
1. Side Ventilator
2. Side Defroster Nozzle
3. Windscreen Defroster Nozzle B710B01HP-E
4. Centre Ventilator
90 HEATING AND VENTILA-
TION
B670A01HP-EAT 4. Air flow control. B670B01A-AAT
This is used to direct the flow of air. Fan Speed Control (Blower Con-
Air can be directed to the floor, trol)
dashboard outlets, or windscreen.
Five symbols are used to represent
Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost
and Defrost air positions.
B670A01HP
There are four controls for the heating

HHP2123
and cooling system. They are:
This is used to turn the blower fan on
1. Fan speed control. and off and to select the fan speed.
This is used to turn the fan on and The blower fan speed, and therefore
select the fan speed. the volume of air delivered from the
2. Air intake control. system, may be controlled manually
This allows you to select fresh out- by setting the blower control between
side air or recirculation inside air. the "1" and "4" position.
3. Temperature control.
This is used to turn the heating
system on and off and to select the
degree of heating desired.
1
91
B670C01Y-EAT
NOTE: B670D01L-EAT
Air Intake Control o It should be noted that prolonged Air Flow Control
in " " mode will give rise to
fogging of the windscreen and
side windows and the air within
the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition pro-
longed use of the air condition-
ing with the " " mode selected
may result in the air within the
passenger compartment becom-
HHP2125
ing excessively dry. HHP2126
o When the ignition switch is
This is used to select fresh outside air turned "ON" the air intake con- This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
or recirculation inside air. trol will be changed to " " mode can be directed to the floor, dashboard
(regardless of switch position). outlets, or windscreen. Five symbols
Fresh This is normal operation. are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Recirculation Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
position.
With the " " mode selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and is heated
or cooled according to the other func-
tions selected.
With the " " mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment is
drawn through the heating system and
heated or cooled according to the other
functions selected.
92
B670D01HP-E B670D02HP-E B670D03HP-E
Face-Level Bi-Level Floor-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause Air is discharged through the face vents Air is discharged through the floor vents,
air to be discharged through the face and the floor vents. This makes it pos- windscreen defroster nozzle, side de-
level vents. sible to have cooler air from the dash- froster nozzle and side ventilator.
board vents and warmer air from the
floor outlets at the same time.
1
93
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
B670D04HP-E B670D05HP-E
Cool Warm
Floor-Defrost Level Defrost-Level HHP2124
This control is used to adjust the de-

Air is discharged through the windscreen Air is discharged through the windscreen gree of heating or cooling desired.
defrost nozzle, the floor vents, side defrost nozzle, side defroster nozzle
defroster nozzle and side ventilator. and side ventilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the
the A/C will turn on automatically and A/C will turn on automatically and
"Fresh" mode will be activated. "Fresh" mode will be activated to im-
prove windscreen defrosting.
94 HEATING CONTROLS BI-LEVEL HEATING VENTILATION
B690A01S-AAT B700A01A-AAT B710A01A-AAT
B690A01HP B700A01HP B710A01HP
For normal heating operation, set the air Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level To operate the ventilation system:
intake control to the fresh air ( ) heating controls. This makes it pos-
position and the air flow control to the sible to have cooler air from the dash- o Set the air intake control to the fresh
floor ( ) position. board vents and warmer air from the air ( ) position.
floor outlets at the same time. To use o To direct all intake air to the dash-
For faster heating, the air intake con- this feature: board vents, set the airflow control
trol should be set in the recirculate ( ) to the face ( ) position.
position. o Set the air intake control to the fresh o Adjust the fan speed control to the
air ( ) position. desired speed.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow o Set the air flow control at the bi-level o Set the temperature control between
control to the defrost ( ) position. ( ) position. "Cool" and "Warm".
(The A/C will turn on automatically and o Set the temperature control between
"Fresh" mode will be activated.) "Cool" and "Warm".
For maximum heat, move the tem-

perature control to "Warm".
1
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING 95
B720A02FC-EAT ( ) and fan speed control to the low

position.
B730A01L-EAT
Operation Tips
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the
position. Be sure to return the co-
B720B01HP
ntrol to the position when the irrita-
B720A01HP tion has passed to keep fresh air in
To remove frost or exterior fog the vehicle. This will help keep the
Use the heating/ventilation system to on the windscreen: driver alert and comfortable.
defrost or defog the windscreen. o Air for the heating/cooling system is
o Set the air flow control to the defrost drawn in through the grilles just
To remove interior fog on the ( ) position.(The A/C will turn on ahead of the windscreen. Care should
windscreen: automatically and "Fresh" mode will be taken that these are not blocked
be activated.) by leaves, snow, ice or other ob-
o Set the air flow control to the defrost o Set the temperature control to warm. structions.
( ) position.(The A/C will turn on o Set the fan speed control to position o To prevent interior fog on the
automatically and "Fresh" mode will "3" or "4". windscreen, set the air intake con-
be activated.)
trol to the fresh air( ) position,
o Set the temperature control to the NOTE: and fan speed to the desired posi-
desired position. When the A/C is operated continu- tion, turn on the air conditioning
o Set the fan speed control between ously on the floor-defrost level ( ) system, and adjust temperature
"1" and "4" position. or defrost level ( ), it may cause control to desired temperature.
fog to form on the exterior
windscreen. If this occurs, set the air
flow control to the face level position
96 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
B740A01S-AAT B740B01A-EAT o Set the temperature control to "Cool".
Air Conditioning Switch Air Conditioning Operation ("Cool" provides maximum cooling.
(Not all models) Cooling The temperature may be moderated
by moving the control toward
"Warm".)
speed. For greater cooling, turn the
fan control to one of the higher
speeds or temporarily select the
recirculate ( ) position on the air
intake control.
B740A01HP B740B01HP
The air conditioning is turned on or off To use the air conditioning to cool the
by pushing the A/C button on the heat- interior:
ing/air conditioning control panel.
o Set the side vent control to " ", to
shut off the outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch
by pushing in on the switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should
come on at the same time.
air ( ) position.
1
97
B740C01A-AAT B740D01Y-AAT
De-Humidified Heating Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when
you first get in, open the windows for
a few minutes to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air condi-
tioning system, keep all windows
closed to keep hot air out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy
traffic, shift to a lower gear. This
increases engine speed, which in
turn increases the speed of the air
B740C01HP
conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air condi-
For dehumidified heating: tioning off to avoid the possibility of
o Turn on the fan control switch. the engine overheating.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. o During winter months or in periods
The air conditioning indicator light when the air conditioning is not used
should come on at the same time. regularly, run the air conditioning once
o Set the air intake control to the fresh every month for a few minutes. This
air ( ) position. will help circulate the lubricants and
o Set the air flow control to the face keep your system in peak operating
( ) position. condition.
speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at
one of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to
provide the desired amount of
warmth.
98 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND
COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-EAT B970B01HP-GAT
(Not aII models) Heating and Cooling Controls
Your Hyundai is equipped with an au-
tomatic heating and cooling control
system controlled by simply setting
the desired temperature.
B970B01HP
1. Blower Fan Control Switch 8. Air Flow Control Switch

2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch 9. Air Conditioning Switch
3. OFF Switch 10.Ambient Temperature Switch
4. Display Window 11.Air Intake Control Switch
5. Temperature Control Button (Recirculation air)
6. Defroster Switch 12.Air Intake Control Switch
7. Rear Window Defrost Switch (Fresh air)
1
99
B970C02L-EAT
NOTE:
Automatic Operation
If the battery has been discharged
or disconnected, the temperature
mode will reset to Centigrade de-
gree.
This is a normal condition and you
can adjust the temperature mode
from Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows;
Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3
HHP2142
seconds or more with the AMB
button held down. The display shows
HHP2138 2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the that the unit of temperature is ad-
desired temperature. justed to Centigrade or Fahrenheit
The FATC (Full Automatic Tempera- The temperature will increase to the (°C → °F or °F → °C).
ture Control) system automatically maximum 90°F(32°C) by pushing
controls the heating and cooling by on the button. Each push of the
doing as follows: button will cause the temperature to
increase by 1°F(0.5°C).
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indi- The temperature will decrease to
cator light will come on confirming the minimum 62°F(17°C) by push-
that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level ing on the button. Each push of
modes as well as the blower speed the button will cause the temperature
and air conditioner will be controlled to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).
automatically.
100
B995A01Y-AAT B980A01Y-AAT
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MANUAL OPERATION
SWITCH The heating and cooling system can
Photo sensor
be controlled manually as well as by
pushing buttons other than the "AUTO"
button. In this state, the system se-
quentially works according to the order
of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are
not selected will be controlled auto-
HHP2096 matically.
Press the "AUTO" button in order to
NOTE: convert to automatic control of the
Never place anything over the sen- HHP2147 system.
sor which is located in the car on the
instrument panel to ensure better Pressing the AMB button displays the
control of the heating and cooling ambient temperature on the display.
system.
1
101
B980B01Y-AAT B670C02HP-EAT With the "Fresh" mode selected, air

Fan Speed Control Air Intake Control Switch enters the vehicle from the outside and
is heated or cooled according to the
function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected,

air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system heated or cooled according to
the function selected.
NOTE:
HHP2137 B980C01HP
o It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating in "recir-
The fan speed can be set to the desired This is used to select fresh outside air culation" mode will give rise to
speed by pressing the appropriate fan or recirculation inside air. fogging of the windscreen and
speed control button. The higher the fan To change the air intake control mode, side windows and the air within
speed is, the more air is delivered. push the control button. the passenger compartment will
Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the become stale. In addition, pro-
fan. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator longed use of the air condition-
light on the button is illuminated when ing with the "Recirculation" mode
the air intake control is in fresh mode. selected may result in the air
within the passenger compart-
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The ment becoming excessively dry.
indicator light on the button is illumi-
nated when the air intake control is in
recirculation mode.
102
o When the ignition switch is turned B980E01L-EAT
"ON" the air intake control will be Air Flow Control

changed to ( )mode (regard-
less of switch position). This is
normal operation. The air intake
control operates in "AUTO" mode
when turning the ignition to the
ON position if the "AUTO" mode
was used before shutting off the
engine.
B670D01HP-E
B980D01Y-AAT HHP2145 Face-Level

Heating and Cooling System Off This is used to direct the flow of air. Air
can be directed to the floor, dashboard When selecting the "Face" mode, the
outlets, or windscreen. Four symbols indicator light will come on, causing air
are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, to be discharged through the face level
Floor and Floor-Defrost air position. vents.
HHP2140
Press the "OFF" button to stop the

operation of the heating and cooling
system.
1
103
B670D02HP-E B670D03HP-E B670D04HP-E
Bi-Level Floor-Level Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, When selecting the "Floor-Defrost"
the indicator light will come on and the the indicator light will come on and the mode, the indicator light will come on
air will be discharged through the face air will be discharged through the floor and the air will be discharged through
vents and the floor vents. This makes vents, windscreen defrost nozzle, side the windscreen defrost nozzle, the floor
it possible to have cooler air from the defroster nozzle and side ventilator. vents, side defroster nozzle and side
dashboard vents and warmer air from ventilator.
104
B980C02L-EAT
Defrost Switch
HHP2143
When the "Defrost" button is pressed,

the " " mode will be automatically
selected and the air will be discharged
through the windscreen defrost nozzle,
side defroster nozzle and side ventila-
tor. To assist in defrosting, the air
conditioning will operate if ambient tem-
perature is higher than 38.3 °F (3.5°C
)and automatically turns off if the am-
bient temperature drops below 38.3 °F
(3.5°C).
1
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM 105
B750A02A-AAT
AM reception FM radio station
How Car Audio Works Ionosphere
FM reception Mountains Unobstructed
Ionosphere
area
Buildings
Iron bridges
B750A02L
Obstructed area B750A03L
B750A01L
AM broadcasts can be received at FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
greater distances than FM broadcasts. frequency and do not bend to follow the
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast This is because AM radio waves are earth's surface. Because of this, FM
from transmitter towers located around transmitted at low frequency. These broadcasts generally begin to fade at
your city. They are intercepted by the long, low frequency radio waves can short distances from the station. Also,
radio antenna on your car. This signal is follow the curvature of the earth rather FM signals are easily affected by build-
then received by the radio and sent to than travelling straight out into the iono- ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
your car speakers. sphere. In addition, they curve around These can result in certain listening
When a strong radio signal has reached obstructions so that they can provide conditions which might lead you to
your vehicle, the precise engineering of better signal coverage. believe a problem exists with your ra-
your audio system ensures high quality dio. The following conditions are normal
reproduction. However, in some cases and do not indicate radio trouble:
the signal coming to your vehicle is not
strong and clear. This can be due to
factors such as the distance from the
radio station, closeness of other strong
radio stations or the presence of build-
ings, bridges or other large obstructions
in the area.
106
B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far
as possible from the audio equipment.
B750A04L B750A05L
o Fading - As your car moves away o Station Swapping - As a FM signal ! CAUTION:

from the radio station, the signal will weakens, another more powerful
weaken and sound will begin to fade. signal near the same frequency may When using a communication sys-
When this occurs, we suggest that begin to play. This is because your tem such a cellular phone or a radio
you select another stronger station. radio is designed to lock onto the set inside the vehicle, a separate
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or clearest signal. If this occurs, select external antenna must be fitted.
large obstructions between the trans- another station with a stronger sig- When a cellular phone or a radio set
mitter and your radio can disturb the nal. is used with an internal antenna
signal causing static or fluttering o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig- alone, it may interfere with the
noises to occur. Reducing the treble nals being received from several vehicle's electrical system and ad-
level may lessen this effect until the directions can cause distortion or versely affect safe operation of the
disturbance clears. fluttering. This can be caused by a vehicle.
direct and a reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
If this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
1
ANTENNA 107
B870A01A-GAT
Fixed Rod Antenna
! WARNING:
! CAUTION:
Don't use a cellular phone when Be sure to remove the antenna be-
you are driving, you must stop at a fore washing the car in an auto-
safe place to use a cellular phone. matic car wash or the antenna may
be damaged.
B870C01HP-D
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to

signals.
This antenna is a removable type. To
remove the antenna, turn the antenna
counterclockwise. To install the an-
tenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
108
B880C02B-EAT
Glass Antenna (Not all models)
! CAUTION:
o Do not clean the inner side of the
rear quarter glass with an abra-
sive type of glass cleaner or use
a scraper to remove foreign de-
posits from the inner surface of
the glass as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
o Avoid adding metallic coating
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
HHP2184-D
broadcast signals.
When the radio power switch is turned
on whilst the ignition key is in either the
"ON" or "ACC" position, your car will
signals through the antenna in the rear
quarter glass.
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2

Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3
Key Positions................................................................ 2-4
Starting ......................................................................... 2-5 2
Manual Transmission ................................................... 2-8
Automatic Transmission ..............................................2-10
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) .............................................2-14
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-21
2
Limited-Slip Differential ................................................2-22
Effective Braking .........................................................2-22
Driving for Economy ....................................................2-23
Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-24
Winter Motoring ............................................................2-24
Trailer and Vehicle Towing ..........................................2-26
2
C010A01HP-EAT
! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger
compartment, move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.
o Never inhale exhaust gas.
Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Exhaust System Maintenance.
Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and
damage which may result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system,
ensure that the exhaust system is inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.
o Confined Areas.
Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open
is dangerous practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.
o Prolonged Idling.
If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake
control is set to the "Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing
in an open area.
o Load Carrying.
If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the hatchback door to be fully closed, the side windows
must remain closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the
highest speed setting.
To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not
be obstructed by snow leaves etc..
2
BEFORE STARTING THE TO START THE ENGINE 3
ENGINE
C020A01A-EAT C030A01HP-EAT
Before you start the engine, you should Cmbination Ignition Switch and
! WARNING: always: Steering Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres
designed to provide for safe ride and 1. Look around the vehicle to be sure o If your Hyundai is equipped with a
handling capability. there are no flat tyres, puddles of oil manual transmission, place the shift
Do not use a size and type of tyre and or water or other indications of pos- lever in neutral and depress the
wheel that is different from the one sible trouble. clutch pedal fully.
that was originally installed on your 2. After entering the car, check to be o If your Hyundai has an automatic
vehicle. It can affect the safety and sure the parking brake is engaged. transmission, place the shift lever in
performance of your vehicle, which 3. Check that all windows, and lights "P" (park).
could lead to handling failure or are clean. o To start the engine, insert the igni-
rollover and serious injury. 4. Check that the interior and exterior tion key and turn it to the "START"
When replacing the tyres, be sure to mirrors are clean and in position. position. Release it as soon as the
equip all four tyres with the tyre and 5. Check your seat, seatback and engine starts. Do not hold the key in
wheel of the same size, type, tread, headrest to be sure they are in their the "START" position for more than
brand and load-carrying capacity. If proper positions. 15 seconds.
you nevertheless decide to equip 6. Close all the doors.
your vehicle with any tyre/wheel com- 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure NOTE:
bination not recommended by that all other occupants have fas- For safety, the engine will not start
Hyundai for off-road driving, you tened theirs. if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N"
should not use these tyres for high- 8. Turn off all lights and accessories position (Automatic Transmission).
way driving. that are not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch to
"ON" check that all appropriate
warning lights are operating and
that you have sufficient fuel.
10.Check the operation of warning
lights and all bulbs when key is in
the "ON" position.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI KEY POSITIONS
4
SC050A1-E
NOTE:
! Do not hold the key in the "START"
WARNING: (Diesel only)
To ensure that sufficient vacuum
! WARNING:
position for more than 15 seconds.
exists within the brake system dur- The engine must never be turned off "ON"
ing cold weather start-up condi- and the key removed from the igni- When the key is at the "ON" position,
tions, it is necessary to run the tion key cylinder whilst the vehicle is the ignition and all accessories are
engine at idle after starting accord- in motion since the steering lock will available for use. If the engine is not
ing to the following table. operate and control of the vehicle running, the key should not be left at
will be lost. this position since the battery will be-
Ambient temp. Warm up time
come discharged and damage to the
Above 5°F (-15°C) 3 min. or longer ignition system may also result. For
Below 5°F (-15°C) 6 min. or longer ACC information regarding engine starting,
LOCK ON refer to "STARTING THE ENGINE".
After starting the engine, do not
drive the vehicle until the brake "ACC"
vacuum warning light has turned When the ignition key is at the "ACC"
off. position, the radio and other accesso-
Failure to carry out the above pro- ries may be used.
cedure may result in the need to
START
apply greater pedal pressure in or-
der to effect the necessary braking
"LOCK"
effort. C040A01E The ignition key may only be inserted
or removed at this position.
"START"
The engine is started in this position. It NOTE:
will crank until you release the key. The ignition key can only be re-
moved if the transmission selector
is at the "P" position (automatic
transmission only).
2
STARTING 5
YC030A1-E C070C01A-AAT HPC060A1-E

STEERING WHEEL LOCK To Remove the Ignition Key Starting The Engine
When the ignition key is removed, the ACC
steering wheel lock will be activated. LOCK
The lock only engages at one position ON
of the steering wheel and therefore it
will be possible to turn the wheel until
this position is reached. It is not, how-
ever, necessary for the lock to be
engaged before leaving the vehicle START
since in the event of attempted
unauthorised removal, the lock will en-
gage when attempts are made to steer C070C01E C050A01E
the vehicle.
Should it be difficult to turn the key 1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" 1. Ensure that the transmission is in
from the "LOCK" position, it may be position. neutral and that the clutch pedal is
found that rocking the steering wheel 2. Simultaneously push and turn the held depressed (manual transmis-
to and fro whilst turning the key will ignition key c o u n t e r c l o c k w i s e sion) or the transmission selector is
assist. from the "ACC" position to the at the "P" position (automatic trans-
"LOCK" position. mission vehicle).
3. The key can be removed in the 2. Turn the ignition key to and hold at
"LOCK" position. the "START" position until the en-
! CAUTION: gine starts. When the engine has
Never remove the key from the igni- started, release the key.
tion lock whilst the vehicle is in
motion since the steering mecha-
nism lock will be activated.
6
NOTE: C050B01HP-EAT
NOTE:
Starting Procedure
Do not operate the starter for more If the engine were not started within
than 15 seconds continuously or 1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt. 2 seconds after the preheating is
continue to operate the starter after 2. Apply the parking brake. completed, turn the ignition key
the engine has started to avoid dam- 3. If your Hyundai is equipped with a once more to the "LOCK" position
aging the starter motor. If the en- manual transmission, place the shift during 10 seconds, and then to the
gine makes a false start, allow it and lever in neutral and depress the "ON" position, in order to preheat
the starter motor to come to rest clutch pedal fully. If your Hyundai again.
before attempting to start the en- has an automatic transmission,
gine again. Never attempt to start place the shift lever in "P" (park).
the engine with the transmission in
gear. Do not depress the accelera- ! WARNING:
tor pedal whilst starting the engine. Be sure that the clutch is fully de-
Allow the engine to idle for 20 sec- pressed when starting a manual
onds or so before driving the ve- Amber lamp ON Amber lamp OFF
tranmission vehicle. Otherwise there
hicle. is the potential to cause
damage to the vehicle or injury to
someone inside or outside the ve-
! CAUTION:
hicle as a result of the forward or
backward movement of the vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended that will occur if the clutch is not
C050B01HP
whilst idling. Never allow the vehicle depressed when the vehicle is
to idle or warm up in a confined 4. On vehicles equipped with the diesel started.
space (i.e. garage) longer than is preheat indication lamp, turn the igni-
necessary to move the vehicle into tion key to the "ON" position. The 5. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
an open area. diesel-preheat indication lamp will position and release it when the
first illuminate in amber, and then engine starts.
after a short time, the amber illumi-
nation will go off, indicating that pre-
heating is completed.
2
7
C055B02HP-GAT DC090C1-E
Driving Condition Required Idle Time
STARTING AND STOPPING THE FUEL ECONOMY
Normal driving Not necessary
ENGINE FOR TURBO The following suggestions are made to
CHARGER INTERCOOLER High speed Up to 50 MPH About 20 seconds
assist in achieving the greatest degree
(Diesel Engine) driving Up to 62 MPH About 1 minute of fuel economy.
(1) Do not race or suddenly accelerate Steep mountain slopes or
the engine immediately after start- continued driving in ex- About 2 minutes o Maintaining a constant check on
ing it. If the engine is cold, allow the fuel consumption will enable the
cess of 62 MPH
engine to idle for several seconds most economical use pattern and
before it is driven to ensure suffi- driving style to be adopted.
cient lubrication of the turbo charger o Avoid using the vehicle for very
unit. ! WARNING:
short journeys if possible, particu-
larly when a cold start is involved.
(2) After high speed driving or prolonged
engine loading, the engine should Do not turn the engine off immedi- o Ensure that tyre pressures are main-
be allowed to idle, as shown in the ately after it has been subjected to a tained at the correct level.
following chart, before turning it off. heavy load. Doing so may cause o Use only the recommended grade
This idle time will allow the turbo severe damage to the engine or turbo of fuel.
charger to cool prior to shutting the charger unit. o Avoid carrying unnecessary weight,
engine off. and if a roof rack is in use, remove
it as soon as possible after use.
o Anticipate the road and conditions
ahead to enable adjustments in
speed to be made smoothly. Avoid
heavy acceleration and sharp brak-
ing.
o Avoid cruising at unnecessary high
speeds.
8 MANUAL TRANSMISSION
o Always ensure that the periodic main- HPC090A3-E
tenance services are performed by a

Hyundai dealer at the time and/or
! CAUTION:
mileage intervals specified. o Do not attempt to engage reverse
o Use the air conditioner only when gear when the car is in motion.
necessary. o To avoid damaging the selector
mechanism, do not use the gear
shift lever as a hand rest. Release
the lever immediately the shift is
completed.
o To avoid premature clutch wear,
HHP3017-E
do not use the clutch pedal as a
foot rest, and do not hold the
The five speed fully synchronized trans- vehicle on a gradient using the
mission is controlled by a floor mounted clutch.
shift lever upon which the shift pattern o Ensure that the engine is not over-
is indicated. It is important that when revved by upshifting before the
changing gear, the clutch pedal is fully tachometer needle enters the red
depressed to avoid transmission dam- zone.
age. o Do not coast with the shift lever at
the neutral position.
o When descending long gradients,
make use of the engine braking to
assist the footbrake to avoid brake
fade or over-heating.
2
9
C070B01A-EAT
o When slippery conditions are en- Using the Clutch
countered, increased caution ! WARNING:
should be exercised when gear The clutch should be pressed all the
o Avoid high cornering speeds.
changing, braking or accelerat- way to the floor before shifting, then
o Do not make quick steering wheel
ing. Abrupt changes in speed may released slowly. The clutch pedal
movements, such as sharp lane
cause a loss of traction or control should aways be used after fully re-
changes or fast, sharp turns.
of the vehicle. turning to the original position. Do not
o Always wear your seat belts.
o During cold weather, shifting may rest your foot on the clutch pedal whilst
In a collision crash, an unbelted
be difficult until the transmis- driving. This can cause unnecessary
person is significantly more likely
sion lubricant has warmed up. wear.
to die than a person wearing a
This is normal and not harmful to Do not partially engage the clutch to
seatbelt.
the transmission. hold the car on an incline. This causes
o The risk of rollover is greatly in-
o If you've come to a complete stop unnecessary wear. Use the parking
creased if you lose control of your
and it's hard to shift into 1st or brake to hold the car on an incline. Do
vehicle at highway speeds.
R(Reverse), put the shift lever in not operate the clutch pedal rapidly
o Loss of control often occurs if two
N(Neutral) position and release and repeatedly.
or more wheels drop off the road-
the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
way and the driver oversteers to
back down, and then shift into
reenter the roadway.
1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
o In the event your vehicle leaves
o Do not use the shift lever as a
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
handrest during driving, as this
Instead, slow down before pulling
can result in premature wear of
back into the travel lanes.
the transmission shift forks.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
10 AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-
SION
C070E03A-EAT
C090A01HP-EAT
NOTE:
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS (Not all models) Depress the brake pedal and
push the button when shifting.
Shift Recommended Push the button when shifting.
from-to MPH (km/h) The selector lever can be shifted
1-2 15 (20) freely.
2-3 25 (40) For optimum fuel economy, acceler-
3-4 35 (55) ate gradually. The transmission will
4-5 45 (75) automatically shift to the second, third
and overdrive gears.
The shift points as shown above are
recommended for optimum fuel HHP3018-E
economy and performance.
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
transmission has four forward speeds
and one reverse speed. It has a con-
ventional shift pattern as shown in the
illustration.
At night, with the sidelights or head-
lights switched on, the appropriate
symbol on the quadrant will be illumi-
nated according to the range selected.
! CAUTION:
Never shift into "R" or "P" position
whilst the vehicle is moving.
2
11
HPC090A1-E DC110C1-E C090E01O-AAT

SELECTOR POSITIONS o R (Reverse): o D (Drive):
o P (Park): With the selector in this position, re- Use for normal driving. The transmis-
verse gear will be engaged. The en- sion will automatically shift through a
With the selector in this position, no gine may not be started with the selec- four gear sequence.
drive is transmitted from the engine tor in this position.
and the transmission output and there-
fore the front wheels locked. The en- DC110F1-E
gine may be started with the selector in o 2 (Second Gear):
this position. ! CAUTION:
With the selector in this position, first
The selector must NEVER be shifted
gear will be engaged from rest. The
to the "R" position whilst the ve-
transmission will upshift to second gear
! CAUTION:
hicle is in motion.
depending upon the vehicle speed and
throttle position. No upshift to third or
The selector must NEVER be shifted fourth will occur. The engine may not
to the "P" position whilst the ve- be started with the selector in this
hicle is in motion, otherwise seri- DC110D1-E position.
ous transmission damage will re- o N (Neutral):
sult.
With the selector in this position, no
gear is selected and no drive is trans- ! CAUTION:
mitted from the engine. The engine Do not move the selector to the 2
may be started with the selector in this position when the vehicle speed is
position. in excess of 60 m.p.h.
! CAUTION:
Do not coast with the selector at the
"N" position.
12
DC110G2-E C090I01E-EAT SC130A1-E

o L (Low Gear): OVERDRIVE SWITCH
With the selector in this position, first ! CAUTION:
gear will be engaged from rest. No o Shift into "R" and "P" only when
upshift will occur regardless of vehicle the vehicle has completely
speed and throttle opening. The en- stopped.
gine may not be started with the selec- o Do not accelerate the engine in
tor in this position. reverse or any of the forward posi-
tions with the brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when
! CAUTION: shifting from "P" or "N" to "R",
Do not move the selector to the L "D", "2" or "L" position.
position when the vehicle speed is o Do not use the "P" (Park) posi- HHP3019-E
in excess of 50 m.p.h. tion in place of the parking brake. The overdrive switch prevents the trans-
Always set the parking brake, mission upshifting higher than third gear
shift the transmission into "P" when the switch is turned "OFF". The
C090H01A-EAT
(Park) and turn off the ignition transmission will start from rest in first
NOTE: when you leave the vehicle, even gear and upshift to second and third
o The brake pedal should be de- momentarily. Never leave the ve- gear depending upon the roadspeed
pressed when shifting from NEU- hicle unattended whilst the en- and throttle opening but will not upshift
TRAL to a forward or reverse gine is running. to fourth gear. When the overdrive switch
gear. o Check the automatic transmis- is turned "ON", the transmission will
o The brake pedal fully depressed sion fluid level regularly and add start from rest in first gear and will
in order to move the shift lever fluid as necessary. upshift, depending upon roadspeed and
from the "P" (Park) position to throttle opening to second, third and
any of the other positions. fourth gear. Therefore, when the over-
o It is always possible to shift from drive switch is turned "OFF", the trans-
"R", "N", "D", "2", "L" positions mission performs as a three speed unit
to "P" position. and the overdrive warning light located
2
13
in the instrument cluster will be illumi- HPC120D2-E o When ascending steep gradients
nated. When the overdrive switch is General Operating Instructions using large throttle openings, the
turned "ON", the transmission func- o The button in the selector handle transmission may repeatedly change
tions as a fully automatic four speed must be depressed before the se- between two adjacent ratios. This is
unit with the maximum fuel economy lector can be moved. a normal characteristic and may be
potential of the vehicle being realized. o The engine may only be started prevented by cancelling the over-
when the selector is at position "P" drive facility if the shifting occurs
or "N". between third and fourth ratios, se-
o Ensure that the footbrake is firmly lecting position "2" if the shifting
applied when shifting from "P" or occurs between third and second
"N" to "D", "2" or "L" and vice versa. ratios or selecting position "1" if the
o Always engage the parking brake shifting occurs between first and
when the vehicle is unattended, second ratios.
never use the "P" position in place of o Never move the selector to or from
the parking brake. the "P" or "N" position with the accel-
o Under normal circumstances, the erator depressed.
selector should be placed in the "D" o Ensure that the overdrive switch is at
position and the transmission al- the "ON" position for maximum
lowed to select the most ideal ratio economy.
for the circumstances. In this posi- o If rapid acceleration is required, fully
tion maximum fuel economy will be depress the accelerator pedal. In
achieved. this condition, the kickdown mecha-
o When descending steep gradients nism will be operated and the trans-
where engine braking is required, mission will automatically downshift
the selector should be placed at the according to the vehicle speed.
"2" or "L" position depending upon o The automatic transaxle may be used
the vehicle speed. to great effect if the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow or mud by allowing the
vehicle to be rocked to and fro. The
engine speed should be held at ap-
14 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
proximately 1,000rpm by means of D090A01P-GAT
the accelerator pedal and the selec- o Always wear your seat belts. You can send your engine power to all
tor lever moved between the "D" and In a collision crash, an unbelted front and rear wheels for maximum
"R" positions to induce a rocking person is significantly more likely power. 4WD is useful when you drive
motion. to die than a person wearing a in snow, mud, ice, mountainous or
o Do not depress the accelerator pedal seatbelt. sandy areas where good traction is
with the brakes applied and the se- o The risk of rollover is greatly in- required, or when your wheels lose
lector at the "R", "D", "2" or "L" creased if you lose control of your traction using two-wheel drive.
position. vehicle at highway speeds.
o Turn the overdrive switch on for good o Loss of control often occurs if two
fuel economy and smooth driving. or more wheels drop off the road-
But if engine braking is needed in the way and the driver oversteers to
"D" range or if repeated upshifting reenter the roadway.
and downshifting between the 3rd o In the event your vehicle leaves
and 4th gear is needed when climb- the roadway, do not steer sharply.
ing a gentle slope, it is recommended Instead, slow down before pulling
that the overdrive switch be turned back into the travel lanes.
off. Turn the overdrive switch back o Never exceed posted speed limits.
on immediately afterward. o Excessive depressing of the
accelerater pedal under the tyre
slip condition such as moving out
! WARNING:
of the mud or fresh snow etc, may
cause severe damage to the trans-
o Avoid high cornering speeds. mission. At this time, take other
o Do not make quick steering wheel way such as towing.
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
2
15
C350A01HP-EAT
4L(Low range 4-wheel drive) 2. Transfer shift knob operation
Part-time 4WD operation
(Not all models) Use "4L" for climbing or descending By turning the transfer shift knob(4H,
steep hills, off-road driving, and ve- 4L), both axles of the vehicle are rigidly
hicle towing. connected with each other. This im-
Especially when increased drive power proves the traction characteristics.
is required.
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) 2H → 4H
are in the 4L mode. Turn the transfer shift knob from the
2H mode to the 4H mode at speed
below 50mph (80 km/h). It is not nec-
! CAUTION:
essary to depress the clutch pedal
(Manual Transmission) or put the shift
Do not select 4WD (4H or 4L) mode lever into "N(neutral)" position (Auto-
HHP2113-E
on dry paved roads. Especially on matic Transmission). Perform this
1. Knob position dry highway, never select the 4WD operation when driving straight.
This is used to set different positions. mode.
Four-wheel driving on dry paved 4H → 2H
roads for a long period will increase
2H(Rear-wheel drive)
the fuel consumption with possible Turn the transfer shift knob from the
When driving on normal roads and noise generation and early tyre 4H mode to the 2H mode at speed
highway. wear. In addition, axle gear oil tem- below 50mph (80 km/h). It is not nec-
perature increases with possible essary to depress the clutch pedal
4H(High range 4-wheel drive) driving system part wear. (Manual Transmission) or put the shift
When driving off-road, wet or snow- lever into "N(neutral)" position (Auto-
covered roads with normal speed. matic Transmission). Perform this op-
The 4WD HIGH indicator light ( ) eration when driving straight.
are in the 4H mode.
16
4H → 4L
D090E02HP-EAT o Do not grip the inside or spokes of
Driving Four-wheel drive safely the steering wheel when driving off-
1. Stop the vehicle. o The driving posture should be more road. The steering wheel could jerk
2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual upright; adjust the seat to a good and injure your hands. Always firmly
Transmission) or put the shift lever position for easy steering and pedal hold the outer steering wheel when
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic operation. you are driving off-road.
Transmission). o Be sure to wear the seat belt. o Drive at lower speeds in strong cross-
3. Select the 4L mode. o Drive carefully when off the road and winds. Because of your vehicle’s
avoid dangerous areas. high centre of gravity, its stability
4L → 4H o 4WD has higher ground clearance will be affected in crosswinds. Slower
and a narrower track to make them speeds ensure better vehicle con-
1. Stop the vehicle. capable of performing in a wide vari- trol.
2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual ety of off road applications. Specific o Check your brake condition once
Transmission) or put the shift lever design characteristics give them a you are out of mud or water. Press
into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic higher centre of gravity than ordinary the brake several times as you move
Transmission). cars. An advantage of the higher slowly until your feel normal braking
3. Select the 4H mode. ground clearance is a better view of forces return.
the road allowing you to anticipate o Four-wheel driving on flat and normal
problems. They are not designed for roads can result in a severe binding
cornering at the same speeds as condition when turning the steering
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles wheel.
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfacto- Driving on dry paved road and
rily under off-road conditions. If at all highway
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
Select the 2H(2WD) to drive on dry
maneuvers. As with other vehicles
paved roads. Especially on dry high-
of this type, failure to operate this
way, never select the 4H or 4L(4WD).
vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.
2
17
Driving on snowy or icy roads Driving in Water Water can wash the grease from wheel
bearings, causing rusting and prema-
Select the 4H or 4L in accordance with ture failure, and may also enter the
the road conditions, and then gradually axles, transmission and transfer case,
depress the accelerator pedal for a reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali-
smooth start. ties.
Driving on sandy or muddy roads
C355A03HP-EAT
Select the 4H or 4L and then gradually
depress the accelerator pedal for a Full-time 4WD operation
15.7 in(40cm) (Not all models)
smooth start. Keep the pressure on the
accelerator pedal constant as possible,
and drive at low speed. D090E01HP
Climbing sharp grades Select the 4L mode and drive through

slowly.
Select the 4L to maximize use the The maximum advisable wading depth
engine torque. is approximately 15.7 in.(40 cm).
Before driving through water, such as
Descending sharp grades when crossing shallow streams, first
check the depth of the water and the
Select the 4L, use the engine brake and
bottom of the river bed for firmness.
descend slowly.
Drive slowly at the speed of 3mph (5 HHP2114-E
km/h) and avoid deep water.

1. Knob position
Take all necessary safety measures to
This is used to set different positions.
ensure that water damage to the engine
or other vehicle parts does not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake will
cause severe engine damage.
18
AUTO Mode 2. Transfer shift knob operation Driving 4WD Safely

Full power delivered to front and rear (1) Be sure to wear the seat belt.
axles for increase traction. Use this AUTO → LOW
(2) Drive at lower speeds in strong
mode for normal on-road operating
crosswinds. Because of your
conditions such as dry road surfaces, 1. Stop the vehicle. vehicle's high centre of gravity, its
wet pavement, snow-covered roads 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
stability will be affected in cross-
and/or off-road. Transmission) or put the shift lever
winds. Slower speeds ensure bet-
into "N(neutral)" position (Automatic ter vehicle control.
LOW Mode Transmission)
(3) Check the brake condition after
Full power to both axles, including a 3. Turn the transfer shift knob to "LOW"
driving in wet or muddy conditions.
lower gear ratio for low-speed applica- mode. Press the brake several times as
tions that require extra power such as you move slowly until you feel nor-
dry road surfaces, wet pavement, LOW → AUTO
mal braking forces return.
snow-covered roads and/or off-road. (4) Do not drive the vehicle through
Especially when increased drive power 1. Stop the vehicle.
water. (i.e. streams, rivers, lakes,
is required. 2. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
etc.)
"LOW" mode is not recommended on Transmission) or put the shift lever (5) The stopping distance of the full-
dry pavement. into "N (neutral)" position (Automatic
time 4WD vehicle differs very little
The 4WD LOW indicator light ( ) Transmission).
from that of the 2WD vehicle.
will be turned on to remind you that you 3. Turn the transfer shift knob to When driving on a snow-covered
are in the LOW mode. "AUTO" mode.
road or a slippery, muddy surface,
make sure that you keep a suffi-
cient distance between your ve-
hicle and the one ahead of you.
2
19
(6) Since the driving torque is always NOTE:

applied to the 4 wheels, the perfor- brand and load-carrying capacity. If To avoid serious damage to your
mance of the full-time 4WD vehicle you nevertheless decide to equip 4WD vehicle, limit towing to 10 mph
is greatly affected by the condition your vehicle with any tyre/wheel com- (15km/h) and not for more than 1
of the tyres. Be sure to equip it with bination not recommended by mile (1.5km) at ANY TIME.
all four tyres of the same size and Hyundai for off-road driving, you
type. should not use these tyres for high- (8) For speedometer test or inspection/
o When replacement of any of the way driving. maintenance (I/M) program of full-
tyres or disc wheels is neces- time 4WD vehicle, use a four-wheel
sary, replace all of them. (7) The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot chassis dynamometer.
o Rotate the tyres and check the be towed by an ordinary tow truck.
tyre pressure at regular inter- Make sure that the vehicle is towed
vals. with its four wheels raised off the ! CAUTION:
ground.
Never engage the parking brake
o If the vehicle is towed with its
! WARNING: only two wheels raised off the
whilst performing these tests.
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres ground, the 4WD system could
designed to provide for safe ride and be damaged.
handling capability. o In unavoidable case, if the ve-
Do not use a size and type of tyre and hicle is being towed with all four
wheel that is different from the one wheels on the ground, it should
that was originally installed on your be towed only forward direction
vehicle. It can affect the safety and with rope.
performance of your vehicle, which o Whilst towing, check the follow-
could lead to handling failure or ing items.
rollover and serious injury. 1. The ignition switch is in "ACC"
Temporary
When replacing the tyres, be sure to or "ON". free roller Roll tester (Speedometer)
equip all four tyres with the tyre and 2. Place the shift lever in neutral
wheel of the same size, type, tread, (For Automatic Transmission, HHP1034
"N" position).
3. Release the parking brake.
20
o In rare cases when it's unavoidable Driving on dry paved road and Driving in Water
that a 4WD vehicle is to be inspected highway
for speedometer test on 2WD roll
tester, strictly follow the procedures Select the AUTO to drive on dry paved
next. roads. Especially on dry highway, never
select the LOW.
1. Check the tyre pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle. Driving on snowy or icy roads
2. Place the rear wheels on the roll
tester for speedometer test as Select the AUTO or LOW in accor-
shown in the illustration. dance with the road conditions, and 15.7 in(40cm)
3. Release the parking brake. then gradually depress the accelerator
4. Place the front wheels on the pedal for a smooth start.
temporary free roller as shown in D090E01HP
the illustration. Driving on sandy or muddy roads Select the LOW mode and drive through
Select the LOW and then gradually slowly.
depress the accelerator pedal for a The maximum advisable wading depth
! WARNING: smooth start. Keep the pressure on is approximately 15.7 in.(40cm).
Keep away from the front of the ve- the accelerator pedal constant as pos- Before driving through water, such as
hicle whilst inspecting. This is very sible, and drive at low speed. when crossing shallow streams, first
dangerous as the vehicle can jump check the depth of the water and the
forward and cause serious injury or Climbing sharp grades bottom of the river bed for firmness.
death. Drive slowly at the speed of 3mph (5
Select the LOW to maximize use the km/h) and avoid deep water.
engine torque. Take all necessary safety measures to
(9) When using tyre chains, always
attach them to the rear wheels. ensure that water damage to the engine
(10) If the front or rear wheels get stuck
Descending sharp grades or other vehicle parts does not occur.
in the mud, do not spin them reck- Select the LOW, use the engine brake
lessly. The 4WD system could be and descend slowly.
damaged.
2
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 21
(ABS)
C120A02A-EAT
Water entering the engine air intake will
(Not all models)
cause severe engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from wheel
! WARNING: The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
bearings, causing rusting and prema- o Avoid high cornering speeds. designed to prevent wheel lock-up
ture failure, and may also enter the o Do not make quick steering wheel during sudden braking or on hazard-
axles, transmission and transfer case, movements, such as sharp lane ous road surfaces. The ABS control
reducing the gear oil's lubricating quali- charges or fast, sharp turns. module monitors the wheel speed and
ties. o The risk of rollover is greatly in- controls the pressure applied to each
creased if you lose control of your brake. Thus, in emergency situations
vehicle at highway speeds.
! CAUTION: o In a collision crash, an unbelted
or on slick roads, ABS will increase
vehicle control during braking.
o Whilst the full-time 4WD vehicle is person is significantly more likely
being raised on a jack, never start to die than a person wearing a NOTE:
the engine or cause the tyres to seatbelt.
During ABS operation, a slight pul-
rotate. o Loss of control often occurs if two
sation may be felt in the brake pedal
There is the danger that rotating or more wheels drop off the road-
when the brakes are applied. Also,
tyres touching the ground could way and the driver oversteers to
a noise may be heard in the engine
cause the vehicle to go off the jack reenter the roadway.
compartment whilst braking. These
and to jump forward. o In the event your vehicle leaves
conditions are normal and indicate
o If one of the front or rear wheels the roadway, do not steer sharply.
that the anti-lock brake system is
begins to spin in mud, snow, etc., Instead, slow down before pulling
functioning properly.
the vehicle can sometimes be back into the travel lanes.
driven out by depressing the ac-
celerator pedal further; however,
avoid running the engine continu- ! WARNING:
ously at high rpm because doing ABS will not prevent accidents due
so could damage the 4WD system. to improper or dangerous driving
manoeuvres. Even though vehicle
control is improved during emer-
22 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFEREN- EFFECTIVE BRAKING
TIAL
D190A01HP-EAT HPC140A1-E
gency braking, always maintain a (Not all models)
safe distance between you and ob- Braking system performance and fric-
jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should A limited-slip differential, if equipped, tion material life are greatly affected by
always be reduced during extreme is for the rear wheel differential only. the driving style adopted. The follow-
road conditions. The features of this limited-slip differ- ing suggestions are made to assist in
The braking distance for cars ential are described below: achieving the best results from the
equipped with an anti-lock braking Just as with a conventional differential, braking system.
system may be longer than for those the wheel on one side is allowed to turn
without it in the following road con- at a different speed from the wheel on o Anticipate the road and conditions
ditions. the other side when the vehicle is ahead in order that heavy braking
cornering. The difference between the may be avoided.
o Driving on rough, gravel or snow- limited-slip differential and a conven- o When descending long gradients,
covered roads. tional differential is that if the wheel on use the engine to assist in retarding
o Driving with tire chains installed. one side of the vehicle loses traction, a the vehicle to minimize the possibil-
o Driving on roads where the road greater amount of torque is applied to ity of brake fade occurring.
surface is pitted or has different the rear wheel on the other side to o When trailer towing, ensure that the
surface height. improve traction. trailer brakes function correctly and
use engine braking to assist the
These roads should be driven at ! CAUTION:
vehicle braking system.
o Use only genuine Hyundai replace-
reduced speeds. The safety features o Never start the engine with the
of an ABS equipped vehicle should ment brake pads and shoes to en-
gearshift lever placed in the for- sure consistent friction characteris-
not be tested by high speed driving ward or reverse whilst one of the
or cornering. This could endanger tics and wear rates.
rear wheels is jacked up and the o After driving through deep water (e.g.
the safety of yourself or others. other in contact with the ground; fording), the brakes may become
doing so may cause the vehicle to wet and performance reduced. Al-
jump forward. ways check brake efficiency after
o Use only recommended oil for emerging from the water and dry the
LSD in the rear axle. brakes by lightly depressing the
See page 9-5 for the recommended
oil descriptions.
2
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY 23
brake pedal several times whilst driv- C140A01A-EAT which reduces their effectiveness
ing slowly. You can save fuel and get more miles and may lead to more serious conse-
o Apply the parking brake only when from your car if you follow these sug- quences.
the vehicle is at rest. gestions: o Take care of your tyres. Keep them
o Since the power assistance pro- inflated to the recommended pres-
vided by the brake servo is derived o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
from the engine, coasting with the moderate rate. Don't make "jack- much or too little, results in unnec-
engine turned off or towing of the rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts essary tyre wear. Check the tyre
vehicle with the engine turned off and maintain a steady cruising pressures at least once a month.
will result in greatly increased pedal speed. Don't race between stop- o Be sure that the wheels are aligned
pressures being required to stop the lights. Try to adjust your speed to correctly. Improper alignment can
vehicle. that of the other traffic so you don't result from hitting curbs or driving
o Do not hold the vehicle on the up- have to change speeds unneces- too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor
grade with the accelerator pedal. sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever alignment causes faster tyre wear
This can cause the transmission to possible. Always maintain a safe and may also result in other prob-
overheat. Always use the brake distance from other vehicles so you lems as well as greater fuel con-
pedal or parking brake. can avoid unnecessary braking. This sumption.
also reduces brake wear. o Keep your car in good condition. For
o Drive at a moderate speed. The better fuel economy and reduced
faster you drive, the more fuel your maintenance costs, maintain your
car uses. Driving at a moderate car in accordance with the mainte-
speed, especially on the highway, is nance schedule in Section 5. If you
one of the most effective ways to drive your car in severe conditions,
reduce fuel consumption. more frequent maintenance is re-
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. quired (see Section 5 for details).
This can increase fuel consumption o Keep your car clean. For maximum
and also increase wear on these service, your Hyundai should be
components. In addition, driving with kept clean and free of corrosive
your foot resting on the brake pedal materials. It is especially important
may cause the brakes to overheat, that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al-
24 SMOOTH CORNERING WINTER DRIVING
lowed to accumulate on the under- C150A01A-EAT DC170A1-E
side of the car. This extra weight can Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- The onset of winter conditions subject
result in increased fuel consumption ners, especially when roads are wet. motor vehicles to greater operating
and also contribute to corrosion. Ideally, corners should always be taken demands. Therefore, the following
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- under gentle acceleration. If you follow suggestions will assist in maintaining
sary weight in your car. Weight re- these suggestions, tyre wear will be peak performance and reliability dur-
duces fuel economy. held to a minimum. ing these periods:
o Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and
not in traffic), turn off your engine ZC170B1-E
and restart only when you're ready Electrical System

to go. Winter conditions impose severe de-
o Remember, your Hyundai does not mands upon vehicle electrical systems,
require extended warm-up. As soon particularly the charging circuit. The
as the engine is running smoothly, battery condition and performance
you can drive away. In very cold along with the alternator performance
weather, however, give your engine and drive belt condition should be
a slightly longer warm-up period. checked prior to the onset of winter.
o Don't "labour" or "over-rev" the en-
gine. Labouring is driving too slowly
in too high a gear resulting in the
vehicle kangarooing. If this happens,
shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is
racing the engine beyond its safe
limit. This can be avoided by shifting
at the recommended speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is oper-
ated by engine power so your fuel
economy is reduced when you use
it.
2
25
YC170C1-E ZC170D1-E ZC170E1-E

Anti-freeze/Corrosion inhibitor Door Locks Windscreen Washers & Wipers
The cooling system must always con- Should the door lock mechanism be- The windscreen washer bottle should
tain an Ethylene-Glycol based anti- come frozen, a proprietary lock de-icer be filled with a solution of water and a
freeze solution. The system is filled should be used. Alternatively, warm- proprietary winter screen wash addi-
during manufacture with solution of ing the door key may thaw the door tive. The windscreen wipers should
the correct strength which should be lock. However, the key should be not be used if the blades are frozen to
checked before the onset of winter and handled carefully to avoid burning the the windscreen or if they are covered
adjusted or changed as required. fingers. with snow, before this is removed.
Never attempt to thaw a frozen door
NOTE: lock using hot water, since the water NOTE:
The anti-freeze solution contains a will eventually freeze and compound Never allow undiluted screen
corrosion inhibitor to prevent deg- the problem. washer fluid additive to spill upon
radation of the aluminium castings the paintwork or use engine cool-
contained within the engine. There- NOTE: ant anti-freeze since damage to the
fore, never, drain the system and The proper temperature for using paintwork may result.
refill with water only. the immobilizer key is from -40°F to
176°F (-40°C to 80°C). If you heat the o When driving in extreme condi-
In addition, anti-freeze solution must immobilizer key over 176°F (80°C) to tions, the windscreen wiper
ALWAYS be used in vehicles fitted open the frozen lock, it may cause blades may fail to clear the screen
with air conditioning, to prevent the damage to the transponder in its properly due to the formation of
heater matrix from freezing and sub- head. ice upon the blade edge. It will
sequently bursting with the refrigera- therefore be necessary to peri-
tion system in use. odically remove such ice to re-
store their efficiency.
o If the power operated door mir-
rors become frozen, attempts to
adjust these may damage the
mechanism.
26 TRAILER OR VEHICLE
TOWING
o The formation of snow or ice build HPC200A2-E YC200B2-E
up inside the wheel arches may If you are considering towing with your Trailer Towbars
interfere with the roadwheels or car, you should first check with your Select the correct towbar and ball com-
steering mechanism. In such in- Local Laws to determine their legal bination, making sure that its location
stances, unusual noises or an in- requirements. is compatible with that of the trailer or
crease in steering effort may re- Since laws vary from county to county, vehicle being towed.
sult. Therefore, ensure that the the requirements for towing trailers, Use a quality non-equalizing towbar
wheelarches are checked peri- cars, or other types of vehicles or which distributes the nose weight uni-
odically and any accumulated apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai formly throughout the chassis.
snow or ice removed. dealer for further details before towing.
o It is advisable to carry emergency The towbar should be bolted securely
equipment including, torch, to the car and installed by a qualified
shovel, tow rope, blankets etc., if
a journey is to be undertaken
! CAUTION:
technician.
into areas of severe road condi- Do not do any towing with your car
tions. during its first 1,000 miles in order to
allow the engine to have properly
run-in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or trans-
mission damage.
2
27
YC200C3-A YC200D2-E
Trailer Brakes Safety Cables
! CAUTION:
If your trailer is equipped with a braking Should the towbar connection between
system, make sure it conforms to fed- o Never connect a trailer brake sys- your car and the trailer or vehicle you
eral and/or local regulations and that it tem directly to the vehicle brake are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle
is properly installed and operating cor- system. could wander dangerously across other
rectly. o When towing a trailer on steep lanes of traffic and ultimately leave the
grades (in excess of 12%) pay roadway. To eliminate this potentially
NOTE: close attention to the engine cool- dangerous situation, safety cables,
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your ant temperature gauge to ensure attached between your car and the
car will require more frequent main- the engine does not overheat. If trailer or towed vehicle, are required.
tenance due to the additional load. the needle of the coolant tem-
See Maintenance Under Severe perature gauge moves across the
Usage Conditions" on page 5-6. dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to
do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
28
C190E03HP-EAT 3. The front or rear axle weight must

Trailer Weight Limit not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) shown on the ve-
hicle identification plate (see page
8-2). It is possible that your towing
package does not exceed the
GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.
Improper trailer loading and/or too
much luggage in the luggage com-
Gross axle weight Gross vehicle partment can overload the rear
weight axle. Redistribute the load and
C190E02L
Nose weight Total trailer weight check the axle weight again.
C190E01L 2. The total gross vehicle weight with 4. The maximum permissible static
trailer must not exceed the Gross vertical load (nose weight) on the
Nose weights can be increased or de- Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) coupling device is 247 Lbs. (112kg)
creased by re-distributing the load in shown on the vehicle identifica- 5. The maximum permissible over-
the trailer. tion plate (see page 8-2). The total hang of the coupling point is 44.7
This can be verified by checking the gross vehicle weight is the com- inches (1135 mm).
total weight of the loaded trailer and bined weight of the vehicle, driver,
then checking the nose weights. all passengers and their luggage,
cargo, towbar hitch, trailer nose
NOTE: weight and other optional equip-
1. Never load the trailer with more ment.
weight in the back than in the
front. About 60% of the trailer
load should be in the front half
on the trailer and the remaining
40% in the rear.
2
29
Lbs.(kg) C190G01HP-EAT
Important Trailer Weight Infor-
Maximum Towable Weight mation
Trailer Nose weight
The Maximum Towable Weight of your
With Brake 6,173(2800) 247(112) Hyundai Terracan will be reduced if
Without Brake 1,543(700) 61.7(28) the vehicle is load.
Coupling point The Maximum Towable Weight for a
fully loaded vehicle is calculated as
follows:
Spare tyre
! WARNING:
C190E01HP o Improperly loading your car and 1. Find the Vehicle Identification Num-
trailer can seriously affect its steer- ber (VIN) plate (see section 8).
ing and braking performance caus- 2. Note the top 2 weights (in kg) of the
4 lines of weight information on the
! CAUTION:
ing a crash which could cause
injury or death. VIN plate.
The following specifications are o When a trailer is used, the opera- 3. Subtract the weight on line 1 from
recommended when towing a tion speed is restricted to 62.1 line 2. This result (in kg) is the
trailer. The loaded trailer weight can- MPH(100km/h) or less. maximum towable weight of a fully
not safely exceed the values in the loaded vehicle.
chart. For more information, contact your
local Hyundai Dealer.
30
HPC200E1-E 8. When parking your car and trailer, 14.When going down a hill, shift into a
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips especially on a hill, be sure to follow lower gear and use the engine brak-
1. Before towing, check towbar and all the normal precautions. Turn ing effect.
safety cable connections as well as your front wheel into the curb, set When ascending a long grade,
proper operation of the trailer run- the parking brake firmly, and put downshift the transmission to a
ning lights, brake lights, and turn the transmission in 1st or Reverse lower gear and reduce speed to
signals. (manual) or Park (automatic). In reduce chances of engine over-
2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod- addition, place wheel chocks at each loading and/or overheating.
erate speed (Less than 60 MPH). of the trailer's tyres. 15.If you have to stop whilst going
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel 9. If the trailer has electric brakes, uphill, do not hold the vehicle in
than normal conditions. start your vehicle and trailer mov- place by pressing on the accelera-
4. To maintain engine braking effi- ing, and then apply the trailer brake tor. This can cause the automatic
ciency and electrical charging per- controller by hand to be sure the transmission to overheat. Use the
formance, do not use fifth gear brakes are working. This lets you parking brake or footbrake.
(manual transmission). check your electrical connection at
5. Always secure items in the trailer to the same time. NOTE:
prevent load shift whilst driving. 10.During your trip, check occasion- When towing, check transmission
6. Check the condition and air pres- ally to be sure that the load is fluid more frequently.
sure of all tyres on the trailer and secure, and that the lights and any
your car. Low tyre pressure can trailer brakes are still working.
seriously affect the handling. Also 11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-
check the spare tyre. eration or sudden stops.
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is 12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
more affected by crosswind and changes.
buffeting. 13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down
When being passed by a large ve- too long or too frequently. This could
hicle, keep a constant speed and cause the brakes to overheat, re-
steer straight ahead. If there is too sulting in reduced braking efficiency.
much wind buffeting slow down to
get out of the other vehicle's air
turbulence.
2
31
! CAUTION:
If overheating should occur when
towing, (temperature gauge reads
near red zone), taking the following
action may reduce or eliminate the
problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner.

2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going
uphill.
4. Whilst in stop and go traffic, place
the gear selector in park or neu-
tral and idle the engine at a higher
speed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the Engine Will Not Start .......................................... 3-2

Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3
If the Engine Overheats ............................................... 3-4
Spare Tyre ................................................................... 3-6
In the Event of a Puncture ........................................... 3-7
Changing a Flat Tyre ................................................... 3-7
3
If Your Car Must Be Towed ........................................3-14
Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-16
3
If You Lose Your Keys................................................3-17
3 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT
START
SD020A1-E HPD020B1-E 4. Do not attempt to push or tow start
Seek assistance from the nearest If The Engine Cannot Be Cranked the vehicle, refer to "Jump Starting"
Hyundai dealer with regard to the for information regarding engine start-
method of ignition and fuel system ing when the battery is discharged.
diagnosis.
! WARNING:
D010C02A-EAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally
If the engine refuses to start, no but Does Not Start
attempt should be made to push or
tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with 1. Check fuel level.
automatic transmission or fuel in- HHP5020-E 2. With the key in the "OFF" position,
jection will not be able to be started check all connectors at ignition coils
1. If the vehicle is fitted with manual
in this manner since no drive is and spark plugs(For Petrol Engine)
transmission, ensure that the clutch
transmitted through the automatic or check all connectors at glow plug
pedal is depressed whilst cranking
transmission whilst the engine is and glow plug relay(For Diesel En-
the engine. If the vehicle is fitted
not running, and in the case of fuel gine). Reconnect any that may be
with automatic transmission, en-
injected derivatives, the fuel pump disconnected or loose.
sure that the transmission selector
will not operate under tow start 3. Check fuel line in the engine com-
is at the "P" or "N" position.
conditions. In addition, if the ve- partment.
2. Check the battery terminals and
hicle is equipped with an exhaust 4. If engine still refuses to start, call a
connections to ensure that these
catalyst, damage to the catalyst may Hyundai dealer or seek other quali-
are clean and also tight.
result if the vehicle is tow started. fied assistance.
3. If the ignition warning lights dim
when the engine is cranked and the
battery terminals have been
checked, a discharged battery is
indicated.
3
JUMP STARTING 3
D010A01A-EAT SD030A1-E
If Engine Stalls Whilst Driving Discharged
battery
! WARNING:
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-
ing a straight line. Move cautiously Motor vehicle batteries contain
off the road to a safe place. sulphuric acid and emit hydrogen
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. gas. Protective clothing should be
3. Try starting the engine again. If your worn and care exercised to prevent
vehicle will not start, contact Hyundai the acid from coming into contact
dealer or seek other qualified assis- with skin or clothing and the ve-
tance. hicle. Naked lights should not be
permitted in the vicinity of the bat-
Booster battery tery. Care should be exercised to
HHP4001-E
prevent sparks occurring during
connection. If acid accidentally
comes into contact with skin or
! CAUTION:
eyes, the affected area should im-
mediately be flushed with copious
Personal injury and damage to the amounts of water and medical as-
vehicle may occur if jump starting is sistance sought.
not performed correctly. If any doubt
exists as to how this operation should
be performed, seek assistance from
qualified personnel.
4 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
1. Ensure that the booster battery is 12 7. Switch "ON" the main beam HPD040A2-E
volt type. If the booster battery is headlamps before carefully remov- If the temperature gauge indicates
installed in another vehicle, ensure ing the jumper cables in the reverse overheating:
that the two vehicles are not touch- order of attachment. Once the
ing. jumper cables have been removed, 1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as
2. Turn off all unnecessary electrical switch "OFF" the main beam it is safe to do so.
equipment in both vehicles. headlamps. 2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"
3. Ensure that the engine of the ve- (automatic), or neutral (manual trans-
hicle providing the jump start is run- mission) and set the parking brake. If
ning prior to connection of the jump the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
cables. ! CAUTION: 3. If coolant is running out under the car
4. Connect the red jump cable to the If the jump cable is incorrectly in- or steam is coming out from under
positive (+) terminal of the booster stalled, damage to the vehicle elec- the bonnet, stop the engine. Do not
battery and the other end to the trical system may occur, in particu- open the bonnet until the coolant has
positive (+) terminal of the dis- lar the electronic components such stopped running or the steaming has
charged battery. as the Fuel Injection system com- stopped. If there is no visible loss of
5. Attach the black jump cable to the puter and the Automatic transmis- coolant and no steam, leave the
negative (-) terminal of the booster sion computer. The battery must engine running and check to be sure
battery, and the other end to a ground never be disconnected whilst the the engine cooling fan is operating.
point within the engine compartment engine is running. If the fan is not running, turn the
of the vehicle with the flat bat-tery. engine off.
Do not connect to the negative bat- 4. Check to see if the water pump drive
tery terminal of the flat battery since belt is missing. If it is not missing,
sparks may be generated with the check to see that it is tight. If the
subsequent risk of explosion. drive belt seems to be satisfactory,
6. Raise the booster vehicle engine check for coolant leaking from the
speed to 2,000 r.p.m. and start the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If
engine of the vehicle with the flat the air conditioning had been in use,
battery. it is normal for cold water to be
draining from it).
3
5
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

! WARNING:
or coolant is leaking out, stop the
engine immediately and call the near-
! CAUTION:
Whilst the engine is running, keep est Hyundai dealer for assistance. Serious loss of coolant indicates
hands and clothing away from mov- there is a leak in the cooling system
ing parts such as the fan and drive and this should be checked as soon
belts to prevent injury. as possible by a Hyundai dealer.
! WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot since steam and
! WARNING (Diesel only): boiling water may be ejected from
the radiator resulting in burns or
Never work on injection system with
scalding.
engine running or within 30 seconds
after shutting off engine. High pres-
sure pump, rail, injectors and high 6. If the cause of the overheating can-
pressure pipes are subject to high not be found, wait until the engine
pressure even after the engine temperature has returned to normal.
stopped. The fuel jet produced by Then, if coolant has been lost, care-
fuel leaks may cause serious in- fully remove the radiator cap and add
jury, if it touch the body. People water to bring the fluid level in the
using pacemakers should not move reservoir(page 6-10) up to the base
than 30cm closer to the ECU or of the radiator fill opening. Fill the
wiring harness within the engine coolant expansion tank to the half-
room while engine is running, since way mark.
the high currents in the Common 7. Proceed with caution until it is estab-
Rail system produce considerable lished that the engine is operating
magnetic fields. normally. If the engine overheats
repeatedly, the advice of a Hyundai
dealer should be sought.
6 SPARE TYRE
YD050A1-E D040B03HP-EAT
For Full Size Handling the Spare Tyre
The following instructions for the FULL
SIZE spare tyre should be observed:
Check inflation pressure as soon as
possible after installing the spare tyre,
and adjust to the specified pressure.
The tyre pressure should be periodi-
cally checked and maintained at the
specified pressure whilst the tyre is
stored.
HHP4025
Spare Tyre Pressure HHP4015

2. Insert the spare wheel rod into the
hole in the upper pad of the rear
Tyre Size FULL Size 1. Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack bumper.
Inflation Pressure 29 psi (200 kPa) handle) after folding up the seat 3. Connect the wheel nut wrench to
cushion of the rear seat . the spare wheel rod.
To fold up the seat cushion, refer to 4. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-
the page 1-23. clockwise and the spare tyre will
lower.
3
IN THE EVENT OF A PUNC- CHANGING A FLAT TYRE 7
TURE
SD060A1-E HPD070A2-E
If a puncture occurs whilst driving the

vehicle:
1. Bring the car to rest as soon as it is

safe to do so and with the minimum
amount of braking required which
will assist in maintaining the maxi-
mum amount of control. The vehicle
should be parked wherever pos-
sible upon firm level ground to facili-
HHP4026
tate wheel changing. D060A01HP
5. Remove the lift plate from the centre 2. If the vehicle is creating a hazard
and the road conditions do not per- It is of the utmost importance that care
of the spare tyre after the spare tyre
mit the wheel to be changed safely, is exercised when changing road
is lowered completely.
assistance should be sought. wheels. Ensure that the parking brake
3. Passengers must not be allowed to is set and that the gear shift lever is in
Installation is the reverse order of re-
remain inside the vehicle during reverse (P, if the vehicle has automatic
moval.
wheel changing. If a puncture oc- transmission).
curs whilst the vehicle is on a
motorway, the passengers should
! CAUTION:
take refuge on the motorway em-
bankment to avoid the possibility of
When installing, turn the wheel nut
injury occurring should the vehicle
wrench clockwise till you hear the
be struck by other motorway traffic.
crackle once or twice(Tightening
4. Wheel changing should be per-
torque : 3.87 kg·m). And make sure
formed according to the following
the spare tyre is secured in the
instructions.
proper location.
8
D060B01HP-EAT
1. Obtain Spare Tyre and Tool
! WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres
designed to provide for safe ride and
handling capability.
Do not use a size and type of tyre and
wheel that is different from the one
that was originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
HHP4011
could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury. o Remove the spare tyre and take out
HHP4015
When replacing the tyres, be sure to the jack and tool bag.
equip all four tyres with the tyre and o Obtain the spare wheel rod (Jack
wheel of the same size, type, tread, handle) after folding up the seat
brand and load-carrying capacity. If cushion of the rear seat . NOTE:
you nevertheless decide to equip To fold up the seat cushion, refer to The spare tyre is located under-
your vehicle with any tyre/wheel com- the page 1-23. neath the car.
bination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you
should not use these tyres for high-
way driving.
3
9
ZD070D1-E D065C02HP-GAT ZD070F1-E

2. Block the Wheel 3. Removing the Spare Wheel 4. Loosen Wheel Nuts
Cap
Pry off the wheel cap, using the bar as
o Alloy Wheel Cap type
Flat tyre
HHP4022 HHP4028
Block the wheel that is diagonally op- The wheel nuts should be loosened
posite from the flat tyre to prevent the slightly before raising the car. To loosen
vehicle from rolling when the car is the nuts, turn the wheel nut wrench
raised on the jack. counterclockwise. When doing this, be
sure that the socket is seated com-
HHP4027 pletely over the nut so it cannot slip off.
For maximum leverage, position the
wheel nut wrench so the handle is to the
right as shown in the drawing. Then,
whilst holding the wheel nut wrench
near the end of the handle, pull up on it
with steady pressure. Do not remove
the nuts at this time. Just loosen them
about one-half turn.
10
D060E01A-AAT D060F02HP-EAT
5. Put the Jack in Place 6. Raising the Car
Front
HHP4016
D060F01HP
Using the jack handle, turn the release
HHP4023
valve clockwise until it reaches a stop.
Rear o Open the lid at the left corner of the
luggage compartment.
o Loosen the hexagonal bolt, and then
take out the jack.
HHP4024
HHP4017
The base of the jack should be placed Then fit the jack handle into the holder,
on firm, level ground. The jack should and align the groove of the jack handle
be positioned as shown in the illustra- with the notch of the holder.
tion.
3
11
As the jack begins to raise the vehicle,

double check that it is properly posi-
tioned and will not slip.
Raise the car high enough so that the
Stop
fully inflated spare tyre can be installed.
mark
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
HHP4018 HHP4019
Move the jack handle up and down to

raise the ram until just before the jack
contacts the jacking point of the car. ! CAUTION:
Position the jack with the jack handle. (1) Use only the jack included with
Position it only at the specified points the vehicle and use it only for
indicated in the "Put the Jack in Place". changing a wheel and for install-
Use of the jack at other points could ing tyre chains.
damage the car. HHP4020
(2) Position the jack on a hard, level
Moving the jack handle up and down to surface.
raise the ram. Using the jack handle, turn the release
valve counterclockwise slow to lower (3) If the release valve is loosened by
the ram, and then take out the jack. turning it 2 or more times in the
When the release valve is difficult to counterclockwise direction, the
turn by jack handle, connect the wheel jack's oil will leak and the jack
nut wrench to the jack handle. cannot be used.
12
SD070H1-E
(4) This jack is hydraulic, and the 7. Changing Wheels
ram is a two stage type. When
both rams are raised and the stop
mark of the upper ram becomes
visible, stop jacking immediately.
! WARNING:
Do not get under the car when it is D060G02HP
supported by the jack! This is very

dangerous as the vehicle could fall D060G01HP
and cause serious injury or death.

No one should stay in the car whilst
Using the wheel nut wrench, remove
the nuts and slide the wheel off the hub
! WARNING:
the jack is being used. and wheel studs. Lie the wheel flat to It is important that the faces of the
prevent it from rolling. Ensure that the wheel and hub are clean prior to
faces of the wheel and hub are clean. installing the wheel. The prescence
Position the spare wheel over the studs of dirt or other matter in the wheel
and slide it up to the hub. or hub faces could result in the
wheel nuts becoming loose whilst
the vehicle is being driven.
3
13
SD070I1-E D060I02HP-EAT Go around the wheel tightening every

8. Re-install Wheel Nuts 9. Lower Vehicle and Tighten other nut until they are all tight. Then
Nuts double-check each nut for tightness.
D060H01HP
Fit the wheel nuts onto the studs and HHP4029

HHP4030
tighten with the wheel nut wrench. Lower the car to the ground by moving
the jack handle up and down. Then And reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the
position the wheel nut wrench as shown boss of the wheel cap in the groove of
in the drawing and tighten the wheel the wheel, hitting the centre of the
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated wheel cap with hand. After changing
completely over the nut. Do not stand wheels, have a technician tighten the
on the wrench or use an extension pipe wheel nuts to their proper torque as
over the wrench handle. soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
90-110 N.m (65-80 lb.ft)
14 IF YOUR CAR MUST BE
TOWED
D060J02O-EAT D080A02A-EAT D080B01HP-EAT
AFTER CHANGING WHEELS Towing a Car With Manual Trans-
mission
o Not OK for 4WD

HHP4031 (OK for Part-Time 4WD in 2H Position)
HHP5019
o OK for Manual Transmission
Equipped Vehicle
If you have a tyre gauge, remove the ! CAUTION:
D080B01HP
valve cap and check the air pressure.

Your car can be damaged if towed
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest incorrectly!
service station and inflate to the cor- If your car has to be towed, it should be
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it done by your Hyundai dealer or a com-
until it is correct. Always reinstall the mercial tow truck service. This will help
valve cap after checking or adjusting assure that your car is not damaged in
tyre pressure. If the cap is not re- towing. Also, professionals are gener- o Not OK for 4WD
placed, air may leak from the tyre. If ally aware of local laws governing tow- (OK for Part-Time 4WD in 2H Position)
you lose a valve cap, buy another and ing. In any case, rather than risk dam- o OK for Manual Transmission
install it as soon as possible. age to your car, it is suggested that you Equipped Vehicle
After you have changed wheels, al- show this information to the tow truck D080B02HP
ways secure the flat tyre in its place operator. Be sure that a safety cable
and return the jack and tools to their system is used and that all current laws
proper storage locations. associated with vehicle towing are ob-
served.
3
15
o Be sure that the ignition key is in the D080C02HP-EAT
"ACC" position. This is necessary to Towing A Car With Automatic

prevent damage to the steering lock Transmission
mechanism, which is not designed
to hold the front wheels straight
whilst the car is being towed.
o If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged,
a towing dolly must be used. o Not OK Automatic Transmission
o Not OK for 4WD Equipped Vehicle
(OK for Part-Time 4WD in 2H Position) D080C02HP
o OK for Automatic Transmission
Equipped Vehicle
D080B01HP ! CAUTION:
Be sure that the transmission is in A car with an automatic transmis-
neutral. Do not tow at speeds greater sion should never be towed from the
o Ok for 4WD than 30 mph (50 km/h) and for more front with the rear wheels on the
o Ok for Manual Transmission than 15 miles (25 km). ground. This can cause serious dam-
Equipped Vehicle age to the transmission. If the car
D080B03HP
NOTE: must be towed from the front, a tow-
Before towing, check the level of the ing dolly must be used under the
transmission fluid. If it is below the rear wheels.
! CAUTION: "HOT" range on the dipstick, add
Full-time 4 Wheel Drive cannot be fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a tow-
towed with a tow truck. ing dolly must be used.
It must be towed by lifting all 4
wheels.
16
D080D02HP-EAT For emergency towing when no com-

Emergency Towing mercial yow vehicle is avaiable, attach
Front chain or strap to one of the towing
hooks under the front/rear of your car.
Be very careful when attempting this
procedure when the vehicle is on any
unpaved surface to avoid damage to
your vehicle.
o Ok for 4WD
Nor should towing be attempted if the
o Ok for Automatic or Manual Trans-
mission Equipped Vehicle
wheels, drive train, axles, steering or
brakes are damaged. Before towing,
D080B03HP
be sure the transmission is in neutral
and the key is in "ACC" (with the
HHP4035
engine off) or in the "ON" position (with
! CAUTION: Rear the engine running). A driver must be
in the towed car to steer it and operate
Full-time 4 Wheel Drive cannot be the brakes.
towed with a tow truck.
It must be towed by lifting all 4
wheels.
HHP4036
3
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS 17
D120A01A-EAT
Information about the key of

immobiliser system will be found on
page 1-5.
HHP4037
NOTE:
o To do the emergency towing, first
remove the cover below the
bumper on driver's side by pull-
ing it
o To avoid serious damage to your
4WD vehicle, limit the towing to 10
mph (15 km/h) and not for more
than 1 mile (1.5 km) at ANY TIME.
APPEARANCE CARE
Appearance Care ......................................................... 4-2

Valeting ......................................................................... 4-3
Stain/Spot Removal ...................................................... 4-4
Polishing ....................................................................... 4-4
Bumper Maintenance .................................................... 4-4
Accident Repairs .......................................................... 4-4
Seat Belts ..................................................................... 4-5
4
4
Interior Valeting ............................................................. 4-5
4 APPEARANCE CARE
2 APPEARANCE CARE
ZE020A1-E ZE020B1-E particularly during the winter sea-

In using the most advanced design Underbody Coatings son to prevent prolonged contact
and construction practices, every Every Hyundai passenger car receives of road salt with the body.
Hyundai is built to retain its original a full underbody and cavity injection Ensure that the various drain points
factory finish for many years. How- treatment during production. In order located at bottom of the door pan-
ever, long term durability is also greatly that this treatment may retain maxi- els are kept clear, to prevent water
dependant upon maintaining the vari- mum effectiveness, it is recommended becoming trapped within the cavi-
ous protection systems and coatings that the underbody receives a power ties. Wherever possible, the park-
used in manufacture since constant wash and a thorough inspection after ing of the vehicle in a confined,
exposure to the elements will eventu- each winter season. In doing so any poorly ventilated location (e.g.)
ally result in their breakdown and loss accumulations of mud, which act as garage should be avoided when the
of effectiveness. The following sug- moisture traps and combine with road vehicle is wet or covered with snow
gestions are made to assist in the salts to accelerate corrosion, will be or ice. Under these conditions, the
maintenance of the vehicle bodywork. removed. Should any damage to or internal cavities of the vehicle will
deterioration of the underbody coating remain damp for long periods of
be apparent, the advice of a Hyundai time which encourage corrosion.
dealer regarding the use of a compat- Parking the vehicle where good
ible repair material should be sought. ventilation exists is preferable.
NOTE:
The underbody should never be
steam cleaned since the underbody
coating may be removed by this
process.
During the interim period between
power washing the underbody, the
more vulnerable areas such as
wheelarches should be hosed off,
4
VALETING 3
ZE020C1-E JE050A1-E Use only a shampoo intended for the

Interior Regular cleaning of the exterior purpose and ensure that the body work
During the winter period, it is possible paintwork serves two important func- is thoroughly wetted to soften the dirt
that the carpet within the passenger tions. Firstly, the removal of abrasive film prior to attempting to remove this.
compartment may become wet. The dirt and contaminants will maintain the After removing the dirt film with a soft
carpet should not be allowed to remain lustre of the paintwork and will prevent sponge, the body work should be thor-
in this condition for prolonged periods discolouration and dulling due to pro- oughly rinsed and then dried with a
since the carpet may begin to create longed contact. good quality chamois leather to pre-
musty smells and promote internal Secondly, the presence of damage vent streaking or spotting of the paint
corrosion of the floorpan. through impact or abrasion will be ap- work.
parent allowing early rectification to be Household detergents, solvents and
made thus preventing corrosion from abrasive cleaning materials should not
becoming established and spreading be used in order to avoid damaging the
beneath the paint film. To avoid "water paint film.
spotting" the vehicle should not be Plastic wheel covers should be cleaned
washed in direct sunlight particularly in using a sponge and water. Cast alloy
the case of vehicles having dark body wheels should be cleaned using a mild
colours. The heat from the sun rays is soap or neutral detergent. Abrasive
absorbed by the paint film increasing compounds must not be used since in
the surface temperature. This action the event of these damaging the lac-
causes water used for washing to quer coating, oxidisation of the alu-
evaporate quickly leaving behind the minium wheel will occur, spoiling the
deposits from the water and the sham- appearance.
poo used. The use of a toothbrush will facilitate
cleaning between the wheel "spokes".
4 APPEARANCE CARE
4
JE060A1-E JE080A1-E JE090A1-E

STAIN/SPOT REMOVAL BUMPER MAINTENANCE ACCIDENT REPAIRS
Should tree sap, dead insects or tar The special material from which the In the event of the body work sustain-
prove to be difficult to remove from the bumpers are manufactured warrants ing damage, the following points should
paint film, turpentine or a proprietary special attention to preserve the ap- be noted prior to repairs being under-
paint cutting compound may be used. pearance of the bumpers. Avoid con- taken.
Ensure that the area to be cleaned is tact with battery electrolyte or brake If body panels are replaced or re-
not rubbed intensively to prevent break- fluid and ensure that accidental spill- paired, anti corrosion treatment must
ing through the colour coat and expos- ages are immediately flushed with be applied to the repair area. The
ing the under coat. water. product used must be compatible with
Do not use abrasive cleaning materi- those used in manufacture. It is rec-
als which may damage the bumpers. ommended that repairs are entrusted
JE070A1-E Avoid subjecting the bumpers to high to a Hyundai dealer to ensure that
POLISHING temperatures such as may be encoun- replacement parts used are of the same
tered in high bake paint ovens. high quality as those used in manufac-
The exterior paint work should be pol- ture of the vehicle and that the correct
ished with a proprietary wax polish repair methods and materials will en-
when water no longer collects in bead sure adequate levels of corrosion pro-
form on the paint work. The instruc- tection and the continued validity of the
tions of the product manufacturer Anti Perforation Warranty.
should be adhered to.
4
INTERIOR VALETING 5
JE100A1-E JE110A1-E YE010A1-E

SEAT BELTS The soft trim and carpets should be To Clean Leather Upholstery
Seat belts should be cleaned only with maintained with the regular use of a (Not all models)
a mild soap solution. Strong deter- vacuum cleaner. Heavy soiling should In the normal course of use, leather
gents, solvens or bleaches may dam- be removed with a dry cleaning agent upholstered surfaces will, like any
age the belt webbing and therefore recommended for this purpose follow- material, pick-up dust and dirt. This
reduce the effectiveness of the belt. ing the instructions of the product dust and dirt MUST be cleaned off or it
Belts which display signs of fraying, manufacturer. Paint thinner, solvents may work into the surface of the leather,
wear or cut should be replaced. or other such cleaning materials should causing damage.
not be used since damage to the up- Fine leather needs care. This care, as
holstery may result. with all fine things, need not be elabo-
rated, but should include cleaning when
necessary. Washing leather thoroughly
JE120A1-E
with soap and water will keep your
WINDOWS leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure
A proprietary glass cleaner should be you have many years of wear.
used to clean the inside of the win- Take a piece of cheese cloth and using
dows. However, the rear heated any mild soap and lukewarm water,
windscreen must only be cleaned us- work up a good lather. Thoroughly
ing a light horizontal cleaning action. wash the leather. Wipe clean with a
Care should be exercised to avoid the slightly damp cloth and dry with soft
use of abrasive cleaners or contact cloth. Do this as often as the leather
with items of jewellery which may dam- becomes soiled.
age the heating elements.
4 APPEARANCE CARE
6
During tanning operations, sufficient

oils are incorporated through process-
ing that none need be applied during
the life of the leather. Oil applied to the
finished surface will in no way help the
leather and may do more harm than
good. Varnished and furniture polishes
should NEVER be used under any
conditions.
Maintenance and Servicing Requirements ................... 5-2

Regular Servicing ......................................................... 5-3
Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7
5 5
2 MAINTENANCE AND SER-
VICING REQUIREMENTS
DF020A1-E
NOTE: that the maintenance operations are
To ensure the continued reliability and The inspection and testing of cer- performed by a Hyundai dealer be-
safety of the vehicle, certain routine tain electronic fuel injection/engine cause of the need for specialized knowl-
maintenance operations are required management and automatic trans- edge and tooling and to ensure that no
at specific mileage or time intervals. mission control systems require possibility of invalidating the manufac-
It is the responsibility of the vehicle specialised electronic equipment turers warranty exists.
owner to ensure that the maintenance specifically designed for Hyundai The maintenance schedules relate to
schedules shown in both this Owner's vehicles. The use of general pur- vehicles operated under normal condi-
Manual and the Warranty and Service pose electrical test equipment may tions, vehicles which are operated
Passport are adhered to. result in damage to the control unit under adverse conditions will require
The new vehicle warranty may be microprocessors. more frequent maintenance which is
invalidated if the routine maintenance described at page 5-6.
operations are not performed in line
with the recommendations outlined and DF020C2-E NOTE:
the safety and durability of the vehicle Specified Scheduled Procedures Service schedules may change de-
adversely affected. The specified scheduled procedures pending on individual country
It is recommended that all mainte- are listed in the maintenance charts needs. Please ask your local
nance operations with the exception of beginning at page 5-3. The operations Hyundai dealer for a copy of the
the daily operating checks are en- specified must be performed at the service schedule that relates to that
trusted to a Hyundai dealer to ensure time or mileage intervals shown irre- country.
that the latest repair and maintenance spective of whether the mileage inter-
procedures and specialized servicing val has been reached before the speci-
tools are employed. In addition, the fied time interval. DF020F1-E
use of genuine Hyundai replacement Certain lubricants and components SERVICE HISTORY
parts will ensure that the vehicle safety degrade with both time and mileage
and performance will not be compro- It is important that all scheduled main-
(eg, engine oil and brake fluid) and tenance services are recorded in the
mised. therefore it is not permissable to base warranty and service passport to en-
the maintenance schedule upon mile- sure that proof of maintenance is avail-
age alone. It is strongly recommended able when warranty service is required.
5
REGULAR SERVICING 3
YF010A2-E
In order to ensure continued reliability, safety and longevity, regular maintenance performed at the intervals specified is
essential. The maintenance intervals specified are based both on time elapsed and mileage covered since the previous
maintenance service was performed. However, under severe operating conditions, certain scheduled operations should be
performed at shorter intervals.
Regular maintenance should be entrusted to a Hyundai dealer who is best able to provide the expertise required to ensure
optimum operational performance.
In addition the use of Hyundai replacement parts and service consumables will ensure that the original build quality,
operational performance and safety are maintained.
F030B02HP-EAT
MILES X 1000 10 20 30 40 50 60
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (PETROL)
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER (API SG, SH OR ABOVE) R R R R R R
2 DRIVE BELT (ALT, DAMPER, TENSIONER, IDLER) I I I
3 FUEL FILTER (MPI TYPE) R
4 FLUID LEAKS I I I I I I
5 TIMING BELT I R
6 VENTILATION HOSES I I
7 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R
8 SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) R
4
F030D05HP-EAT
MILES X 1000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (DIESEL)
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER (API CF-4 OR ABOVE, ACEA B4 OR ABOVE) R R R R R R R
2 AIR CLEANER FILTER I R I R I R I
3 FUEL FILTER CARTRIDGE I R I R I R I
4 TIMING BELT R
5 DRIVE BELT (FOR AIR COMPRESSOR, ALTERNATOR) I I I
6 ALTERNATOR VACUUM PUMP I I I I I I I
7 ALTERNATOR OIL HOSE & VACUUM HOSE I I I I I I I
8 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSE & CONNECTIONS I I I I I I I
5
5
F030C06HP-EAT
MILES X 1000 10 20 30 40 50 60
NO. DESCRIPTION
MONTHS 12 24 36 48 60 72
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 COOLING SYSTEM I I I I I I
Petrol Engine R R
2 COOLANT
Diesel Engine R R R
3 COOLANT SPECIFIC GRAVITY I I I I I I
4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL I I I I I I
5 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND FILTER I I I I I R
6 BRAKE PIPES, HOSES, AND CONNECTIONS I I I I I I
7 BRAKE FLUID I R I R I R
8 CLUTCH FLUID I R I R I R
9 REAR BRAKE LININGS, CYLINDERS AND PARKING BRAKE I I I I I I
10 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I I I I I I
11 SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM I I I I I I
12 FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS I I I I I I
13 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE AND BOOTS, LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT I I I I I I
14 DRIVE SHAFT AND BOOTS I I I
15 TRANSFER CASE OIL I I I I I I
16 AXLE GEAR OIL R I I R I I
17 CLEAN PROPELLER SHAFT/RETIGHTEN BOLTS I I I I I I
18 REAR WHEEL BEARINGS I I I I I I
19 TYRE CONDITION AND PRESSURE (incl. Spare) I I I I I I
20 LUBRICATE LOCKS AND HINGES I I I I I I
21 CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I I I I I I
22 ROAD TEST I I I I I I
23 CHECK ALL SYSTEMS WITH HI-SCAN I I I I I I
24 CHECK EMISSIONS I I I I I I
25 CHECK 4 WHEEL ALIGNMENT I I I I I I
6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A05HP-EAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the
chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
PETROL ENGINE A, B, C, F, H
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 4,500 MILES OR 6 MONTHS
DIESEL ENGINE A, B, F, G, H, I, J
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS (FOR PETROL ENGINE) R MORE FREQUENTLY G, H, I, J
TIMING BELT R EVERY 37,000 MILES OR 48 MONTHS D, E, F, G
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
REAR BRAKE LININGS, CYLINDERS AND PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, G, H, I
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE AND BOOTS/
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 9,000 MILES OR 12 MONTHS C, D, E, F
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL R EVERY 60,000 MILES A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND FILTER R EVERY 27,000 MILES A, C, E, F, G, H, I
TRANSFER CASE OIL *1 R EVERY 60,000 MILES C, E, G, H, I
AXLE GEAR OIL *1 I MORE FREQUENTLY C, E, G, H, I
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above
A - Repeated short distance driving 90°F (32°C)
B - Extensive idling G - Driving in mountainous areas
C - Driving in dusty, rough roads H - Towing a trailer
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials I - Driving for patrol car, taxi, or other commercial use or
or in very cold weather vehicle towing
E - Driving in sandy areas J - Driving over 100 MPH
*1. Transfer Case Oil and Axle Gear Oil should be checked(and replaced if necessary) anytime they have been submerged in water
over 15.7 in. (40 cm) deep.
5
EXPLANATION OF SCHED- 7
ULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
F060M01A-AAT F060C01A-AAT
o Engine oil and filter o Fuel filter
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, dam- Never work on injection system with
the maintenance schedule. If the car age the emission system and cause engine running or within 30 sec-
is being driven in severe conditions, hard starting. If an excessive amount onds after shutting off engine. High
more frequent oil and filter changes of foreign matter accumulates in the pressure pump, rail, injectors and
are required. fuel tank, the filter may require re- high pressure pipes are subject to
placement more frequently. high pressure even after the engine
After installing a new filter, run the stopped. The fuel jet produced by
F060B01A-AAT engine for several minutes, and check fuel leaks may cause serious injury,
o Drive belts for leaks at the connections. Fuel fil- if it touch the body. People using
ters should be installed by trained pacemakers should not move than
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil technicians.
harness within the engine room
and replace if necessary. Drive belts while engine is running, since the
should be checked periodically for high currents in the Common Rail
F060D01TB-AAT
proper tension and adjusted as neces- system produce considerable mag-
sary. o Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections netic fields.
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.
Have a trained technician replace any
damaged or leaking parts immediately.
8
F060E01A-AAT F060F02A-AAT F060H01A-AAT

o Timing belt o Crankcase ventilation hoses o Air cleaner filter
Inspect all parts related to the timing Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
belt for damage and deformation. dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- recommended when filter is replaced.
Replace any damaged parts immedi- age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking,
ately. tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling indicate deterioration. Particu- F060J01A-EAT
lar attention should be paid to examine o Spark plugs
those hose surfaces nearest to high
(For petrol engine)
heat sources, such as the exhaust
F060G01A-EAT
manifold. Make sure to install new spark plugs
o Vapour hose and fuel filler cap of the correct heat range.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
The vapour hose and fuel filler cap the hoses do not come in contact with
should be inspected at those intervals any heat source, sharp edges or mov-
specified in the maintenance sched- ing component which might cause heat
ule. Make sure that a new vapour hose damage or mechanical wear. Inspect F070B01A-AAT
or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced. all hose connections, such as clamps o Cooling system
and couplings, to make sure they are Check the cooling system part, such
secure, and that no leaks are present. as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses
Hoses should be replaced immedi- and connections for leakage and dam-
ately if there is any evidence of dete- age. Replace any damaged parts.
rioration or damage.
5
9
F070C01A-AAT F070E02HP-GAT F070G02A-AAT

o Coolant o Automatic transmission fluid o Brake fluid
The coolant should be changed at and filter Check brake fluid level in the brake
the intervals specified in the mainte- The fluid level should be in the "HOT" fluid reservoir. The level should be
nance schedule. range of the dipstick, after engine and between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on
transmission and filter are at normal the side of the reservoir. Use only
operating temperature. Check the Au- hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT
tomatic and filter Transmission and 3 or DOT 4.
F070D01HP-AAT
o Manual transmission oil filter Fluid level with the engine running
and the transmission and filter in
Inspect the manual transmission oil neutral, with the parking brake properly
F070H01HP-AAT
according to the maintenance sched- applied. Use MOBIL DEXRON-II when
ule. adding or changing fluid. o Rear brake linings, pad and
parking brake
NOTE: Check the rear brake linings and pads
If the oil level is low, check for for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, bro-
possible leaks before adding oil. Do F070F01A-AAT ken parts, and excessive wear. In-
not overfill. o Brake hoses and lines spect the parking brake system in-
cluding the parking brake lever and
Visually check for proper installation, cables. For detailed service proce-
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any dures, refer to the Shop Manual.
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
10
F070J01A-AAT F070L01A-AAT F070N01A-AAT

o Brake pads, calipers and o Suspension mounting bolts o Power steering pump, belt and
rotors Check the suspension connections for hoses
Check the pads for excessive wear, looseness or damage. Retighten to the Check the power steering pump and
discs for run out and wear, and cali- specified torque. hoses for leakage and damage. Re-
pers for fluid leakage. place any damaged or leaking parts
immediately. Inspect the power steer-
ing belt for evidence of cuts, cracks,
F070M01B-AAT
excessive wear, oiliness and proper
F070K01A-AAT o Steering gear box, linkage & tension. Replace or adjust it if neces-
o Exhaust pipe and muffler boots/lower arm ball joint, sary.
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, upper arm ball joint
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- With the vehicle stopped and engine
rioration, or damage. Start the engine off, check for excessive free-play in F070P01HP-AAT
and listen carefully for any exhaust the steering wheel.
gas leakage. Tighten connections or o Drive shafts and boots
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
replace parts as necessary. age. Check the dust boots and ball Check the drive shafts, boots and
joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam- clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
age. Replace any damaged parts. damage. Replace any damaged parts
and, if necessary, repack the grease.
F070Q01A-AAT
o Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leAakage and dam-
age. Check air conditioning perfor-
mance according to the relevant shop
manual if necessary.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Engine Compartment ................................................... 6-2

Daily Operating Checks ............................................... 6-4
Engine Oil ..................................................................... 6-4
Engine Oil and Filter Replacement .............................. 6-8
Engine Coolant Checking and Replacing .................... 6-9
Spark Plug ...................................................................6-12
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ...................................6-13
Manual Transmission Lubricant ..................................6-16
6
Automatic Transmission Lubricant ..............................6-17
Brake System Checking .............................................6-19
Checking the Clutch Fluid ...........................................6-20
Air Conditioning System Maintenance ........................6-21 6
Checking Engine Drive Belts ......................................6-24
Fusible Links ...............................................................6-25
Battery Maintenance ...................................................6-27
Checking Electric Cooling Fans .................................6-28
Fuel Filter .....................................................................6-30
Power Steering Fluid Level .........................................6-29
Replacing Headlight Bulbs ..........................................6-31
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ......................................6-33
Bulb Wattages .............................................................6-35
Fuse Panel Description ...............................................6-36
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01HP-EAT
Petrol Engine Compartment (3.5 V6)
! CAUTION:
G010A01HP-E
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 10.Automatic transmission fluid level
2. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Air cleaner filter dipstick (Vehicle with Automatic
3. Engine cover 8. Radiator cap Transmission)
4. Battery 9. Engine oil filler cap 11.Engine oil level dipstick
5. Fuse and relay box 12.Coolant reservoir cap
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
3
G010C01HP-EAT
Diesel Engine Compartment (2.9 CRDi)
! CAUTION:
G010C01HP-E
1. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Engine oil filler cap 10.Radiator cap

2. Clutch fluid reservoir 6. Battery 11.Fuel filter
(Not all models) 7. Fuse and relay box 12.Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil level dipstick 8. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 13.Coolant reservoir cap
4. Engine cover 9. Air cleaner filter
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
4 DAILY OPERATING CHECKS ENGINE OIL
SG020B1-E G030A01FC-EAT G030B03HP-EAT
The following items should be checked The correct engine oil level is of para- Recommended Oil
on a daily basis or whenever the mount importance. An excessively 1. Petrol Engine
vehicle is refuelled, whichever occurs high or low oil level may result in (1) Select engine oil of the proper SAE
sooner. irreparable damage being sustained viscosity number according to the
by the engine. The engine oil level atmospheric temperature.
o Engine oil level. must be checked on a daily basis, Recommended viscosity is given
o Coolant level. whenever the vehicle is refuelled or in the following illustration.
o Power steering fluid level. before starting a long trip, whichever
o Brake fluid level. occurs sooner.
o Windscreen washer fluid level. In addition, it is imperative that only
o Battery condition. an approved grade and specification
o Tyre condition and pressures. of oil is used to avoid the possibility of
o Operation and cleanliness of all serious engine damage and prema-
lighting equipment. ture wear. The use of "budget price"
o Windscreen wiper and washer op- oil is a false economy that must be
eration. avoided if the maximum reliability and
o Horn operation. useful life is to be obtained from the
o Warning light operation. vehicle.
o Adjustment and cleanliness of mir- G030B01HP
rors.
o Seat and seat belt adjustment and (2) A multi grade oil having a specifi-
operation. cation which meets A.P.I. specifi-
o Fluid leakage. cation of SG, SH or ABOVE is
recommended.
The vehicle must not be driven if the
daily operating checks indicate that
any item of equipment related to the
safety or roadworthiness of the ve-
hicle is not functioning correctly.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
5
The oil viscosity should be selected 2. Diesel Engine If the atmospheric temperatures are
according to the operating environ- (1) Select engine oil of the proper SAE 32°F (0°C) or below, SAE #30 oil
ment of the engine by means of the viscosity number according to the must not be used. This oil should
table shown above. The engine oil atmospheric temperature. be used only in areas where the
recommendations are complete in Recommended viscosity is given atmospheric temperatures are 32°F
themselves and the use of addi- in the following illustration. (0°C) or above.
tives is neither required nor recom-
mended. The use of engine oil addi- (2) The engine oil quality should meet
tives may result in invalidation of the following classification:
the vehicle warranty.
API: CF-4 or ABOVE
NOTE: ACEA: B4 or ABOVE
The use of a 5W-20 multi grade oil is
not recommended for sustained high
speed use.
G030B03HP
NOTE:
SAE 5W-30 oil should be used only
in areas where extremely cold tem-
peratures of 50°F(10°C) or below are
experienced.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
SG030C2-E Prior to checking the level, the vehicle HPG030C2-E

Engine Oil Level should be allowed to stand for several ENGINE OIL REPLENISHMENT
Petrol Engine minutes after the engine has been Petrol Engine
switched off to allow the oil to drain
back to the sump.
Withdraw the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean rag. Replace the dipstick fully
and withdraw again when the oil level
may be read from the stick. Normal
oil level is indicated when the oil is
present between the two marks on
the stick. It is not necessary to add oil
if the level is above the lower mark
G030C01HP G030D01HP
and in any case, oil must not be
Diesel Engine added to the degree that the level Diesel Engine
exceeds the upper mark. Replace the
dipstick fully after checking the level.
! WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking the
engine oil as it may be hot enough
to burn you.
HHP5002-E HHP5003
The engine oil level should be checked If the indicated oil level is at or below
with the engine at normal operating the lower mark of the dipstick, oil
temperature and the vehicle parked should be added until the level is at or
upon level ground. below the upper mark.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
7
To add oil to the engine, remove the G350A01A-EAT o The engine oil consumption is
filler cap by rotating in an counter- ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION strongly effected by the viscosity
clockwise direction and pour engine Function of engine oil and quality of oil, engine rpm and
oil into the engine. Before checking Engine oil has the primary function of driving condition etc.
the level again, allow several minutes lubricating and cooling the inside of More engine oil may be consumed
for the oil to drain into the sump. the engine. under severe driving conditions
Replace the oil filler cap rotating it in such as high speeds, frequent ac-
a clockwise direction until tight. celeration and deceleration, com-
Engine oil consumption
The quantity of oil required to raise the pared to normal driving.
level from the minimum to maximum It is normal that an engine should
level is approximately 1 litre (Petrol consume some engine oil whilst nor-
Engine)/1.4 litres (Diesel Engine). mal driving.
The causes of oil consumption in a
normal engine are as follows;
o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis-

! WARNING: tons, piston rings and cylinders.
Be very careful not to touch the A thin film of oil is left on the
radiator hose when adding the en- cylinder wall when a piston moves
gine oil as it may be hot enough to downwards in the cylinder.
burn you. High negative pressure generated
during engine operation sucks some
of this oil into the combustion cham-
ber.
This oil with some oil of the cylin-
der wall is burned by the high tem-
perature combustion gases during
the combustion process.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
8 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
REPLACEMENT
G040A02HP-EAT severe or adverse conditions, the oil 4. When the oil has drained from the
Petrol Engine Oil filler cap and filter must be replaced more fre- sump, replace the drain plug using a
quently. new washer ensuring that the plug
is not over tightened.
To replace the oil and filter, proceed as
follows: Tightening torque : 3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m
1. Ensure that the engine is at normal
5. Remove the oil filter by rotating
operating temperature and park the
counterclockwise, using a propri-
vehicle on level ground with the
parking brake securely applied and etary oil filter removal tool if neces-
Oil filter sary. Note that the oil filter will
Drain plug
the engine turned off.
G040A01HP contain approximately 0.5 litres of
2. Open the bonnet and remove the
oil and this should be collected in a
oil filler cap.
Diesel Engine Oil filler cap suitable receptacle.
3. Prepare a suitable receptacle to
6. Install a new oil filter having
collect the displaced oil and re-
smeared the sealing ring with clean
move the drain plug from the sump.
oil and rotating clockwise until the
filter contacts the mounting and
then a further one half turn. Do not
! CAUTION: over-tighten.
The oil being drained from the en-
gine will be hot. Care should be Tightening torque:
exercised to prevent scalding. Petrol Engine - 1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m
Oil filter
Drain plug HHP5004
Diesel Engine - 2.3 ~ 2.5 kgf.m
The engine oil and filter must be 7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.
changed at the time or mileage interval 8. Pour the specified quantity of the
specified in the maintenance sched- recommended oil into the engine
ule. If the vehicle is operated under and replace the filler cap. Start the
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK- 9
ING AND REPLACING
engine and ensure that no oil leaks SG050A1-E It is important to note that whilst an
exist. Turn off the engine and after increase in the concentration of anti
a couple minutes, recheck the oil
level.
! WARNING:
freeze gives an increase in the level
of frost protection, a solution which is
Do not remove the radiator cap when in excess of 65% anti freeze will result
the engine is hot, since the system in reduced frost protection and engine
! CAUTION: is pressurized and coolant may be overheating. Therefore the recom-
Slowly pour the recommended oil ejected from the radiator resulting mended concentration of 50% should
by using a funnel. Do not overfill in scalding. not be exceeded for general use.
not to damage the engine. The use of methanol based anti freeze
SG050B1-E
compounds may result in engine over-
Coolant recommendations heating and will invalidate the vehicle
warranty.
! WARNING:
Only ethylene glycol based coolant
with a corrosion inhibitor suited to
Prolonged and repeated contact with aluminium alloy engine components NOTE:
used engine oils may result in seri- should be used in the cooling system. It is imperative that vehicles fitted
ous skin disorders including der- No further additives or inhibitors with an air conditioning system
matitis and cancer. Avoid contact should be used. The coolant specific have a coolant concentration of
with skin as far as possible and gravity should be checked as pre- the recommended strength at all
always wash thoroughly after any scribed in the maintenance schedule times. The use of the air condition-
contact. Keep used oils out of reach to ensure adequate frost and corro- ing system when the cooling sys-
of children. It is illegal to pollute sion protection. In addition, the en- tem is filled with water only will
drains, water courses and soil. Use gine coolant must be replaced at the result in the heater matrix freezing
only authorized waste collection specified interval since the corrosion and subsequently bursting.
facilities including civic amenity inhibitor properties deteriorate with
sites and garages for the disposal time.
of used oil and oil filters. If in doubt,
contact the local authority for dis-
posal instructions.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
10
SG050C1-E HPG050D2-E
Coolant Level To Change the Coolant Petrol Engine only
The coolant should be changed at

those intervals specified in the ve-
tion 5.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to ensure
that coolant is not allowed to spill
onto the paintwork since the fin- G050D02HP
ish may become damaged. If cool-
HHP5005-E ant spillage occurs, the affected NOTE: Petrol Engine Only
area should be rinsed thoroughly
The engine coolant level may be Before adding the coolant to the
with water.
observed through the side of the plas- radiator, unscrew the bolts on the
tic coolant reservoir (expansion tank) engine cover, remove the engine
1. Park the vehicle on level ground cover and unscrew the flange bolt
when the engine is cold. If the level is
and ensure that the parking brake for fitting water outlet to escape the
below the "LOW" mark, add coolant
is firmly applied, and the engine excess pressure. And if the coolant
of the correct concentration until the
allowed to cool. overflows from the hole whilst add-
level is between the "LOW" and
Do not attempt this operation whilst ing the coolant, screw the bolt and
"FULL" marks. If the level falls below
the engine is hot since burning or continue to add the coolant.
the "LOW" mark on a regular basis
despite being topped up, consult a scalding may result.
Hyundai dealer. 2. Prepare a suitable receptacle to
collect the displaced coolant and
position this under the radiator drain
tap.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
11
Petrol Engine 4. When the engine coolant has drained

completely, close the drain tap en-
suring that this is not over tight-
! WARNING:
ened. The cooling fan is controlled by
5. Prepare a suitable quantity of new engine coolant temperature and may
engine coolant (refer to section 9) sometimes operate even when the
and pour this into the radiator. engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the
blades of the cooling fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan
blade. As the engine coolant tem-
G050D01HP-D
perature decreases, the fan will au-
Diesel Engine tomatically shut off. This is a nor-
mal condition.
HHP5008
6. Start the engine with the radiator

cap still removed and continue to
add coolant as the level decreases
HHP5006-E
as air is expelled from the system.
3. With the heater temperature control When the level remains constant,
set to the "HOT" position, remove replace the radiator cap and replen-
the radiator cap and open the radia- ish the coolant reservoir.
tor drain tap. 7. When the engine is hot, check to
ensure that no coolant leaks are
present.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
12 SPARK PLUGS
G060A02L-AAT G060B03L-EAT Recommended Spark Plugs:

(For Petrol Engine) Replacing the Spark Plugs
Type Remark
The spark plugs should be changed RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)
at the intervals specified in the ve- Unleaded
PFR5N-11 (NGK)
tion 5 or whenever engine perfor- o It is recommended that spark
mance indicates they should be plugs be changed by an
0.039 ~ 0.043 in.
changed. Symptoms that suggest poor authorised Hyundai dealer.
(1.0 ~ 1.1mm)
spark plug performance include en-
gine misfiring under load, loss of fuel
economy, poor acceleration, etc.
G060A01L
When spark plugs are replaced, al- ! WARNING:
ways use spark plugs recommended
Your engine was originally equipped by Hyundai. The use of other spark It is recommended that the engine
with platinum-tipped spark plugs. plugs can result in loss of perfor- be cool or cold when changing the
Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last mance, radio interference or engine spark plugs. If the engine is hot,
longer than conventional type spark damage. you could burn yourself on the
plugs and can be identified by blue insulated connector, the spark plug
lines on the ceramic shell. NOTE: or the engine itself.
o When replacing the spark plug,
NOTE: Genuine Hyundai Replacement
Do not clean or regap platinum- Parts are recommended.
tipped spark plugs.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
WINDSCREEN WIPER 13
BLADES
G070A03Y-AAT ZG080A2-E
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER
FILTER ! CAUTION:
o Operating your vehicle without
a proper air cleaner filter in place
can result in excessive engine
wear.
o When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake.
These may result in damage to
the air cleaner filter.
HHP5045-E
The wiper blades should be carefully

HHP5013-E inspected from time to time and
The replacement of air cleaner filter is cleaned to remove accumulations of
performed in the following manner. road film or other debris.
To clean the wiper blades and arms,
1. Unsnap the clips around the cover. use a clean sponge or cloth with a
2. When this is done, the cover can mild soap or detergent and water.
be lifted off, the old filter removed If the wipers continue to streak or
and the new filter put in its place. smear the glass, replace them with
genuine Hyundai replacement parts
Genuine Hyundai replacement parts or their equivalent.
are recommended.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
14
G080B01HR-EAT
Replacing the Wiper Blades
! CAUTION: To replace the wiper blades, raise the
o Do not operate the wipers on dry wiper to the vertical.
glass. This can result in more
rapid wear of the wiper blades To remove the wiper blade
and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products
such as engine oil, petrol, etc.
HHR5049
2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and

pull up it.
(1)
HHR5048
1. Push down the wiper blade with the

locking clip (1) pressed to detach it
from the wiper arm.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
WINDSCREEN WASHER RES- 15
ERVOIR REPLENISHMENT
To install the wiper blade HPG090A1-E
HHR5051
HHP5017-E
HHR5050 2. Pull up the wiper blade until you
hear an audible "click" to engage in The level of windscreen washer fluid
1. Put a new wiper blade onto the available should be checked on a daily
the end of the wiper arm.
wiper arm and lower the wiper blade basis. The level of fluid will be visible
at the level of the wiper arm as through the side of the reservoir. When
shown in the drawing. NOTE:
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall the fluid is to be replenished, only a
against the windscreen. proprietary screen wash additive should
be used and in the concentration rec-
ommended by the manufacturer. The
windscreen washer reservoir has a
total capacity of 4.5 litres.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
16 MANUAL TRANSMISSION
LUBRICANT
G100A01HP-EAT
! CAUTION: ! CAUTION:
Engine coolant anti freeze must not The transmission lubricant level
be used in the windscreen washer should only be checked when the
system since damage to the engine is cold to prelude the pos-
paintwork may result. sibility of personal injury by con-
Undiluted windscreen washer addi- tact with hot components.
tive must not be allowed to come
into contact with the paintwork. If
spillage occurs, flush the affected Drain plug 1. To check the transmission lubricant
area immediately with water. Do Filler plug level, the vehicle should be placed
HHP5010
not operate the windscreen washer on level ground and the level plug
for more than 15 seconds continu- The transmission lubricant should be removed with a suitable spanner.
ously or when the reservoir is checked and/or changed at intervals 2. If the level is correct, lubricant
empty since damage to the washer specified in the maintenance sched- should begin to drip from the plug
pump will result. ule. orifice. In this case the plug should
be replaced.
Recommended Lubricant If the level is incorrect, lubricant
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE should be added until it begins to
PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4). drip from the plug orifice at which
time the plug should be replaced.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- 17
SION LUBRICANT
To Check the Transmission Oil 2. Use your finger to feel inside the G110A04HP-EAT
Level hole. The oil level should be at its Transmission lubricant should be
bottom edge. If it is not, check for changed at those intervals specified
leaks before adding oil. To refill in the vehicle maintenance schedule
the transmission or bring the oil in Section 5.
level up, add oil slowly until it
reaches the proper level. Do not NOTE:
overfill. Basically automatic transmission
3. Replace the bolt and washer, screw fluid is red color. As driving dis-
it in with your fingers and then tance increases, the fluid color
tighten securely with the wrench. turns darkish red gradually. It is
normal condition and you should
not use fluid color as a criterion
G100B01L
for replacing the transmission
Park the car on level ground with the fluid.
engine off. You must replace the automatic
transmission fluid in accordance
1. Using a wrench of the correct size, with intervals specified in the ve-
loosen the oil filler bolt turning it hicle maintenances schedule in
counterclockwise and remove it section 5.
with your fingers.
Recommended Lubricant
Use only MOBIL DEXRON-II. Dam-
age caused by a nonspecified fluid is
not covered by your new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
18
Transmission Fluid Capacity To Check the Transmission Fluid Petrol Engine

The fluid capacity of the automatic Level
transmission is 10.5 litres (Petrol En-
gine)/ 11.8 litres (Diesel Engine).
! CAUTION:
The transmission fluid level should
be checked when the engine is at
normal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator, G110D01HP
exhaust system etc., are very hot
Diesel Engine
so you should exercise great care HHP3018-E
not to burn yourself during this
procedure. Park the car on level ground with the
parking brake engaged. When the
transmission fluid level is checked,
the transmission fluid should be at
normal operating temperature and the
engine idling.
Whilst the engine is idling, apply the
brakes and move the gear selector
level from "P" to each of its other HHP5009-E
positions — "R", "N", "D", "2", "L" —
and then return to "N" or "P". With the 2. Remove the transmission dipstick,
engine still idling: wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick
as far as it will go, then remove it
1. Open the bonnet, being careful to again. Now check the fluid level on
keep hands and clothing clear of the dipstick. It should be in the
any moving parts. "HOT" range on the dipstick.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKING 19
SG120A1-E

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range
Never work on injection system with ! CAUTION:
engine running or within 30 sec-
onds after shutting off engine. High Correct operation of the braking
pressure pump, rail, injectors and system is essential to the safe op-
high pressure pipes are subject to eration of the vehicle and there-
high pressure even after the engine fore, any maintenance operations
stopped. The fuel jet produced by other than those listed below
fuel leaks may cause serious injury, should be entrusted to a Hyundai
G110D04HP
if it touch the body. People using dealer.
3. If the transmission fluid level is low, pacemakers should not move than
use a funnel to add transmission 30cm closer to the ECU or wiring
fluid through the dipstick tube until harness within the engine room SG120C2-E
the level reaches the "HOT" range. whilst engine is running, since the Brake Fluid Recommendations
Do not overfill. high currents in the Common Rail
system produce considerable mag- Only brake fluid conforming to DOT 3
netic fields. or DOT 4 specifications or higher
may be used in the braking system.
Care should be taken to observe the
! WARNING: NOTE: instructions and precautions printed
The electric engine cooling fan au- Only lint free cloth should be used upon the container.
tomatically switches on and off ac- for wiping the dipstick. The pres-
cording to engine temperature. Be ence of lint within the transmis-
careful to keep away from the fan sion may cause problems with the
during this check as it may switch normal function of the transmis-
on at any time. sion.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
20 CHECKING THE CLUTCH
FLUID
SG120D1-E SG130A1-C
Brake Fluid Level To Check the Clutch Fluid
! WARNING:
Brake fluid is hygroscopic and
should never be stored in an un-
sealed container. The presence of
water in the braking system will
cause vapour locks and increase
the possibility of brake fade along
with promoting corrosion within
the braking system. The brake fluid
must be changed at the specified
time or mileage interval to ensure
HHP5015-E HHP5016-E
continued safe operation of the
The fluid level in the brake fluid reser- system. Brake fluid will cause rapid The clutch fluid level in the master
voir should be checked periodically. and serious damage to paintwork. cylinder should be checked when per-
The level should be between the "MIN" If accidental spillage occurs, the forming other under bonnet checks.
and "MAX" marks on the side of the affected area must be rinsed with The system should be checked for
reservoir. If the level is at or below water immediately. Do not allow leakage at the same time.
the "MIN" mark, fluid should be added brake fluid to come into contact Ensure that the clutch fluid level is
having carefully cleaned the area sur- with the eyes or to be ingested always between the "MAX" and "MIN"
rounding the reservoir cap to ensure and ensure that fluid is safely level markings on the fluid reservoir.
that dirt is not allowed to enter the stored away form the reach of chil- Fill as required. Fluid loss indicates a
system. It should be borne in mind dren. leak in the clutch system which should
that the brake fluid level will decrease be inspected and repaired immedi-
slightly as the friction linings of the ately.
pads and shoes become worn and
that this is a normal condition.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 21
MAINTENANCE
SG130B2-E SG140A1-E
Adding Fluid Condenser
! WARNING:
Recommended brake fluid conform- Ensure that the condenser is periodi-
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should be Brake fluid will cause rapid and cally inspected and that accumula-
used. The reservoir cap must be fully serious damage to paintwork. If tions of dirt, dead insects and leaves
tightened to avoid contamination from accidental spillage occurs, the af- etc, are removed to ensure that the
foreign matter or moisture. fected area must be rinsed with efficiency of the system is not im-
water immediately. Do not allow paired. Care must be exercised to
brake fluid to come into contact ensure that the condenser fins are
with the eyes or to be ingested not damaged during cleaning.
! CAUTION: and ensure that fluid is safely
Brake fluid is hygroscopic and stored away form the reach of chil- SG140C2-E
should never be stored in an un- dren. Checking the Refrigerant
sealed container. Do not allow
1. Start the engine and run at idle for
petroleum base fluid to contami-
several minutes with the refrigera-
nate the brake fluid since damage
tion system running at the coldest
to the rubber seals of the system
setting.
may result.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash
vents is not cold, have the air con-
ditioning system inspected by your
Hyundai dealer.
! CAUTION:
Running the air conditioning sys-
tem for extended periods of time
with a low refrigerant level may
damage the compressor.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
22
SG140D1-E HPG140B1-E The air conditioning compressor drive

Off Season Maintenance Compressor Drive Belt belt should be checked to ensure
The air conditioning must be run for Petrol Engine freedom from damage or excessive
ten minutes or so weekly during peri- wear and correct tension. The belt
ods when the system would not nor- tension is correct when the belt de-
mally be used to ensure that the Tension pulley flects by about 0.3 inches (8 mm)
compressor and seals are lubricated. when a force of 98 N is applied to the
If this precaution is not observed the COMP.pulley belt halfway between the compressor
compressor seals may become stuck and crankshaft pulleys. Adjustment of
to the compressor shaft and dam- the belt should be entrusted to a
aged when the system is next used Hyundai dealer.
resulting in a loss of refrigerant and
damage to the compressor. Crankshaft pulley G140D01HP NOTE:
The compressor drive belt tension
Diesel Engine for diesel engine is adjusted auto-
Generator pulley Idler pulley
Water pump pulley matically.
COMP. pulley
Auto tensioner
Crankshaft pulley
G140D03HP
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY 23
YG180A1-E YG170A1-E G170A01A-GAT

Steering Wheel Clutch Pedal Brake Pedal
0.24 ~ 0.51 in. 0.12 ~ 0.31 in.

(6 ~ 13 mm) (3 ~ 8 mm)
Maximum
1.18 in
(30 mm)
HHP5044 G160A01HP G160A01HP
To check the steering wheel free-play, The clutch pedal freeplay must lie With the engine off, press down on the
stop the car with the wheels pointed within the limits shown. Incorrect free- brake pedal several times to reduce
straight ahead and gently move the play can result in premature wear of the vacuum in the brake booster.
steering wheel back and forth. Use the clutch linings and release bearing. Then, using your hand, press down
very light finger pressure and be sen- Excessive free-play can result in gear slowly on the brake pedal until you
sitive to changes in resistance that selection difficulties. feel a change in resistance. This is
mark the limits of the free-play. If the free-play is incorrect, the clutch the brake pedal free-play. The free-
If the free-play is greater than speci- cable should be adjusted by a Hyundai play should be within the limits speci-
fied, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer. fied in the illustration. If it is not, have
dealer and adjusted or repaired if it inspected by your Hyundai dealer
necessary. and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
24 CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CHECKING ENGINE DRIVE
CLEARANCE BELTS
G180A01A-GAT YG200A1-E HPG190A1-E
1. With the engine turned off, check ADJUSTING DRIVE BELTS

the belts for cracks, fraying, or Petrol Engine
excessive wear. Replace the belt if Power steering pulley
it is in poor condition.
Idler pulley
2. With your thumb (with a force
2.95 in. (75 mm) approx. 10 kg) press on each belt Tension pulley
Tension
midway between the pulleys. Each pulley
belt should deflect no more than
the amount shown in figure.
Generator
G180A01L pulley
COMP. pulley
You need a helper to check the brake Tension pulley Crankshaft pulley G190D01HP
pedal clearance. With the engine run- Diesel Engine

ning, have your helper press down on Generator pulley Idler pulley Water pump pulley
the brake pedal several times and
then hold it down with a force of about Power
490 N (50 Kg, 110 lbs). The brake steering
pulley
pedal clearance is the distance from
the top surface of the brake pedal to
the asphalt sheeting under the floor
COMP. pulley
mat.
Auto tensioner
If the brake pedal clearance is not
within the limits specified in the illus- Crankshaft pulley
Tension pulley HHP5049
tration, have it inspected by your
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or re-
paired if necessary. If a belt is loose, adjust it by:
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
FUSIBLE LINKS 25
1. Loosen the adusting bolts just DG200A1-E The fusible link prevents damage to
enough so that the components the wiring harness in the event of an
can be moved. electrical system malfunction. Failure
2. Whilst pulling outward on the pry bar of a fusible link is indicative of a
or screwdriver, test the belt deflec- serious overload condition having
tion with your thumb. occurred and therefore the electrical
3. After tightening the adjusting bolts, system should be checked by a
be sure to recheck the belt tension. Hyundai dealer before a replacement
Overtightening drive belts can link is fitted.
cause excessive wear and failure Bad Good
in driven components and belts.
G200A01HP-E ! WARNING:
Under no circumstances should a
! WARNING: fusible link be replaced with any-
The drive belt should be checked thing other than a new link of the
when the engine is cool or cold to same rating. The use of higher
avoid burning yourself on hot en- rated links or other means of con-
gine. necting the circuit will create a
potential fire hazard.
Bad Good
G200A02HP-E
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
26
DG200B1-E
INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT FUSES
Good Burned out

HHP4002-E G200B02L
G200B01HP-E In the event of a replacement fuse

The fuse box containing the individual
failing shortly after installation a mal-
function within the circuit protected by
! WARNING:
circuit fuses is located on the lower that fuse is indicated. The circuit The use of replacement fuses hav-
portion of the dashboard adjacent to should be checked by a Hyundai ing a higher rating than specified
the bonnet release. The fuse box dealer at the first available opportu- or other means of connecting the
cover is removed by pushing lightly nity. circuit will create a potential fire
and then releasing the lid. A fuse hazard.
rating grid will be found on the re-
verse side of the cover. In the event
of fuse failure, the fuse should be
NOTE:
replaced with one of equivalent rat-
See page 6-36 for the fuse panel
ing. A fuse removal tool is provided
descriptions.
within the fuse box to facilitate re-
placement.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
BATTERY MAINTENANCE 27
DG210A2-E o If battery electrolyte is spilled onto

skin or into eyes, the effected area
must be flushed with copious
! WARNING:
amounts of water and medical as- Always read the following
sistance sought. instructions carefully when
o If battery electrolyte is ingested, handling a battery.
copious amounts of water or milk Keep lighted cigarettes and
followed by an antacid (raw egg or all other flames or sparks
milk of magnesia) must be drunk. away from the battery.
Vomiting should not be induced Hydrogen, which is a highly
and medical assistance must be combustible gas, is always
sought. present in battery cells and
HHP5020-E
o Batteries must only be charged in may explode if ignited.
well ventilated areas from which Keep batteries out of the
naked lights or sources of sparks reach of children because
! WARNING: are excluded. batteries contain highly cor-
o Ensure that children, pets or other rosive SULFURIC ACID. Do
Motor vehicle batteries contain not allow battery acid to
sulphuric acid which is corrosive unauthorized persons are kept away
from batteries. contact your skin, eyes,
and poisonous. Hydrogen gas is clothing or paint finish.
emitted from the battery which is o Do not allow anything to bridge the
explosive when combined with positive (+) and negative (-) termi-
oxygen. The following precautions nals of the battery.
must be strictly observed to avoid o Never invert the battery.
personal injury or damage to the
vehicle. The battery fitted during production is
of the "Maintenance Free" type.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
28 CHECKING ELECTRIC
COOLING FANS
YG210A1-E
If any electrolyte gets into o When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
your eyes, flush your eyes tery, excessive pressure on the
with clean water for at least case may cause battery acid to ! WARNING:
15 minutes and get imme- leak, resulting in personal injury. The cooling fan is controlled by
diate medical attention. If Lift with a battery carrier or with engine coolant temperature and may
possible, continue to apply your hands on opposite corners. sometimes operate even when the
water with a sponge or o Never attempt to charge the bat- engine is not running. Do not touch
cloth until medical atten- tery when the battery cables are the radiator fan until it is completely
tion is received. connected. stopped.
If electrolyte gets on your o The electrical ignition system As the coolant temperature de-
skin, thoroughly wash the works with high voltage. creases the fan will automatically
contacted area. Never touch these components shut off. This is a normal condi-
If you feel a pain or a burn- with the engine running or the tion.
ing sensation, get medical ignition switched on.
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection when Checking Engine Cooling Fan
charging or working near a The engine cooling fan should auto-
battery. matically come on if the engine cool-
Always provide ventilation ant temperature is high.
when working in an en-
closed space. Checking Condenser Cooling
Fan
The condenser cooling fan (in front of
the condenser) should come on auto-
matically whenever the air conditioner
is in operation.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
POWER STEERING FLUID 29
LEVEL
G230A03A-EAT The power steering fluid level should YG220A1-E
Petrol Engine be checked regularly. POWER STEERING HOSES

To check the power steering fluid level, It is suggested that you check the
be sure the ignition is "OFF", then power steering hose connections for
check to make certain that the power fluid leakage at those intervals speci-
steering fluid level is between the fied in the vehicle maintenance sched-
"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on ule in Section 5. The power steering
the fluid reservoir. hoses should be replaced if there are
severe surface cracking, pulling, scuff-
NOTE: ing or worn spots. Deterioration of the
Do not check whilst the engine is hoses could cause premature failure.
G230A01HP-E
running. Do not start when power
steering fluid reservoir is empty. NOTE:
Diesel Engine The power steering pump may be
noisy when the engine is first
started in the extreme cold (-4°F).
This noise is not abnormal and
Fluid Recommendation will stop as the engine warms up.
Only automatic transmission fluid If the power steering pump contin-
meeting the specification of PSF-3 or ues to be noisy after the engine
ATF DEXRON 2 should be used in has warmed up, have it inspected
the power steering system. by your Authorised Hyundai Dealer.
HHP5014-E
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
30 FUEL FILTER
G350B01HP-GAT G300B02HP-GAT
Bleeding The Fuel System Removal Of Water From The
(For Diesel Engine) ! CAUTION: Fuel Filter (For Diesel Engine)
Do not hold the ignition key in the
"START" position for more than
15 seconds. Doing so may cause
the engine and the injection pump
to damage.
HHP5048-E HHP5047-E
The fuel system should be bled to If the fuel filter warning lamp illumi-
remove air as described in the illus- nates during driving, it indicates that
tration if the fuel supply is exhausted water has accumulated in the fuel
during travel, when the fuel filter is filter. If this occurs, remove the water
replaced, or if the vehicle is not used as described below.
for a long time.
1. Loosen the drain plug at the bot-
1. Pump the hand prime pump with tom of the fuel filter.
your hand for one minute(about 2. Tighten the drain plug when water
20~30 times). no longer comes out.
2. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
position and release it 2~3 times
shortly until the engine starts.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
REPLACING HEADLIGHT 31
BULBS
3. Check to be sure that the warning G260A01HP-EAT G270A01B-EAT
lamp illuminates when the ignition Before attempting to replace a head- Headlight Bulb
key is turned to "ON", and that it light bulb, be sure the switch is turned
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye
goes off when the engine is started. to the "OFF" position.
protection.
If in doubt, consult your nearest The next paragraph shows how to
2. Open the engine bonnet.
authorised HYUNDAI dealer. reach the headlight bulbs so they
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plas-
may be changed. Be sure to replace
tic base, avoid touching the glass.
the burned-out bulb with one of the
NOTE: 4. Using a spanner, remove the head-
same number and wattage rating.
It is recommended that water accu- light assembly mounting bolts.
Ensure that the replacement bulb has
mulated in the fuel filter should be 5. Disconnect the power cord from
the same cap configuration and watt-
removed by an authorised Hyundai the bulb base in the back of the
age as the original.
dealer. headlight.
See page 6-35 for the wattage descrip-
tions.
! WARNING:
Be sure to carefully wipe away any ! CAUTION:
water drained out in this manner,
Keep the lamps out of contact with
because the fuel mixed in the
petroleum product, such as oil,
water might be ignited and result
petrol, etc.
in a fire.
G270A01HP
6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-

wise and remove it.
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
32
7. Disconnect the connector from the

bulb base in the back of the head-
light.
G270A03HP G270A03O
9. Remove the protective cap from

the replacement bulb and install
the new bulb by matching the plas-
! WARNING:
G270A02HP
tic base with the headlight hole. The halogen bulb contains gas
8. Push the bulb spring to remove the Reattach the bulb spring and re- under pressure and if impacted
headlight bulb. connect the connector. could shatter, resulting in flying
10.Use the protective cap and carton fragments. Always wear eye pro-
to promptly dispose of the old bulb. tection when servicing the bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids
when lighted. Turn the bulb on
only when installed in a headlight.
Replace the headlight if damaged
or cracked. Keep the bulb out of
the reach of children and dispose
of the used bulb with care.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
HEADLIGHT AIMING AD- 33
JUSTMENT
G290A01HP-EAT 1. Keep all tyres inflated to the correct And then, draw a parallel line at 1.50
<Low Beam> pressure. in. (38 mm) under the horizontal line in
2. Place the vehicle on level ground case of adjusting the low beam or at
Vertical
and press the front bumper & rear 0.83 in. (21 mm) under the horizontal
aiming
bumper down several times. Place line in case of adjusting the high beam.
vehicle at a distance of 118.1 in.
(3m) from the test wall. 7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded beam to the parallel line with a
Horizontal (except for full levels of coolant, phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL
aiming engine oil and fuel, and spare tyre, AIMING.
jack, and tools). Have the driver or 8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low
G290B01HP
equivalent weight placed in driver's beam to the each vertical line with
seat. a phillips screwdriver - HORIZON-
<High Beam> 4. Clean the headlight lens and turn on TAL AIMING.
the headlight.
Horizontal
5. Open the bonnet.
aiming
6. Draw the vertical line (through the
centre of each headlight) and the
Vertical horizontal line (through the centre
aiming of each headlight) on the aiming
screen.
(1) Horizontal line dimension from
ground :
G290B02HP
Low Beam : 35.1 in.(894 mm)
High Beam : 33 in. (839 mm)
Before performing aiming adjustment,
(2) Distance between each vertical
make sure of the following.
line :
Low Beam : 51.8 in. (1,316 mm)
High Beam : 42.4 in. (1,076 mm)
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
34
G290B01HP-EAT shown in the illustration. Turn on the

Adjustment After Headlight As- headlight switch (Low Beam or High
sembly Replacement Beam Position).
<Low Beam>
Vertical line 1.5 in.(38 mm) 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis
Horizontal line of light is parallel to centre line of
W 0.55 in.(14 mm)
"P" the body and is aligned with point
"P" shown in the illustration.
H
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show
Cut-off line the centre of headlights.
Ground L "H"
H Horizontal centre line of headlights
line
from ground :
G290B01HP-E
Low Beam : 35.1 in. (894 mm)
<High Beam> High Beam : 33 in. (839 mm)
Vertical Horizontal line
line W "W"
1.54 in.(39 mm)
"P" Distance between each headlight
0.83 in. centre :
H (21mm)
Low Beam : 51.8 in. (1,316 mm)
Cut-off line High Beam : 42.4n. (1,076 mm)
Ground L "L"
line H
Distance between the headlights
G290B02HP-E
and the wall that the lights are
tested against :
If the vehicle has had front body repair Low Beam : 118.1 in. (3,000 mm)
and the headlight assembly has been High Beam : 118.1in. (3,000 mm)
replaced, the headlight aiming should
be checked using an aiming screen as
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
BULB WATTAGES 35
G280A02HP-EAT
G280A01HP
No. Part Name Wattage No. Part Name Wattage

1 Headlight (Low/High Beam) 55/55 9 Luggage Compartment Light 10
2 Front position Light 5 10 High Mounted Rear Stop Light 16
3 Front Turn Signal Light 21 11 Rear Combination Light
4 Map Light 8 Stop/Tail Light 21/5
5 Interior Light 10 Turn Signal Light 21
6 Front Fog Light 55 Back-up Light 16
7 Side Repeater Light 5 Rear Fog Light 21
8 Front Door Edge Warning Light 5 12 License Plate Light 5
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
36 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
G200C01HP-EAT
Petrol Engine
DESCRIPTION AMPERAGES CIRCUIT PROTECTED

NO.1 100A Glow Relay (COVEC-F/EGR), Air Heater Relay (Diesel Engine)
120A (DIESEL) Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #2,
NO. 2
140A (PETROL) Generator
Inner Panel Fuse Box (Fuse 1,2,3,4,5)
NO. 3 50A Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box #1 (Fuse 8,9)
FUSIBLE Fuel Heater Control Module (COVEC-F/EGR)
LINK NO.4 30A Generator, Ignition Switch
Diesel Engine NO.5 - -
NO. 6 - -
Engine Control Relay (Diesel Engine), Main Control Relay
NO. 7 20A
(Petrol Engine)
NO. 8 10A Horn Relay
NO. 9 15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
FUSE NO. 10 - -
NO. 11 10A ECM (Diesel Engine), EGR Control Module
NO. 12 10A ECM (Diesel Engine)
G200C01HP-E
NOTE:
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
37
G200D01HP-EAT
G200C02HP
NOTE:
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
38

NO. 10 15A Fuel Heater and Sensor(Diesel Engine)
NO. 11 15A Headlamp(Low beam)
NO. 12 15A Headlamp(High beam)
NO. 13 - -
NO. 14 10A A/C Compressor Relay, Triple Switch
NO. 15 10A TCI Fan Relay(COVEC-F/EGR)
NO. 16 - -
NO. 17 15A -
NO. 18 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
FUSE NO. 19 15A ECM(Diesel Engine)
NO. 20 15A ECM(Diesel Engine), Air Heater Relay(Diesel Engine), EGR Solenoid(Diesel Engine)
NO. 21 10A Illuminations, Combination Lamp
NO. 22 10A License Lamp, Combination Lamp
NO. 23 10A ABS Control Module, ABS Relay, EBD Relay
ECM(Diesel Engine), Headlamp Relay, Condenser Fan Relay
NO. 24 10A
(Petrol/COVEC-F), EGR Solenoid(COVEC-F)
NO. 26 10A Cruise Control Module
NO. 27 15A Front Wiper and Washer
NO. 28 25A Power Seat Switch
NO. 29 20A Power Outlet Relay
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6
39

Power Connector(A,B), Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay #2
NO. 1 50A
(Fuse 28,29), Inner Panel Fuse Box(Fuse 6,7,8, 9)
NO. 2 30A Start Relay, Ignition Switch
Condenser Fan Relay, Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2
NO. 3 40A
FUSIBLE (Fuse 14,15)
LINK NO. 4 40A ABS Control Module
NO. 5 30A Power Window Relay
Tail Lamp Relay, Engine Compartment Fuse and Relay Box #2
NO. 6 40A
(Fuse 11,12)
NO. 8 - -
NO. 9 20A Fuel Pump Relay, ECM, Ignition Failure Sensor
A/CON, TCM, ETACM, Data Link Connector, Siren, Immobiliser
NO. 30 10A
Control Module
Interior Lamp, Map Lamp, Audio, Instrument Cluster, Front Door Edge
NO. 31 15A
Warning Lamp
6 OWNER MAINTENANCE
40
G200E01HP-EAT
Inner Panel NO. AMPERAGES CIRCUIT PROTECTED
1 30A Defogger Relay
2 10A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch
3 15A Stop Lamp Switch
4 20A TOD, EST Control Module
5 10A -
6 15A Sunroof Controller
7 30A Blower Relay
8 20A Power Door Locks
9 10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
10 10A Audio, Map Lamp
11 20A Cigar Lighter, Power Outlet relay, ACC Socket
12 10A Power Outside Mirror Switch
13 - -
14 - -
15 10A A/C Switch
16 10A Left/Right Outside Mirror & Defogger
17 - -
18 10A TCM, ECM(COVEC-F), TCCS(TOD, EST), Immobiliser
19 10A Back-up Lamp Switch, Inside Rearview Mirror, Transmission Range Switch
20 10A Hazard Switch
21 10A Instrument Cluster, ETACM, Vehicle Speed Sensor, DRL Control Module
22 10A Airbag
23 10A Airbag Indicator
24 - -
25 10A Blower & A/C, ETACM, Defogger Relay
26 15A Seat Warmer
27 15A Sunroof, Rear Wiper & Washer, Cruise Switch, Rear Intermittent Wiper Relay
G200D01HP 28 10A Start Relay, Theft-Alarm Relay
NOTE:
Exhaust Gas Warning .................................................. 7-2

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2
Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3
EGR System ................................................................ 7-5
7 7
2 EXHAUST GAS WARNING EMISSION CONTROL SYS-
TEMS
H030A01HP-EAT
Inspect the exhaust system ZH010A1-E
Exhaust gases contain carbon monox- (Not all models)

Whenever a change is noticed in the
ide, a potentially toxic gas that is Your Hyundai is equipped with an
sound of the exhaust system, the
colorless and odorless. Avoid breath- emission control systems.
underside or rear of the vehicle may
ing exhaust gases. There are three emission control sys-
be damaged. You should inspect the
exhaust system each time the car is tems which are as follows.
o Do not run the engine in confined
raised for lubrication or oil change.
areas, such as garages, any longer (1) Crankcase emission control sys-
than necessary to move the car in tem (For a Petrol Engine)
or out. To check condition
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
o Do not drive with the hatchback 1. Holes and gas leaks due to corro- tem (For a Petrol Engine)
door open. An open hatchback door sion, damage, etc., should be recti- (3) Exhaust emission control system
may draw exhaust gases into the fied.
passenger compartment. If you must 2. The joints should be checked for In order to assure the proper function
drive with the hatchback door open, loose connections and gas leakage. of the emission control system, it is
drive only with all the windows wide 3. The hanger rubber and brackets recommended that you have your car
open and the blower motor on high should be checked for damage. inspected and maintained by an
speed. authorised Hyundai dealer in accor-
o If it is necessary to sit in a parked dance with the schedule in this manual.
car with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust
your heating system to force out-
side air into the car by placing the
air selector button of the heater in
the FRESH AIR position and mode
control in the VENT position. Set
the fan at high speed and the con-
trols in any position desired.
7
CATALYTIC CONVERTER 3
; For a Petrol Engine
DH010B1-E
Canister YH040A2-E
1. Crankcase Emission Control
System ; For a Petrol Engine Whilst the engine is inoperative, fuel
vapors generated inside the fuel tank
The positive crankcase ventilation are absorbed and stored in the canis-
system is employed to prevent air ter. When the engine is running, the
pollution caused by blow-by gases fuel vapors absorbed in the canister
being emitted from the crankcase. are drawn into the induction system
This system supplies fresh air to the through the purge control solenoid
crankcase through the air cleaner. valve.
Inside the crankcase, the fresh air
mixes with blow-by gases, then Purge Control Solenoid Valve
passes through the PCV valve into The purge control solenoid valve is Catalytic Converter H020A01HP-D
the intake system. controlled by the ECU; when the en- The catalytic converter is part of the
gine coolant temperature is low, and exhaust emission control system. Its
during idling, it closes, so that evapo- purpose is to remove certain engine
rated fuel is not taken into the surge emission products from the engine's
tank. After engine warm-up, during exhaust. It looks something like a
ZH010C1-E
ordinary driving, it opens to introduce muffler and is located underneath the
2. Evaporative Emission Control evaporated fuel to the surge tank. car in the exhaust system.
System ; For a Petrol Engine
The Evaporative Emission Control SH010D1-E
System is designed to prevent fuel 3. Exhaust Emission Control
vapors from escaping into the atmo- System
sphere.
The exhaust emission control system
is a highly effective system which
controls exhaust emission while main-
taining good vehicle performance.
4
YH040B1-E H020D01HP-GAT
About the Catalytic Converter o Avoid driving with a very low fuel ; For a Diesel Engine
; For a Petrol Engine level. If you run out of petrol, it
could cause the engine to misfire
Exhaust gases passing through the and result in excessive loading of
catalytic converter cause it to operate the catalytic converter.
at very high temperatures. As a re- o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
sult, the introduction of large amounts ods longer than 10 minutes.
of unburned petrol may cause it to o Your Hyundai should not be ei-
overheat and create a fire hazard. ther pushed or pulled to get it
This can be avoided by observing the started. This can cause the cata-
following: lytic converter to overload.
o Take care not to stop your Hyundai
over any combustible material Catalytic Converter H020A01HP-D
! WARNING
such as grass, paper, leaves or
rags.
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with
oxidation type catalytic converter to
o Use only unleaded fuel. o Do not touch the catalytic con- reduce the carbon monoxide, hydro-
o Maintain your engine in good converter or any other part of the carbons and particulate contained in
dition. Extremely high converter exhaust system whilst the engine the exhaust gas.
temperatures can result from im- is running.
proper operation of the electrical, o Remember that your Hyundai
ignition or M.P.I. system. dealer is your best source of as- ! WARNING
o If your engine stalls, pings, sistance. o Use diesel only.
knocks, or is hard to start, take o Maintain your engine in good con-
your car to your Hyundai dealer dition. Extremely high converter
as soon as possible and have the temperatures can result from im-
difficulty corrected. proper operation of the electrical
ignition or electronic fuel injec-
tion system.
7
EGR SYSTEM 5
H020C01HP-EAT
o If your engine stalls, pings, or is ; For a Diesel Engine
hard to start, take your car to your
This system helps control oxides of
Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
nitrogen by recirculating a part of the
sible and have the difficulty cor-
exhaust gas into the engine, there by
rected.
reducing cylinder combustion tem-
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel
perature.
level. If you run out of diesel, it
The EGR system helps reduce NOx
could cause the engine to stop
(Oxides of Nitrogen) emission gas-
and result in damage to the cata-
ses.
lytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for peri-
ods longer than 10 minutes.
o Your Hyundai should not be ei-
ther pushed or pulled to get it
started. This can cause the cata-
lytic converter to overload.
o Take care not to stop your Hyundai
over any combustible material
such as grass, paper, leaves or
rags.
o Do not touch the catalytic con-
verter or any other part of the
exhaust system whilst the engine
is running.
o Remember that your Hyundai
dealer is your best source of as-
sistance.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................ 8-2

Engine Number ............................................................ 8-2
Tyre Information ........................................................... 8-2
Tyre Pressures ............................................................ 8-3
Snow Tyres .................................................................. 8-3
Tyre Chains .................................................................. 8-3
Tyre Balancing ............................................................. 8-4
8
Tyre Rotation ................................................................ 8-4
Tyre Replacement ........................................................ 8-4
Wheel Replacement ..................................................... 8-5
Spare Tyre and Tools .................................................. 8-6
8
2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ENGINE NUMBER TYRE
NUMBER (VIN)
DI070A1-E I010B01A-AAT ZI010C1-E
Petrol engine TYRE INFORMATION

The tyres supplied on your new
I010A01HP-E I010B01HP
The vehicle identification number (VIN) Diesel Engine

is unique to each individual vehicle
and is the number (sometimes referred
to as chassis number) used upon the
vehicle registration document to iden-
tify the vehicle.
The VIN will be found stamped upon ZI010C1-E
a plate attached to the engine bulk- TYRE INFORMATION
head.
The tyres supplied on your new
I010B03HP
The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.
8
3
HPI010B2-E I050A02HP-EAT
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
TYRE PRESSURES RIM TYRE CHAINS
TYRE SIZE NORMAL LOAD MAXIMUM LOAD
SIZE Tyre chains, if necessary, should be
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR installed on the rear wheels. Be sure
7.0Jx16 P255/65R16 200(29) 200(29) 200(29) 220(32) that the chains are the proper size and
that they are installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
HPI030A1-E To minimize tyre and chain wear, do
SNOW TYRES not continue to use tyre chains when
they are no longer needed.
If you equip your car with snow tyres,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tyres. Do not drive faster than
I030A01HP-E
In modern high-speed motoring, cor-

70 mph (112 Km/h) when your car is ! WARNING:
equipped with snow tyres. o When driving on roads covered
rect tyre pressures are vitally impor-
tant. with snow or ice, drive at less
Incorrect pressures can reduce adhe- than 20 mph (30 km/h).
sion, affect the steering, and cause o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
excessive tyre wear. Check the pres- plastic chains.
sures before you start a trip, when o If you have noise caused by
tyres are cold. If the pressures are chains contacting the body, re-
measured when the tyres are warm, a tighten the chain to avoid contact
higher reading will be obtained. The with the vehicle body.
correct tyre pressures are indicated o To prevent body damage, re-
on the label affixed in the driver's tighten the chains after driving
door edge and below. 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1 km).
4
SI060A1-E I060A01HP-EAT HPI060B1-E

TYRE BALANCING TYRE ROTATION TYRE REPLACEMENT
Incorrect tyre balance will cause steer- 0.06 in. (1.6 mm)
ing vibration and uneven tyre wear.
The vehicle tyres are balanced during
production but may need further bal-
ancing throughout the life of the tyres.
It is recommended that the tyres be
balanced on the car for best results
and that the tyres are balanced when-
ever they have been removed from Wear indicator
the wheel for repair.
Spare tyre I060A01HP HHP5018
Tyre wear will vary for each wheel. In Tyres must be replaced when the wear
order to increase the life of each tyre indicators appear as a solid bar across
and keep wear uniform, tyre rotation the tyre tread. At this point, the re-
should be performed every 3,000 maining tread depth will be approxi-
miles as shown in figure. mately 0.06 in.(1.6 mm). In addition to
this, the tyre must be replaced if any
NOTE: portion of the tread has become bald
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply or if there are any lumps, bulges or
under any circumstances. This may deep cuts in the sidewalls or tread.
cause dangerous handling char- Replacement tyres must be of the
acteristics. recommended size and rating and
should be of the same manufacture
and tread pattern on each axle.
8
5
HPI060D1-E
WHEEL REPLACEMENT When replacing the tyres, be sure
! WARNING: The original wheels may only be re- to equip all four tyres with the
Your vehicle is equipped with tyres placed with Hyundai Approved wheels. tyre and wheel of the same size,
designed to provide for safe ride type, tread, brand and load-carry-
and handling capability. ing capacity. If you nevertheless
Do not use a size and type of tyre ! WARNING:
decide to equip your vehicle with
and wheel that is different from the any tyre/wheel combination not
one that was originally installed on o Driving on worn or defective tyres recommended by Hyundai for off-
your vehicle. It can affect the safety is dangerous. Worn tyres may road driving, you should not use
and performance of your vehicle, cause loss of steering control these tyres for highway driving.
which could lead to handling failure and a serious deterioration of
or rollover and serious injury. braking efficiency. Defective tyres
When replacing the tyres, be sure to may cause vibration and loss of Tyres of different size, construction or
equip all four tyres with the tyre and control through blow outs. tread pattern should not be intermixed
wheel of the same size, type, tread, o Your vehicle is equipped with on the same axle. Radial and cross ply
brand and load-carrying capacity. If tyres designed to provide for safe tyres should not be used on the same
you nevertheless decide to equip ride and handling capability. vehicle.
your vehicle with any tyre/wheel Do not use a size and type of tyre The use of tyres and wheels of non
combination not recommended by and wheel that is different from approved sizes can be dangerous.
Hyundai for off-road driving, you the one that was originally in-
should not use these tyres for high- stalled on your vehicle. It can
way driving. affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could lead
to handling failure or rollover and
serious injury.
6 SPARE TYRE AND TOOLS
I100A01HP-EAT
HHP4011
Your Hyundai is delivered with the

following:
Spare tyre and wheel

Wheel nut wrench
Jack handle (Spare wheel road)
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2

Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
9 9
2
J010A02HP-EAT J030A02HP-EAT
MEASUREMENT TYRE
Overall length 185 in. Tyre Size Inflation Pressure
Overall width 73.2 in. Standard 255/65 R16
200 kPa(29psi)
Overall height 70.7 in. (72.4 in.*1 ) Spare Full Size
Wheel base 108.3 in.
Wheel tread Front 60.2 in.
J040A02HP-EAT
Rear 60.2 in. ELECTRICAL
*1:With Roof Bar
ITEM PETROL DIESEL
J020A01HP-EAT Battery MF 68 AH MF 100 AH
POWER STEERING Alternator 120 A (13.5 V) 110 A (12 V)
Ball and nut, torsion
Type
bar type(Integtal type)
Wheel free play 0~1.18 in. (0~30mm) J050A02HP-AAT
BRAKE
Oil pump type Vane type
Type Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type Ventilated disc
J060A01HP-EAT
Rear brake type Disc type
FUEL SYSTEM Parking brake Cable operated on rear wheel
Fuel tank capacity 16.5 lmp.gal (75 litres)

9
ENGINE 3
J070A03HP-EAT
Petrol Diesel
ITEMS
3.5 V6 2.9 CRDi
Engine Type 6-Cyl., V-type DOHC 4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
Bore x Stroke 3.67 x 3.38 in. (93.0 x 85.8 mm) 3.82 x 3.86 in. (97.1 x 98 mm)
Displacement (cc) 3497 2902
Compression Ratio 10 16.5
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-3-4-2
Valve Clearance Cold Auto lash ←
(Intake/Exhaust) (mm) Hot Auto lash ←
Spark Plug CHAMPION: RC10PYPB4

-
NGK: PFR5N-11
Spark Plug Gap 0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm) -
Idle Speed (rpm) 800 800 ± 100
Ignition Timing BTDC 5° ± 2° Automatically Adjusted
4 LUBRICATION CHART
J080A08HP-EAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (lmp.qts)(litre)

Engine Oil Petrol API SG, SH SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 [ABOVE 14°F (-10°C)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) :
or ABOVE SAE 15W-40, 15W-50 [ABOVE 5°F (-15°C)] 3.78 (4.3)
SAE 10W-30 [-13°F ~ 104°F (-25°C ~ 40°C)]
SAE 10W-40, 10W-50 [ABOVE -13°F (-25°C)]
SAE 5W-20 [BELOW 14°F (-10°C)] *1, *2
SAE 5W-30 [BELOW 50°F (10°C)] *1
SAE 5W-40 [BELOW 68°F (20°C)] *1
Diesel API CF-4 or ABOVE, SAE #30 [32°F~104°F (0°C~40°C)]
ACEA B4 or ABOVE SAE 20W-40 [ABOVE 14°F (-10°C)] Drain and refill (With oil filter) :
SAE 15W-40 [ABOVE 5°F (-15°C)] 5.28 (6.0)
SAE 10W-30 [-4°F ~ 104°F(-20°C ~ 40°C)]
SAE 5W-30 [BELOW 50°F(10°C)] *1, *2
*1. Restricted by driving condition and dealing area
*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Engine oil consumption Normal driving condition MAX. 1L /1,000 miles (1,500 Km)
Severe driving condition MAX. 1L /600 miles (1,000 Km)
9
5
J080A08HP-EAT
Item Oil & Grease Standard Q'ty (lmp.qts)(litre)

Transmission Manual HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4) 2.82 (3.2)
Fluid Auto MOBILE DEXRON-II Petrol : 9.24(10.5), Diesel : 10.38 (11.8)
Transfer case oil ATF DEXRON-III 1.25(1.42)
Front axle gear oil HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER, Part-time 4WD : 1.58(1.8)
SAE 80W[BELOW -22°F (-30°C)]/90W[ABOVE -22°F (-30°C)] Full-time 4WD : 1.14(1.3)
Rear axle With LSD MOBIL INFILREX 33
NO.7 : 2.29(2.6)
gear oil HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5 or HIGHER,
Without LSD NO.7.5 : 2.46(2.8)
SAE 80W[BELOW -22°F (-30°C)]/90W[ABOVE-22°F (-30°C)]
Coolant Ethylene glycol base for aluminium Petrol : 9.68 (11), Diesel : 7.92(9)
Power steering oil PSF-3 or ATF Dexron 2 1.14 (1.3)
Brakes and clutch fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent As required
INDEX
10
10
10 INDEX
2
A Cigar Lighter .............................................................. 1-67

Air Cleaner Filter ........................................................ 6-13 Clock ......................................................................... 1-66
Air Conditioning Clutch
Maintenance ........................................................... 6-21 Checking fluid ......................................................... 6-20
Operation ................................................................ 1-96 Pedal free-play ........................................................ 6-23
Switch ..................................................................... 1-96 Cooling Fans ............................................................. 6-28
Airbag ........................................................................ 1-40 Cruise Control ............................................................ 1-86
Antenna ................................................................... 1-107
Apperance Care ........................................................... 4-1 D
Ashtray ...................................................................... 1-68 Daily Operating Checks ............................................... 6-4
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ........ 1-98 Defrosting/Defogging .................................................. 1-95
Door
B Central door locks .................................................. 1-11
Battery ....................................................................... 6-27 Locking, unlocking front door with a key .................. 1-9
Bi-Level Heating ........................................................ 1-94 Drink Holder ............................................................... 1-69
Bonnet Release ......................................................... 1-83 Drive Belts ................................................................. 6-24
Brake Driving
Anti-lock system (ABS) .......................................... 2-21 Driving for economy ............................................... 2-23
Brake system checking .......................................... 6-19 Smooth cornering.................................................... 2-24
Effective braking ..................................................... 2-22 Winter motoring ...................................................... 2-24
Fluid ........................................................................ 6-19
Pedal clearance ...................................................... 6-24 E
Pedal free-play ........................................................ 6-23 EGR system ................................................................ 7-5
Emission Control System ............................................ 7-1
C Engine
Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3 Before starting the engine ........................................ 2-3
Centre Console Compartment .................................... 1-74 Compartment (3.5 V6) .............................................. 6-2
Child Restraint System .............................................. 1-31 Compartment (2.9 CRDi) ........................................... 6-3
Child-Proof Rear Door Lock ....................................... 1-10 Coolant ..................................................................... 6-9
INDEX
10
3
Coolant temperature gauge ..................................... 1-57 G

If the engine overheats ............................................. 3-4 Glove Box ................................................................. 1-73
Number ..................................................................... 8-2
Oil ............................................................................. 6-4 H
Starting ..................................................................... 2-5 Hatchback Door ......................................................... 1-78
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ........................... 2-2 Hazard Warning System ............................................ 1-65
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ..................................... 6-33
F Headlight Bulbs Replacement .................................... 6-31
Fan Speed Control .......................................... 1-90, 1-101 Headlight Leveling Device System ............................ 1-85
Fog Light Switch Heated Front/Rear Window ........................................ 1-65
Front ....................................................................... 1-62 Heating and Cooling Control ...................................... 1-89
Rear ........................................................................ 1-62 Heating and Ventilation
Four-Wheel Drive(4WD) ............................................. 2-14 Air flow control ............................................. 1-91, 1-102
Front Door Edge Warning Light ................................. 1-84 Air intake control ......................................... 1-91, 1-101
Front Seats Defrosting/Defogging ............................................... 1-95
Adjustable head restraints ...................................... 1-17 Fan speed control ........................................ 1-90, 1-101
Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-17 Temperature control ................................................ 1-83
Driver's seat lumbar support control ....................... 1-18 High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ................................... 1-82
Seat adjustment ..................................................... 1-16 Horn ........................................................................... 1-84
Seat cushion height adjustment ............................. 1-19
Seat fore/aft adjustment ......................................... 1-16 I
Fuel Ignition Switch ............................................................. 2-3
Capacity ................................................................... 9-2 Illuminated ignition switch ......................................... 1-8
Gauge ..................................................................... 1-57 Immobiliser System ..................................................... 1-5
Recommendations .................................................... 1-2 Indicator and Warning Lights ..................................... 1-50
Fuel-Filler Flap Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-46
Remote release ........................................................ 1-2 Interior Light ............................................................... 1-72
Full-time 4WD Operation ............................................ 2-17 Interior Rearview Mirror .............................................. 1-77
Fusible Links ............................................................. 6-25 Intermittent Wipe Facility ........................................... 1-64
10 INDEX
4
J Multi-Function Switch
Jump Starting .............................................................. 3-3 Headlight flash ........................................................ 1-62
High and low beam ................................................. 1-61
K Lane change signal ................................................. 1-60
Key ....................................................................... 1-5, 1-7 Lighting switch ........................................................ 1-61
If you lose your keys ............................................. 3-17 Sidelight auto cut.................................................... 1-61
Positions ................................................................... 2-4 Turn signal operation .............................................. 1-60
Keyless Entry System .............................................. 1-13
O
L Odometer ................................................................... 1-59
Limited-Slip Differential .............................................. 2-22 Outside Rearview Mirror ............................................ 1-75
Luggage Compartment P
Cargo Security Screen ........................................... 1-80 Parking Brake ............................................................ 1-78
Light ........................................................................ 1-79 Part-time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-15
Net .......................................................................... 1-79 Power Driver's Seat ................................................... 1-19
Power Outlet .............................................................. 1-68
M Power Steering Fluid Level ........................................ 6-29
Maintenance Requirements
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .......... 5-7 R
Maintenance and servicing requirements .................. 5-2 Rear Seat
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............ 5-6 Adjustable head restraints ...................................... 1-22
Regular servicing ...................................................... 5-3 Adjusting seatback angle ....................................... 1-22
Mirrors Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ................. 1-23
Interior rearview ...................................................... 1-77 Rear Seat Warning .................................................... 1-25
Outside rearview ..................................................... 1-75 Rheostat Switch ........................................................ 1-67
Multi Box ................................................................... 1-74 Roof Bars .................................................................. 1-81
Running in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-4
INDEX
10
5
S Changing a flat tyre .................................................. 3-7

Seat Belts In the event of a puncture ........................................ 3-7
3-Point system ....................................................... 1-28 Information ................................................................ 8-2
Adjusting your seat belt .......................................... 1-28 Pressures ................................................................. 8-3
Care of seat belts ................................................... 1-26 Replacement ............................................................. 8-4
Centre rear seat 3-point system with emergency Rotation .................................................................... 8-4
locking retractor .................................................... 1-29 Snow tyres ............................................................... 8-3
Height adjustable front seat shoulder belt .............. 1-27 Spare tyre ................................................................. 3-6
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt .......................................... 1-38 Spare tyre and tools ................................................. 8-6
Precautions ............................................................. 1-25 Towing
Seat Warmer ............................................................. 1-21 A trailer (or vehicle) ................................................ 2-26
Sound Emergency ............................................................. 3-16
Brake Pad Wear Warning Sound ............................ 1-57 If your car must be towed ........................................ 3-4
Spark Plugs ............................................................... 6-12 Important trailer weight information ......................... 2-29
Speedometer ............................................................. 1-59 Transmission
Starting Procedure ....................................................... 2-6 Automatic ............................................................... 2-10
Steering Wheel Automatic transmission lubricant ............................ 6-17
Free-play ................................................................. 6-23 Manual ...................................................................... 2-8
Tilt lever ................................................................. 1-85 Manual transmission lubricant ................................ 6-16
Stereo Sound System ............................................. 1-105 Trip Odometer ............................................................ 1-59
Sun visor ................................................................... 1-83
Sunroof ...................................................................... 1-70 U
Under Tray ................................................................. 1-21
T
Tachometer ................................................................ 1-58 V
Theft-Alarm system ................................................... 1-11 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................. 8-2
Tyres Vehicle Specifications ................................................. 9-1
Balancing .................................................................. 8-4
Chains ...................................................................... 8-3
10 INDEX
6
W
Windows
Power ..................................................................... 1-14
Windscreen Washer Reservoir Replenishment ........... 6-15
Windscreen Wiper and Washer Switch ....................... 1-63
Rear window wiper and washer ................................ 1-64
Variable intermittent wipe facility ............................. 1-64
Windscreen washer operation .................................. 1-63
Windscreen Wiper Blades .......................................... 6-13

2005 Hyundai Terracan 101241

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Hyundai Terracan 101241

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2005 Hyundai Terracan 101241

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A000A01A-GAT

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI 1

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE 4

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 7

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.

3. How can you tell if you purchas-

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light A/T(Automatic Transmission)

Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2

verter to become ineffective and the What About Gasohol?

3 minutes for a catalytic converter don't drive so slowly in too high a

B030B01A-AAT B880A01A-GAT B880B02HP-GAT

A code number is stamped on the Type B

(1) ID key (3) If you need additional keys or if you B880C01A-GAT

B885C01O-GAT The key number should be recorded B885D01O-GAT

The vehicle key number is recorded

NOTE: NOTE: B030C01Y-AAT

B040A02Y-AAT B040B01A-AAT B040C02Y-DAT

B040D01S-AAT B040E04A-AAT If you wish to be able to open the door

the rear seat. The central door locking switch is lo-

NOTE: B070A01A-AAT B070B01O-AAT

o When pushing the front portion (If Installed) Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

1) Remove the ignition key from the B070C01HP-GAT

After completion of the steps above,

1) A front or rear door is opened with-

After completion of the step above, the B070F01A-GAT B070E02HP-GAT

To recline the seatback, lean forward B080D02JM-GAT

! to take your weight off it, then pull up Adjustable Headrests

o For maximum effectiveness in To adjust the lumbar support, turn the

B080F01S-AAT B090A02Y-AAT B090B01L-AAT

2. To fold down the seatback , first

4. To secure the seat, hook the secur- NOTE:

5. Fix the seat belt buckle in the groove

securely in the rear seat. NEVER place B150F01A-AAT

B160A01A-AAT B160C01A-AAT B170A04A-AAT

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of

the proper length only after the lap belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of B200A01S-GAT B210A01A-AAT

B220A01A-AAT B220B01A-AAT B220C01A-AAT

so that the seat belt will properly

B230B02A-AAT B230C02HP-GAT the headrest and between the head-

For small children and babies, the use

B230D03E-GAT An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if

NOTE: On each side of the rear seat, between

NOTE: 1. To engage the child restraint seat

B230H02HP-GAT U : Suitable for "universal" category B180B03HP-AAT

o Improper handling of the pre-

o No objects should be placed over dren to ride in the front passen-

B240B01HP-GAT The SRS service reminder indicator

B240B01L Upon deployment, tear seams molded

o Do not install a child restraint o Do not replace the bumper or the

1. Tachometer 14.Front Fog Indicator Light

1. Tachometer 16.Overdrive Off Indicator Light (If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual- B260J01S-GAT B260A01B-GAT

B260B01B-GAT B260N02A-AAT B260Q01HP-DAT

checked. Cruise Indicator Light